Copyright: Copyright © 1999 Peachtree Software, Inc.
Citation: Peachtree Accounting Help Copyright © 1999 Peachtree Software, Inc. All rights reserved.


DEFAULT TOPIC TITLE
This is a context-sensitive Help file that is called from an application.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated account record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (account) displayed and enter a new one.


General

Select this tab to set up the type of account (cash, equity, etc.), enter beginning balances, and examine period history of the account.


Budgets

Select this tab (Peachtree Complete, Peachtree Accounting, and First Accounting only) to set up budget dollar amounts for each account for the current and next fiscal years.


Maintain Chart of Accounts

General: Select this tab to set up the type of account (cash, equity, etc.), enter beginning balances, and examine period history of the account.

Budgets (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Accounting only): Select this tab to set up budget dollar amounts for each account for the current and next fiscal years.


Account ID

This code identifies the account in your chart of accounts. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters to name the account. Once you enter an ID and select the Save button, you can't change or edit the ID; however, you can change the description.

The naming convention for accounts is important; you want to be able to establish a system that is easily understood by everybody who uses the system. The sample company that comes with Peachtree Accounting uses a standard convention and can be copied and used as a guideline.

Tips: You cannot use asterisks (*), question marks (?), or plus signs (+). You cannot use leading or trailing spaces. Spaces between characters are allowed. Account numbers are sorted alphabetically with numbers sorted before letters. For example, an account starting with a "6" would list before an account starting with an "A." You need to use leading zeroes to make the numbers sort properly. For example, these numbers are sorted this way: 1, 100, 1000, 27. To properly sort, enter the numbers as 0001, 0027, 0100, and 1000.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this account when you close the fiscal year, select this check box. If you try to use an inactive account, a warning appears telling you that the account is inactive and asking if you want to continue.

Important: Once an account is inactive, it becomes eligible for purging during year-end processing provided there are no open transactions that use this account in the year you are closing.


Description

You can describe the account such as "Petty Cash," "Cash in Checking," "Cash in Savings," etc. This prints on reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Description

You can describe the account such as "Petty Cash," "Cash in Checking," "Cash in Savings," etc. This prints on reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Account Type

This identifies the category for which the account is used in financial statement processing. If you are unsure which type to use, ask your accountant or refer to the sample charts of accounts listed in the online Help.

Select an account type from the drop-down list.


Account Type

This identifies the category for which the account is used in financial statement processing. If you are unsure which type to use, ask your accountant or refer to the sample charts of accounts listed in the online Help.

Select an account type from the drop-down list.


Period History

This shows, for each period, the debits, credits, period activity, and running balance. You cannot edit this. The Period History window reflects the balances you have entered for each account.

The first entry of the period history is the period that you are currently working in. This is also the period that is displayed on the status bar. This is the balance as of the first day before the first period being displayed.


Budget This Year

You can enter the budget for income and expense accounts for this year by entering individual amounts for each accounting period, if they differ from accounting period to accounting period. If your budget is figured in even amounts for the year, enter the budget in the box at the bottom of the Amount column, and select Allocate.


Budget This Year

You can enter the budget for income and expense accounts for this year by entering individual amounts for each accounting period, if they differ from accounting period to accounting period. If your budget is figured in even amounts for the year, enter the budget in the box at the bottom of the Amount column, and select Allocate.


Total Budget This Year

If your budget is figured in even amounts for the year, enter the amount here, and select the Allocate button.


Budget Next Year

You can enter the budget for next year in three different ways: you can enter differing amounts for each accounting period; you can enter the yearly budget figure and select Allocate; or you can use Copy to copy this year's budget to next year's budget.


Beginning Balances

Select this button to enter the beginning balance for accounts or to adjust the balance for accounts in a previous period.


Beginning Balances

Select this button to enter the beginning balance for accounts or to adjust the balance for accounts in a previous period.


Maintain Chart of Accounts

General: Select this tab to set up the type of account (cash, equity, etc.), enter beginning balances, and examine period history of the account.

Budgets (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Accounting only): Select this tab to set up budget dollar amounts for each account for the current and next fiscal years.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete an account record if there are transactions that use that account ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Allocate

If you want to budget an even amount for this year, enter the budget amount; then select the Allocate button.


Copy

Select this button to copy this year's budget to next.


Budget Next Year

You can enter the budget for next year in three different ways: you can enter differing amounts for each accounting period; you can enter the yearly budget figure and select Allocate; or you can use Copy to copy this year's budget to next year's budget.


Allocate

If you want to budget an even amount for next year, enter the budget amount; then select the Allocate button.


Total Budget Next Year

If your budget is figured in even amounts for the year, enter the amount here, and select the Allocate button.


Change ID

Select this button to change the account ID for the displayed GL account record.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated account record.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Budgets

Enter budget information for the current year, the current year revised, the current year + 1, and the current year + 2.


Account ID

Enter or find and select an account ID from your company's chart of accounts.


Description

This is a brief description for the chosen account as entered in the chart of accounts.


Description

This is a brief description for the chosen account as entered in the chart of accounts.


Budgets

Enter budget information for the current year, the current year revised, the current year + 1, and the current year + 2.

Period Ending: These columns identify the end date of each accounting period in each of the three displayed fiscal years. Enter budget amounts opposite the appropriate accounting period in the Period Ending column. When you've entered these amounts for a fiscal year, Peachtree will calculate and display budget totals for the year in the Total row at the bottom of the column.

Current Year: For income and expense accounts, enter individual amounts for each accounting period if they differ from accounting period to accounting period. If your budget is figured in even amounts for each accounting period, select the Allocate button to distribute budget amounts to all the other periods in the year.

Current Year Revised: For each account, enter the actual dollar amounts for the year.

Current Year + 1: Enter budget amounts for the following fiscal year.

Current Year + 2: Enter budget amounts for the second fiscal year following.


Horizontal scroll bar

Use this to scroll from left to right through the columns of budget information.


Adjust/Copy

Select this to 1) adjust a budget--that is, copy and allocate a budget amount from one period to all other periods in a single fiscal year--or 2) copy and allocate all budget amounts for one fiscal year to another fiscal year.


Variance Report

If you place the cursor on a budget amount for an accounting period in any of the displayed fiscal years except the current year + 2, the Monthly Variance report appears. This report shows the variance between the actual figure for the chosen period and the budget figure for that period.


Budgets

The table displays budget information for the year before the current year and revised budget figures for that year; these fields are informational only and are not editable. You can enter and save budget information for the current year, the current year revised, the current year + 1, and the current year + 2.

Period Ending: These columns identify the end date of each accounting period in each of the displayed fiscal years. Enter budget amounts opposite the appropriate accounting period in the Period Ending column. When you've entered these amounts for a fiscal year, Peachtree will calculate and display budget totals for the year in the Total row at the bottom of the column.

Current Year: For income and expense accounts, enter individual amounts for each accounting period if they differ from accounting period to accounting period.

Current Year Revised: For each account, enter the actual dollar amounts for the year.

Current Year + 1: Enter budget amounts for the following fiscal year.

Current Year + 2: Enter budget amounts for the second fiscal year following.


New

Select this button to clear the record displayed and enter a new one.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW). Note: Quickbooks companies are not available in First Accounting.

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Directories

Use this to select the directory where your company is stored. When the correct directory is selected, Peachtree displays the company name in the File Name list box.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


Company Type

Select the type of company to open. You have two choices: Peachtree or QuickBooks.


Company Type

Select the type of company to open. You have two choices: Peachtree or QuickBooks. (Quickbooks companies are not available in First Accounting.)


OK

Select OK to close this window and open the selected company.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without opening a company.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that you should enter your tax registration number, although you will be able to process payroll during the month of January. Since you will not be able to process payroll after that, it's a good idea to enter your registration number now.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that you should enter your tax registration number, although you will be able to process payroll during the month of January. Since you will not be able to process payroll after that, it's a good idea to enter your registration number now.


Peachtree Web Site

To obtain a tax registration number so you can process payroll in the current fiscal year, click the link, or visit Peachtree online at the displayed Internet address.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that you should enter your tax registration number, although you will be able to process payroll during the month of January. Since you will not be able to process payroll after that, it's a good idea to enter your registration number now.


Check your desired options.


Register

Select this to open the Tax Service Registration window and enter your tax registration number.


OK

Select OK to close this tax reminder window. For more information on Peachtree Accounting Tax Service, refer to the online Help.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that you should enter your tax registration number, although you will be able to process payroll during the month of January. Since you will not be able to process payroll after that, it's a good idea to enter your registration number now.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that if you have not already installed the payroll tax tables for the current year OR have installed them but not registered, you will not be able to process payroll in Peachtree Accounting. Make sure that tax tables for the current year have been installed and that you have entered your tax registration number in the Tax Service Registration window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that if you have not already installed the payroll tax tables for the current year OR have installed them but not registered, you will not be able to process payroll in Peachtree Accounting. Make sure that tax tables for the current year have been installed and that you have entered your tax registration number in the Tax Service Registration window.


Peachtree Web Site

To obtain a tax registration number so you can process payroll in the current fiscal year, click the link, or visit Peachtree online at the displayed Internet address.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that if you have not already installed the payroll tax tables for the current year OR have installed them but not registered, you will not be able to process payroll in Peachtree Accounting. Make sure that tax tables for the current year have been installed and that you have entered your tax registration number in the Tax Service Registration window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to remind you that if you have not already installed the payroll tax tables for the current year OR have installed them but not registered, you will not be able to process payroll in Peachtree Accounting. Make sure that tax tables for the current year have been installed and that you have entered your tax registration number in the Tax Service Registration window.


Do not dispaly this message again.

If you do not want to see this tax reminder message again, click the check box.


Register

Select this to open the Tax Service Registration window and enter your tax registration number.


OK

Select OK to close this tax reminder window. For more information on Peachtree Accounting Tax Service, refer to the online Help.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. To enter your tax registration number, select the Register button.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. To enter your tax registration number, select the Register button.


Peachtree Web Site

To obtain a tax registration number so you can process payroll in the current fiscal year, click the link, or visit Peachtree online at the displayed Internet address.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. To enter your tax registration number, select the Register button.


Check your desired options.


Register

Select this to open the Tax Service Registration window and enter your tax registration number.


OK

Select OK to close this tax reminder window. For more information on Peachtree Accounting Tax Service, refer to the online Help.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. To enter your tax registration number, select the Register button.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Date

Enter or select the date for transactions you enter in Peachtree Accounting, if different from the current date. If the system date is within the current accounting period, Peachtree uses this date. If you are not working in the current accounting period, Peachtree defaults the transaction date to the first day of the current month.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: Peachtree Accounting's system date does not affect your computer's date or the dates in any other applications you are running.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on your computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Licensed to: This identifies the business organization that this copy of Peachtree is registered to.

Release: This identifies current version of Peachtree Accounting program that is installed on your computer. The first number is the Release number (for example 8.0); the remaining numbers indicate the actual build that is installed. As software updates become available and are installed, these numbers will change.

Serial Number: This identifies your licensed copy, if registered, of Peachtree Accounting. As stated in the Peachtree Software License Agreement, you must purchase a unique serial number for each copy of Peachtree that you intend to install or use.

Global Tax Table Version: This identifies the current version of the global tax tables that are installed. The first four digits represent the tax year associated with your tax table.


About Peachtree Accounting

Licensed to: This identifies the business organization that this copy of Peachtree is registered to.

Release: This identifies current version of Peachtree Accounting program that is installed on your computer. The first number is the Release number (for example 8.0); the remaining numbers indicate the actual build that is installed. As software updates become available and are installed, these numbers will change.

Serial Number: This identifies your licensed copy, if registered, of Peachtree Accounting. As stated in the Peachtree Software License Agreement, you must purchase a unique serial number for each copy of Peachtree that you intend to install or use.

Global Tax Table Version: This identifies the current version of the global tax tables that are installed. The first four digits represent the tax year associated with your tax table.


About Peachtree Accounting

Licensed to: This identifies the business organization that this copy of Peachtree is registered to.

Release: This identifies current version of Peachtree Accounting program that is installed on your computer. The first number is the Release number (for example 8.0); the remaining numbers indicate the actual build that is installed. As software updates become available and are installed, these numbers will change.

Serial Number: This identifies your licensed copy, if registered, of Peachtree Accounting. As stated in the Peachtree Software License Agreement, you must purchase a unique serial number for each copy of Peachtree that you intend to install or use.

Global Tax Table Version: This identifies the current version of the global tax tables that are installed. The first four digits represent the tax year associated with your tax table.


OK

Closes the window.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer


About Peachtree Accounting

Licensed to: This identifies the business organization that this copy of Peachtree is registered to.

Release: This identifies current version of Peachtree Accounting program that is installed on your computer. The first number is the Release number (for example 8.0); the remaining numbers indicate the actual build that is installed. As software updates become available and are installed, these numbers will change.

Serial Number: This identifies your licensed copy, if registered, of Peachtree Accounting. As stated in the Peachtree Software License Agreement, you must purchase a unique serial number for each copy of Peachtree that you intend to install or use.

Global Tax Table Version: This identifies the current version of the global tax tables that are installed. The first four digits represent the tax year associated with your tax table.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


Third-Party Copyright Statements

Acknowledges additional companies whose components are used in Peachtree Accounting.


Third-Party Copyright Statements

Acknowledges additional companies whose components are used in Peachtree Accounting.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on our computer.


Close

Select this button to close the window.


The Peachtree Accounting Team

This window lists by department the names of all team members responsible for Peachtree Accounting, Release 2004.


Update company

From the drop-down listbox, choose the version of Peachtree that you would like your company data to be compatible with.


OK

Select this to accept your choice and close the window.


Cancel

Select this to close the window without making a choice.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


This company is currently compatible with

This lists which version of Peachtree the selected company is compatible with. To change to a different version of Peachtree, use the option buttons.


Open to be compatible with

Select this option if you want to open the selected company and have it work as a company compatible with the version of Peachtree you select from the drop-down list.


Convert to be compatible with

Select this option if you want to convert the selected company so that it will be fully compatible with the version of Peachtree you select from the drop-down list.


Peachtree version drop-down list

From the drop-down list, select the version of Peachtree that you want the company you are opening to be compatible with.


OK

Select OK to close this window and open the selected company.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without opening a company.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


The Peachtree Accounting Team

This window lists by department the names of all team members responsible for Peachtree Accounting, Release 2004.


The Peachtree Accounting Team

This window displays photographs of team members responsible for Peachtree Accounting, Release 2004.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated employee record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (employee or sales representative) displayed and enter a new one.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new employee's ID. For existing employees, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Employee ID field) to select a employee from the drop-down list.

Employee IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different employee IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


Log

Select this button to display events recorded for a customer, vendor, or employee over a range of time you specify. You can filter this list to see only certain types of activities and whether they're complete or incomplete. You can mark activities or events as completed here by placing a mark in the far-left column. You cannot edit any of the other information in the list edit box, however.


General Tab

Select this tab to set up employee names and addresses, employee types, date of hires, and beginning balances. (Beginning balances are not availalble in First Accounting.)


Custom Fields

Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Employee Defaults window.


Pay Info

Select this tab to enter information about the employee's pay rates, frequency of pay, and whether the employee is hourly or salaried.


Withholding Info

Select this tab to enter the employee's withholding information (federal and state filing statuses).


EmployEE Fields

Select this tab to modify the employee payroll fields if different from the payroll defaults.


Sales Rep

Select this option to include the individual on all the sales representative reports. Sales representatives are not included on employee reports or the list for Payroll Entry (not available in First Accounting) unless you select the Both option.


Maintain Employees/Sales Reps

General Tab: Select this tab to set up employee names and address, employee types, date of hire, and beginning balances. (Beginning balances are not availalble in First Accounting.)

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Employee Defaults window.

Pay Info (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to enter information about the employee's pay rates, frequency of pay, and whether the employee is hourly or salaried.

Withholding Info (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to enter the employee's withholding information (federal and state filing statuses).

EmployEE Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify the employee payroll fields if different from the payroll defaults.

EmployER Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify the employer payroll fields for this employee if different from the payroll defaults.

Direct Deposit (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify Peachtree direct deposit fields for the company.


First

This identifies employee's first name. For new employees, enter up to 15 characters in this field.


EmployER Fields

Select this tab to modify the employer payroll fields for this employee if different from the payroll defaults.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this employee record during year-end processing, select this check box. Once an employee record is inactive, a warning appears if you try to enter a check for this employee. You can update the employee record with address and telephone information.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, all employees who have no outstanding transactions and are tagged as inactive can be purged.


Direct Deposit

Select this tab to set up direct deposit account allocations for the employee.


Name

Enter the employee's first name, middle initial, and last name.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Employee

Select this option if this person is considered an employee of your company. The individual will be included on all the employee reports, as well as the list for Select for Payroll and Payroll Entry. (These windows are not available in First Accounting.) If this employee is also a sales representative, select the Both option.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new employee's ID. For existing employees, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Employee ID field) to select a employee from the drop-down list.

Employee IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different employee IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


E-mail

Enter the employee's e-mail address for correspondence within your company's network or on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. (Do add the "http:/" prefix.)

To send an e-mail message to this employee, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (Not available in First Accounting.)


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number where the employee resides. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number where the employee resides. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number where the employee resides. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which the employee resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the employee's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP code for the employee's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


City

Enter the city in which the employee resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the employee's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP code for the employee's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the employee resides. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Country

Enter the country where the employee resides. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Social Security #

This identifies the employee with the United States government for tax and benefit purposes. The social security number entered here can be printed in payroll reports as well as paychecks and W-2 forms. (Payroll reports, paychecks, and W-2 forms are not available in First Accounting.) You can enter up to 14 characters, including hyphens (for example, 123-45-6789).

Note: The system does not validate social security numbers, so be sure to enter the correct numbers.


Social Security #

This identifies the employee with the United States government for tax and benefit purposes. The social security number entered here can be printed in payroll reports as well as paychecks and W-2 forms. (Payroll reports, paychecks, and W-2 forms are not available in First Accounting.) You can enter up to 14 characters, including hyphens (for example, 123-45-6789).

Note: The system does not validate social security numbers, so be sure to enter the correct numbers.


Employee Type

You can use this to group like employees together. For example, if you have some employees who are full-time and some who are part-time, you can enter "FULL" or "PART" to describe them. The Employee Type field can also be used to filter some Payroll reports (in First Accounting, called "Employee reports"). You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Full" when filtering employee types in reports, employees that are identified as "full" or "FULL" will not be included.


Employee Type

You can use this to group like employees together. For example, if you have some employees who are full-time and some who are part-time, you can enter "FULL" or "PART" to describe them. The Employee Type field can also be used to filter some Payroll reports (in First Accounting, called "Employee reports"). You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Full" when filtering employee types in reports, employees that are identified as "full" or "FULL" will not be included.


Telephone 1

Enter the employee's residential telephone number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example (770) 555-1111.


Beginning Balances

Click the arrow button to see the Employee Beginning Balances window, where you can enter beginning balance information.


Telephone 1

Enter the employee's residential telephone number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example (770) 555-1111.


E-mail

Enter the employee's e-mail address for correspondence within your company's network or on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. (Do add the "http:/" prefix.)

To send an e-mail message to this employee, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (Not available in First Accounting.)


Beginning Balances arrow button

Click the arrow button to see the Employee Beginning Balances window, where you can enter beginning balance information.


Hired Date

Enter the date the employee was hired. (This field is required if you are using Electronic Time and Attendance.)


Last Raise

Enter the date of the employee's last raise.


Terminated Date

If the employee was terminated, enter the date on which this occurred.


Hired Date

Enter the date the employee was hired. (This field is required if you are using Electronic Time and Attendance.)


Dates

These are the dates when the employee was hired and, if applicable, terminated.


Last Raise

Enter the date of the employee's last raise.


Terminated Date

If the employee was terminated, enter the date on which this occurred.


Retirement Plan

Check this box to indicate that the employee is in a 401K or other retirement plan. This box replaced the Pension and Deferred boxes on the W-2.


Statutory Employee

Check this box if the employee qualifies as an employee by statute based on IRS guidelines. Statutory employees may be subject to Social Security, Medicare, and FUTA taxes in certain conditions.


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Employee Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Employee Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to payroll reports. (Payroll reports are not available in First Accounting.)


Pay Method

From the drop-down list, select the method of how you want to pay the employee during payroll entry.

Salary: This pay method is used for salaried employees, those who are paid a set amount of gross pay per payroll period.

Hourly-Hours Per Pay Period: This method is used for hourly employees who normally work a set number of hours per pay period.

Hourly-Time Ticket Hours: This pay method is used for hourly employees who base their hours worked on time tickets recorded during the payroll period (Peachtree Complete only).


Pay Method

From the drop-down list, select the method of how you want to pay the employee during payroll entry.

Salary: This pay method is used for salaried employees, those who are paid a set amount of gross pay per payroll period.

Hourly-Hours Per Pay Period: This method is used for hourly employees who normally work a set number of hours per pay period.

Hourly-Time Ticket Hours: This pay method is used for hourly employees who base their hours worked on time tickets recorded during the payroll period (Peachtree Complete only).


Raise History

Selecting the Raise History arrow button opens the Raise History window, where you can enter compensation information for the selected employee.


Raise History arrow button

Selecting the Raise History button opens the Raise History window, where you can enter compensation information for the selected employee.


Frequency

This information is used to calculate payroll checks. Select weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, monthly, or annually for frequency of paychecks.


Frequency

This information is used to calculate payroll checks. Select weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, monthly, or annually for frequency of paychecks.


Hours Per Pay Period

This is a set number of hours the employee works in a payroll period. This option is available only if you selected Hours-Hours Per Pay Period as the pay method. The number of hours entered here will be used in the first hourly pay level during payroll entry. The Hours Per Pay Period field value will default to a full-time work schedule based on the selected pay frequency: weekly=40, bi-weekly=80, semi-monthly=88, monthly=176, and annually=2112.


Hours Per Pay Period

This is a set number of hours the employee works in a payroll period. This option is available only if you selected Hours-Hours Per Pay Period as the pay method. The number of hours entered here will be used in the first hourly pay level during payroll entry. The Hours Per Pay Period field value will default to a full-time work schedule based on the selected pay frequency: weekly=40, bi-weekly=80, semi-montly=88, monthly=176, and annually=2112.


Pay Levels

Either the Hourly or Salary pay levels display depending on the pay method selected for this employee.

Description: This is the name of the pay level set up in Employee Defaults.

Standard: Select this check box to use the G/L account you set up in Employee Defaults. Clear the Standard check box to change the G/L account number.

G/L Account: This is set up in Employee Defaults. If you want to change the account, clear the Standard check box. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Rate: You can change the rate amount for hourly and salaried employees. The rate for salaried employees depends on the pay frequency you selected.


EmployEE Payroll Fields

This area lists company-wide payroll fields set up in Employee Defaults. If you have employees whose payroll deductions differ from the company-wide deductions, this is where you enter these differences.

Description: This is the name of the payroll field set up in Employees Defaults. It cannot be changed here.

Standard: Select this check box to use the G/L account you set up in Employee Defaults and the standard calculation set up in the payroll tax tables. Clear the Standard check box to change the G/L account number, the calculation, the amount, as well as the Adjust settings.

G/L Account: Account number in the General Ledger where information entered into this field for this employee is posted. Not applicable if the Memo box is checked. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Calculate: Select this check box if the information in this field can be calculated from the adjusted gross and the tax tables.

Tax Name: If this field can be calculated, enter the name of the tax table to use (not the Tax ID) without the payroll year. Press ? to see a list of tax tables.

Amount: If you aren't using a calculation, enter a flat rate here.  Positive numbers are earnings and negative numbers are deductions.

Memo: Select this check box if the information in this field does not affect your company general ledger or financial statements. An example of this would be tips.

Run: Select this check box to indicate that you don't want the balance to be set to zero when you close the year.

Adjust: If this field can be calculated, select this arrow button to select which payroll fields are accumulated to make the adjusted gross for this calculation.


EmployER Payroll Fields

This area lists employer payroll fields as related to the setup of the individual employee. If you have employees whose payroll deductions differ from the company-wide deductions, this is where you enter these differences.

Description: This is the name of the payroll field set up in Employees Defaults. It cannot be changed here.

Standard: Select this check box to use the standard payroll field definition. Clear the Standard check box to change the G/L account number and tax name. Or, select both the Standard and Calc check boxes, and you can change the G/L account number and amount.

Calc: Select this check box if you want to choose a tax name to use for the automatic calculation of tax amounts. If you don't select the Calc checkbox, you would have to calculate taxes on each individual paycheck.

Tax Name: If this field can be calculated, enter the name of the tax table to use (not the Tax ID) without the payroll year. Press ? to see a list of tax tables.

Adjust: If this field can be calculated, select this arrow button to select which payroll fields are accumulated to make the adjusted gross for this calculation.


Both

Select this option if the individual is both an employee and a sales representative and will be included on both employee and sales representatives reports as well as Payroll Entry lists. (Payroll Entry is not available in First Accounting.)


Withholding Information

This identifies how the employee will be taxed during payroll entry. The employee's filing status, allowances, and additional withholding amounts are maintained for Federal, State, and Local payroll fields. This information can be obtained from the employee's Federal W-4 form and other withholding records. You can also establish the percentage of gross pay that the employee wants to contribute to a 401(k) plan, if appropriate.

For more information on entering withholding information, select the Help button.

Payroll Field Names: These identify the standard Federal, State, Local and 401(k)% payroll fields for which conditions unique to the employee must be set up. You cannot change the names of these fields. Special 1 and Special 2 payroll fields allow you to customize payroll tax formulas, if necessary.

Filing Status: Select the filing status that the employee has requested from the drop-down list. For federal filing status, select either Single or Married.

Allowances: Enter the number of allowances the employee is claiming. Enter 99 if the employee is exempt from withholding.

Additional Withholding: Enter any additional withholding, an amount in addition to the calculated withholding, the employee has requested.

State/Locality: This identifies the state and local region where the employee resides; these values determine which tax table is used during payroll entry. The State/Locality values will print on W-2 forms.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a employee record if there are transactions that use that employee ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Withholding Information

This identifies how the employee will be taxed during payroll entry. The employee's filing status, allowances, and additional withholding amounts are maintained for Federal, State, and Local payroll fields. This information can be obtained from the employee's Federal W-4 form and other withholding records. You can also establish the percentage of gross pay that the employee wants to contribute to a 401(k) plan, if appropriate.


Direct Deposit

This indicates whether the employee is a direct deposit employee. If you want to set up an employee for direct deposit, select the check box.


Direct Deposit Allocations

This area lists information about accounts set up as direct deposit accounts for the selected employee.

Account: You can set up as many as four accounts to serve as direct deposit accounts. This information will come from the direct deposit employee's Employee Authorization Agreement.

Account Type: For each direct deposit account, use the drop-down list to choose the appropriate type, either checking or savings.

Routing/Transit Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the routing/transit number of the account.

Bank Acct Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the account number.

Allocation Method: For each direct deposit account you set up, you can choose one of three methods: Percent: The percentage of distribution equals the employee's net pay multiplied by the amount entered in the % field. Amount: A dollar amount (entered in the Fixed Dollar Amount field) that doesn't fluctuate despite differences in employee net pay. Remainder: This method is used to ensure that all of an employee's net pay is distributed in cases where net pay exceeds Percent and Fixed Amount allocations.

Fixed Dollar Amount: Enter the dollar amount of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Pre-Note Status: This reflects whether a pre-note has been successfully sent to and accepted by the employee's financial institution. If the note has not been sent, the field will read Not Sent.

Status Date: This displays the date of the latest pre-note sent for this employee direct deposit account. If you haven't sent a note, the field will display the current system date.

Account Reset button: This lets you reset account information for any of the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee.


Direct Deposit Allocations

This area lists information about accounts set up as direct deposit accounts for the selected employee.

Account: You can set up as many as four accounts to serve as direct deposit accounts. This information will come from the direct deposit employee's Employee Authorization Agreement.

Account Type: For each direct deposit account, use the drop-down list to choose the appropriate type, either checking or savings.

Routing/Transit Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the routing/transit number of the account.

Bank Acct Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the account number.

Allocation Method: For each direct deposit account you set up, you can choose one of three methods: Percent: The percentage of distribution equals the employee's net pay multiplied by the amount entered in the % field. Amount: A dollar amount (entered in the Fixed Dollar Amount field) that doesn't fluctuate despite differences in employee net pay. Remainder: This method is used to ensure that all of an employee's net pay is distributed in cases where net pay exceeds Percent and Fixed Amount allocations.

Fixed Dollar Amount: Enter the dollar amount of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Pre-Note Status: This reflects whether a pre-note has been successfully sent to and accepted by the employee's financial institution. If the note has not been sent, the field will read Not Sent.

Status Date: This displays the date of the latest pre-note sent for this employee direct deposit account. If you haven't sent a note, the field will display the current system date.

Account Reset button: This lets you reset account information for any of the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee.


Total Distributed - Percentage

This is the total percentage of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up as Percent accounts for the employee.


Total Distributed - Fixed Dollar Amount

This is the total dollar amount of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up as Amount accounts for the employee.


Up arrow button

Use this button to move a selected row up one position in the list of accounts. This will be useful, for example, if you have a (Fixed) Amount account toward the end of the list and want to move it up to make sure that there will be enough net pay to distribute the entire fixed amount to that account.

Whenever you move a row, it is automatically renumbered. For example, if you move Account 2 up one position, it will become Account 1.


Total Distributed

This is the total percentage and fixed dollar amount of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee.


Pre-Note Status Message

This tells you about the pre-note status of the currently selected direct deposit account.


Down arrow button

Use this button to move a selected row down one position in the list of accounts. Whenever you move a row, it is automatically renumbered. For example, if you move Account 1 down one position, it will become Account 2.


Last

This identifies employee's last name. For new employees, enter up to 20 characters in this field.


Maintain Employees/Sales Reps

General Tab: Select this tab to set up employee names and address, employee types, date of hire, and beginning balances. (Beginning balances are not availalble in First Accounting.)

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Employee Defaults window.

Pay Info (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to enter information about the employee's pay rates, frequency of pay, and whether the employee is hourly or salaried.

Withholding Info (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to enter the employee's withholding information (federal and state filing statuses).

EmployEE Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify the employee payroll fields if different from the payroll defaults.

EmployER Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify the employer payroll fields for this employee if different from the payroll defaults.

Direct Deposit (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to modify Peachtree direct deposit fields for the company.


Learn more about Peachtree Direct Deposit

To learn more about the Peachtree Direct Deposit Service, click the informational link.


Change ID

Select this button to change the employee ID for the displayed employee record.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


MI

This identifies employee's middle initial.


Hourly Billing Rate

Enter a standard rate to bill customers for hours recorded on employee time tickets. You can override this rate when recording individual time tickets.


Hourly Billing Rate

Enter a standard rate to bill customers for hours recorded on employee time tickets. You can override this rate when recording individual time tickets.


Learn about Payroll and Inventory Upgrade Features

Click this link to go to the Peachtree Web site, where you can learn more about how to upgrade to take advantage of Peachtree's Payroll and Inventory components.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Reverse Transaction

A reversing transaction is one that is the exact reverse of an adjusting entry. Select this check box to indicate that the currently displayed General Journal transaction will be reversed the first day of the following accounting period. Peachtree Accounting will automatically generate a reversing transaction that will be posted to the General Ledger. The amounts and accounts are the same; the debits and credits are merely reversed.

Note: You cannot edit the system-generated reversing transaction. To remove the reversed transaction, you must display the original transaction and clear the Reverse Transaction check box or erase the entire original entry.


Reverse Transaction

A reversing transaction is one that is the exact reverse of an adjusting entry. Select this check box to indicate that the currently displayed General Journal transaction will be reversed the first day of the following accounting period. Peachtree Accounting will automatically generate a the reversing transaction that will be posted to the General Ledger. The amounts and accounts are the same; the debits and credits are merely reversed.

Note: You cannot edit the system-generated reversing transaction. To remove the reversed transaction, you must display the original transaction and clear the Reverse Transaction check box or erase the entire original entry.


Reference

This identifies the General Journal adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

If you enter a number, Peachtree Accounting automatically adds 1 to the number each time you use the General Journal Entry.

Unlike with other transactions, you may want to use duplicate reference numbers--for example, recurring depreciation entries or accrued monthly estimates of income tax.


Reference

This identifies the General Journal adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

If you enter a number, Peachtree Accounting automatically adds 1 to the number each time you use the General Journal Entry.

Unlike with other transactions, you may want to use duplicate reference numbers--for example, recurring depreciation entries or accrued monthly estimates of income tax.


General Journal Entry Line Items (Distributions):

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger account ID you want to debit or credit for this part of the journal entry. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter a description of the transaction. Tip: If you enter a description and press the Add button, the description is copied to the new line.

Debit: Enter the debit amount of this transaction.

Credit: Enter the credit amount of this transaction.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.

Remember that total debit amount must equal total credit amount. The balance of the transaction is given in the Out of Balance field. For assistance on debit and credit adjustments, consult your accountant.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Memorize. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save button.

Save: If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.

Memorize: Click this button to create a memorized general journal entry from the one that is currently displayed.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the displayed transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Open

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Select. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Open button.

Open: Click this button to display a previously entered transaction.

Select: Click this button to select a memorized transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Recurring Entry Notice

This identifies that the payment is a recurring transaction; it also indicates the number of additional entries remaining.


Delete

Select this button to remove any transactions you have entered in the window.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


General Journal Entry

Use this window to make and edit entries to the general journal.


General Journal Entry

Use this window to make and edit entries to the general journal.


General Journal Entry

Use this window to make and edit entries to the general journal.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Memorize. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save button.

Save: If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.

Memorize: Click this button to create a memorized payment from the one that is currently displayed.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals two additional selections, Preview and Postage. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the check that corresponds to the currently displayed payment. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to display the form on the screen as it will appear when printed.

Postage: Click this button to buy and print postage online through the Peachtree Internet Postage Service.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the displayed transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Open

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Select. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Open button.

Open: Click this button to display a previously entered transaction.

Select: Click this button to select a memorized transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed in the Payments window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the date of the displayed transaction.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Vendor ID/Customer ID

You can enter payments to vendors or issue refund checks to customers. Select either Vendor ID or Customer ID as the type of payment you want to enter.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this transaction. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name of a vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, this field appears automatically. You can change it for this payment by selecting the arrow button and making your changes.


Check Number

Leave the check number blank if you want to print a check.

Enter a number only if the check has already been written. This will ensure that a second check is not written to the vendor because Peachtree Accounting will print the word "DUPLICATE" on the check. You can enter any number, using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Check Number

Leave the check number blank if you want to print a check.

Enter a number only if the check has already been written. This will ensure that a second check is not written to the vendor because Peachtree Accounting will print the word "DUPLICATE" on the check. You can enter any number, using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only, not on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can enter it in the Forms Designer.

Note: In First Accounting, you cannot use the Forms Designer to add text; you can only change the fonts of text appearing on the form.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only, not on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can enter it in the Forms Designer.

Note: In First Accounting, you cannot use the Forms Designer to add text; you can only change the fonts of text appearing on the form.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer.

Apply to Invoices: Select this tab if you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice.

Apply to Expenses: Select this tab if you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice.

Apply to Customer Account: Select this tab if you are writing a check to a customer (for example, a sales refund). This tab is only present if you selected Customer ID above the Pay to the Order of field.

Prepayment: Select this check box if you have sent the vendor a payment for an invoice that has not been entered into the system yet. This choice is not available for non-vendors.


Payment Line Items

Invoice: Invoices currently unpaid (having an open balance) are listed here. This is for display only.

Date Due: The due date for the invoice appears here based on the invoice payment terms. This is for display only.

Amount Due: This identifies the current unpaid balance for the invoice. This is for display only.

Description: You can enter several lines to describe this transaction. This appears on reports.

Discount: The discount is computed based on the invoice payment terms. You can change the discount amount if some special terms apply.

Amount Paid: Enter the amount you want to pay on this invoice, or select the Pay check box to pay the invoice in full.

Pay: Select this check box to pay the full amount due on the invoice. To pay partially, enter the amount in Amount Paid; the Pay check box is then automatically selected.


Expense Line items

Quantity:  Enter the number of items being purchased. You must enter a quantity if you entered a stock-type inventory item. (Stock items are not available in First Accounting.)

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line purchases, if applicable. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default.  (In First Accounting, this will be the GL Salary / Wages account you set up in Maintain Items.) If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item, or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Discount account field will not appear in this window. The Purchase Discount account set up in Vendor Defaults will be used. To modify the G/L account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account look-up list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this payment. Note: If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Balance includes unposted transactions...

If your company uses the batch posting method, this tells you that the displayed Balance amount includes transactions not posted as of the displayed date.


Balance includes unposted transactions...

If your company uses the batch posting method, this tells you that the displayed Balance amount includes transactions not posted as of the displayed date.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Prepayment

Select this check box if you have sent the vendor a payment for an invoice that has not been entered into the system yet. This choice is not available for non-vendors.


Address

This specifies the address of the chosen vendor. You can modify the address if needed by selecting the Pay to the Order of arrow and then entering the new address in the Pay To Address window.


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Discount account field will not appear in this window. The Purchase Discount account set up in Vendor Defaults will be used. To modify the G/L account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Customer Payment Notice

This identifies that this transaction is a customer payment. Payments made to customers should be applied as prepayments or credit memos in the Receipts window.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Detail

This button shows additional information about the selected record or transaction. In some cases, the original task or maintain window appears and you will be able to review and edit data. In other cases the information is purely for review purposes; you won't be able to edit the data.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the displayed payment.

Void: Click this button to void the displayed payment.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Void

The word "Void" appears in red if the displayed vendor check has been voided.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Payments

This allows you to write checks for vendor invoices, for payments that don't have a vendor invoice, and for prepayments or discounts. You can also write a check to a customer. There are two ways you can account for payments in Peachtree Accounting:

If you received an invoice from a vendor and want to apply a payment to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab.

If you made a direct purchase that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Expenses tab.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Address

This is the address of the vendor or customer you've chosen to pay. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the vendor or customer record.


Prepayment

Select this check box if you have sent the vendor a payment for an invoice that has not been entered into the system yet. This choice is not available for non-vendors.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed in the Receipts window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the date of the displayed transaction.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Balance includes unposted transactions

This notes tells you that the displayed cash account balance includes transactions that are unposted as of the displayed date.


Balance includes unposted transactions

This notes tells you that the displayed cash account balance includes transactions that are unposted as of the displayed date.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Customer ID/Vendor ID

You can enter receipts from customers or refunds issued by vendors. Select either Customer ID or Vendor ID as the type of receipt you want to enter.


Deposit Ticket ID

On the Pay Methods tab of the Customer Defaults window, you can tell Peachtree to assign desposit ticket IDs in Receipts. If you have chosen this option, the current system date appears by default in the Deposit Ticket ID field, but you can change it.

If you have not chosen to assign ticket IDs in Receipts, in the Deposit Ticket ID field, enter the ID number (up to eight characters) from your deposit ticket. This code is used for bank reconciliation. This ID ties receipts to the deposit total. This allows you to clear all the receipts for an entire deposit ticket when reconciling.


Deposit Ticket ID

On the Pay Methods tab of the Customer Defaults window, you can tell Peachtree to assign desposit ticket IDs in Receipts. If you have chosen this option, the current system date appears by default in the Deposit Ticket ID field, but you can change it.

If you have not chosen to assign ticket IDs in Receipts, in the Deposit Ticket ID field, enter the ID number (up to eight characters) from your deposit ticket. This code is used for bank reconciliation. This ID ties receipts to the deposit total. This allows you to clear all the receipts for an entire deposit ticket when reconciling.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this transaction. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Name

If you entered a customer ID or vendor ID, you cannot enter anything in this field. However, if you left the customer/vendor ID blank, you can enter a name here. This indicates that the receipt is for a direct sale and will be applied to revenues rather than invoices.


Reference

Enter the number from the customer's or vendor's check or the method of payment here. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

Note: If you are entering cash receipts, avoid using the reference "CASH" each time. It is generally a good idea to always use a unique reference number for each receipt transaction. This way you can easily identify and manage the receipt in reports and account reconciliation.


Reference

Enter the number from the customer's or vendor's check or the method of payment here. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

Note: If you are entering cash receipts, avoid using the reference "CASH" each time. It is generally a good idea to always use a unique reference number for each receipt transaction. This way you can easily identify and manage the receipt in reports and account reconciliation.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Payment Method

From the list, select the method of payment this customer is using. The payment methods are entered on the Pay Methods tab of the Maintain Customer Defaults window. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Payment Method

From the list, select the method of payment this customer is using. The payment methods are entered on the Pay Methods tab of the Maintain Customer Defaults window. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposit. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this deposit. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposit. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this deposit. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposit. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this deposit. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Receipt Amount

This identifies the total amount of the receipt. It is calculated by the amounts you apply to invoices or revenues. You cannot enter anything in this field.


Receipt Amount

This identifies the total amount of the receipt. It is calculated by the amounts you apply to invoices or revenues. You cannot enter anything in this field.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Prepayment

Select this check box if a customer has sent a payment for an invoice that has not been entered into the system yet. This choice is not available for non-customers.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account.

Apply to Invoices: Select this tab if you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice.

Apply to Revenues: Select this tab if you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice.

Apply to Vendor Account: Select this tab if you received payment from a vendor (for example, a purchase refund). This tab is only present if you selected Vendor ID below the Deposit Ticket ID field.


Receipt Line Items

Invoice: Invoices currently unpaid (have an open balance) are listed here. This is for display only.

Date Due: The due date for the invoice displays here based on the invoice payment terms. This is for display only.

Amount Due: This identifies the current unpaid balance for the invoice. This is for display only.

Description: You can enter several lines to describe this transaction. This appears on reports.

Discount: The discount is computed based on the invoice payment terms. You can change the discount amount if some special terms apply.

Amount Paid: Enter the amount you want to pay on this invoice, or select the Pay check box to pay the invoice in full.

Pay: Select this check box to pay the full amount due on the invoice. To make a partial payment, enter the amount in Amount Paid; the Pay check box is then automatically selected.


Revenue Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity sold of this item. Once the quantity is entered, it is multiplied by the unit price to determine the amount.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line item. This appears for only the Product invoice template. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Inventory Items.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. Type a ? to list sales representatives, or double-click in this field or type + to add a new sales representative in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not available in First Accounting).


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. Type a ? to list sales representatives, or double-click in this field or type + to add a new sales representative in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not available in First Accounting).


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Discount Account field will not appear in this window. The Sales Discount account set up in Customer Defaults will be used. To modify the G/L account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Discount Account field will not appear in this window. The Sales Discount account set up in Customer Defaults will be used. To modify the G/L account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Vendor Receipt Notice

This identifies that this transaction is a vendor receipt. Receipts provided by vendors should be applied as prepayments or credit memos in the Payments window.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed transaction, if permitted.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Detail

This button shows additional information about the selected record or transaction. In some cases, the original task or maintain window appears and you will be able to review and edit data. In other cases the information is purely for review purposes; you won't be able to edit the data.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Select this button to print the quote that corresponds to the currently displayed transaction. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the quote will look once printed.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Receipt Number

Enter the receipt number that corresponds to the receipt number on the preprinted receipt form. Once the first receipt is printed, Peachtree will increase this number by 1. Then each time you print a receipt from the same account (such as Cash Account), Peachtree will increase the number of the last printed receipt by 1.

If you want to change the number for any reason--for example, in order to correct a printing error that threw the number sequence off or to account for a series of handwritten receipts that fall after the last receipt printed--simply change the number in the Receipt Number box. Peachtree will increase this number by 1 as each subsequent receipt is printed.


Receipt Number

Enter the receipt number that corresponds to the receipt number on the preprinted receipt form. Once the first receipt is printed, Peachtree will increase this number by 1. Then each time you print a receipt from the same account (such as Cash Account), Peachtree will increase the number of the last printed receipt by 1.

If you want to change the number for any reason--for example, in order to correct a printing error that threw the number sequence off or to account for a series of handwritten receipts that fall after the last receipt printed--simply change the number in the Receipt Number box. Peachtree will increase this number by 1 as each subsequent receipt is printed.


Process Credit Card

If your customer is paying by credit card, click this button to enter credit card information and the transaction authorization code. If the credit card payment was authorized and an authorization code was entered in the Credit Card Information window, "(Approved)" appears beside the Credit Card button.


Process Credit Card

If your customer is paying by credit card, click this button to enter credit card information and the transaction authorization code. If the credit card payment was authorized and an authorization code was entered in the Credit Card Information window, "(Approved)" appears beside the Credit Card button.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate customer. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Sales Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers window.


Receipts

This allows you to enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips you receive and deposit them in your checking account. There are two ways you can account for receipts in Peachtree Accounting:

If you sent an invoice to a customer and want to apply a receipt to the invoice, select the Apply to Invoices tab

If you made a direct sale that didn't require an invoice, enter it on the Apply to Revenues tab.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Address

This is the address of the customer you are entering a receipt for. It is for display only. Changes to the address must be made in the customer record.


Prepayment

Select this check box if a customer has sent a payment for an invoice that has not been entered into the system yet. This choice is not available for non-customers.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the displayed transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this vendor or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after them.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. Once selected, the vendor's default information--including address, purchase account, ship method, and payment terms--appears. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. Once an ID is selected, the vendor's default information--including address, purchase account, ship method, and payment terms--appears. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Invoice No.

This identifies the vendor invoice number. This should come from the vendor's bill. This field is required. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Invoice No.

This identifies the vendor invoice number. This should come from the vendor's bill. This field is required. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Waiting on Bill

Select the Waiting on Bill check box if you do not have an invoice yet. This lets you update your inventory with the items you have received, but since you don't have a bill from the vendor yet, you can't send a payment.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items will be delivered from the vendor. The methods are set up in Inventory Item Defaults window (called "Item Defaults" in First Accounting). You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items will be delivered from the vendor. The methods are set up in Inventory Item Defaults window (called "Item Defaults" in First Accounting). You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the purchase. This includes the:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due to the vendor.

Discount Amount: This is the discount allowed if paid before a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the vendor early-payment discount is allowed.

Displayed Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of purchase when payment is due.

If you apply this purchase invoice to a purchase order, this information comes from the purchase order (not available in First Accounting).


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the purchase. This includes the:

Date Due-This is the date payment is due to the vendor.

Discount Amount-This is the discount allowed if paid before a certain date.

Discount Date-This is the date up to when the vendor early-payment discount is allowed.

Displayed Terms-This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of purchase when payment is due.

If you apply a purchase order to this invoice, this information comes from the purchase order (not available in First Accounting).


Terms arrow button

If this is a new vendor or if you want to make changes to the displayed payment terms for a vendor, click the arrow button.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/P Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/P account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/P Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/P account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


Apply to Purchase Order Tab

If open purchase orders exist for this vendor, you can choose to apply purchase order items to this invoice.


Apply to Purchases Tab

Select this tab to add new or modify existing transaction lines to the invoice.


Apply to Purchase Order Tab

If open purchase orders exist for this vendor, you can choose to apply purchase order items to this invoice.

Apply to Purchases Tab

Select this tab to add new or modify existing transaction lines to the invoice.


Purchase Invoice Line Items

Item: This identifies the item included on the purchase order.

Remaining: This identifies how many of the item you are still waiting to receive.

Received: Enter how many of the item you received, based on the purchase invoice.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. (In First Accounting, this will be the GL Salary / Wages account you set up in Maintain Items.) If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Purchase Invoice Line items

Quantity:  Enter the number of items being purchased. You must enter a quantity if you entered a stock-type inventory item. (Stock inventory items are not available in First Accounting.)

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each item you are purchasing, if applicable. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Invoice Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item entered on the invoice. You cannot change it.


Invoice Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item entered on the invoice. You cannot change it.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Use this field to enter a quick payment for the invoice if paid at the time of the purchase. Peachtree displays the Reference field and Cash Account field so you can enter payment information.

For example, you may have manually written a check at the time of the purchase and want it indicated on the invoice.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments (installments) must be entered and applied using the Payments window.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Use this field to enter a quick payment for the invoice if paid at the time of the purchase. Peachtree displays the Reference field and Cash Account field so you can enter payment information.

For example, you may have manually written a check at the time of the purchase and want it indicated on the invoice.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments (installments) must be entered and applied using the Payments window.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Use this field to enter a quick payment for the invoice if paid at the time of the purchase. Peachtree displays the Reference field and Cash Account field so you can enter payment information.

For example, you may have manually written a check at the time of the purchase and want it indicated on the invoice.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments (installments) must be entered and applied using the Payments window.


Reference

This appears only if you entered the amount paid. Enter the check number you used to pay the invoice here. If you pay in cash, you can enter CASH01 here. Each time you pay cash, you can add one to the last cash reference number to get a new cash reference number since you can't have duplicate reference numbers.


Reference

This appears only if you entered the amount paid. Enter the check number you used to pay the invoice here. If you pay in cash, you can enter CASH01 here. Each time you pay cash, you can add one to the last cash reference number to get a new cash reference number since you can't have duplicate reference numbers.


Net Due

This indicates the amount that you currently owe for the purchase. Net amount due is calculated as the invoice total less any applied payments. You cannot edit this field.


Net Due

This indicates the amount that you currently owe for the purchase. Net amount due is calculated as the invoice total less any applied payments. You cannot edit this field.


Cash Account

This appears only if you entered an amount paid for this invoice. Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the amount paid. The default account is the Cash Account that was used on the Payments window. You may select a different account or add a new one here.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this payment, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

This appears only if you entered an amount paid for this invoice. Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the amount paid. The default account is the Cash Account that was used on the Payments window. You may select a different account or add a new one here.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this payment, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

This appears only if you entered an amount paid for this invoice. Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the amount paid. The default account is the Cash Account that was used on the Payments window. You may select a different account or add a new one here.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this payment, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

This appears only if you entered an amount paid for this invoice. Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the amount paid. The default account is the Cash Account that was used on the Payments window. You may select a different account or add a new one here.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this payment, you must select the Journal button.


Recurring Entry

This identifies the number of remaining entries that you have recurred for this purchase. This appears only if you recurred this purchase transaction.


Template

Select this button to display a pull-down menu that contains a list of available templates for the displayed task window. Choose a predefined template, one of your own templates, or the Customize Templates option to create or modify a template.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship To

This defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase. You can also select the purchase as a drop shipment (direct shipment from the vendor you ordered the items from to the customer you ordered the items for). On the Open Purchase Orders report, you can separate drop-shipment purchase orders from regular purchase orders (not available in First Accounting).

To change the company shipping address for this purchase invoice, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Delete

Select this button to remove all displayed transaction information in case you have entered it in error.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Ship

This button replaces the Row button when the Apply to Purchase Order # tab is in the forefront. Use it to set the ship status of line items on the tab. It works like a drop-down list, revealing two additional selections:

Ship All: To ship all items on the purchase order, click the Ship button, and then click Ship All.

Ship None: To ship none of the items on the purchase order (zero all quantities in the Shipped column), click the Ship button, and then click Ship None.


Other Payments and Credits

This indicates the total amount of all other payments and vendor credit memos applied to the current purchase. You cannot edit this field.


Other Payments and Credits

This indicates the total amount of all other payments and vendor credit memos applied to the current purchase. You cannot edit this field.


Payment Status

The read-only text indicates the payment status of the current purchase: Unpaid, Partially Paid, or Paid in Full.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Customer ID

If this purchase is to be delivered as a drop-shipment, enter the ID of the appropriate customer. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information appears in the Ship To fields. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Customer ID

If this purchase is to be delivered as a drop-shipment, enter the ID of the appropriate customer. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information appears in the Ship To fields. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Purchases

Use this window to enter records of purchases from your vendors.


Drop Ship

If this purchase is to be delivered as a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship To

This defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase. You can also select the purchase as a drop shipment (direct shipment from the vendor you ordered the items from to the customer you ordered the items for). On the Open Purchase Orders report, you can separate drop-shipment purchase orders from regular purchase orders (not available in First Accounting).

To change the company shipping address for this purchase invoice, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Customer Invoice No.

Enter the number from the invoice sent by the customer that will cover this vendor purchase.


Customer Invoice No.

Enter the number from the invoice sent by the customer that will cover this vendor purchase.


Purchases

Use this window to enter records of purchases from your vendors.


Purchases

Use this window to enter records of purchases from your vendors.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Memorize. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save button.

Save: If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.

Memorize: Click this button to create a memorized invoice from the one that is currently displayed.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional two selections, Preview and Postage. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the check that corresponds to the currently displayed payment. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the invoice will look once printed.

Postage: Click this button to buy and print postage online through the Peachtree Internet Postage Service.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the displayed transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Open

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Select. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Open button.

Open: Click this button to display a previously entered transaction.

Select: Click this button to select a memorized transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this customer or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before or after the line items.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this invoice. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears.

To select an existing customer, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new customer record, press + in the Customer ID field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this invoice. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears.

To select an existing customer, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new customer record, press + in the Customer ID field.


Invoice No.

Leave this blank if you want the program to print an invoice. Peachtree will suggest an invoice number when you print the invoice. Enter an invoice or other reference number if the invoice is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact).


Invoice No.

Leave this blank if you want the program to print an invoice. Peachtree will suggest an invoice number when you print the invoice. Enter an invoice or other reference number if the invoice is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact).


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Quote Number

This identifies the quote number associated with this transaction prior to being converted to a sales order or sales invoice.


Quote Number

This identifies the quote number associated with this transaction prior to being converted to a sales order or sales invoice.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the invoice.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not available in First Accounting).


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the invoice.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not available in First Accounting).


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list. This field appears only for the product invoice.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order. (Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list. This field appears only for the product invoice.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order. (Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Ship Date

Enter or select the date when you expect the items to be shipped. This will appear and print on reports; it does not affect the posting of inventory (not in First Accounting) or journal entries. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

This appears only for the product invoice.


Ship Date

Enter or select the date when you expect the items to be shipped. This will appear and print on reports; it does not affect the posting of inventory (not in First Accounting) or journal entries. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

This appears only for the product invoice.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Discount Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not in First Accounting).


Payment Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Displayed Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not in First Accounting).


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Discount Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order (not in First Accounting).


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field. If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order. (Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field. If you apply a sales order to this sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order. (Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Apply to Sales Order Tab

If open sales orders exist for this customer, you can choose to apply items from a sales order to this customer invoice.


Apply to Sales Tab

Select this tab to add new or modify existing transaction lines to the invoice.


Apply to Sales Order Tab

If open sales orders exist for this customer, you can choose to apply items from a sales order to this customer invoice.

Apply to Sales Tab

Select this tab to add new or modify existing transaction lines to the invoice.


Invoice Line Items

Item: This identifies the item included on the sales order. This appears for only the Product invoice template.

Remaining: This is the number of items left to be shipped to complete the sales order.

Shipped: This is the number of items that you want to ship and invoice the customer.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Items.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Sale Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity of the item sold.

Item: Enter or select the ID of the item sold.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Items.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Other Applied Credits

This indicates the total amount of all other customer receipts and credit memos applied to the current invoice. You cannot edit this field.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you apply a sales order to a sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not display in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you apply a sales order to a sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not display in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Freight

Enter the freight charges for this transaction here. If you are applying a sales order to this sales invoice and had freight on the sales order, select the Ship button; then from the drop-down menu that appears, select the All button to move the total freight amount to the sales invoice. Note: Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.


Freight

Enter the freight charges for this transaction here. If you are applying a sales order to this sales invoice and had freight on the sales order, select the Ship button; then from the drop-down menu that appears, select the All button to move the total freight amount to the sales invoice. Note: Sales orders are not available in First Accounting.


Invoice Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item listed on the invoice, sales tax, and freight (if entered). You cannot change it.


Invoice Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item listed on the invoice, sales tax, and freight (if entered). You cannot change it.


Amount Paid

This identifies the amount paid against this invoice, if any. To apply a payment on the fly, select the arrow button to the right of the Amount Paid field.


Amount Paid at Sale

This allows you to enter a receipt for the sale at the time the sales invoice is posted. For example, your customer may want to apply a payment at the time of the sale and have it indicated on the invoice. To apply a payment on the fly, select the arrow button to the right of the Amount Paid at Sale field.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments must be entered and applied using the Receipts window.


Amount Paid at Sale

This allows you to enter a receipt for the sale at the time the sales invoice is posted. For example, your customer may want to apply a payment at the time of the sale and have it indicated on the invoice. To apply a payment on the fly, select the arrow button to the right of the Amount Paid at Sale field.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments must be entered and applied using the Receipts window.


Amount Paid at Sale

This allows you to enter a receipt for the sale at the time the sales invoice is posted. For example, your customer may want to apply a payment at the time of the sale and have it indicated on the invoice. To apply a payment on the fly, select the arrow button to the right of the Amount Paid at Sale field.

Note: You can enter only one payment for the invoice using this method. All other payments must be entered and applied using the Receipts window.


Net Due

This indicates the current balance due from your customer for the sale. Net amount due is calculated as the invoice total less any applied receipts. You cannot edit this field.


Net Due

This indicates the current balance due from your customer for the sale. Net amount due is calculated as the invoice total less any applied receipts. You cannot edit this field.


Check Number

If you have made a payment on this invoice, the check number will appear here.


Template

Select this button to display a pull-down menu that contains a list of available templates for the displayed task window. Choose a predefined template, one of your own templates, or the Customize Templates option to create or modify a template.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Apply Tickets/Expenses

If there are outstanding time or expense tickets or other reimbursable transactions for this customer, you can choose to apply them to the invoice.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the displayed invoice.

Void: Click this button to void the displayed invoice.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Ship

This button replaces the Row button when the Apply to Sales Order tab is in the forefront. Use it to set the ship status of line items on the tab. It works like a drop-down list, revealing two additional selections:

Ship All: To ship all items on the sales order, click the Ship button, and then click Ship All.

Ship None: To ship none of the items on the sales order (zero all quantities in the Shipped column), click the Ship button, and then click Ship None.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Invoice Status

The read-only text indicates the status of the displayed invoice: Unpaid, Partially Paid, Paid in Full, or Void.


Apply Tickets/Expenses arrow button

If there are outstanding time or expense tickets or other reimbursable transactions for this customer, you can choose to apply them to the invoice. Click the arrow button next to the field.


Other Applied Credits

This indicates the total amount of all other customer receipts and credit memos applied to the current invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate customer. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Sales Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers window.


Sales/Invoicing

Use this window to enter invoices for sales to customers.


Sales/Invoicing

Use this window to enter invoices for sales to customers.


Drop Ship

If the order that this invoice represents will be drop-shipped from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the ship-to address for this invoice. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Sales/Invoicing

Use this window to enter invoices for sales to customers.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Select this button to print the paycheck that corresponds to the currently displayed transaction. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the paycheck will look once printed.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Jobs

Select this button to apply the selected employee's salary to different jobs. To set up jobs, select Jobs from the Maintain menu.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed in the Payroll Entry window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the date of the displayed transaction.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Payroll Entry

You use the Payroll Entry task to create paychecks to print for individual employees. All entries made here are posted both to General Ledger and the employee record.

Information for the selected employees is pulled from the employee records, the payroll tax tables, and employee defaults.


Company Name

This identifies the name of your business that is set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


Employee ID

Enter or select an employee ID to associate with this paycheck. Once an ID is selected, the employee's information--including name and address, pay frequency, and respective pay levels--appears. The payroll fields are calculated based on the employee setup. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: Employee records set up as sales representatives only will not appear in the Employee ID list here.


Employee ID

Enter or select an employee ID to associate with this paycheck. Once selected, the employee's information--including name and address, pay frequency, and respective pay levels--appears. The payroll fields are calculated based on the employee setup. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: Employee records set up as sales representatives only will not appear in the Employee ID list here.


Pay to the Order of

This is the name and address of the employee that was entered in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window. You cannot change it here.


Pay to the Order of

This is the name and address of the employee that was entered in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window. You cannot change it here.


Check Number

If you want to print the paycheck, leave the check number field blank. If your checks are printed elsewhere and entered into the computer for accounting reasons, enter a check number or other reference. The check number must be unique.


Check Number

If you want to print the paycheck, leave the check number field blank. If your checks are printed elsewhere and entered into the computer for accounting reasons, enter a check number or other reference. The check number must be unique.


Date

Enter or select the date of the paycheck, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: The date entered here reflects the check date, not necessarily the payroll period ending date.


Date

Enter or select the date of the paycheck, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: The date entered here reflects the check date, not necessarily the payroll period ending date.


Check Amount

This is a calculated field based on payroll field setup and values; you cannot change it.


Check Amount

This is a calculated field based on payroll field setup and values; you cannot change it.


Payroll Entry

You use the Payroll Entry task to create paychecks to print for individual employees. All entries made here are posted both to General Ledger and the employee record.

Information for the selected employees is pulled from the employee records, the payroll tax tables, and employee defaults.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this paycheck. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this paycheck. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this paycheck. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this paycheck. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Pay Period Ends

Enter or select the last date in the payroll period for this paycheck. This date will be used when calculating quarterly earnings. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Pay Period Ends

Enter or select the last date in the payroll period for this paycheck. This date will be used when calculating quarterly earnings. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Weeks in Pay Period

This number appears based on the employee's pay frequency set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. You can change this if it is incorrect. This information is used in some states' payroll tax returns.


Weeks in Pay Period

This number appears based on the employee's pay frequency set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. You can change this if it is incorrect. This information is used in some states' payroll tax returns.


Hours Worked/Salary

Hourly Fields/Salary Fields: This shows the fields for hourly or salary employees set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each employee hourly or salary field is based on the employee setup. To change the account ID, enter a ? to see a list of existing accounts, or type + to enter a new account. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear in this window. The defaults set up for the employee are assumed. To modify G/L accounts used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Hours/Amount: You can adjust the hours for hourly employees or the amount for salaried employees.


Hours Worked/Salary Amounts

Hourly Fields/Salary Fields: This shows the fields for hourly or salary employees set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each employee hourly or salary field is based on the employee setup. To change the account ID, enter a ? to see a list of existing accounts, or type + to enter a new account. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear in this window. The defaults set up for the employee are assumed. To modify G/L accounts used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Hours/Salary: You can adjust the hours for hourly employees or the amount for salaried employees.


Taxes - Benefits - Liabilities

Name: This is the name of the employee or employer payroll field set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each payroll field is based on the employee setup. To change the account ID, enter a ? to see a list of existing accounts, or type to enter a new account. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear in this window. The defaults set up for the employee are assumed. To modify G/L accounts used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Amount: In most cases, the amount is calculated for you. You can adjust the amount of the payroll field for this employee, if necessary.

Memo: Some fields relate not to dollar entries but to notes or memos that appear on the paycheck--e.g., about the number of vacation days used/remaining. Memo fields are marked by the word Memo on a gray background.


Taxes - Benefits - Liabilities

Name: This is the name of the employee or employer payroll field set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each payroll field is based on the employee setup. To change the account ID, enter a ? to see a list of existing accounts, or type to enter a new account. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear in this window. The defaults set up for the employee are assumed. To modify G/L accounts used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Amount: In most cases, the amount is calculated for you. You can adjust the amount of the payroll field for this employee, if necessary.

Memo: Some fields relate not to dollar entries but to notes or memos that appear on the paycheck--e.g., about the number of vacation days used/remaining. Memo fields are marked by the word Memo on a gray background.


Gross Pay

This identifies the adjusted gross that is used when calculating payroll fields. In most cases it is the sum total of all wages less any pretax deductions.


Gross Pay

This identifies the adjusted gross that is used when calculating payroll fields. In most cases it is the sum total of all wages less any pretax deductions.


Use Time Ticket Hours

This signals that the employee is set up with the Hourly-Time Ticket Hours pay method in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window. The hours worked in the first hourly pay level are calculated based on time tickets posted during the current payroll period.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the displayed paycheck.

Void: Click this button to void the displayed paycheck.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Void

This indicates that the displayed paycheck has been voided.


Direct Deposit

Use this to create a manual check for an employee set up for Peachtree direct deposit. If your company has an approved direct deposit pre-note and if the displayed employee is a direct deposit employee, the check box will be enabled. Select it to print the manual paycheck.


Direct Deposit Allocations arrow button

Select this to view direct deposit allocations for the displayed employee.


Learn more about Peachtree Direct Deposit

To learn more about the Peachtree Direct Deposit Service, click the informational link.


Learn more about Peachtree Direct Deposit

To learn more about the Peachtree Direct Deposit Service, click the informational link.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Payroll Entry

You use the Payroll Entry task to create paychecks to print for individual employees. All entries made here are posted both to General Ledger and the employee record.

Information for the selected employees is pulled from the employee records, the payroll tax tables, and employee defaults.


Check Amount

This is a calculated field based on payroll field setup and values; you cannot change it.


Check Amount

This is a calculated field based on payroll field setup and values; you cannot change it.


Check Amount

This is a calculated field based on payroll field setup and values; you cannot change it.


Payroll Entry

You use the Payroll Entry task to create paychecks to print for individual employees. All entries made here are posted both to General Ledger and the employee record.

Information for the selected employees is pulled from the employee records, the payroll tax tables, and employee defaults.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Date Due

Enter or select the date the invoice is due, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Date Due

Enter or select the date the invoice is due, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Discount Amount

Enter or select the discount percentage for early payment, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Discount Amount

Enter or select the discount percentage for early payment, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Discount Date

Enter or select the last date an early payment discount is allowed, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Discount Date

Enter or select the last date an early payment discount is allowed, if different from the default terms set up for this customer or vendor.


Displayed Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer or vendor appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for information purposes. It will print on invoices.  Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice (including discount amounts).


Displayed Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer or vendor appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for information purposes. It will print on invoices.  Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice (including discount amounts).


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Item ID

Enter or select the ID of the inventory item you want to adjust. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.


Item ID

Enter or select the ID of the inventory item you want to adjust. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.


Name

This identifies the short description of the inventory item. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Name

This identifies the short description of the inventory item. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Reference

This identifies the transaction in reports. Enter any information to identify this adjustment transaction, such as your initials or the date of the inventory adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Reference

This identifies the transaction in reports. Enter any information to identify this adjustment transaction, such as your initials or the date of the inventory adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter the date the change in inventory occurred or the date of the physical inventory, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter the date the change in inventory occurred or the date of the physical inventory, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods


Job ID

This identifies the job associated with the inventory item adjustment, if necessary.  If this inventory item is a regular inventory item, it can be applied to a job by entering the item in this window and specifying in this field the job to which the item belongs. It can also be applied to a job by adding the item directly to the customer's invoice and assigning it to a job.


Job ID

This identifies the job associated with the inventory item adjustment, if necessary.  If this inventory item is a regular inventory item, it can be applied to a job by entering the item in this window and specifying in this field the job to which the item belongs. It can also be applied to a job by adding the item directly to the customer's invoice and assigning it to a job.


G/L Source Account

This identifies the G/L cost of sales account that will be adjusted as a result of this entry. If you decrease the item quantity, the G/L source account is debited, and the item's inventory account will be credited. If you increase the item quantity, the G/L source account is credited, and the item's inventory account will be debited.

You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click in this field to add a new account.


G/L Source Account

This identifies the G/L cost of sales account that will be adjusted as a result of this entry. If you decrease the item quantity, the G/L source account is debited, and the item's inventory account will be credited. If you increase the item quantity, the G/L source account is credited, and the item's inventory account will be debited.

You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click in this field to add a new account.


G/L Source Account

This identifies the G/L cost of sales account that will be adjusted as a result of this entry. If you decrease the item quantity, the G/L source account is debited, and the item's inventory account will be credited. If you increase the item quantity, the G/L source account is credited, and the item's inventory account will be debited.

You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click in this field to add a new account.


Unit Cost

This amount defaults to the last purchase price entered in the system if you are making a positive adjustment.  You can change it if necessary. For adjustments down (negative adjustments), the reduction is considered a sale, and this field is disabled since Peachtree costs the adjustment based on the item's costing method at the time of the sale.


Unit Cost

This amount defaults to the last purchase price entered in the system if you are making a positive adjustment.  You can change it if necessary. For adjustments down (negative adjustments), the reduction is considered a sale, and this field is disabled since Peachtree costs the adjustment based on the item's costing method at the time of the sale.


Quantity On-Hand

This displays the quantity of items currently in stock. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Quantity On-Hand

This displays the quantity of items currently in stock. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Adjust Quantity by

Enter the amount by which to adjust the quantity.

For an adjustment-up, you will enter a positive quantity and can also enter a unit cost. This will increase your quantity on hand and total inventory value much as a purchase would. You could use an adjustment-up if you previously miscounted your inventory and now have more units on hand than you thought you had.

For an adjustment down, you will enter a negative quantity, but you can't enter a unit cost. Peachtree will figure out the cost value that these units are being removed at, much like a sale. An inventory adjustment-down will decrease the quantity on hand as well as the total value. You could use an adjustment-down if something was stolen or for breakage or if inventory was previously miscounted or if you used the item for a job. When you make an adjustment, the Cost of Goods Sold, Inventory Total Value, and Inventory G/L accounts are all updated.


Adjust Quantity by

Enter the amount by which to adjust the quantity.

For an adjustment-up, you will enter a positive quantity and can also enter a unit cost. This will increase your quantity on hand and total inventory value much as a purchase would. You could use an adjustment-up if you previously miscounted your inventory and now have more units on hand than you thought you had.

For an adjustment down, you will enter a negative quantity, but you can't enter a unit cost. Peachtree will figure out the cost value that these units are being removed at, much like a sale. An inventory adjustment-down will decrease the quantity on hand as well as the total value. You could use an adjustment-down if something was stolen or for breakage or if inventory was previously miscounted or if you used the item for a job. When you make an adjustment, the Cost of Goods Sold, Inventory Total Value, and Inventory G/L accounts are all updated.


New Quantity

This field is the sum of the Quantity on-hand and Adjust Quantity by fields. It is for display only and cannot be changed.


New Quantity

This field is the sum of the Quantity on-hand and Adjust Quantity by fields. It is for display only and cannot be changed.


Reason to Adjust

Enter the reason for the change to the inventory quantity. For example, "Spoilage" or "Found in Warehouse."


Reason to Adjust

Enter the reason for the change to the inventory quantity. For example, "Spoilage" or "Found in Warehouse."


Delete

This button lets you remove a previously entered transaction if you have entered it in error.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Item ID

Enter or select the ID of the assembly item you want to adjust (build or unbuild). To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.


Item ID

Enter or select the ID of the assembly item you want to adjust (build or unbuild). To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.


Name

This identifies the short description of the inventory item. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Name

This identifies the short description of the inventory item. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Reference

This identifies the transaction in reports. Enter any information you like, such as your initials or the date you build the assembly. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Reference

This identifies the transaction in reports. Enter any information you like, such as your initials or the date you build the assembly. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter the date the change in inventory occurred, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter the date the change in inventory occurred, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Quantity On-Hand

This displays the quantity of assembly items currently in stock. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Quantity On-Hand

This displays the quantity of assembly items currently in stock. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Quantity to Build

Enter the number of units of this assembly item that you want to build. If you want to unbuild an assembly item, enter a negative quantity here.

The assembly must have already been entered using the Bill of Materials tab of the Maintain Inventory Items window. You cannot build more assembly items than you have components for, nor can you unbuild more assemblies than the quantity on hand.


Quantity to Build

Enter the number of units of this assembly item that you want to build. If you want to unbuild an assembly item, enter a negative quantity here.

The assembly must have already been entered using the Bill of Materials tab of the Maintain Inventory Items window. You cannot build more assembly items than you have components for, nor can you unbuild more assemblies than the quantity on hand.


New Quantity

This field is the sum of the Quantity on-Hand and Quantity to Build fields. It is for display only and cannot be changed.


New Quantity

This field is the sum of the Quantity on-Hand and Quantity to Build fields. It is for display only and cannot be changed.


Reason to Build

Enter the reason for building the assembly--for example, "Needed more" or "Per Brown Company invoice."


Reason to Build

Enter the reason for building the assembly--for example, "Needed more" or "Per Brown Company invoice."


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed transaction, if permitted.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Void

Select this button to void the selected check in the list.


Close

Select this button to exit this window, losing any changes.


Void Checks

This lists all checks that have posted and not cleared in Account Reconciliation for the cash account selected.  You can void Accounts Payable and Payroll checks. (Payroll checks aren't available in First Accounting.) The list includes the check number, date, source (whether the check is an Accounts Payable disbursement check or a Payroll check), amount, and payee.

To void a check, select a check listed, and click the Void button.


Void Checks

This lists all checks that have posted and not cleared in Account Reconciliation for the cash account selected.  You can void Accounts Payable and Payroll checks. (Payroll checks aren't available in First Accounting.) The list includes the check number, date, source (whether the check is an Accounts Payable disbursement check or a Payroll check), amount, and payee.

To void a check, select a check listed, and click the Void button.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Void Date

This is the date the voiding entry appears in the General Ledger. It is also the date that appears in the Account Reconciliation window.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Memorize. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save button.

Save: If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.

Memorize: Click this button to create a memorized purchase order from the one that is currently displayed.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the purchase order that corresponds to the currently displayed transaction. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the purchase order will look once printed.


Open

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Select. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Open button.

Open: Click this button to display a previously entered transaction.

Select: Click this button to select a memorized transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this vendor or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after them.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. Once an ID is selected, the vendor's default information--including address, purchase account, ship method, and payment terms--appears. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this transaction. Once an ID is selected, the vendor's default information--including address, purchase account, ship method, and payment terms--appears. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Purchase Order No.

This identifies an order requested by your company to purchase goods or services from a specific vendor. Do not enter a PO# if you plan to print the purchase order. Peachtree Accounting assigns a number at print time.

Note: A vendor cannot have two purchase orders with the same purchase order number.


Purchase Order No.

This identifies an order requested by your company to purchase goods or services from a specific vendor. Do not enter a PO# if you plan to print the purchase order. Peachtree Accounting assigns a number at print time.

Note: A vendor cannot have two purchase orders with the same purchase order number.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Close Purchase Order

Select this check box to close this purchase order. You will want to do this if you know you won't receive all of the items. If you have items left on a PO, they will appear on the PO tab of Purchases/Receive Inventory until you close the PO. Once a PO is closed, it no longer shows up on open PO reports. Also, once you close a PO, it is eligible for purging.


Good Thru Date

Enter the date that the order will be good through. You can change this date at any time. This date appears when you print the purchase order. The default for this date is 30 days from the date in the Date field.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Good Thru Date

Enter the date that the order will be good through. You can change this date at any time. This date displays when you print the purchase order. The default for this date is 30 days from the date in the Date field.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items will be delivered from the vendor. The methods are set up in Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items will be delivered from the vendor. The methods are set up in Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Discount Amount

This identifies the discount that you will you receive if you pay by a certain date. The discount amount is calculated based on the invoice payment terms. You can change the discount amount if some special terms apply.


Discount Amount

This identifies the discount that you will you receive if you pay by a certain date. The discount amount is calculated based on the invoice payment terms. You can change the discount amount if some special terms apply.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected vendor appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the purchase order to an invoice.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected vendor appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the purchase order to an invoice.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/P Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/P account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/P Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/P account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


Purchase Order Line Items

Quantity:  Enter the number of items being purchased. You must enter a quantity if you entered a stock-type inventory item.

Received: This identifies how many of the item you received.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each item you are purchasing, if applicable. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item, or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job: Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You cannot edit this field.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You cannot edit this field.


Template

Select this button to display a pull-down menu that contains a list of available templates for the displayed task window. Choose a predefined template, one of your own templates, or the Customize Templates option to create or modify a template.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship To

This defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. You can also select the purchase or purchase order as a drop shipment (direct shipment from the vendor you ordered the items from to the customer you ordered the items for). On the Open Purchase Orders report, you can separate drop-shipment purchase orders from regular purchase orders.

To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed transaction, if permitted.

Note: If the transaction has a "partner," you cannot delete the transaction. For example, you cannot delete a purchase invoice if a purchase order has been applied to it. Once you delete the purchase order, you can then delete the invoice.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate vendor. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Purchase Defaults tab of the Maintain Vendors window.


Purchase Orders

Use this window to enter purchase orders for your vendors.


Customer ID

If this purchase order is based on a drop-shipment, enter the ID of the appropriate customer. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information appears in the Ship To fields. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Customer ID

If this purchase order is based on a drop-shipment, enter the ID of the appropriate customer. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information appears in the Ship To fields. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Purchase Orders

Use this window to enter purchase orders for your vendors.


Drop Ship

If this order represents a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship To

This defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. You can also select the purchase or purchase order as a drop shipment (direct shipment from the vendor you ordered the items from to the customer you ordered the items for). On the Open Purchase Orders report, you can separate drop-shipment purchase orders from regular purchase orders.

To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this purchase order. You can change the ship-to address for this purchase order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Customer Invoice No.

Enter the number from the invoice sent by the customer that will cover this purchase order.


Customer Invoice No.

Enter the number from the invoice sent by the customer that will cover this purchase order.


Purchase Orders

Use this window to enter purchase orders for your vendors.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the quote that corresponds to the currently displayed transaction. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the sales order will look once printed.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this customer or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after them.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this sales order. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this sales order. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Order No.

Peachtree Accounting automatically enters the next sales order number in the SO No. field. If you have not yet entered a sales order, this field is blank. Once you enter a sales order number for the first time, Peachtree Accounting increases this number by one for the next sales order. This is a required field, and no duplicate sales order numbers are allowed.


Sales Order No.

Peachtree Accounting automatically enters the next sales order number in the SO No. field. If you have not yet entered a sales order, this field is blank. Once you enter a sales order number for the first time, Peachtree Accounting increases this number by one for the next sales order. This is a required field, and no duplicate sales order numbers are allowed.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Close Sales Order

Select this check box when everything on the sales order has been shipped or you want to close the sales order because the remaining items will not be arriving.

Peachtree will automatically close a sales order when all items on it have been invoiced.


Quote Number

This identifies the quote number associated with this transaction prior to being converted to a sales order.


Quote Number

This identifies the quote number associated with this transaction prior to being converted to a sales order.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the sales order and invoice.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the sales order and invoice.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Ship Via

You can select the type of method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the quote or sales order to an invoice.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the quote or sales order to an invoice.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Order Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity ordered of this item. Once the quantity is entered, it is multiplied by the unit price to determine the amount.

Shipped: This is the number of items already shipped to the customer (via Sales/Invoicing).

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line item. This appears for only the Product invoice template. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field. Once an item is shipped, this field is disabled.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not display. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the price that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Inventory Items.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job: If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/R account will not be affected until you invoice the customer.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/R account will not be affected until you invoice the customer.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Sales Order Total

This field is the sum of amounts of the line items entered in the distribution list box; you cannot change it.


Sales Order Total

This field is the sum of amounts of the line items entered in the distribution list box; you cannot change it.


Template

Select this button to display a pull-down menu that contains a list of available templates for the displayed task window. Choose a predefined template, one of your own templates, or the Customize Templates option to create or modify a template.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Delete

Select this button to remove all displayed transaction information in case you have entered it in error.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Ship By

Enter or select the date by which the sales order should ship. Once you enter this date, you can create an event in Action Items that will help you keep track of the order. In addition, as a further reminder, Peachtree will display this date in several of the sales order reports.


Ship By

Enter or select the date by which the sales order should ship. Once you enter this date, you can create an event in Action Items that will help you keep track of the order. In addition, as a further reminder, Peachtree will display this date in several of the sales order reports.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate customer. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Sales Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers window.


Sales Orders

Use this window to enter sales orders, printed orders for goods for your customer before those goods are actually available in inventory. Once the goods are available, you can invoice your customer.


Sales Orders

Use this window to enter sales orders, printed orders for goods for your customer before those goods are actually available in inventory. Once the goods are available, you can invoice your customer.


Drop Ship

If this sales order is based on a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this sales order. You can change the ship-to address for this sales order. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Sales Orders

Use this window to enter sales orders, printed orders for goods for your customer before those goods are actually available in inventory. Once the goods are available, you can invoice your customer.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Memorize. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save button.

Save: If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.

Memorize: Click this button to create a memorized quote from the one that is currently displayed.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Select this button to print the quote that corresponds to the currently displayed transaction. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the quote will look once printed.


Convert

Select this button to convert a quote to an invoice or sales order. Once you convert a quote, it is no longer displayed as a quote or accessible when selecting the Edit (Records) button.


Open

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Select. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Open button.

Open: Click this button to display a previously entered transaction.

Select: Click this button to select a memorized transaction.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment or about this customer or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after them.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this invoice. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this invoice. Once an ID is selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Quote No.

Do not enter a quote number if you plan to print the quote. When you are ready to print, you will be asked for a beginning Quote # after you select Print. Enter a quote or other reference number only if the quote is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact). If you are entering new quotes and you enter a number in this field, Peachtree will automatically add one to the quote number for the next quote.


Quote No.

Do not enter a quote number if you plan to print the quote. When you are ready to print, you will be asked for a beginning Quote # after you select Print. Enter a quote or other reference number only if the quote is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact). If you are entering new quotes and you enter a number in this field, Peachtree will automatically add one to the quote number for the next quote.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Good Thru

This tells the customer when the quote expires. If you work in an industry where the price of whatever you are selling fluctuates, this tells your customer how long you can hold the price steady. The default is 30 days from the day the quote is entered.


Good Thru

This tells the customer when the quote expires. If you work in an industry where the price of whatever you are selling fluctuates, this tells your customer how long you can hold the price steady. The default is 30 days from the day the quote is entered.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the sales order and invoice.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information appears on customer statements and prints on the sales order and invoice.


Ship Via

You can select the method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Ship Via

You can select the method by which the items are to be delivered to the customer. The methods are set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. You can also enter a different method, if it is not on the list.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the quote or sales order to an invoice.


Terms

The terms associated with the selected customer appear automatically in this field. If you need to change the terms, you can edit them here. However, this field appears for informational purposes only and does not calculate discounts. Changes you make in this field do not affect the calculation of an invoice once you convert the quote or sales order to an invoice.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. Type a ? to list sales representatives, or press + or double-click in this field to add a new sales representative in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. Type a ? to list sales representatives, or press + or double-click in this field to add a new sales representative in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.


Quote Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity sold of this item. Once the quantity is entered, it is multiplied by the unit price to determine the amount. This appears for only the Product invoice template.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line item. This appears for only the Product invoice template. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field. This appears for only the Product invoice template.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item, or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Inventory Items.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job: If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/R account will not be affected until you invoice the customer.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not appear in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.

Note: The A/R account will not be affected until you invoice the customer.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. You may edit this field, if necessary.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Quote Total

This is the total amount of the quote. It includes tax and freight charges, if applicable.


Quote Total

This is the total amount of the quote. It includes tax and freight charges, if applicable.


Template

Select this button to display a pull-down menu that contains a list of available templates for the displayed task window. Choose a predefined template, one of your own templates, or the Customize Templates option to create or modify a template.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed transaction, if permitted.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate customer. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Sales Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers window.


Quotes

Use this window to enter quotes, printed estimates for possible sale that can be submitted to your customers.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the ship-to address for this quote. Just type the new address information into the provided address lines.


Drop Ship

If this quote is based on a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Quotes

Use this window to enter quotes, printed estimates for possible sale that can be submitted to your customers.


Quotes

Use this window to enter quotes, printed estimates for possible sale that can be submitted to your customers.


Sale/Invoice

Select this option to convert the quote to an invoice.  If you have an invoice number for this quote already and will not print the invoice, enter it in the Invoice # field. You may also leave the Invoice # field blank so you can print the assigned number later.


Sale Invoice and Print Now

Select this option to convert the quote to an invoice and immediately print the invoice. Peachtree Accounting opens the standard window for selecting the invoice form you want to use and provides you with the starting invoice number.


Sales Order

Select this option to convert the quote to a sales order, so you can ship partial shipments of items on the quote if, for example, some of the items on the quote are not in stock. Peachtree Accounting will display the next available sales order number and assign it when you convert the quote.


Invoice Number

If you have already assigned an invoice number to the quote, enter it here. If you plan to print the invoice, leave this field blank.


Invoice Number/Sales Order Number

If you have an invoice number for this quote already and will not print the invoice, enter it in this field. If you plan to eventually print the invoice or sales order, leave this field blank. For sales orders, Peachtree will assign the next available Sales Order number.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Number of accounting periods in the fiscal year

Specifies the number of accounting periods in your company's fiscal year. Enter the appropriate number.


Number of Accounting Periods in the Fiscal Year?

Specifies the number of accounting periods in your fiscal year. Enter the number of periods.


First period in which you will be entering data

Specifies the period you will first enter data. Enter the period.


First Period in Which You Will Be Entering Data?

Specifies the period you will first enter data. Enter the period.


Calendar Year

Specifies the calendar year. Enter the 4-digit calendar year.


Calendar Year

Specifies the calendar year. Enter the 4-digit calendar year.


Calendar Year

Specifies the calendar year. Enter the 4-digit calendar year.


Current Fiscal Year Accounting Periods List

Period: Specifies the accounting period.

From: Specifies the first day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.

To: Specifies the last day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.


Current Fiscal Year Accounting Periods List

Period: Specifies the accounting period.

From: Specifies the first day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.

To: Specifies the last day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.


Next Fiscal Year Accounting Periods List

Period: Specifies the accounting period.

From: Specifies the first day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.

To: Specifies the last day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.


Next Fiscal Year Accounting Periods List

Period: Specifies the accounting period.

From: Specifies the first day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.

To: Specifies the last day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Rounding Account

This is used for collecting rounding differences when you choose to round totals on financial statements. It can be either a balance sheet account or an income statement account. However, Peachtree recommends that you use the Retained Earnings account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report Index

This list displays the name of each report area that you can select, for example, Accounts Receivable. Each report area contains reports that you can then select for adding to a report group.


Report List

This list displays the name of each report associated with the selected report area. For example, it displays "Sales Journal " if you selected Accounts Receivable from the report index. You can select the reports in this list to add to a report group.


Description of Report

This field describes the selected report.


Add

Select this button to add a report to a report group.


Remove

Select this button to remove a report from a report group.


Report Group Name

This field displays the name of the report group.


Report Group List

This list displays the name of each report in the report group. You can add a report to this group by selecting the report from the report list on the left and then selecting the Add button. You can remove a report from this list by selecting the report and then selecting the Remove button.


Description of Report Group

This field describes the selected report group.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


State Disability Insurance

This identifies the state disability insurance contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list--for example, SDI. If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


Unemployment

This identifies the state unemployment contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list--for example, SUI. If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


Training Tax

This identifies the employee training contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list--for example, SETT.  If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Federal Unemployment (FUTA)

This identifies the payroll field that corresponds to the federal unemployment contributions that employers must pay. Select the payroll field from the drop-down list. The default is FUTA_ER.


State Unemployment (SUTA)

This identifies the payroll field that corresponds to the state unemployment contributions that employers must pay. Select the payroll field from the drop-down list. The default is SUI_ER.


State Disability Insurance

This identifies the state disability insurance contributions that employers must pay. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list--for example, SDI_ER.  Most states require this contribution.  If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


State Training Tax

This identifies the state employee training contributions that employers must pay. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list--for example, SETT_ER.  Not all  states require this contribution.  If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


State Special A and B

This identifies the unique taxes that employers must pay. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list. Typically, these are already set up for you if you used the Payroll Setup wizard.  If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


State Special A and B

This identifies the unique taxes that employers must pay. Select a payroll field from the drop-down list. Typically these are already set up for you if you used the Payroll Setup wizard.  If your state does not require these taxes, select None. Check your state's tax laws to be sure.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Open

Select this to display a previously entered transaction.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional two selections, Preview and Postage. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the displayed credit memo. Selecting Print also posts (Real-Time method) or saves (Batch method) the displayed transaction to your journals.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the memo will look once printed.

Postage: Click this button to buy and print postage online through the Peachtree Internet Postage Service.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the displayed credit memo.

Void: Click this button to void the displayed memo.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Return

This button replaces the Row button when the Apply to Invoice # tab is in the forefront. Use it to set the return/credit status of line items on the tab. It works like a drop-down list, revealing two additional selections:

Return All: To return or credit all items on the invoice, click the Return button, and then click Return All.

Return None: To return or credit none of the items on the invoice (zero all quantities in the Returned column), click the Return button, and then click Return None.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this customer or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.

Important: Be aware that note text prints out on the transaction. You can choose to print the note either before or after the line items.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this credit memo. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears.

To select an existing customer, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new customer record, press + in the Customer ID field.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this credit memo. Once selected, the customer's default information--including billing and shipping addresses, sales account, ship method, payment terms, and sales tax code--appears.

To select an existing customer, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new customer record, press + in the Customer ID field.


Credit No.

Leave this blank if you want the program to print a credit memo. Peachtree will suggest a number when you print the memo. Enter a credit memo or other reference number if the credit memo is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact).


Credit No.

Leave this blank if you want the program to print a credit memo. Peachtree will suggest a number when you print the memo. Enter a credit memo or other reference number if the credit memo is being entered after it was created elsewhere (after the fact).


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information prints on the credit memo.

If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, the PO # comes from the invoice.


Customer PO

You can enter the customer's purchase order number or any other piece of information that will identify the sale to the customer. This information prints on the credit memo.

If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, the PO # comes from the invoice.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Displayed Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this information should come from the invoice.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Displayed Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this information should come from the invoice.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the sale. This includes:

Date Due: This is the date payment is due from the customer.

Discount Amount: This is the discount that customer receive if they pay within a certain date.

Discount Date: This is the date up to when the customer's discount is good.

Displayed Terms: This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of sale when payment is due.

If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this information should come from the invoice.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field. If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this information should come from the invoice.


Sales Rep

You can optionally enter a sales representative so that you can identify sales by individual representatives. To display a list of existing sales representatives, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales representative, type + or double-click the field. If this credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this information should come from the invoice.


Apply to Invoice No. Tab

If open invoices exist for this customer, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Sales Tab

If there is no invoice for the sale, choose this tab to credit or return items for the sale itself.


Apply to Invoice No. Tab

If open invoices exist for this customer, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Sales Tab

If there is no invoice for the sale, choose this tab to credit or return items for the sale itself.


Apply to Invoice No. Tab

If open invoices exist for this customer, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Sales Tab

If there is no invoice for the sale, choose this tab to credit or return items for the sale itself.


Credit Line Items

Item: This identifies the item being returned or credited.

Quantity: This is the quantity of the item shipped on the original sales invoice.

Returned (Apply to Invoice # tab): This is the quantity of the item to be returned or credited.

Description: This is a maximum-160-character description of the item being returned or credited.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number chosen when recording the original invoice. If an item number was entered, the sales account entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") will be the default. If an inventory item was not selected, the customer's default G/L sales account is used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Inventory Item Defaults (in First Accounting, called "Item Defaults").

Tax: This specifies the inventory item sales tax type. Tax types determine whether the item is taxable or not. If you entered an item ID on the line, the tax type is the default set up for this item in the Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") window. Sales tax types are set up in Inventory Defaults (in First Accounting, called "Item Defaults"). To see a list of different tax types, type ? or click the Lookup button.

Amount: Peachtree calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Credit Line Items

Item: This identifies the item being returned or credited.

Quantity: This is the quantity of the item shipped on the original sales invoice.

Returned (Apply to Invoice # tab): This is the quantity of the item to be returned or credited.

Description: This is a maximum-160-character description of the item being returned or credited.

GL Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number chosen when recording the original invoice. If an item number was entered, the sales account entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") will be the default. If an inventory item was not selected, the customer's default G/L sales account is used. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Inventory Item Defaults (in First Accounting, called "Item Defaults").

Tax: This specifies the inventory item sales tax type. Tax types determine whether the item is taxable or not. If you entered an item ID on the line, the tax type is the default set up for this item in the Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting, called "Maintain Items") window. Sales tax types are set up in Inventory Defaults (in First Accounting, called "Item Defaults"). To see a list of different tax types, type ? or click the Lookup button.

Amount: Peachtree calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you apply a sales order to a sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not display in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

If you apply a sales order to a sales invoice, this information comes from the sales order.

Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the A/R Account field will not display in this window. To modify the A/R account used for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Sales Tax Code

This identifies the default sales tax code associated with this customer. Enter or select an alternate sales tax code, if necessary. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. If the credit memo is applied to an existing sales invoice, then both sales tax and freight amount (if entered) will be applied to the AR account entered on the original invoice. If the memo is applied directly to a sale, then tax and freight amount will be applied to the AR account entered for this credit memo transaction.


Sales Tax

This is the total sales tax on the transaction. If the credit memo is applied to an existing sales invoice, then both sales tax and freight amount (if entered) will be applied to the AR account entered on the original invoice. If the memo is applied directly to a sale, then tax and freight amount will be applied to the AR account entered for this credit memo transaction.


Freight

Enter the freight charges for this transaction here. If the credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this field will not be filled in with the freight amount from the original invoice; instead, you'll have to enter it manually. That amount will then be added automatically to the amount that appears in the Credit Applied to Invoice field. Also, the freight amount will be applied to the AR account entered on the original sales invoice.


Freight

Enter the freight charges for this transaction here. If the credit memo is applied to a sales invoice, this field will not be filled in with the freight amount from the original invoice; instead, you'll have to enter it manually. That amount will then be added automatically to the amount that appears in the Credit Applied to Invoice field. Also, the freight amount will be applied to the AR account entered on the original sales invoice.


Credit Total

This indicates the sum of amounts credited for each line item listed on the invoice, sales tax, and freight (if entered). You cannot change it.


Credit Total

This indicates the sum of amounts credited for each line item listed on the invoice, sales tax, and freight (if entered). You cannot change it.


Net Credit Due

This indicates the net amount due the customer. The amount is equal to the credit total minus any other receipts applied to the credit memo minus the credit applied to the invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Net Credit Due

This indicates the net amount due the customer. The amount is equal to the credit total minus any other receipts applied to the credit memo minus the credit applied to the invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Credit Applied to Invoice

This indicates the amount from the credit memo that is applied to the original invoice. You cannot edit this field


Credit Applied to Invoice

This indicates the amount from the credit memo that is applied to the original invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Other Applied Receipts

This indicates the total amount of all other receipts applied to this credit memo. You cannot edit this field.


Applied/Unapplied/Partially Paid

The text "Applied" appears if credit has been fully applied to the original customer invoice. If credit has been applied in part, the text "Partially Paid" appears. If credit has not been applied, the text "Unapplied" appears.


Other Applied Receipts

This indicates the total amount of all other receipts applied to this credit memo. You cannot edit this field.


Return Authorization

You can optionally enter a maximum 20-character return authorization code related to the returned or credited items.


Return Authorization

You can optionally enter a maximum 20-character return authorization code related to the returned or credited items.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


E-mail

Select this button to e-mail a copy of the currently displayed form to the appropriate customer. The format in which the form is sent is determined by the setting of the Form Delivery Options on the Sales Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers window.


Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for customer returns and credits.


Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for customer returns and credits.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer bill-to information set up in the customer record. The customer's billing address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for customer returns and credits.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.


Delete

Select this to delete the displayed credit memo.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Return

This button replaces the Row button when the Apply to Invoice # tab is in the forefront. Use it to set the return/credit status of line items on the tab. It works like a drop-down list, revealing two additional selections:

Return All: To return or credit all items on the invoice, click the Return button, and then click Return All.

Return None: To return or credit none of the items on the invoice (zero all quantities in the Returned column), click the Return button, and then click Return None.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this vendor or transaction. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this credit memo. Once selected, the vendor's default information--including name, mailing address, and terms--appears.

To select an existing vendor, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Vendor ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new vendor record, press + in the Vendor ID field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this credit memo. Once selected, the vendor's default information--including name, mailing address, and terms--appears.

To select an existing vendor, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Vendor ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new vendor record, press + in the Vendor ID field.


Credit No.

This identifies the credit memo number. This field is required before you can save the credit memo transaction. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Credit No.

This identifies the credit memo number. This field is required before you can save the credit memo transaction. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the transaction, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can enter dates only for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the credit memo. This includes the:

Date Due-This is the date payment is due to the vendor.

Discount Amount-This is the discount allowed if paid before a certain date.

Discount Date-This is the date up to when the vendor early-payment discount is allowed.

Displayed Terms-This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of purchase when payment is due.

If you apply this credit memo to a purchase invoice, this information comes from the invoice.


Terms

Selecting this shows you the current terms and allows you to change the terms of the credit memo. This includes the:

Date Due-This is the date payment is due to the vendor.

Discount Amount-This is the discount allowed if paid before a certain date.

Discount Date-This is the date up to when the vendor early-payment discount is allowed.

Displayed Terms-This displays the discount, how many days the discount is good for, and the number of days from the date of purchase when payment is due.

If you apply this credit memo to a purchase invoice, this information comes from the invoice.


Terms arrow button

If this is a new vendor or if you want to make changes to the displayed payment terms for a vendor, click the arrow button.


A/P Account

This specifies the number of the Accounts Payable account that will be debited to cover the credit being issued.


A/P Account

This specifies the number of the Accounts Payable account that will be debited to cover the credit being issued.


Apply to Invoice # Tab

If open invoices exist for this vendor, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Purchases Tab

If there is no invoice for the purchase, choose this tab to credit or return items for the purchase itself.


Apply to Invoice # Tab

If open invoices exist for this vendor, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Purchases Tab

If there is no invoice for the purchase, choose this tab to credit or return items for the purchase itself.


Apply to Invoice No. Tab

If open invoices exist for this vendor, you can choose to credit or return items from an invoice.

Apply to Purchases Tab

If there is no invoice for the purchase, choose this tab to credit or return items for the purchase itself.


Credit Line Items

Item: This identifies the item included on the original purchase invoice.

Quantity: This is the quantity of the item received from the original purchase invoice.

Returned (Apply to Invoice No. tab): This is the quantity of the item to be returned or credited.

Description: This is a maximum-160-character description of the item purchased.

GL Account: This is the General Ledger income account chosen when the original purchase was recorded. If you are using the Apply to Purchases tab to enter credit for a purchase directly, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will appear. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Credit Line Items

Item: This identifies the item included on the original purchase invoice.

Quantity: This is the quantity of the item received from the original purchase invoice.

Returned (Apply to Invoice No. tab): This is the quantity of the item to be returned or credited.

Description: This is a maximum-160-character description of the item purchased.

GL Account: This is the General Ledger income account chosen when the original purchase was recorded. If you are using the Apply to Purchases tab to enter credit for a purchase directly, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will appear. Note: If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the G/L account field will not appear. You must select the Journal button to display or change the account ID.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Credit Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item returned. You cannot change it.


Credit Total

This indicates the sum of amounts for each line item returned. You cannot change it.


Credit Applied to Invoice

This indicates the amount from the credit memo that is applied to the original vendor invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Credit Applied to Invoice

This indicates the amount from the credit memo that is applied to the original vendor invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Credit Applied to Invoice

This indicates the amount from the credit memo that is applied to the original vendor invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Net Credit Due

This indicates the net credit due to the company from the vendor. The amount is equal to the credit total minus any other payments applied to the credit memo minus the credit applied to the invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Net Credit Due

This indicates the net credit due to the company from the vendor. The amount is equal to the credit total minus any other payments applied to the credit memo minus the credit applied to the invoice. You cannot edit this field.


Cash Account

If an amount is paid at time of purchase, enter or select the ID of the cash account that will cover the purchase.


Cash Account

If an amount is paid at time of purchase, enter or select the ID of the cash account that will cover the purchase.


Return Authorization

You can optionally enter a maximum 20-character return authorization code related to the returned or credited purchase.


Return Authorization

You can optionally enter a maximum 20-character return authorization code related to the returned or credited purchase.


Other Applied Payments

This indicates the total amount of all other payments applied to this credit memo. You cannot edit this field.


Other Applied Payments

This indicates the total amount of all other payments applied to this credit memo. You cannot edit this field.


Applied/Unapplied/Partially Paid

The text "Applied" appears if a refund has been fully applied to the original vendor invoice. If refund has been applied in part, the text "Partially Paid" appears. If the refund has not been applied, the text "Unapplied" appears.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Vendor Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for returns to and credit from vendors.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address listed in the vendor record. The vendor address cannot be changed here, but it can be modified in the Maintain Vendors window.


Vendor Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for returns to and credit from vendors.


Vendor Credit Memos

Use this window to enter credit memos for returns to and credit from vendors.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Drop Ship

Select this check box if this purchase will be a drop shipment--the items will be shipped directly to the customer from your vendor.


Invoice Number

This references the sales invoice number associated with this purchase that will be drop shipped by your vendor.


Invoice Number

This references the sales invoice number associated with this purchase that will be drop shipped by your vendor.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer associated with this purchase that will be drop shipped by your vendor. This field is only available if you selected the Drop Ship check box. Enter or select a customer ID from the lookup list.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer associated with this purchase that will be drop shipped by your vendor. This field is only available if you selected the Drop Ship check box. Enter or select a customer ID from the lookup list.


Ship to

This allows you to enter a Ship to address, if different from the Bill to Address. If this purchase is a drop shipment to your customer, you can select one of the customer's nine Ship to addresses from the drop-down list.


Ship to Name

This identifies your company name for purchases. You can change the name, if needed. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a unique name, if needed. If this purchase is a drop shipment, enter the customer's name in this field.


Ship to Name

This identifies your company name for purchases. You can change the name, if needed. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a unique name, if needed. If this purchase is a drop shipment, enter the customer's name in this field.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor or customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your vendor or customer or resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for the address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the vendor or customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Address Line 1

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor or customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address Line 2

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor or customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your vendor or customer or resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for the address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Drop Ship

Select the Drop Ship check box if this will be a drop shipment--(the items will be shipped directly to the customer from your vendor.)


Ship to

This allows you to enter a Ship to address, if different than the Bill to Address. You can enter up to nine Ship to addresses in Maintain Customers.

Select one of the previously entered Ship to addresses from the drop-down list.


Ship to Name

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a unique customer name, if needed.


Ship to Name

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a unique customer name, if needed.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Address Line 1

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address Line 2

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated employee record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (customer or prospect) displayed and enter a new one.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Log

Select this button to display events recorded for a customer, vendor, or employee over a range of time you specify. You can filter this list to see only certain types of activities and whether they're completed or not completed. You can mark activities or events as completed here by placing a mark in the far-left column. You cannot edit any of the other information in the list, however.


General Tab

Select this tab to set up customer contact information including "bill to" and "ship to" addresses, sales tax information, customer type, and telephone numbers.


Sales Defaults

Select this tab to enter the default sales rep, the default G/L sales account, preferred shipping method, resale number, and pricing level. You can also customize terms for this customer.


Custom Fields

Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Customer Defaults window.


History

Select this tab to display customer history including most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Maintain Customers/Prospects

General Tab: Select this tab to set up customer contact information including "bill to" and "ship to" addresses, sales tax information, customer type, and telephone numbers.

Sales Defaults: Select this tab to enter the default sales rep, the default G/L sales account, preferred shipping method, resale number, and pricing level. You can also customize terms for this customer.

Payment Defaults: Select this tab to enter default credit card information for the customer, as well as the customer's default payment method and G/L account for applying deposits from the customer's receipts.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Customer Defaults window.

History: Select this tab to display customer history including the most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's ID. For existing customers, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) to select a customer from the drop-down list.

Customer IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different customer IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's ID. For existing customers, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) to select a customer from the drop-down list.

Customer IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different customer IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


Name

This identifies the customer's name on all accounts receivable windows, forms, and reports. Customer names can be entered as a person or company. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's name.


Name

This identifies the customer's name on all accounts receivable windows, forms, and reports. Customer names can be entered as a person or company. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's name.


Prospect

If you select the Prospect check box, this company or person is not included on any customer reports. Prospects are primarily used when generating quotes. If you enter an invoice for the prospect or clear the Prospect check box, the prospect becomes a regular customer and is included on customer reports.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this customer during year-end processing, select this check box. Once a customer record is inactive, a warning appears if you try to make a sale to the customer. You can update the customer record with address and telephone information.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, all customers that have no outstanding transactions and are tagged as inactive can be purged.


Contact

Enter the name of the person you most often deal with for this customer.


Contact

Enter the name of the person you most often deal with for this customer.


Bill to Address/Ship to Address

Choose among ten addresses--one billing address and nine shipping addresses--for the customer. The billing name and address are used as the default when entering sales transactions. They print on the invoice and are also used for customer mailing labels. To enter different addresses, open the address drop-down list, and choose which address to enter.


Ship to Name

Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for a unique customer name, if needed.


Ship to Name

Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for a unique customer name, if needed.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Sales Tax

This identifies the customer's default sales tax code. You can set up default tax codes for each customer address. Sales taxes can also be associated with shipping addresses different from the billing address. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field.

To set up a sales tax code, refer "Sales Taxes" in the Peachtree Accounting Help.


Sales Tax

This identifies the customer's default sales tax code. You can set up default tax codes for each customer address. Sales taxes can also be associated with shipping addresses different from the billing address. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field.

To set up a sales tax code, refer "Sales Taxes" in the Peachtree Accounting Help.


Customer Type

You can use this to group like customers together. For example, if you have customers in regions, you can enter "NORTH" here to identify these customers as being from the north. The Customer Type field can also be used to filter some Accounts Receivable reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "North" when filtering customer types in reports, customers that are identified as "north" or "NORTH" will not be included.


Customer Type

You can use this to group like customers together. For example, if you have customers in regions, you can enter "NORTH" here to identify these customers as being from the north. The Customer Type can also be used to filter some Accounts Receivable reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "North" when filtering customer types in reports, customers that are identified as "north" or "NORTH" will not be included.


Telephone 1

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 1

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 2

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 2

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Fax Number

Enter the contact's facsimile machine number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example (770) 555-1111.


Fax Number

Enter the contact's facsimile machine number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example (770) 555-1111.


E-mail (Address)

Enter the customer's e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters.

To send an e-mail message to this customer, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (This is not available in First Accounting.)


E-mail (Address)

Enter the customer's e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters.

To send an e-mail message to this customer, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (This is not available in First Accounting.)


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter customer beginning balances. The beginning balance consists of existing, outstanding invoices due at the time you began using Peachtree Accounting. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer. You can enter a beginning balance for any customer at any time. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/R account in General Ledger.

If a payment has been made against a beginning balance invoice, it will appear gray and be disabled.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter customer beginning balances. The beginning balance consists of existing, outstanding invoices due at the time you began using Peachtree Accounting. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer. You can enter a beginning balance for any customer at any time. These beginning balances amounts are not transferred to your A/R account in General Ledger.

If a payment has been made against a beginning balance invoice, it will appear gray and be disabled.


Current Balance for Customer

The current balance in the Maintain Customers window displays the total of all unpaid invoices currently in the customer ledger as of the system date. Even if you are in a previous accounting period and your system date is today's date, the current balance reflects all unpaid invoices as of today's date.

Selecting the Current Balance button displays the current ledger for the selected customer. It appears in the standard Peachtree Customer Ledgers report filtered to show unpaid invoices from the beginning date of the chosen period to the current (system) date.

When you enter a new customer, the current balance will not appear until you save the customer record for the first time.


Current Balance for Customer

The current balance in the Maintain Customers window displays the total of all unpaid invoices currently in the customer ledger as of the system date. Even if you are in a previous accounting period and your system date is today's date, the current balance reflects all unpaid invoices as of today's date.

Selecting the Current Balance button displays the current ledger for the selected customer. It appears in the standard Peachtree Customer Ledgers report filtered to show unpaid invoices from the beginning date of the chosen period to the current (system) date.

When you enter a new customer, the current balance will not appear until you save the customer record for the first time.


Current Balance for Customer

The current balance in the Maintain Customers window displays the total of all unpaid invoices currently in the customer ledger as of the system date. Even if you are in a previous accounting period and your system date is today's date, the current balance reflects all unpaid invoices as of today's date.

Selecting the Current Balance button displays the current ledger for the selected customer. It appears in the standard Peachtree Customer Ledgers report filtered to show unpaid invoices from the beginning date of the chosen period to the current (system) date.

When you enter a new customer, the current balance will not appear until you save the customer record for the first time.


Default Sales Representative

From the drop-down list, enter or select a primary sales representative that has contact with the customer. To enter sales representatives, from the Maintain menu select Employees/Sales Reps, and choose the Sales Rep option for a new or existing employee record.

Note: This is a default setting. You can change the sales representative at any time when invoicing a customer.


Default Sales Representative

From the drop-down list, enter or select a primary sales representative that has contact with the customer. To enter sales representatives, from the Maintain menu select Employees/Sales Reps, and choose the Sales Rep option for a new or existing employee record.

Note: This is a default setting. You can change the sales representative at any time when invoicing a customer.


Default G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the default general ledger sales account for this customer. This is normally an income account. When you are selling inventory items, the general ledger default accounts set up in the Inventory Items option of the Maintain menu override this default account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the default general ledger sales account for this customer. This is normally an income account. When you are selling inventory items, the general ledger default accounts set up in the Inventory Items option of the Maintain menu override this default account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Open P.O. #

This is the standing purchase order number you can use for this customer. This defaults on the Quotes, Sales Orders, and Sales/Invoicing windows. (Quotes and Sales Orders windows are not available in First Accounting.)


Open P.O. #

This is the standing purchase order number you can use for this customer. This defaults on the Quotes, Sales Orders, and Sales/Invoicing windows. (Quotes and Sales Orders windows are not available in First Accounting.)


Ship Via

You can select the default shipping carrier you want to use to ship items to this customer. Whatever you select here will default for sales transactions you enter for this customer. You enter the shipping carriers from which to choose in the Inventory Item Defaults window. (From the Maintain menu select Default Information, then Inventory Items.) In First Accounting, the window is called Item Defaults; choose the Items from the Default Information submenu.


Ship Via

You can select the default shipping carrier you want to use to ship items to this customer. Whatever you select here will default for sales transactions you enter for this customer. You enter the shipping carriers from which to choose in the Inventory Item Defaults window. (From the Maintain menu select Default Information, then Inventory Items.) In First Accounting, the window is called Item Defaults; choose the Items from the Default Information submenu.


Resale #

If this customer purchases items for resale, enter the resale number here. Resale numbers are required by most states for businesses that sell taxable goods. It enables the business to sell goods to other businesses for resale without charging a tax or to buy goods from other businesses for resale without paying a tax. If a customer intends to resell your goods, enter the customer's resale number (also called seller's permit) here.


Resale #

If this customer purchases items for resale, enter the resale number here. Resale numbers are required by most states for businesses that sell taxable goods. It enables the business to sell goods to other businesses for resale without charging a tax or to buy goods from other businesses for resale without paying a tax. If a customer intends to resell your goods, enter the customer's resale number (also called seller's permit) here.


Pricing Level

Select the pricing level that you want to be used as the default when entering sales transactions for this customer. You can choose from ten pricing levels (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting) or five pricing levels (Peachtree Accounting or First Accounting), set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window.


Pricing Level

Select the pricing level that you want to be used as the default when entering sales transactions for this customer. You can choose from ten pricing levels (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting) or five pricing levels (Peachtree Accounting or First Accounting), set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window.


Customer Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the customer default information. If these standard payment terms are what you want to use for this customer, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this customer's payment terms.


Customer Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the customer default information. If these standard payment terms are what you want to use for this customer, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this customer's payment terms.


Customer Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the customer default information. If these standard payment terms are what you want to use for this customer, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this customer's payment terms.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Customer Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to customer reports.


Customer History

Use this to view historical information about this customer. When entering a new customer, you may enter information on this tab; once you select Save, this tab becomes view-only.


Customer Since

This is the date when you first made a sale to the customer.


Customer Since

This is the date when you first made a sale to the customer.


Customer Since

This is the date when you first made a sale to the customer.


Last Invoice Date

This is the date of the last invoice you sent to the customer.


Last Invoice Date

This is the date of the last invoice you sent to the customer.


Last Invoice Date

This is the date of the last invoice you sent to the customer.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the customer's last invoice.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the customer's last invoice.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the customer's last invoice.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment you received from the customer.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment you received from the customer.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment you received from the customer.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you received from the customer.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you received from the customer.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you received from the customer.


Last Statement Date

This is the date of the last statement you sent to the customer.


Last Statement Date

This is the date of the last statement you sent to the customer.


Last Statement Date

This is the date of the last statement you sent to the customer.


Customer History

Use this to view historical information about this customer. When entering a new customer, you may enter information on this tab; once you select Save, this tab becomes view-only.


Maintain Customers/Prospects

General Tab: Select this tab to set up customer contact information including "bill to" and "ship to" addresses, sales tax information, customer type, and telephone numbers.

Sales Defaults: Select this tab to enter the default sales rep, the default G/L sales account, preferred shipping method, resale number, and pricing level. You can also customize terms for this customer.

Payment Defaults: Select this tab to enter default credit card information for the customer, as well as the customer's default payment method and G/L account for applying deposits from the customer's receipts.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Customer Defaults window.

History: Select this tab to display customer history including the most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Change ID

Select this button to change the customer ID for the displayed customer record.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a customer record if there are transactions that use that customer ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Web (Site) Address

Enter the customer's Web site address on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)

To display the customer's Web site, click the Internet button to the right of the Web Address field (or choose View Web Page from the Edit menu). This launches your default Internet browser and locates the address.


Web (Site) Address

Enter the customer's Web site address on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)

To display the customer's Web site, click the Internet button to the right of the Web Address field (or choose View Web Page from the Edit menu). This launches your default Internet browser and locates the address.


Payment Defaults

Select this tab to enter default credit card information for the customer, as well as the customer's default payment method and G/L account for applying deposits from the customer's receipts.


Cardholder's Name

Choose the credit card you want to use as this customer's default, and enter the name as it appears on the credit card in the Cardholder's Name field. You can enter up to 39 characters in this field.


Cardholder's Name

Choose the credit card you want to use as this customer's default, and enter the name as it appears on the credit card in the Cardholder's Name field. You can enter up to 39 characters in this field.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. As the default, the address fields will initially display the information you entered as the Bill to Address on the General tab. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. As the default, the address fields will initially display the information you entered as the Bill to Address on the General tab. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. As the default, the address fields will initially display the information you entered as the Bill to Address on the General tab. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city of your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter the two-character state abbreviation for your customer's billing address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit ZIP Code for your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters in this field.


City

Enter the city of your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter the two-character state abbreviation for your customer's billing address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit ZIP Code for your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters in this field.


Country

Enter the country of your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 15 characters in this field.


Country

Enter the country of your customer's billing address. You can enter up to 15 characters in this field.


Credit Card Number

Allows you to enter a default credit card number to use for this customer. You can enter dashes, spaces, or slashes as separators. You can enter up to 19 characters in the Credit Card Number field.


Credit Card Number

Allows you to enter a default credit card number to use for this customer. You can enter dashes, spaces, or slashes as separators. You can enter up to 19 characters in the Credit Card Number field.


Expiration Date

Enter the expiration date listed on the front of the customer's credit card. Enter the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.


Expiration Date

Enter the expiration date listed on the front of the customer's credit card. Enter the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.


Expiration Date

Enter the expiration date listed on the front of the customer's credit card. Enter the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.


Expiration Date

Enter the expiration date listed on the front of the customer's credit card. Enter the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.


Expiration Date

Enter the expiration date listed on the front of the customer's credit card. Enter the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.


Use receipt window settings

In the Receipt Settings area of the Payment Defaults tab, you can specify the default payment settings for the selected customer. By default, the Payment Method and Cash Account fields in the Receipts and Receive Payment windows will populate with the information you set up in customer defaults. To customize the receipt settings for the selected customer, uncheck the Use receipt window settings check box and select your desired options from the Payment Method and Cash Account lists. The next time you create a receipt for this customer, or receive a payment through the Sales/Invoicing window, the customized receipt settings will appear.

Payment Method

The default payment method for customer receipts was set up when you entered information on the Pay Methods tab of the Maintain Customer Defaults window. You can select a customized default payment method for the selected customer by unchecking the Use receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and then selecting a new method from the Payment Method drop-down list.

Cash Account

To set up a default General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposits from this customer's receipts, uncheck the Use receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and select the account you want to use from the Cash Account drop-down list. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Use receipt window settings

In the Receipt Settings area of the Payment Defaults tab, you can specify the default payment settings for the selected customer. By default, the Use Receipts window settings box is checked. When checked, the Payment Method and Cash Account fields default to those on the last saved receipt. To customize the receipt settings for the selected customer, uncheck the Use Receipt window settings check box, and select your desired options from the Payment Method and Cash Account lists. The next time you create a receipt for this customer or receive a payment throught the Sales/Invoicing window, the customized receipt settings will appear.


Payment Method

You can select a customized default payment method for the selected customer by unchecking the Use Receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and then selecting a new method from the Payment Method drop-down list. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Payment Method field defaults to the method used on the last saved receipt.


Payment Method

You can select a customized default payment method for the selected customer by unchecking the Use Receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and then selecting a new method from the Payment Method drop-down list. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Payment Method field defaults to the method used on the last saved receipt.


Cash Account

To set up a default General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposits from this customer's receipts, uncheck the Use receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and select the account you want to use from the Cash Account drop-down list. This would generally be a cash (checking) account. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Cash Account field defaults to the account used on the last saved receipt.


Cash Account

To set up a default General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposits from this customer's receipts, uncheck the Use receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and select the account you want to use from the Cash Account drop-down list. This would generally be a cash (checking) account. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Cash Account field defaults to the account used on the last saved receipt.


Use receipt window settings

In the Receipt Settings area of the Payment Defaults tab, you can specify the default payment settings for the selected customer. By default, the Use Receipts window settings box is checked. When checked, the Payment Method and Cash Account fields default to those on the last saved receipt. To customize the receipt settings for the selected customer, uncheck the Use Receipt window settings check box, and select your desired options from the Payment Method and Cash Account lists. The next time you create a receipt for this customer or receive a payment throught the Sales/Invoicing window, the customized receipt settings will appear.

Payment Method

You can select a customized default payment method for the selected customer by unchecking the Use Receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and then selecting a new method from the Payment Method drop-down list. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Payment Method field defaults to the method used on the last saved receipt.

Cash Account

To set up a default General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the deposits from this customer's receipts, uncheck the Use receipt window settings check box on the Payment Defaults tab, and select the account you want to use from the Cash Account drop-down list. This would generally be a cash (checking) account. When the Use Receipt window settings box is checked, the Cash Account field defaults to the account used on the last saved receipt.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Form Delivery Options

This group box lets you choose options that determine how forms are delivered to the customer.

Delivery method: Choose either paper forms or e-mail. Whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, your choice will determine whether the form is printed for mailing OR automatically sent as an e-mail attachment to this specific customer.

CC Sales Rep: Indicates whether to automatically e-mail a copy of the form to the default customer sales rep when a form is sent to the customer.


Delivery method

Choose the desired option:

Paper form: When you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will print as a paper form for mailing to this specific customer.

E-mail: When you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will be sent to this specific customer as an attachment to an e-mail message.


Paper Form

If you choose this option, whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will print as a paper form for mailing to this specific customer.


E-mail

If you choose this option, whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will be sent to this specific customer as an attachment to an e-mail message.


CC Sales Rep

Select this if you want Peachtree to automatically send an e-mail copy of the form to the default customer sales rep whenever you send a form the customer.


CC Sales Rep

Select this if you want Peachtree to automatically send an e-mail copy of the form to the default customer sales rep whenever you send a form the customer.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Name

This identifies the vendor's name on all accounts payable windows, forms, and reports. Vendor names can be entered as a person or company. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a new vendor's name.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of the vendor. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of the vendor. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for the vendor's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Name

This identifies the customer's name on all accounts receivable windows, forms, and reports. Customer names can be entered as a person or company. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's name.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for the vendor's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Name

This identifies the customer's name on all accounts receivable windows, forms, and reports. Customer names can be entered as a person or company. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for a new customer's name.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your customer. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for the vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for the vendor's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated vendor record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (vendor) displayed and enter a new one.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Log

Select this button to display events recorded for a customer, vendor, or employee over a range of time you specify. You can filter this list to see only certain types of activities and whether they're completed or not completed. You can mark activities or events as completed here by placing a mark in the far-left column. You cannot edit any of the other information in the list, however.


General Tab

Select this tab to set up vendor contact information including address, vendor type, and telephone numbers.


Purchase Defaults

Select this tab to enter the default G/L expense account, preferred shipping method, and tax ID. You can also customize payment terms for this vendor.


Custom Fields

Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Vendor Defaults window.


History

Select this tab to display vendor history, including most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Maintain Vendors

General: Select this tab to set up vendor contact information including address, vendor type, and telephone numbers.

Purchase Defaults: Select this tab to enter the default G/L expense account, preferred shipping method, and tax ID. You can also customize payment terms for this vendor.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Vendor Defaults window.

History: Select this tab to display vendor history, including most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new vendor's ID. For existing vendors, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Vendor ID field) to select a vendor from the drop-down list.

Vendor IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different vendor IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


Name

This is the name of the vendor. It can be either a company's or individual's name and can be up to 39 alphanumeric characters. The name prints on checks and reports.


Name

This is the name of the vendor. It can be either a company's or individual's name and can be up to 39 alphanumeric characters. The name prints on checks and reports.


Inactive

Check this check box if you plan to purge the vendor when you close the fiscal year. Once a vendor record is inactive, Peachtree displays a warning when you try to make a purchase or payment to the vendor.


Contact

This is the name of the person you deal with most at the vendor.


Contact

This is the name of the person you deal with most at the vendor.


Account #

This is the code the vendor uses to identify your account with them. Many vendors request you place this account number on your checks when you send payments.


Account #

This is the code the vendor uses to identify your account with them. Many vendors request you place this account number on your checks when you send payments.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your vendor. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your vendor resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your vendor's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


City

Enter the city in which your vendor resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your vendor's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your vendor's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the vendor is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Country

Enter the country where the vendor is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Vendor Type

You can use this to group like vendors together. For example, if you have some vendors for services and some vendors for products, you can enter "Services" and "Products" to identify what each vendor sells. The Vendor Type field can also be used to filter some Accounts Payable reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Services" when filtering vendor types in reports, vendors that are identified as "services" or "SERVICES" will not be included.


Vendor Type

You can use this to group like vendors together. For example, if you have some vendors for services and some vendors for products, you can enter "Services" and "Products" to identify what each vendor sells. The Vendor Type field can also be used to filter some Accounts Payable reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Services" when filtering vendor types in reports, vendors that are identified as "services" or "SERVICES" will not be included.


1099 Type

This specifies if the vendor qualifies as 1099 contract labor. Choose the 1099 type from the drop-down list.

Independent Contractor: Select this 1099 option if you pay more than $600 annually to the individual for contract work. You must submit a 1099-Miscellaneous form for each independent contractor to the Internal Revenue Service.

Interest: Select this 1099 option if you have paid at least $10 in interest to a vendor as a loan. You must submit the 1099-Interest form for each of these contractors to the Internal Revenue Service.

None: Select this option if your vendors do not meet either independent contractor criteria or interest criteria.


1099 Type

This specifies if the vendor qualifies as 1099 contract labor. Choose the 1099 type from the drop-down list.

Independent Contractor: Select this 1099 option if you pay more than $600 annually to the individual for contract work. You must submit a 1099-Miscellaneous form for each independent contractor to the Internal Revenue Service.

Interest: Select this 1099 option if you have paid at least $10 in interest to a vendor as a loan. You must submit the 1099-Interest form for each of these contractors to the Internal Revenue Service.

None: Select this option if your vendors do not meet either independent contractor criteria or interest criteria.


Telephone 1

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 1

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 2

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Telephone 2

Enter the contact's primary telephone number, including extension. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Fax Number

Enter the contact's facsimile machine number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Fax Number

Enter the contact's facsimile machine number. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters including parentheses to separate area codes--for example, (770) 555-1111.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter vendor beginning balances. The beginning balance consists of existing, outstanding invoices due at the time you began using Peachtree Accounting. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you currently owe to vendors. You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/P account in General Ledger.

If a payment has been made against a beginning balance invoice, it will appear gray and be disabled.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter vendor beginning balances. The beginning balance consists of existing, outstanding invoices due at the time you began using Peachtree Accounting. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you currently owe to vendors. You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/P account in General Ledger.

If a payment has been made against a beginning balance invoice, it will appear gray and be disabled.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter vendor beginning balances. The beginning balance consists of existing, outstanding invoices due at the time you began using Peachtree Accounting. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you currently owe to vendors. You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/P account in General Ledger.

If a payment has been made against a beginning balance invoice, it will appear gray and be disabled.


Current Balance for Vendor

The current balance in the Maintain Vendors window displays the total of all unpaid invoices currently in the vendor ledger as of the system date. Even if you are in a previous accounting period and your system date is today's date, the current balance reflects all unpaid invoices as of today's date.

Selecting the Current Balance button displays the current ledger for the selected vendor. It appears in the standard Peachtree Vendor Ledgers report filtered to show unpaid invoices from the beginning date of the chosen period to the current (system) date.

When you enter a new vendor, the current balance will not appear until you save the vendor record for the first time.


Current Balance for Vendor

The current balance in the Maintain Vendors window displays the total of all unpaid invoices currently in the vendor ledger as of the system date. Even if you are in a previous accounting period and your system date is today's date, the current balance reflects all unpaid invoices as of today's date.

Selecting the Current Balance button displays the current ledger for the selected vendor. It appears in the standard Peachtree Vendor Ledgers report filtered to show unpaid invoices from the beginning date of the chosen period to the current (system) date.

When you enter a new vendor, the current balance will not appear until you save the vendor record for the first time.


Default G/L Purchase Account

Enter or select the default general ledger purchase account for this vendor. This is normally an expense account. When you sell items, the general ledger default accounts set up in the Inventory Items (called "Items" in First Accounting) option of the Maintain menu override this default account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default G/L Purchase Account

Enter or select the default general ledger purchase account for this vendor. This is normally an expense account. When you sell inventory items, the general ledger default accounts set up in the Inventory Items option of the Maintain menu override this default account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Tax ID #

Enter the vendor's tax ID number. This is only necessary if you send this vendor a 1099 form.


Tax ID #

Enter the vendor's tax ID number. This is only necessary if you send this vendor a 1099 form.


Ship Via

Select the shipping carrier that this vendor uses for items. Whatever you select here will default for purchase transactions you enter for this vendor. You enter the shipping carriers from which to choose in the Inventory Item Defaults window. (From the Maintain menu select Default Information, then Inventory Items.)


Ship Via

Select the shipping carrier that this vendor uses for items. Whatever you select here will default for purchase transactions you enter for this vendor. You enter the shipping carriers from which to choose in the Inventory Item Defaults window. (From the Maintain menu select Default Information, then Inventory Items.)


Vendor Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the vendor default information. If these standard payment terms are used by this vendor, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this vendor's payment terms.


Vendor Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the vendor default information. If these standard payment terms are used by this vendor, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this vendor's payment terms.


Vendor Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the vendor default information. If these standard payment terms are used by this vendor, then make no changes. Otherwise, select the Terms button to change this vendor's payment terms.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Vendor Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to vendor reports.


Vendor History

Use this to view historical information about this vendor. When entering a new vendor, you may enter information on this tab; once you select Save, this tab becomes view-only.


Vendor Since

This is the date when you first made a purchase or payment to the vendor.


Vendor Since

This is the date when you first made a purchase or payment to the vendor.


Vendor Since

This is the date when you first made a purchase or payment to the vendor.


Last Invoice Date

Enter the date of the last invoice you received from the vendor.


Last Invoice Date

Enter the date of the last invoice you received from the vendor.


Last Invoice Date

Enter the date of the last invoice you received from the vendor.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the vendor's last invoice.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the vendor's last invoice.


Last Invoice Amount

This is the amount of the vendor's last invoice.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment made to this vendor.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment made to this vendor.


Last Payment Date

This is the date of the last payment made to this vendor.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you made to this vendor.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you made to this vendor.


Last Payment Amount

This is the last payment amount you made to this vendor.


Vendor History

Use this to view historical information about this vendor. When entering a new vendor, you may enter information on this tab; once you select Save, this tab becomes view-only.


Maintain Vendors

General Tab: Select this tab to set up vendor contact information including address, vendor type, and telephone numbers.

Purchase Defaults: Select this tab to enter the default G/L expense account, preferred shipping method, and tax ID. You can also customize payment terms for this vendor.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Vendor Defaults window.

History: Select this tab to display vendor history including most recent invoice and payment dates and amounts.


Change ID

Select this button to change the vendor ID for the displayed vendor record.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted. When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a vendor record if there are transactions that use that vendor ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


E-mail (Address)

Enter the vendor's e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters.

To send an e-mail message to this vendor, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (This is not available in First Accounting.)


E-mail (Address)

Enter the vendor's e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters.

To send an e-mail message to this vendor, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message.  (This is not available in First Accounting.)


Web (Site) Address

Enter the vendor's Web site address on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)

To display the vendor's Web site, click the Internet button to the right of the Web Address field (or choose View Web Page from the Edit menu). This launches your default Internet browser and locates the address


Web (Site) Address

Enter the vendor's Web site address on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)

To display the vendor's Web site, click the Internet button to the right of the Web Address field (or choose View Web Page from the Edit menu). This launches your default Internet browser and locates the address.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Purchase Rep

Enter or select an employee to act as purchase representative for this vendor.


Purchase Rep

Enter or select an employee to act as purchase representative for this vendor.


Form Delivery Options

This group box lets you choose options that determine how forms are delivered to the vendor.

Delivery method: Choose either paper forms or e-mail. Whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, your choice will determine whether the form is printed for mailing OR automatically sent as an e-mail attachment to this specific vendor.

CC Purchase Rep: Indicates whether to automatically e-mail a copy of the form to the default purchase rep when a form is sent to the vendor.


Delivery method

Choose the desired option:

Paper form: When you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will print as a paper form for mailing to this specific vendor.

E-mail: When you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will be sent to this specific vendor as an attachment to an e-mail message.


Paper Form

If you choose this option, whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will print as a paper form for mailing to this specific vendor.


E-mail

If you choose this option, whenever you print a form in bulk from the Select a Report window, it will be sent to this specific vendor as an attachment to an e-mail message.


CC Purchase Rep

Select this if you want Peachtree to automatically send an e-mail copy of the form to the default purchase rep whenever you send a form the vendor.


CC Purchase Rep

Select this if you want Peachtree to automatically send an e-mail copy of the form to the default purchase rep whenever you send a form the vendor.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (item) displayed and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about this item. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.


General Tab

Select this tab to set up item descriptions, item types, sales price levels, default G/L accounts, and costing methods.


Custom Fields

Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window.


History

Select this tab to display item history, including number of items sold, sales totals, and cost totals.


Bill of Materials

Select this tab to display or add components to an assembly item. This tab is only available if an assembly item is selected.


Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting called "Maintain Items")

General Tab: Select this tab to set up item descriptions, item types, sales price levels, default G/L accounts, and costing methods.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. In First Accounting, this window is called "Item Defaults."

History (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to display item history, including number of items sold, sales totals, and cost totals.

Bill of Materials (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to display or add components to an assembly item. This tab is only available if an assembly item is selected.

Item Attributes (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting only): Select this tab to set up attribute sets for a master stock item and the substock items generated from that master stock item.


Item ID

This identifies the item in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new item ID. For existing items, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Item ID field) to select an item from the drop-down list.

Item IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different item IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before lowercase letters. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code.


Item Description

This identifies the inventory item in lookup lists and reports; it is also known as the "short" description. You can enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for the item description.


Item Class

This identifies the type of inventory item. Select an item type from the drop-down list. Choose between non-stock, stock, master stock, substock, description only, assembly, service, labor, activity, or charge. Select Help for a description of each item type.

Note: In First Accounting, the choices are non-stock, description only, service, and labor.


Item Class

This identifies the type of inventory item. Select an item type from the drop-down list. Choose between non-stock, stock, master stock, substock, description only, assembly, service, labor, activity, or charge. Select Help for a description of each item type.

Note: In First Accounting, the choices are non-stock, description only, service, and labor.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this item during year-end processing, select this check box. Once an inventory item record is inactive, a warning appears when you try to sell the item. You can update the item description.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, all items that are not associated with existing transactions and are tagged as inactive will be purged.


Sales/Purchase Description

This identifies the text that will appear for this item in the Description field in transaction windows and on forms. Select either type of description from the drop-down list. Each description can be up to 160 alphanumeric characters long.

Select for Sales to enter a description that will be used in quotes, sales orders, sales/invoicing, and receipts. Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.

Select for Purchases to enter a description that will be used in purchase orders, purchases/receive inventory, and payments. It could reference the vendor's catalog number for the item. Purchase orders are not available in First Accounting, and purchase/receive inventory is called "purchases."


Description Type

This specifies which description type is displayed in the window. Select the description type from the drop-down list; then enter the description in the text field to the right.

Select for Sales to enter a description that will be used in quotes, sales orders, sales/invoicing, and receipts. Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.

Select for Purchases to enter a description that will be used in purchase orders, purchases/receive inventory, and payments. It could reference the vendor's catalog number for the item. Purchase orders are not available in First Accounting, and purchase/receive inventory is called "purchases."


Sales/Purchase Description

This identifies the text that will appear for this inventory item in the Description field in transaction windows and on forms. Select either type of description from the drop-down list to the left. Enter up to 160 alphanumeric characters.


Sales Price Levels

Enter the default sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for this item. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.) In Peachtree Accounting and First Accounting, you can set up up to five price levels for each item. In Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting, you can maintain up to ten price levels. Click the arrow button to set up multiple price levels.

Tip: You can specify a default pricing level for customers in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window or select from the five levels while invoicing your customers. Sales pricing levels correspond with the ones you set for your customers, so make sure that you enter the pricing levels in a consistent order (for example, from lowest to highest or highest to lowest).


Billing Rates

Enter the default billing amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices when selling this activity item. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.) Billing Rate levels correspond to the ones you set for your employees when working with time-ticket hours. You can set up five pricing levels for each item. Click the arrow button to set up multiple price levels.

Tip: You can specify a default pricing level for customers in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window or select from the five levels while invoicing your customers. Sales pricing levels correspond with the ones you set for your customers, so make sure that you enter the pricing levels in a consistent order (for example, from lowest to highest or highest to lowest).


Sales Price/Billing Levels

Enter the default sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for this item. For each item, you can set up up to ten pricing levels in Peachtree Complete, and up to five in Peachtree Accounting and First Accounting. Click the arrow button to set up multiple price levels.

Tip: You can specify a default pricing level for customers in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window or select from the various levels while invoicing your customers. Sales pricing levels correspond with the ones you set for your customers, so make sure that you enter the pricing levels in a consistent order (for example, from lowest to highest or highest to lowest).

Note: If you are setting up an activity item, then Sales Price Level fields are replaced by Billing Rate levels. Billing Rate levels correspond to the ones you set for your employees when working with time-ticket hours.


Sales Price/Billing Levels

Enter the default sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for this item.  (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.) For each item, you can set up up to ten pricing levels in Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting, and up to five in Peachtree Accounting and First Accounting. Click the arrow button to set up multiple price levels.

Tip: You can specify a default pricing level for customers in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window or select from the various levels while invoicing your customers. Sales pricing levels correspond with the ones you set for your customers, so make sure that you enter the pricing levels in a consistent order (for example, from lowest to highest or highest to lowest).

Note: If you are setting up an activity item, then Sales Price Level fields are replaced by Billing Rate levels. Billing Rate levels correspond to the ones you set for your employees when working with time-ticket hours.


Unit/Measure

This defines one unit of measure for the item. For example, a unit of measure can be each, units, case, barrel, and so on. The item's unit/measure prints on Physical Inventory List, Item Price List, Inventory Stock Status, and Inventory Valuation reports. (Only the Item Price List report is available in First Accounting.)


Unit/Measure

This defines one unit of measure for the item. For example, a unit of measure can be each, units, case, barrel, and so on. The item's unit/measure prints on Physical Inventory List, Item Price List, Inventory Stock Status, and Inventory Valuation reports. (Only the Item Price List is available in First Accounting.)


Item Type

You can use this to group like items together. For example, if you have a large warehouse, you may want to enter Electric for electrical items and Plumbing for plumbing supplies. You can use the Item Type field to filter most inventory reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Electric" when filtering item types in reports, inventory items that are identified as "electric" or "ELECTRIC" will not be included.


Unit/Measure

This defines one unit of measure for the item. For example, a unit of measure can be each, units, case, barrel, and so on. The item's unit/measure prints on Physical Inventory List, Item Price List, Inventory Stock Status, and Inventory Valuation reports. (Only the Item Price List report is available in First Accounting.)


Location

You can enter up to 10 characters to describe the location (Aisle1, Aisle2, Bin4, etc.). This appears on inventory reports and lists.


Location

You can enter up to 10 characters to describe the location (Aisle1, Aisle2, Bin4, etc.). This appears on inventory reports and lists.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the income type account you'll credit when you sell the item. All item classes except for Description require a sales account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field..


G/L Income Account

Enter or select the income type account you'll credit when you sell the item. All item classes except for Description require a sales account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the income type account you'll credit when you sell the item. All item classes except for Description require a sales account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the income type account you'll credit when you sell the item. All item classes except for Description require a sales account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Inventory Account

For stock items only, enter the account (typically an inventory type account) that the inventory for this item is charged to. This account is used as the default account for entering purchases. Generally, the account gets debited when you purchase more of the item and credited when you sell the item.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Salary/ Wages Expense Account

For service, non-stock, and labor items, enter the account to debit when selling this item (typically a salary or wage expense account).

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Inventory (or Salary/ Wages Expense) Account

For stock items only, enter the account (typically an inventory type account) that the inventory for this item is charged to. This account is used as the default account for entering purchases. Generally, the account gets debited when you purchase more of the item and credited when you sell the item. For service, non-stock, and labor items, enter the account to debit when selling this item (typically a salary or wage expense account).

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Inventory (or Salary/ Wages Expense) Account

For stock items only, enter the account (typically an inventory type account) that the inventory for this item is charged to. This account is used as the default account for entering purchases. Generally, the account gets debited when you purchase more of the item and credited when you sell the item. For service, non-stock, and labor items, enter the account to debit when selling this item (typically a salary or wage expense account).

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Cost of Sales Account

For stock items and assembly items, enter or select the account that gets debited for the item when sold. Peachtree allows you to use FIFO, LIFO, or weighted-average methods of costing; costing occurs as of the transaction date for the sale. Non-stock items use this account as the default expense account when entering purchases.

Note: In First Accounting, only the weighted-average method is available.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Cost of Sales Account

For stock items and assembly items, enter or select the account that gets debited for the item when sold. Peachtree allows you to use FIFO, LIFO, or weighted-average methods of costing; costing occurs as of the transaction date for the sale. Non-stock items use this account as the default expense account when entering purchases.

Note: In First Accounting, only the weighted-average method is available.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Cost of Sales Account

For stock items and assembly items, enter or select the account that gets debited for the item when sold. Peachtree Accounting allows you to use FIFO, LIFO, or weighted-average methods of costing; costing occurs as of the transaction date for the sale. Non-stock items use this account as the default expense account when entering purchases.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Cost Method

This identifies how the cost of the stock item will be calculated when you purchase and sell it. Select one of the three inventory costing methods from the drop-down list: Average Cost, LIFO (last in, first out), and FIFO (first in, first out). Generally, all inventory items need to use the same costing method. Check with your accountant about the implications of doing this before you make any changes.


Item Type

You can use this to group like items together. For example, if you have a large warehouse, you may want to enter Electric for electrical items and Plumbing for plumbing supplies. You can use the Item Type field to filter most inventory reports. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Electric" when filtering item types in reports, inventory items that are identified as "electric" or "ELECTRIC" will not be included.


Last Unit Cost

This represents the latest unit cost amount associated with this item. Once a purchase, payment, or adjustment (including beginning balances) is made for an item, the last unit cost is updated.

For stock and substock items (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting only): You can enter a cost amount for new items. However, once a purchase, payment, or adjustment is made for the item, the last unit cost is updated by Peachtree Accounting. The cost amount shown is the last purchase price or adjustment cost of the item.

For non-stock, service, and labor items: You can enter an estimated cost or change the displayed unit here. When you sell one of these item types, a cost entry is generated based on the cost you enter. This may be very handy if you are trying to generate a direct labor cost based on service or labor that is performed. If direct labor is not important, then set this at 0.00.

For assembly items: This field is not available. Only the cost of each assembly component is tracked. (Assembly items are not available in First Accounting.)


Last Unit Cost

This represents the latest unit cost amount associated with this item. Once a purchase, payment, or adjustment (including beginning balances) is made for an item, the last unit cost is updated.

For stock and substock items (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting only): You can enter a cost amount for new items. However, once a purchase, payment, or adjustment is made for the item, the last unit cost is updated by Peachtree Accounting. The cost amount shown is the last purchase price or adjustment cost of the item.

For non-stock, service, and labor items: You can enter an estimated cost or change the displayed unit here. When you sell one of these item types, a cost entry is generated based on the cost you enter. This may be very handy if you are trying to generate a direct labor cost based on service or labor that is performed. If direct labor is not important, then set this at 0.00.

For assembly items: This field is not available. Only the cost of each assembly component is tracked. (Assembly items are not available in First Accounting.)


Item Tax Type

These are the inventory item tax types you may have set up in the Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults" in First Accounting). They define whether or not the stock item is taxable. To see a list of your choices, enter a ? or select the Lookup button.


Cost Method

This identifies how the cost of the stock item will be calculated when you purchase and sell it. Select one of the three inventory costing methods from the drop-down list: Average Cost, LIFO (last in, first out), and FIFO (first in, first out). Generally, all inventory items need to use the same costing method. Check with your accountant about the implications of doing this before you make any changes.


Subject to Commission

This identifies whether the item, when sold through Sales/Invoicing, should be included in the Accounts Receivable Sales Rep report. Select the check box to indicate that the item is subject to commission.

Note: Commission amounts must be calculated manually through payroll. (Payroll is not available in First Accounting.)


Quantity on Hand

This identifies the number of items you currently have in stock; this is a view-only field used only for stock and assembly items. It keeps track of the quantities sold through Sales/Invoicing and Receipts, quantities purchased through Purchases and Payments, and Adjustments made through Inventory Adjustments.


Quantity on Hand

This identifies the number of items you currently have in stock; this is a view-only field used only for stock and assembly items. It keeps track of the quantities sold through Sales/Invoicing and Receipts, quantities purchased through Purchases and Payments, and Adjustments made through Inventory Adjustments.


Minimum Stock

Enter the number at which you will typically reorder the item. This is used only for stock and assembly items. For example, when you run the Inventory Reorder Worksheet, you can use this number to filter the report by those items that are below minimum quantity in the Net Quantity field. This helps determine how much of which items you need to reorder.


Minimum Stock

Enter the number at which you will typically reorder the item. This is used only for stock and assembly items. For example, when you run the Inventory Reorder Worksheet, you can use this number to filter the report by those items that are below minimum quantity in the Net Quantity field. This helps determine how much of which items you need to reorder.


Reorder Quantity

This is the amount of the item that you normally order. It is used only for stock and assembly items and appears on the Inventory Stock Status Report and the Inventory Reorder Worksheet.


Reorder Quantity

This is the amount of the item that you normally order. It is used only for stock and assembly items and appears on the Inventory Stock Status Report and the Inventory Reorder Worksheet.


Preferred Vendor ID

Enter or select your preferred vendor for this item. You can filter items by their preferred vendor on the Inventory Reorder Worksheet (not available in First Accounting). To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Preferred Vendor ID

Enter or select your preferred vendor for this item. You can filter items by their preferred vendor on the Inventory Reorder Worksheet (not available in First Accounting). To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter item beginning balances. The beginning balance for inventory items includes the quantity, unit cost, and total cost of the inventory. You only use this when you first enter beginning balances. However, if you enter an incorrect unit cost for a beginning balance, this is the only place where you can change it.

The total amount of your inventory beginning balances entered here needs to be the same amount you entered in your Chart of Accounts Beginning Balance for Inventory. If you don't do this, your General Ledger and Financial reports will not match your Inventory reports.


Beginning Balances

Select the arrow button to enter item beginning balances. The beginning balance for inventory items includes the quantity, unit cost, and total cost of the inventory. You only use this when you first enter beginning balances. However, if you enter an incorrect unit cost for a beginning balance, this is the only place where you can change it.

The total amount of your inventory beginning balances entered here needs to be the same amount you entered in your Chart of Accounts Beginning Balance for Inventory. If you don't do this, your General Ledger and Financial reports will not match your Inventory reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Item Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow to you set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Inventory Item Defaults (called "Item Defaults in First Accounting), you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to item reports.


Period History

This is a summary of inventory transactions for stock and assembly items for past periods. You cannot edit any of these fields.

Period History: This shows you the last 12 periods.

# Units Sold: This is the total number of units sold for the period.

Sales ($): this is the total sales amount for the period.

# Units Received: This is the total number of units purchased for the period.

Costs ($): This is the total purchase amount for the period.


Print Components on Invoice

Select this check box if you want all of the components of an assembly to print on quotes, sales orders, and invoices. If this box is not selected, then only the assembly prints on quotes, sales orders, and invoices.


Print Components on Invoice

Select this check box if you want all of the components of an assembly to print on quotes, sales orders, and invoices. If this box is not selected, then only the assembly prints on quotes, sales orders, and invoices.


Add

Select this button to add a new inventory item to the assembly.

Note: You cannot modify the components of an assembly once you have purchased or sold the assembly.


Remove

Select this button to remove an inventory item from the assembly.

Note: You cannot modify the components of an assembly once you have purchased or sold the assembly.


Bill of Materials List

Item ID: This identifies a single component of the assembly item. You can enter a ? or click the right mouse button to select an existing inventory item from the lookup list.

Description: This is the short description of the inventory item. You cannot change this description once the assembly item is saved for the first time.

Quantity Needed: This is the amount of this item needed to build one assembly item.


Maintain Inventory Items (in First Accounting called "Maintain Items")

General Tab: Select this tab to set up item descriptions, item types, sales price levels, default G/L accounts, and costing methods.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Inventory Item Defaults window. In First Accounting, this window is called "Item Defaults."

History (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to display item history, including number of items sold, sales totals, and cost totals.

Bill of Materials (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to display or add components to an assembly item. This tab is only available if an assembly item is selected.

Item Attributes (Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting only): Select this tab to set up attribute sets for a master stock item and the substock items generated from that master stock item.


Change ID

Select this button to change the item ID for the displayed inventory item record.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted. When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete an item record if there are transactions entered that use the item ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Detail

Select this button to see detail information for a substock item that appears on the Item Attributes tab. Select the item in the Created Substock Items table, and then select the Detail button to see details.


Item Attributes

Select this tab to set up attribute sets for a master stock item and the substock items generated from that master stock item.


UPC / SKU

This represents the Universal Price Code/Stock Keeping Unit of an item, which is encoded in the item's barcode.


UPC / SKU

This represents the Universal Price Code/Stock Keeping Unit of an item, which is encoded in the item's barcode.


Weight

This represents the item's weight.

Note: All item weights entered into Peachtree must be in the same unit of measure (for example, grams, ounces, pounds) in order for weight totals to be correct on reports and forms.


Weight

This represents the item's weight.

Note: All item weights entered into Peachtree must be in the same unit of measure (for example, grams, ounces, pounds) in order for weight totals to be correct on reports and forms.


Quantity Available

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item on hand minus quantities committed on sales orders, plus quantities appearing on purchase orders (if you have chosen to include these quantities when Peachtree calculates quantity available; you make this choice on the General tab of Inventory Item Defaults).


Quantity Available

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item on hand minus quantities committed on sales orders, plus quantities appearing on purchase orders (if you have chosen to include these quantities when Peachtree calculates quantity available; you make this choice on the General tab of Inventory Item Defaults).


Qty on SO's

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item committed on sales orders.


Qty on SO's

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item committed on sales orders.


Qty on PO's

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item appearing on purchase orders.


Qty on PO's

This is a view-only field used for stock and assembly items. It tracks the number of units of an item appearing on purchase orders.


Buyer ID

Enter or select the ID of an employee who will act as buyer for this item. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.


Buyer ID

Enter or select the ID of an employee who will act as buyer for this item. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.


Primary Attributes

These are sets of item characteristics that you designate as primary ones for the master stock item. Attributes could include size, length, color, price range, and so forth. Primary Attributes include the following fields:

Name: Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Color.

ID: Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.

Description: Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Name

Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Color.


Name

Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Size.


Primary Attributes List Box

Once you add an attribute, it appears in the list box, which shows all available primary attributes.


Secondary Attributes

These are sets of item characteristics that you designate as secondary ones for the master stock item. Attributes could include size, length, color, price range, and so forth. Secondary Attributes include the following fields:

Name: Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Size.

ID: Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.

Description: Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Name

Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Size.


Name

Enter a maximum 20-character name for the attribute, such as Size.


Secondary Attributes List Box

Once you add an attribute, it appears in the list box, which shows all available secondary attributes.


ID

Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.


ID

Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.


Description:

Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Description:

Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Remove

To remove an attribute from the list of primary attributes, select the item in the list, and then select Remove.


Add

Select this to add a newly entered primary attribute to the list of available attributes.


ID

Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.


ID

Enter a maximum 4-character ID for the attribute.


Description

Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Description

Enter a maximum 20-character description for the attribute.


Add

Select this to add a newly entered secondary attribute to the list of available attributes.


Remove

To remove an attribute from the list of secondary attributes, select the item in the list, and then select Remove.


Attributes

These are the primary and secondary attributes of the displayed substock item.


Attributes

These are the primary and secondary attributes of the displayed substock item.


Attributes

These are the primary and secondary attributes of the displayed substock item.


Attributes

These are the primary and secondary attributes of the displayed substock item.


Subject to Commission

Select the check box if this item is subject to commission. If it is and is sold through Sales/Invoicing, the item is included in the Accounts Receivable Sales Rep report.


Created Substock Items

The table below lists all substock items automatically generated from the master stock item. The table also shows the primary and secondary attributes that characterize each item, as well as the quantity on hand. You can choose to make an item inactive by selecting the Inactive box for that item.


Created Substock Items (Related Master and Substock Items)

The table below lists the master stock item and all substock items automatically generated from the master.

Note: Information for the master stock item will be listed only if the item appearing in the Item ID field at the top of the window is a substock item.

Item ID: This column displays the item ID of the master and each substock item. (See Note.)

[First Attribute]: This column displays the first attribute that characterizes the item (for example, item color).

[Second Attribute]: This column displays the second attribute that characterizes the item (for example, item size).

Quantity on Hand: This column displays the quantity on hand for each substock item.

Inactive: This column indicates whether the item is currently inactive or not. To make an item inactive, select the check box for that item.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Learn about Payroll and Inventory Upgrade Features

Click this link to go to the Peachtree Web site, where you can learn more about how to upgrade to take advantage of Peachtree's Payroll and Inventory components.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered into the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows which are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered into the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered into the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered into the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Gross More Than

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

During calculations, Peachtree Accounting matches the Gross more than column to the employee's gross and uses the row to calculate the tax.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Withhold

Enter the withholding amount that corresponds to the amount in the Gross more than column.

The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


Plus %

Enter the percentage amount to be added to the Withholding amount based on the amount in the Gross more than column. The amounts entered in this column must be entered in each row in increasing order. Any rows that are beyond the end of the table must have a zero entered in the column.

Note: This is used only by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box. If your formula does use the table function, then you need to refer to Payroll chapter of the User's Guide for further information about the Table function.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Vendor Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the vendor default information. If these standard payment terms are what is used by this vendor, then select the Use Standard Terms check box (if it is not already selected). Otherwise, clear the Use Standard Terms check box to enter unique payment terms for this vendor.


Use Standard Terms

Select this check box if the payment terms established in vendor default information are what this vendor requires. Clear the Use Standard Terms check box to enter unique payment terms for this vendor.


COD

Select this option if you purchase items COD (cash on delivery) from this vendor.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Prepaid

Select this option if this vendor requires you to prepay for goods and services.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Due on a day next month

Select this option if this vendor requires you to pay invoices by a specified day of the month--for example, if all invoices are due on the 15th of each month.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment terms.


Due in number of days

Select this option if this vendor requires you to pay invoices within a specific number of days--for example, if all invoices are due within 30 days of the original invoice date.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment terms.


Due at the end of month

Select this option if this vendor requires you to pay invoices by the last day of the month--for example, if all March invoices are due March 31, then all April invoices are due April 30.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment terms.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which this vendor will not allow early payment discounts.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that this vendor allows as a discount, if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals; for example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit allowed by this vendor. When the vendor balance exceeds this total, a warning message will appear.


OK

Select this button to close the window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Purchase Order Transactions Found

Peachtree First Accounting and above does not support purchase orders. However, there are purchase order transactions among your company transactions. These transactions cannot be automatically converted in Peachtree First Accounting 2004 and newer. You should either remove these transactions altogether from your company data or convert them to purchase invoice transactions in an older version of the program.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Delete

Select this button to delete the selected custom style.

Note: You will not be able to delete the four standard report styles: Classic, Contemporary, Elegant, and Professional.


New

Select this button to create a new report style. Peachtree Accounting will clear the Style text box, and you can then enter the name of the style you want to create.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


General

Select this tab to change an existing report style or to create a new style. Then select the report sections or elements (such as report print date or company name) that you want to see on the report and the fonts that you want these sections to appear in.


Style Defaults

Select this tab to tell Peachtree the default style you want to use for standard reports in each report area (such as Accounts Receivable or Company Reports).


Report Styles

The tabs in this window let you change or create styles that your reports appear in. Choose the General tab either to select an existing report style or to create a new one, then tell Peachtree how you want the report to look. Choose the Style Defaults tab to tell Peachtree the default styles you want to use for the various report areas (such as Accounts Receivable or Company Reports).


General

Select this tab to change an existing report style or to create a new style. Then select the report sections or elements (such as report print date or company name) that you want to see on the report and the fonts that you want these sections to appear in.


Style

Use the drop-down list to select the name of an existing style you want to change. Or, to create a new report style, in the text box enter the new style name (40 characters maximum).


Style

Use the drop-down list to select the name of an existing style you want to change. Or, to create a new report style, in the text box enter the new style name (40 characters maximum).


General Style Options

Use these options to tell Peachtree how you want the selected report to look:

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the report element (such as report print date or company name).

Font Detail: Identifies the font that the report section will appear in.  Select the Font button (A) to choose a new font.


Style Defaults

Select this tab to tell Peachtree the default style you want to use for standard reports in each report area (such as Accounts Receivable or Company Reports).


Style Defaults Options

Use these options to select the default style to use in each report area:

Report Area: Indicates the report area, such as Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable.

Default Style: Displays the default report style for the report area. From the drop-down list, select the default style you want to use. For example, you might choose the Contemporary style for your company reports.

Note: If you have installed Peachtree for the first time (that is, the installation is not an upgrade of a previous release of Peachtree) all new companies you create will have <Standard> Professional as their default report style for all report areas.


Report Styles

The tabs in this window let you change or create styles that your reports appear in. Choose the General tab either to select an existing report or create a new one, then tell Peachtree how you want the report to look. Choose the Style Defaults tab to tell Peachtree the default styles you want to use for the various report areas (such as Accounts Receivable or Company Reports).


First Check Number

The next available check number appears. You can change this number or enter a new check number you want to assign when printing checks.


Last Check Date

This displays the date of the last check that was printed by Peachtree Accounting. You cannot edit this field; it is only for display.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Cash Account

Before you can enter and save a payment, receipt, or paycheck, you must initially select a cash account. You can select an alternate account later, if needed, in the Cash Account field.

From the drop-down list, select an account name to use with this transaction and select OK. Once you save the first transaction, Peachtree Accounting automatically selects the most recently used cash account for future transactions.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Reset all one-time messages

Peachtree displays a number of one-time messages, which you can tell the program not to show again. The Reset button lets you reset all one-time messages so that you will see every message again, even the ones you told Peachtree not to show.


Reset

Peachtree displays a number of one-time messages, which you can tell the program not to show again. The Reset button lets you reset all one-time messages so that you will see every message again, even the ones you told Peachtree not to show.


Decimal Point Entry

This option is used to determine the way decimal points are inserted during data entry in Peachtree Accounting.


Automatic

Select this option if you want Peachtree to insert the decimal point. It inserts it before the last two digits of an entered number. For example, if you type 1 and press Enter, Peachtree will display 0.01 in the field.


Manual

Select this option if you want to type the decimal point yourself. For example, if you type 1 and press Enter, Peachtree will display 1.00 in the field.


Number of Decimal Places

This sets the default number of decimal places Peachtree uses for quantities and unit price fields. You can select from zero to five decimal places. The default is two.

For example, if the default is set to two, then entering 1075 will display 10.75. Entering 75 will display 0.75. Entering 1.075 will display 1.08.


Number of Decimal Places

This sets the default number of decimal places Peachtree uses for quantities and unit price fields. You can select from zero to five decimal places. The default is two.

For example, if the default is set to two, then entering 1075 will display 10.75. Entering 75 will display 0.75. Entering 1.075 will display 1.08.


Hide General Ledger Accounts

You can elect not to display general ledger (G/L) accounts in various task windows, making data entry easier and faster. When you select any of the Hide General Ledger Accounts global options, the respective task windows in those areas will not display G/L account fields. These transactions will automatically use the default G/L accounts that you have set up.


Accounts Receivable

Select this option to hide G/L accounts in the Quotes, Sales Orders, Sales Invoicing, and Receipts windows. The Quotes and Sales Orders windows are not available in First Accounting.


Accounts Payable

Select this option to hide G/L accounts in the Purchase Orders, Purchases/Receive Inventory, and Payments windows.  The Purchase Orders window is not available in First Accounting, and the Purchases/Receive Inventory window is called "Purchases."


Payroll

Select this option to hide G/L accounts in the Payroll Entry window.


Warn if a data record was changed but not saved yet

Select this option to have Peachtree Accounting display a warning if you are trying to exit a new or modified record that has not been saved. If you turn this off, the warning will not appear, and Peachtree will continue to the next window or record.


Hide Inactive Records

Select this option to have Peachtree Accounting not display inactive records (for example, items, customers, vendors, employees, and so on) in lookup lists.


Recalculate Cash Balance Automatically in Receipts, Payments, and Payroll Entry

The default setting of this option is ON (the check box is checked).

When this option is checked, the cash balance fields in Receipts, Payments, and Payroll Entry are automatically updated as you post/save receipts, payments, and payroll entries. The balance will display as of the date included on the task window. (Payroll Entry is not available in First Accounting.)

When this option is not checked, cash balances displayed will not automatically update as you post or save receipts, payments, and payroll entries. This can speed up data entry. The cash balance will initially display as "Uncalculated." To calculate the balance, you must select the Recalculate button.


Recalculate Cash Balance Automatically in Receipts, Payments, and Payroll Entry

The default setting of this option is ON (the check box is checked).

When this option is checked, the cash balance fields in Receipts, Payments, and Payroll Entry are automatically updated as you post/save receipts, payments, and payroll entries. The balance will display as of the date included on the task window. (Payroll Entry is not available in First Accounting.)

When this option is not checked, cash balances displayed will not automatically update as you post or save receipts, payments, and payroll entries. This can speed up data entry. The cash balance will initially display as "Uncalculated." To calculate the balance, you must select the Recalculate button.


Improve Performance

These options let you turn off certain options in reports and item lookup lists. Turning the options off will mean faster generation of reports and display of item lookup lists onscreen.


Do not print total page length of reports in report headers

Select this option to allow reports to print faster, skipping the initial calculation of total number of pages prior to printing. Instead of displaying "page 1 of 12" or "page 2 of 12" in the report header, your reports will display "page 1" or "page 2."


Do not show quantity on hand in inventory item lookups

Select this option to speed up the display of inventory-item lookup lists, skipping the routine of calculating each item's current quantity on hand every time the list is displayed. Peachtree recommends selecting this option if you maintain a large number of inventory items.


Line Item Entry Display

This allows you to determine whether one or two lines will display in the list distribution box of various task windows.

If you choose two lines, the second line will list descriptions of the item, G/L account name, and job (if you set up at least one job).


1 Line

Select this option to display a single line in the list distribution box of various task windows. This will not display descriptions of items, G/L account names, and jobs.


2 Lines

Select this option to display two lines in the list distribution box of various task windows. The second line will list descriptions of the item, G/L account name, and job (if you set up at least one job).


Smart Data Entry Options

These options enable lookup lists to instantly display and anticipate what you want to enter. They can make data entry faster in most cases.


Automatic field completion

Select this option to fill in the lookup field with the nearest match to the characters you enter; it lets you avoid having to enter all characters.


Drop-down list displays automatically

Select this option to instantly display a drop-down list when the cursor is placed in the lookup field and at least one character is typed.


Color Scheme

You can choose from five color schemes that change the appearance of windows and dialog boxes used in Peachtree Accounting. Each scheme uses a different combination of colors. When you select a color scheme preference, this default affects all companies in the Peachtree Accounting data path that are accessed by this computer. You can change color schemes at any time. If you operate on a network, each workstation can set up its own color scheme preference.

Note: Peachtree Accounting color schemes only apply to windows and dialog boxes within the Peachtree Accounting program, not other Windows applications or the Windows desktop.


Classic

This scheme uses Peachtree's traditional white tabs and white color backgrounds throughout the program. If you are upgrading from a previous version of Peachtree Accounting, this color scheme is initially set up.


Professional

This scheme uses light gray tabs and gray backgrounds. If you are new to Peachtree Accounting, this color scheme is initially set up.


Sand

This scheme uses light and dark tan colors throughout the program.


Splash

This scheme uses light pastels similar to the folder colors displayed in the Navigation Aids.


Low

This setting allows all Peachtree Partner applications to run automatically. Peachtree Partner programs will be able to exchange data with your Peachtree database without prompting you.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Peachtree Partners Security Level

These options let you choose a security level that determines how Peachtree Partner applications, such as FAS for Peachtree or Peachtree Contact Manager, interface with your Peachtree data.


Medium

This setting will cause Peachtree to prompt you whenever you start a Peachtree Partner application. A warning message will ask whether or not you want the application to run. This is the default and recommended setting.


Vibrant

This scheme uses bright and bold colors similar to the folder colors displayed in the Navigation Aids.


Reset all one-time messages

Peachtree displays a number of one-time messages, which you can tell the program not to show again. The Reset button lets you reset all one-time messages so that you will see every message again, even the ones you told Peachtree not to show.


Use Timeslips Accounting Link

Check this box to activate the Timeslips Accounting Link option in Peachtree Accounting.


Accounting Tab

This tab lets you choose settings that affect how Peachtree handles accounting-related tasks, including the choice of manual or automatic decimal entry and whether or not to hide G/L accounts in cetain Peachtree windows.


General Tab

This tab lets you choose settings that affect Peachtree performance in areas such as line-item display and smart data entry.


Peachtree Partners Tab

This tab lets you choose security settings for Peachtree Partner applications such as FAS for Peachtree.


Maintain Global Options

These options identify defaults or preferences that affect all companies in the Peachtree Accounting data path. You can change any of these options at any time. Choose the Accounting, General, or Peachtree Partners, or Spelling tab.

Note: The Peachtree Partners tab lets you choose a security level that determines how Peachtree Partner applications, such as FAS for Peachtree, interface with your Peachtree data.


Maintain Global Options

These options identify defaults or preferences that affect all companies in the Peachtree Accounting data path. You can change any of these options at any time. Choose the Accounting, General, or Peachtree Partners tab.

Note: The Peachtree Partners tab lets you choose a security level that determines how Peachtree Partner applications, such as FAS for Peachtree, interface with your Peachtree data.


Peachtree Spell Check

Spell Check allows you to check spelling in various areas throughout Peachtree.


Peachtree Spell Check

Spell Check allows you to check spelling in various areas throughout Peachtree


Peachtree Spell Check

Spell Check allows you to check spelling in various areas throughout Peachtree.


Spell Check Options

Use the Spell Check Options area to specify various options that affect the way that Spell Check operates.


Check spelling as you type

Select this option to instruct Spell Check to highlight misspelled words in red as you type.


Check spelling on save or close

When this option is selected, Spell Check reviews your text when you save or close a record.


Auto correct misspelled words

When enabled, words marked "Auto Change" actions will automatically be changed to their specified replacements. When disabled, you will be prompted before the words are changed.


Suggestion speed and accuracy

This option controls the speed and accuracy of the initial search for suggested replacements for misspelled words.


Fast but less accurate

When this option is selected, Spell Check searches for misspelled words more quickly, but the level of accuracy is decreased.


Moderately fast and accurate

When this option is selected, Spell Check performs a moderately fast and accurate search for misspelled words. This is the default option.


Slow but accurate

When this option is selected, it slows down the search but increases the probability that Spell Check will locate the correct word.


Main Dictionary Language

This option allows you to set the language of the main dictionary used to check spelling.


Main Dictionary Language

This option allows you to set the language of the main dictionary used to check spelling.


Custom Dictionary

Pressing this button opens the Custom Dictionaries window, which allows you to edit the contents of user dictionaries.


Running options

Running options affect the way that Spell Check searches for misspelled words. For example, you can instruct Spell Check to ignore capitalized words.


Ignore Capitalized words

When enabled, any words beginning with a capital letter are ignored.


Ignore words with mixed case

When enabled, any words containing an unusual mixture of upper- and lowercase letters are ignored.


Ignore words with numbers

When enabled, any words containing embedded digits are ignored.


Ignore all UPPERCASE words

When enabled, any words containing all capital letters are ignored.


Ignore Internet addresses

When enabled, any words that appear to be Internet domain names (such as peachtree.com) are ignored.


Report doubled words

When enabled, any word appearing twice in a row is reported.


Case sensitive

When enabled, a disctinction is made between capitalized and non-capitalized words. When the option is disabled, capitalized and non-capitalized words (for example, peachtree and Peachtree) are considered identical.


Phonetic suggestions

When enabled, suggestions are made based on phonetic (sounds-like) similarity to the misspelled word. Enabling this option will increase the time required to locate suggestions. Note that either this option or the Typographical option must be enabled, or no suggestions will be offered.


High

Choosing this setting will mean that no Peachtree Partner applications will run.


Which File to Export

Specifies the file to export, for example, Chart of Accounts. From the list, select the file you want to export.


Which Format to Export to

Specifies the new format for the file you are exporting. From the list, select the format for the file you want to export.


Path Name of File to Export to

Specifies the location where the file will reside after you export it. Enter the path for the new location.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting Account

If you are exporting the Chart of Accounts, specifies the starting account for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting account.


Ending Account

If you are exporting the Chart of Accounts, specifies the ending account for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending account.


Ending Account

If you are exporting the Chart of Accounts, specifies the ending account for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending account.


Ending Account

If you are exporting the Chart of Accounts, specifies the ending account for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending account.


Starting Vendor

If you are exporting vendor records, specifies the starting vendor for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting vendor.


Starting Vendor

If you are exporting vendor records, specifies the starting vendor for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting vendor.


Starting Vendor

If you are exporting vendor records, specifies the starting vendor for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting vendor.


Ending Vendor

If you are exporting vendor records, specifies the ending vendor for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending vendor.


Starting Employee

If you are exporting employee records, specifies the starting employee for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting employee.


Starting Employee

If you are exporting employee records, specifies the starting employee for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting employee.


Ending Employee

If you are exporting employee records, specifies the ending employee for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending employee.


Ending Employee

If you are exporting employee records, specifies the ending employee for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending employee.


Starting Date

If you are exporting journal entries, specifies the starting date for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting date.


Starting Date

If you are exporting journal entries, specifies the starting date for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the starting date.


Ending Date

If you are exporting journal entries, specifies the ending date for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending date.


Ending Date

If you are exporting journal entries, specifies the ending date for the range of records you will be exporting. Enter or select the ending date.


Which Journals to Export

Specifies the journal or journals to export, for example, Sales Journal. From the list, select the journal(s) you want to export.


General

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the General Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the General Journal.


Payroll

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Payroll Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Payroll Journal.


Sales

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Sales Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Sales Journal.


Purchase

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Purchase Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Purchase Journal.


Inventory Adjustment

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Inventory Adjustment Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Inventory Adjustment Journal.


Cost of Goods Sold

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Cost of Goods Sold Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Cost of Goods Sold Journal.


Cash Receipts

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Cash Receipts Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Cash Receipts Journal.


Cash Disbursements

If you are exporting journal entries, indicates whether the Cash Disbursements (Payments) Journal will be exported. Select this check box if you want to export the Cash Disbursements Journal.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Which File to Import

Specifies the file to import. Select the file you want to import from the list.


Which Format to Import from

Specifies the format for the file you are importing. From the list, select the format of this file.


Replace Old Records

Indicates whether you want to replace existing records during the import process. Select this check box if you want to replace existing records with the new records you are importing.


Prior Year Balances and Budgets

Indicates whether you want to import prior year balances and budgets. Select this check box if you want to import balances and budgets from the prior year.


Path Name of File to Import from

Specifies the current location of the file you are importing. Enter the path.


Path Name of File to Import from

Specifies the current location of the file you are importing. Enter the path.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated tax table.


Find

Select this button to search for text in the tax table list within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next tax table, if any, that includes the text to be found. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Table

Select this button to set up gross pay and withholding limits for the tax table. This is only used by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box.

If your formula does use the Table function, then refer to User's Guide for further information.


Tax Table List

Tax ID: This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields.

Tax Name: This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year].

Government: This identifies the type of tax table (federal, state, or local).

Filing Status: This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status.


Tax Table List

Tax ID: This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields.

Tax Name: This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year].

Government: This identifies the type of tax table (federal, state, or local).

Filing Status: This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status.


Tax ID

If you plan to enter a new tax table, enter an ID that is not already in the Tax Table list. You may want to follow the naming conventions of Peachtree Accounting and start the ID with the two-letter postal abbreviation for your state.


Tax Name

The name you choose for your tax table is important because it allows Peachtree Accounting to identify which payroll tax table to use for a particular field. The name has two parts separated by a single space:

Calculation Name: This is the name that you enter as the calculation name.

Payroll Year: This is the last two digits of the calendar year to which this tax table applies.

Hint: You can look at the sample company that comes with Peachtree Accounting for examples.


Filing Status

If this calculation is to be used for all employees, regardless of filing status, select "All Filing Statuses" from the drop-down list. If you choose a status other than this, you can create multiple tax tables with the same name, one for each possible filing status.


Appears on Payroll Tax Report Menus

Select this check box to have this calculation display on the Payroll Tax Report menu or to have the payroll field which uses this calculation display on the Exception Report. The Taxable_Gross variable must be included in the formula when selecting this check box.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State or Local.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State or Local.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State or Local.


Locality

Enter the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee's State locality code matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry.

Leave the field blank if you want the tax table calculated for all state locality values.


Locality

Enter the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee's Local locality code matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry.

Leave the field blank if you want the tax table calculated for all local locality values.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete an account record if there are transactions that use that account ID.


Formula

The Formula box contains the equations you use to actually calculate taxes. For further information, see the Payroll chapter in your User's Guide.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Formula

The Formula box contains the equations you use to actually calculate taxes. For further information, see the Payroll chapter in your User's Guide.


Deduction

Select this option to subtract the calculated amount from the gross.


Addition

Select this option to add the calculated amount to the gross.


Exception

Select this option for a positive or negative number to be allowed in Payroll calculations. Use Exception for a vacation or sick time field to allow the calculation of a deduction to be positive, or the calculation of an addition to be negative.


First Invoice Number

The next available invoice number appears. You can change this number or enter a new invoice number you want to assign when printing forms.


First Invoice Number

The next available invoice number appears. You can change this number or enter a new invoice number you want to assign when printing forms.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Number of Times

This identifies the number of times you want to repeat this transaction. You can enter any number up to 22. The maximum number of times you can recur an entry depends on the transaction's original date and what period you are currently operating in. You can only enter recurring transactions within the two open fiscal years of Peachtree Accounting.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly. For events, the range is from daily to yearly.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly. For events, the range is from daily to yearly.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly. For events, the range is from daily to yearly.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly. For events, the range is from daily to yearly.


When to Recur

For customer invoices, purchases, payments, and general journal entries, you can select a range of frequencies from weekly to yearly. For events, the range is from daily to yearly.


Assign Invoice Numbers

Select this option if you want to assign reference numbers to recurring transactions. This is optional for invoices and mandatory for purchases.


Begin with #

Enter the first invoice number to assign to the recurring transaction.


Begin with #

Enter the first invoice number to assign to the recurring transaction.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Company

This column lists the chosen subsidiary companies that require a user ID and password for user access.

User ID

In this column, enter the user ID that is required for access to the subsidiary companies in the Company column.

Password

In this column, enter the password that is required for access to the subsidiary companies in the Company column.


Subsidiary Company Passwords

This window lists all chosen subsidiary companies that require user IDs and passwords for user access. The company names appear in the Company column. In the User ID and Password columns, you enter the appropriate ID and password for each subsidiary company.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Customer Note tab

In the Note text box, enter a customer or vendor note that you want to print on the form. You can choose to print the note either before or after transaction line items.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window


Internal Note tab

In the Note text box, enter a note that will be only viewed by your business employees.


Note

Select the appropriate tab, and then enter the text of the note you want to appear on the form.

Customer Note: In the Note text box, enter a customer or vendor note that you want to print on the form. You can choose to print the note either before or after transaction line items.

Statement Note: In the Note text box, enter a note that will appear on the printed statement. You can choose to have the note appear before or after the invoice reference field on the form.

Internal Note: In the Note text box, enter a note that will be only viewed by your business employees.


Note

Enter the text of a note that you want to print either before or after line items on an invoice-style form (if the note, or comment, object is present in the form's design). If you do not want the customer or vendor note to print on the form, leave the Note field blank on this tab or remove the "Full Comment" object from the form's design (not possible in First Accounting).

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Note

Enter the text of a note that you want to print either before or after line items on an invoice-style form (if the note, or comment, object is present in the form's design). If you do not want the customer or vendor note to print on the form, leave the Note field blank on this tab or remove the "Full Comment" object from the form's design (not possible in First Accounting).

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Print Note Options

If you are using the Note feature with Sales/Invoicing, Quotes, or Purchase Orders, the note text prints out on the transaction. (Quotes and Purchase Orders are not available in First Accounting.) You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after the line items.

Before Line Items: Select this option button if you want the note to print out before transaction line items on the form.

After Line Items: Select this option button if you want the note to print out after transaction line items on the form.


Print Note Options

If you are using the Note feature with Sales/Invoicing, Quotes, or Purchase Orders, the note text prints out on the transaction. (Quotes and Purchase Orders are not available in First Accounting.) You can choose to print the note either before the line items or after the line items.

Before Line Items: Select this option button if you want the note to print out before transaction line items on the form.

After Line Items: Select this option button if you want the note to print out after transaction line items on the form.


Before Line Items

Select this option button if you want the note to print out before transaction line items on the form.


After Line Items

Select this option button if you want the note to print out after transaction line items on the form.


Note

Enter the text of note that will be only viewed by your business employees. Internal notes help identify unique aspects of the transaction (for example, processing or collection information). Internal notes cannot be added to customer or vendor forms; however, they can be displayed or printed in reports.

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Note

Enter the text of note that will be only viewed by your business employees. Internal notes help identify unique aspects of the transaction (for example, processing or collection information). Internal notes cannot be added to customer or vendor forms; however, they can be displayed or printed in reports.

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Note

Select the appropriate tab, and then enter the text of the note you want to appear on the form.

Customer Note: In the Note text box, enter a customer or vendor note that you want to print on the form. You can choose to print the note either before or after transaction line items.

Statement Note: In the Note text box, enter a note that will appear on the printed statement. You can choose to have the note appear before or after the invoice reference field on the form.

Internal Note: In the Note text box, enter a note that will be only viewed by your business employees.


This note will not print on forms

Because this note is for internal use by your employees only, it will not print on the form for the customer or vendor to see.


Statement Note tab

In the Note text box, enter a note that will appear on the printed statement. You can choose to have the note appear before or after the invoice reference field on the form.


Note

Enter the text of a note that you want to print either before or after the invoice reference field on a customer statement form (if the note, or comment, object is present in the form's design). If you do not want a statement note to print on the form, leave the Note field blank on this tab or remove the "Full Comment" object from the form's design (not possible in First Accounting).

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Note

Enter the text of a note that you want to print either before or after the invoice reference field on a customer statement form (if the note, or comment, object is present in the form's design). If you do not want a statement note to print on the form, leave the Note field blank on this tab or remove the "Full Comment" object from the form's design (note possible in First Accounting).

When you have completed one line of the note and want to move on to type the next, press Crtl+Enter.


Print Note Options

The note you enter here will print out on customer statement forms. You can choose to print the note either before or after the invoice reference field.

Before Invoice Reference: Select this option button if you want the note to print out before the invoice reference field on the statement.

After Invoice Reference: Select this option button if you want the note to print out after the invoice reference field on the statement.


This note will not print on forms

Because this note is for internal use by your employees only, it will not print on the form for the customer or vendor to see.


Print Note Options

You can choose to print the note either before or after the invoice reference field on the customer statement.

Before Invoice Reference: Select this option button if you want the note to print before the transaction reference field on the form.

After Invoice Reference: Select this option button if you want the note to print after the transaction reference field on the form.


Before Invoice Reference

Select this option button if you want the note to print out before the invoice reference field on the statement.


After Invoice Reference

Select this option button if you want the note to print out after the invoice reference field on the statement.


Passwords

This tab displays subsidiary companies that require a user ID and password for financial statement access.

Company: This column lists the subsidiary companies, chosen on the Companies tab, that require a user ID and password.

User ID: In this column, enter the user ID that is required for access to the subsidiary companies in the Company column.

Password: In this column, enter the password that is required for access to the subsidiary companies in the Company column.


Available Peachtree companies

This lists all Peachtree companies in the current data path that are available for consolidation. if you add one of these companies, it will appear in the Selected subsidiary companies list box at right.


Add

To add an available company to the list of subsidiary companies, first select the company in the Available Peachtree companies list box; then select Add. The company will move to the Selected subsidiary companies list box.


Remove

To remove a company chosen to be a subsidiary company, first select the company in the Selected subsidiary companies list box; then select Remove. The company will move back to the Availalble Peachtree companies list box.


Selected subsidiary companies

This lists the companies you have chosen to be subcompanies of the new consolidated company you are creating.


Browse for More Companies

Use this to find and select available Peachtree companies that are not in the default Peachtree data path. The Open Company window will appear. Locate and select the company you want to use as a subsidiary company, and click OK. The company will then show up in the Selected subsidiary companies list box of the New Company Setup - Subsidiary Companies window.


Reconsolidate budgets

If you want to consolidate the budgets for your chosen subsidiary companies, select this button. Otherwise, the budget information will not be used to create a combined budget for the newly consolidated company.


Available Peachtree companies

This lists all Peachtree companies in the current data path that are available for consolidation. if you add one of these companies, it will appear in the Selected subsidiary companies list box at right.


Add

To add an available company to the list of subsidiary companies, first select the company in the Available Peachtree companies list box; then select Add. The company will move to the Selected subsidiary companies list box.


Remove

To remove a company chosen to be a subsidiary company, first select the company in the Selected subsidiary companies list box; then select Remove. The company will move back to the Availalble Peachtree companies list box.


Selected subsidiary companies

This lists the companies you have chosen to be subcompanies of the new consolidated company you are creating.


Browse for More Companies

Use this to find and select available Peachtree companies that are not in the default Peachtree data path. The Open Company window will appear. Locate and select the company you want to use as a subsidiary company, and click OK. The company will then show up in the Selected subsidiary companies list box of the New Company Setup - Subsidiary Companies window.


Selected subsidiary companies

This lists the companies you have chosen to be subcompanies of the new consolidated company you are creating.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Labor Distributions to Jobs

Job: From the drop-down list, select the job ID (if applicable) to which you want to charge time. To list existing jobs, type ? or click the right mouse button. You can add a new job by selecting Jobs from the Maintain menu.

Hourly/Salary Field: You can select from those hourly or salary pay level fields that have hours listed for them in the Payroll Entry window. Hourly pay rates are set up for each of these pay levels in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Hours: If this is an hourly employee, you can adjust the hours worked here.

Hourly/Salary Amount: If this is an hourly employee, you cannot directly change the hourly amount. It shows a running subtotal of the hours charged to this job. If this is a salaried employee, enter the portion of this employee's salary that should be charged to the job.


Total for the Check

This displays the check total for gross pay, which must match the sum of all amounts listed above.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Employee ID

This is the ID of the employee whose raise history you're viewing. You cannot edit this field.


Employee Name

This is the name of the employee whose raise history you're viewing. You cannot edit this field.


Employee ID

This is the ID of the employee whose raise history you're viewing. You cannot edit this field.


Employee Name

This is the name of the employee whose raise history you're viewing. You cannot edit this field.


Raise History

Raise Date: Enter or select the date of the pay raise. You can enter the date manually, or choose a date by clicking the calendar button. (The calendar appears when you place your cursor in the Raise Date field.)

Applicable Rate: From the drop-down list, select the pay rate to which you want to apply the raise (for example, Regular or Overtime pay). Note: The Applicable Rate drop-down list includes pay rates with associated general ledger accounts and pay rates that have previously been used when calculating the raise amounts and percentages.

Base Amount: When you choose a pay rate from the Applicable Rate drop-down list, its associated rate appears in the Base Amount field. The Based Amount is used when calculating the raise amounts and percentages.

Raise Amount: Enter a specific amount for the raise in the Raise Amount field. Note: You can also enter the raise as a percentage.

Raise Percentage: Enter a specific percentage for the raise in the Raise Percentage field. Note: You can also enter the raise as an amount.

New Amount: After selecting the applicable rate and entering the amount or percentage of the raise, the total of the base amount plus the raise appears in the New Amount field.

Notes: Select the Note button to enter or display a comment. You can enter a note of up to 255 characters. While typing, you do not need to press ENTER at the end of each line, as the words will wrap to the next line for you. Press CTRL+ENTER to move to the next line.


Note

You can use this window to view, add, and edit historical information about an employee's raises; however, you can't change the employee's pay rate here. Rate changes must be made on the Pay Info tab.


Note

You can use this window to view, add, and edit historical information about an employee's raises. However, you can't change the employee's pay rate here. Rate changes must be made on the Pay Info tab.


First Check Number

Before you can begin printing checks, you must enter the first check number. If you are using preprinted checks, enter the first check number printed on the check form. After printing checks, Peachtree Accounting will track check numbers and assign the next check number in sequence. You can change the starting check number at any time.


Last Check Date

Enter or select the date on which you are printing checks. After printing checks the first time, Peachtree Accounting will track the last date each check form was printed.


Cash Account

Enter or select the general ledger account ID to which you want to apply the check. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Cash Account

Enter or select the general ledger account ID to which you want to apply the check. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Cash Account

Enter or select the general ledger account ID to which you want to apply the check. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


User ID

This identifies the person who is attempting to access the company data. User IDs are case sensitive. If you are unsure of your user ID, check with your system administrator, the person who set up user records in Peachtree Accounting.

User IDs are case sensitive. Therefore, make sure that you type the user IDs exactly as they are set up in the user record. For example, User, USER, and user, are all different. If you're sure you have the right user ID and password but Peachtree isn't accepting them, check to see if your Caps Lock key is on.


Password

This is a unique code that allows the user access to company data. User IDs are case sensitive. If you are unsure of your user ID, check with your system administrator, the person who set up user records in Peachtree Accounting.

Passwords are case sensitive. Therefore, make sure that you type the password exactly as it is set up in the user record. For example, Password, PASSWORD, and password, are all different. If you're sure you have the right user ID and password but Peachtree isn't accepting them, check to see if your Caps Lock key is on.


OK

Select OK to access the company data.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


EmployEE Field Names

Use: Select this check box next to each payroll field you want included in adjusted gross when calculating the current payroll field amount during payroll entry. You cannot select the same payroll field that you are adjusting.

Field Name: Identifies the field.

Add: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as an addition; the amount will be added to gross pay, if selected.

Deduct: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as a deduction; the amount will be subtracted from gross pay, if selected


EmployEE Field Names

Use: Select this check box next to each payroll field you want included in adjusted gross when calculating the current payroll field amount during payroll entry. You cannot select the same payroll field that you are adjusting.

Field Name: Identifies the field.

Add: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as an addition; the amount will be added to gross pay, if selected.

Deduct: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as a deduction; the amount will be subtracted from gross pay, if selected.


EmployER Field Names

Use: Select this check box next to each payroll field you want included in adjusted gross when calculating the current payroll field amount during payroll entry. You cannot select the same payroll field that you are adjusting.

Field Name: Identifies the field.

Add: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as an addition; the amount will be added to gross pay, if selected.

Deduct: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as a deduction; the amount will be subtracted from gross pay, if selected.


EmployER Field Names

Use: Select this check box next to each payroll field you want included in adjusted gross when calculating the current payroll field amount during payroll entry. You cannot select the same payroll field that you are adjusting.

Field Name: Identifies the field.

Add: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as an addition; the amount will be added to gross pay, if selected.

Deduct: Indicates that the payroll field's respective tax table has been set up as a deduction; the amount will be subtracted from gross pay, if selected.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated user record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (user) displayed and enter a new one.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


User ID

This identifies the user when accessing the company data, as well as in the Audit Trail report. Enter up to 16 characters. Do not include the forward slash (/) character in your user ID. You may want to use descriptive IDs such as a person's name. Or, you can set up user IDs depending on the user's intended access rights (for example, "Administrator"). User IDs are case sensitive.

Note: If you are operating on a network, multiple individuals can access the company data using the same user ID. For example, two individuals can log on using the "Administrator" user ID at the same time. (This method is not recommended if Audit Trail is activated.)


User ID

This identifies the user when accessing the company data, as well as in the Audit Trail report. Enter up to 16 characters. Do not include the forward slash (/) character in your user ID. You may want to use descriptive IDs such as a person's name. Or, you can set up user IDs depending on the user's intended access rights (for example, "Administrator"). User IDs are case sensitive.

Note: If you are operating on a network, multiple individuals can access the company data using the same user ID. For example, two individuals can log on using the "Administrator" user ID at the same time. (This method is not recommended if Audit Trail is activated.)


Password

This is the user's secret code for accessing the company data. You enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters. Do not include the forward slash (/) character in your password. Avoid passwords that are obvious, such as birthdays or names of relatives. Passwords are case sensitive and must be unique. Two or more user records cannot have the same password.


Password

This is the user's secret code for accessing the company data. You enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters. Do not include the forward slash (/) character in your password. Avoid passwords that are obvious, such as birthdays or names of relatives. Passwords are case sensitive and must be unique. Two or more user records cannot have the same password.


Access to "Maintain Users"

Select this check box if you intend to allow the current user record to set up users, maintain passwords, and administer access rights. Typically, you would set up one user, considered to be a system administrator, with this type of access. The first user set up in Peachtree Accounting is automatically assigned this option. Additional users can be given this option. You cannot delete a user if that person is the only user with access to Maintain Users.


Inactive

Select this check box to make users inactive. When user IDs are made inactive, users cannot open this Peachtree Accounting company. When they try to log on, the system will display a message telling them to contact the system administrator. Only the system administrator can make user records active or change the modules users are allowed to access. For example, you may elect to make a user inactive if the individual has temporarily left the company or is on a leave of absence.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Program Area Control Levels

You can set up user rights (control levels) to various program areas of Peachtree Accounting. First select a program tab, then select a control level for each program area for this user. Depending on the program area selected, choose No Access, Read, Add, Edit, or Full control rights. To expand the list of program areas in the grid, double-click the triangle to the left of the program area.

Hint: To select the same control level for a major program area, make a selection in the Summary tab.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed user record, if permitted. When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Limit data access from Crystal Reports to this user only

Select this check box if you want to limit data access to Crystal reports to the current user only.

All users of Peachtree will still be able to preview or print a Crystal report. However, when any user tries to refresh the data in a Crystal report using the Refresh button in the Crystal Reports Standard toolbar, the Crystal Reports program will request a password. If the password entered does not match the password set up for one-user access, then the user will not be able to refresh report data in the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Customer Payment Terms

The default payment terms that appear are set up as part of the customer default information. If these standard payment terms are what you want to use for this customer, then select the Use Standard Terms check box (if it is not already selected). Otherwise, clear the Use Standard Terms check box to enter unique payment terms for this customer.


Use Standard Terms

Select this check box if the payment terms established in customer default information are what you want to use for this customer. Clear the Use Standard Terms check box to enter unique payment terms for this customer.


COD

Select this option if you sell items COD (cash on delivery) to this customer.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Prepaid

Select this option if you require this customer prepay for goods and services.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Due on a day next month

Select this option if you require this customer to pay invoices by a specified day of the month--for example, if all invoices are due on the 15th of each month.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the payment term.


Due in number of days

Select this option if you require this customer to pay invoices within a specific number of days--for example, if all invoices are due within 30 days of the original invoice date.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the payment term.


Due at the end of month

Select this option if you require this customer to pay invoices by the last day of the month--for example, if all March invoices are due March 31 and if all April invoices are due April 30.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the payment term.


Net due in _____ days/Due on the _____next month

If you selected the Due in # of Days option, enter the number of days beyond the invoice date before the invoice becomes past due. If you checked the Due on Day of the Month option, enter the day of the month it is due.


Net due in ... days/Due on the ... next month

If you selected the Due in # of Days option, enter the number of days beyond the invoice date before the invoice becomes past due. If you checked the Due on Day of the Month option, enter the day of the month it is due.


Net due in _____ days/Due on the _____next month

If you selected the Due in # of Days option, enter the number of days beyond the invoice date before the invoice becomes past due. If you checked the Due on Day of the Month option, enter the day of the month it is due.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which you will not allow customers to get discounts.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that you will allow this customer as a discount, if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals. For example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit you will allow for this customer. When the customer exceeds this total, a warning message will appear.


Charge Finance Charges

Select the Charge Finance Charges check box to allow finance charges to be calculated for this customer, when requested. Conditions for calculating finance charges are set up in the Customer Defaults window.

Note: Finance charges are not applied automatically in Peachtree Accounting. This is done from the Task menu, by selecting Finance Charges.


OK

Select OK to save changes, close this window and run the report.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting Customer

Enter or select the first customer in a range to calculate finance charges. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. If you want to calculate finance charges for all customers eligible, leave this field blank.

Tip: If you want finance charges for just this one customer, select the Starting Customer Only button at the bottom of the window.


Lookup

Select this button to display a list of customers.


Ending Customer

Enter or select the last customer in a range to calculate finance charges. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. If you want to calculate finance charges for all customers eligible, leave this field blank.


Lookup

Select this button to display a list of customers.


Type Mask

Optionally, enter a Customer Type by which to sort customers. Remember that Peachtree Accounting is case sensitive; entering NORTH won't include customers with customer types of "North" or "north."


Date

Enter or select the date for which you want to calculate the finance charges. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Summary Report Only

Select this option to print the finance charge total for each customer eligible. Clear this option to print a detailed report that will not list each invoice past due.


Prepare Journal Entries

Select this option to have Peachtree Accounting apply finance charges calculated to customer's balances.


Report Order

You can choose to sort the report by customer ID or customer Name.


Report Order

You can choose to sort the report by customer ID or customer Name.


Starting Customer

Enter or select the first customer in a range to calculate finance charges. To select a customer, click the lookup button to the right, or type ? in the field.  If you want to calculate finance charges for all customers eligible, leave this field blank.

Tip: If you want finance charges for just this one customer, select the Starting Customer Only button at the bottom of the window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to begin testing the selected utility.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you run one utility option at a time. Also, you should always back up your company data before running an Integrity Check utility.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Integrity Check

This is a utility that allows you to verify if any of your data files have been corrupted. Always contact Peachtree Technical Support before you use the Integrity Check utility. A technician will instruct you on which test(s) to run.

Note: It is vital that you back up your company before you use the Integrity Check; if the procedure is not successful or your computer locks up during a test, you may lose valuable data.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


File Statistics

This identifies the number of records and the current size of each data file in your company.

Select OK to close this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Choose an item from the list.


Customer

This is the ID of the customer whose invoice is showing a problem.


Customer

This is the ID of the customer whose invoice is showing a problem.


Invoice

In Peachtree Accounting, you can run synchronization tests to examine payment transactions applied to invoices to see if they match the amount that the invoice shows to have been paid and to match all electronic bill payments to the amounts applied to the invoices they are paying. Select this button if an error is detected during the test and the invoice is correct. This selection indicates there is a problem with the associated payment.


Payments

In Peachtree Accounting, you can run synchronization tests to examine payment transactions applied to invoices to see if they match the amount that the invoice shows to have been paid and to match all electronic bill payments to the amounts applied to the invoices they are paying. Select this button if an error is detected during the test and payments are correct. This selection indicates there is a problem with the associated invoice.


PeachLink Order Information

Field: These identify the type of information collected.

PeachLink Purchase Order: This lists information collected by PeachLink about the customer from the Internet. Check this information against the Peachtree information to keep your records up-to-date.

Peachtree Customer Information: This lists current data entered in Peachtree associated with the selected customer ID.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this transaction. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


New

Select this button to enter a new customer record in Peachtree Accounting. Once you have created the new customer record, save it; close the Maintain Customers window; and choose the new customer ID from the list in the Assign Customer ID to PeachLink Customer window.


Continue

Select Continue to assign the customer ID and proceed to the next step: posting the sales order in Peachtree Accounting.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made. You are given the option to cancel the current order or the entire process.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name of a vendor you don't want to include as a vendor record. If the vendor is entered, this field appears automatically.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor name set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor name cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter a name to print on the check (up to 30 alphanumeric characters) here. This can be a company name or an individual's name.


Address, Line 1

This identifies the vendor address line 1 set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


Address, Line 2

This identifies the vendor address line 2 set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


City, State, Zip

This identifies the vendor's city, state and Zip code set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


City, State, Zip

This identifies the vendor's city, state and Zip code set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


City, State, Zip

This identifies the vendor's city, state and Zip code set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


Country

This identifies the vendor's country set up in the vendor record. If you selected a vendor ID, the vendor address cannot be edited here, but it can be changed in the Maintain Vendors window.

If you did not select a vendor ID, enter the vendor address here.


Your Name

Enter the name of the person a technical support representative should contact when assisting you.


Your Company

Enter the name of your company, if different from the name set up in Maintain Company Information window.


Address

Enter the address where your company is located, if different from the address set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


Address

Enter the address where your company is located, if different from the address set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


Telephone

Enter your company telephone number that a technical support representative can use to contact you, if different from the telephone number set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


FAX Number

Enter the telephone number of your company's fax machine that a technical support representative can use to contact you, if different from the fax number set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


Category

This identifies the type of request you want to submit to Peachtree technical support. Choose between Problem, Comment, Question, or Enhancement.


Description

This identifies your problem, comment, or enhancement request that you want Peachtree Software to address. Enter up to 500 characters. Press CTRL+ENTER to start a new paragraph.


Include in Printout

Select this option to include text from your computer's PXXXXX.INI, a setup file used by Peachtree Accounting. The letters and numbers that appear correspond to the version and release of Peachtree you're working with. This text will append to the technical support information sheet.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record


Print

Select this button to print the technical support information sheet that includes information about your company data as well as computer setup.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed transaction, if permitted.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select the Print button

Please select the Print button and print out the information contained in the Technical Support Information file so that you can be able to give that information to Peachtree Client Support Services when you contact them.


Address

Enter the address where your company is located, if different from the address set up in the Maintain Company Information window.


Country

Enter the country where your company is. (Example: USA.)


E-mail

Enter your e-mail address.


Customer ID

Enter your customer ID.


Note Text

You can enter a note up to 250 characters. To enter a note, click on the large text box; press TAB until the cursor is in the box; or press ALT+T. Note that while typing, you do not need to press ENTER at the end of each line, as the words will wrap to the next line for you. If you do press ENTER, text entry will end, and the main screen will return. Press CTRL+ENTER to move to the next line.

Use this to keep messages about your customers, vendors, employees, and so forth.


OK

Select OK to save changes and close this window


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Note Text

You can enter a note up to 250 characters. To enter a note, click on the large text box; press TAB until the cursor is in the box; or press ALT+T. Note that while typing, you do not need to press ENTER at the end of each line, as the words will wrap to the next line for you. If you do press ENTER, text entry will end, and the main screen will return. Press CTRL+ENTER to move to the next line.

Use this to keep messages about your customers, vendors, employees, and so forth.


Note Text

You can enter a note up to 250 characters. Use this to keep messages about your customers, vendors, employees, and so forth.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated job record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (job) displayed and enter a new one.


Note

Select this button to enter or display a comment about the job. The Note button looks different when a note exists; text appears on the yellow note.


General Tab

Select this tab to establish the job supervisor, start and end date, customer, type, and percentage of completion. You can also access and enter job beginning balances here.


Custom Fields Tab

Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Job Defaults window.


Estimated Expenses/Revenues Tab

Select this tab to enter and track estimated expenses and revenues for a particular job and provide comparisons against your actual costs/revenues.


Maintain Jobs

General: Select this tab to establish the job supervisor, start and end date, customer, type, and percentage of completion. You can also access and enter job beginning balances here.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Job Defaults window.

Estimated Expenses/Revenues: Select this tab to enter and track estimated expenses and revenues for a particular job and provide comparisons against your actual costs/revenues.


Job ID

This identifies the job in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Jobs are projects, typically associated with customers, that you can set up in order to track associated expenses and revenue. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new job ID. For existing jobs, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Job ID field) to select a job from the drop-down list.

Job IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different job IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use commas or *, ?, or + in the code.


Description

This briefly describes the job and displays on lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Use Phases

Select this check box if you want to establish phases with this job. This allows you to track more advanced components of the job including cost types, if needed.

Note: If you have previously entered estimated expenses and revenues for this job before you assigned phases to the job, then these entries would be lost when you select this check box.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this job during year-end processing, select this check box. If you have finished a job, you may want to make it inactive. If you try to post any transactions to an inactive job, a message warns that the job is inactive. You can still update the job information in the Maintain Jobs window, if needed.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, jobs that are not associated with existing transactions and are tagged as inactive will be eligible to purge.


Supervisor

This identifies the person in charge of the job at your company. Enter up to 30 characters.


Supervisor

This identifies the person in charge of the job at your company. Enter up to 30 characters.


For Customer

This identifies the customer to whom the job is to be assigned. This is a required field if you want to use the Reimbursable Expenses feature of Sales/Invoicing. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


For Customer

This identifies the customer to whom the job is to be assigned. This is a required field if you want to use the Reimbursable Expenses feature of Sales/Invoicing. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Start Date

Enter or select the date the job started or you expect the job to start. It is used only for report purposes. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Start Date

Enter or select the date the job started or you expect the job to start. It is used only for report purposes. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


End Date

Enter or select the date on which the job was completed. It is used only for report purposes. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


End Date

Enter or select the date on which the job was completed. It is used only for report purposes. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Job Type

Entering a job type is a way for you to group your jobs into different categories. For example, you may want to enter Install for new installation jobs and Repair for maintenance jobs. You can use this to filter most job costing reports, except for the Phase List and the Cost Code List, to print only information dealing with the job type(s) you specify. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Install" when filtering job types in reports, jobs that are identified as "install" or "INSTALL" will not be included.


Job Type

Entering a job type is a way for you to group your jobs into different categories. For example, you may want to enter Install for new installation jobs and Repair for maintenance jobs. You can use this to filter most job costing reports, except for the Phase List and the Cost Code List, to print only information dealing with the job type(s) you specify. You can enter up to eight characters.

Note: This field is case sensitive. If you enter "Install" when filtering job types in reports, jobs that are identified as "install" or "INSTALL" will not be included.


PO Number

Enter the customer's purchase order number for the job here, if known.


PO Number

Enter the customer's purchase order number for the job here, if known.


% Complete

Enter the percentage of the job that is complete. You can update this at any time. This field is used only for report purposes.


% Complete

Enter the percentage of the job that is complete. You can update this at any time. This field is used only for report purposes.


Job Beginning Balances

You can enter the beginning balances for each individual job as well as keep track of the beginning balances of the other jobs you have entered. Select the arrow button to enter job beginning balances.


Job Beginning Balances

You can enter the beginning balances for each individual job as well as keep track of the beginning balances of the other jobs you have entered. Select the arrow button to enter job beginning balances.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Job Custom Fields

Custom Fields allow you to set up and store data unique to your business. If you have set up labels for custom fields in Job Defaults, you can enter the information for the fields here. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters.

Tip: You can add these customized fields to job costing reports.


Estimated Expenses/Revenues

Phase ID: Enter or select the phase ID to associate with the estimated revenue or expense. To select an existing phase, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Phase ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new phase, press + in the Phase ID field.

Cost Code ID: Enter or select the cost code to associate with the estimated revenue or expense for the phase. If you entered a phase ID that doesn't use cost codes, then this field is not available. To select an existing cost code, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Cost Code ID field) from the drop-down list. To enter a new cost code, press + in the Cost Code ID field.

# of Units: Enter the number of units used in this phase/cost code combination.

Expenses: Enter the estimated expenses for this phase/cost code combination.

Revenues: Enter the estimated revenues from this phase/cost code combination. If you do not want to track revenues by phase and/or cost code, create a phase code called Revenue, and use it for your job income.


Estimated Expenses

Enter the expenses (costs) anticipated from this job. This field is optional and is used only for report purposes.


Estimated Expenses

Enter the expenses (costs) anticipated from this job. This field is optional and is used only for report purposes.


Estimated Revenues

Enter the revenues (income) anticipated from this job. This field is optional and is used only for report purposes.


Estimated Revenues

Enter the revenues (income) anticipated from this job. This field is optional and is used only for report purposes.


Total

This identifies the sum of estimated expenses (costs) and revenue (income) entered for this job.


Total

This identifies the sum of estimated expenses (costs) entered for this job.


Total

This identifies the sum of estimated revenue (income) entered for this job.


Use Phases

Select the Use Phases check box if you want to establish phases with this job. This allows you to track more advanced components of the job including cost types, if needed.

Note: If you have previously entered estimated expenses and revenues for this job before you assigned phases to the job, then these entries would be lost when you select this check box.


Maintain Jobs

General: Select this tab to establish the job supervisor, start and end date, customer, type, and percentage of completion. You can also access and enter job beginning balances here.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Job Defaults window.

Estimated Expenses/Revenues: Select this tab to enter and track estimated expenses and revenues for a particular job and provide comparisons against your actual costs/revenues.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a job record if there are transactions entered that use the job ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting Job

Specifies the starting job. Select the job you want to start with from the list.


Starting Job

Select this button to display a list of jobs.


Ending Job

Specifies the ending job. Select the job you want to end with from the list.


Ending Job

Select this button to display a list of jobs.


Mask

Masks (or filters out) the records you do not want to include. Enter the appropriate characters to mask these records and display the ones you want to include.


First Date

Specifies the first date. Enter or select the date you want to start with.


Last Date

Specifies the last date. Enter or select the date you want to end with.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Range

Select this button to clear a range of checks that you specify.


Print

Select this button to print the Current Account Reconciliation report.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Account and Date Info

Account to Reconcile: Enter or select the G/L account to reconcile here. Typically, bank accounts, cash accounts (such as petty cash), and credit card accounts are reconciled.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account ID field) from the drop-down list.

Statement Date: Enter or select the closing date from the bank's statement and press the Enter key. The statement closing date must be within the current accounting period.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Find

Select this button to search for a transaction in either the Checks and Bank Debits or Deposits and Bank Credits box.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

All (Select): This button lets you clear all listed transactions (place a check in all Clear check boxes). This means that all transactions have been included in the bank statement.

All (None): This button lets you remove the check from all Clear check boxes. This means that none of the transactions has been included in the bank statement.


Detail

Highlight a transaction in either the Checks and Bank Debits or Deposits and Bank Credits box, and then select this button to view transaction detail.


Adjust

Select this button to enter additional withdrawal or deposit adjustments. For example, you may want to enter service charges that appear on your bank statements


Account

Enter or select the G/L account you want to use as the offsetting account. Since interest was applied to the bank account that you are reconciling, select an interest income account. Note: Do not select the same account that you are reconciling.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account field) from the drop-down list.


Cleared increases

These boxes display the sum of all increases (for example, deposited customer receipts) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Interest income

Enter total interest income received on the displayed account.


Date

Enter or select the date when the interest income on the account was received. The date must be in the current accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the General Ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Date

Enter or select the date when the interest income on the account was received. The date must be in the current accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the General Ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Statement Ending Balance

Before reconciling an account, enter the final balance from the statement and press the ENTER key.


Account

Enter or select the G/L account you want to use as the offsetting account. Since interest was applied to the bank account that you are reconciling, select an interest income account. Note: Do not select the same account that you are reconciling.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account field) from the drop-down list.


Cleared increases

These boxes display the sum of all increases (for example, deposited customer receipts) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Checks and Bank Debits

New transactions that credit the G/L account appear here. Also, old transactions not cleared in prior accounting periods appear. For each transaction, the reference number (check number in most cases), amount, date, and vendor/payee appear. Select the Clear check box to indicate that the transaction listed here (in Peachtree Accounting) is also listed on the monthly statement or report. Once cleared, these transactions will not appear in Account Reconciliation for future accounting periods.

If you void a check in Peachtree Accounting, the original check will appear in the Checks and Bank Debits section. The void (reverse) transaction will appear in the Deposits and Bank Credits section. Both should be cleared during reconciliation in order to balance your account.

Note: If the transactions that appear in this area are posted direct deposit paychecks, they will appear as a single-sum entry totaled by date. The Reference/Check Number for the direct deposit entry will be prefaced by "DirectPay"--for example, DirectPay041903 (Peachtree Accounting, Peachtree Complete, and Peachtree Premium Accounting only).


Deposits and and Bank Credits

New transactions that debit the G/L account appear here. Also, old transactions not cleared in prior accounting periods appear. The reference number (for example, deposit ticket ID), amount, date, and description appear for each transaction. Select the Clear check box to indicate that the transaction listed here (in Peachtree Accounting) is also listed on the monthly statement or report. Once cleared, these transactions will not appear in Account Reconciliation for future accounting periods.

If two or more receipts entered in Peachtree Accounting have the same deposit ticket ID, they are combined and appear as one line item. Daily receipts are typically grouped together as one daily deposit. Therefore, all receipts entered for a particular day appear as one deposit transaction in Account Reconciliation. To reconcile these transactions separately, exit Account Reconciliation and enter unique reference IDs for these transactions.

Note: If you enter beginning transactions with the same reference, they appear separately in this area.


Beginning Transactions

These are transactions made prior to starting Peachtree Accounting that have not yet cleared the bank (not appeared on the bank statement). They are primarily used to resolve unreconcilable differences during the first account reconciliation.


Beginning Transactions arrow button

Select this button to account for transactions made prior to starting Peachtree Accounting that have not yet cleared the bank (not appeared on the bank statement). They are primarily used to resolve unreconcilable differences during the first account reconciliation.


Account

Enter or select the G/L account you want to use as the offsetting account. Since a service charge was applied to the bank account that you are reconciling, select a service charge expense account. Note: Do not select the same account that you are reconciling.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account field) from the drop-down list.


Account

Enter or select the G/L account you want to use as the offsetting account. Since a service charge was applied to the bank account that you are reconciling, select a service charge expense account. Note: Do not select the same account that you are reconciling.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account field) from the drop-down list.


Date

Enter or select the date when the service charge on the account was incurred. The date must be in the current accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the General Ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Date

Enter or select the date when the service charge on the account was incurred. The date must be in the current accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the General Ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Cleared decreases

These boxes display the sum of all decreases (for example, vendor checks) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Service charges

Enter total service charges incurred by the displayed account.


Cleared decreases

These boxes display the sum of all decreases (for example, vendor checks) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Account to Reconcile

Enter or select the G/L account to reconcile here. Typically, bank accounts, cash accounts (such as petty cash), and credit card accounts are reconciled.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account ID field) from the drop-down list.


Account to Reconcile

Enter or select the G/L account to reconcile here. Typically, bank accounts, cash accounts (such as petty cash), and credit card accounts are reconciled.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account ID field) from the drop-down list.


Account to Reconcile

Enter or select the G/L account to reconcile here. Typically, bank accounts, cash accounts (such as petty cash), and credit card accounts are reconciled.

To select an account, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Account ID field) from the drop-down list.


Statement Date

Enter or select the closing date from the bank's statement and press the Enter key. The statement closing date must be within the current accounting period.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Statement Date

Enter or select the closing date from the bank's statement and press the Enter key. The statement closing date must be within the current accounting period.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Checks and Bank Debits

New transactions that credit the G/L account appear here. Also, old transactions not cleared in prior accounting periods appear. For each transaction, the reference number (check number in most cases), amount, date, and vendor/payee appear. Select the Clear check box to indicate that the transaction listed here (in Peachtree Accounting) is also listed on the monthly statement or report. Once cleared, these transactions will not appear in Account Reconciliation for future accounting periods.

If you void a check in Peachtree Accounting, the original check will appear in the Checks and Bank Debits section. The void (reverse) transaction will appear in the Deposits and Bank Credits section. Both should be cleared during reconciliation in order to balance your account.

Note: If the transactions that appear in this area are posted direct deposit paychecks, they will appear as a single-sum entry totaled by date. The Reference/Check Number for the direct deposit entry will be prefaced by "DirectPay"--for example, DirectPay041903 (Peachtree Accounting, Peachtree Complete, and Peachtree Premium Accounting only).


Service charges

Enter total service charges incurred by the displayed account.


Cleared decreases

These boxes display the sum of all decreases (for example, vendor checks) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Deposits and Bank Credits

New transactions that debit the G/L account appear here. Also, old transactions not cleared in prior accounting periods appear. The reference number (for example, deposit ticket ID), amount, date, and description appear for each transaction. Select the Clear check box to indicate that the transaction listed here (in Peachtree Accounting) is also listed on the monthly statement or report. Once cleared, these transactions will not appear in Account Reconciliation for future accounting periods.

If two or more receipts entered in Peachtree Accounting have the same deposit ticket ID, they are combined and appear as one line item. Daily receipts are typically grouped together as one daily deposit. Therefore, all receipts entered for a particular day appear as one deposit transaction in Account Reconciliation. To reconcile these transactions separately, exit Account Reconciliation and enter unique reference IDs for these transactions.

Note: If you enter beginning transactions with the same reference, they appear separately in this area.


Interest income

Enter total interest income received on the displayed account.


Cleared increases

These boxes display the sum of all increases (for example, deposited customer receipts) to the account that have been cleared in the Account Reconciliation window.


Statement Ending Balance

Before reconciling an account, enter the final balance from the statement and press the ENTER key.


Outstanding Checks

This section displays the sum of all checks and credits in the Account Reconciliation window in which the Clear check box is not selected. Uncleared transactions are those entered in Peachtree Accounting but not listed on the statement.


Outstanding Checks

This section displays the sum of all checks and credits in the Account Reconciliation window in which the Clear check box is not selected. Uncleared transactions are those entered in Peachtree Accounting but not listed on the statement.


Deposits in Transit

This section displays the sum of all deposits and debits in the Account Reconciliation window in which the Clear check box is not selected. Uncleared transactions are those entered in Peachtree Accounting but not listed on the statement.


Deposits in Transit

This section displays the sum of all deposits and debits in the Account Reconciliation window in which the Clear check box is not selected. Uncleared transactions are those entered in Peachtree Accounting but not listed on the statement.


G/L System Balance

This is the Peachtree Accounting general ledger balance as of the statement date for the account you are reconciling.

Important: If you are using the batch method, post your accounts to the general ledge before you reconcile. This ensures that you are using up-to-date information.


G/L System Balance

This is the Peachtree Accounting general ledger balance as of the statement date for the account you are reconciling.

Important: If you are using the batch method, post your accounts to the general ledge before you reconcile. This ensures that you are using up-to-date information.


Unreconciled Difference

This is the difference between the statement ending balance and the G/L system balance, less outstanding checks (credits entered in Peachtree but not included on the statement) and including deposits in transit (debits entered in Peachtree but not included on the statement).

When all transactions listed on the bank statement are entered and cleared in Peachtree Accounting and outstanding transactions have been accounted for, the unreconciled difference should be zero (0.00). If not, check the bank statement to make sure that each transaction listed is also entered in Peachtree Accounting. For example, a service charge listed on the statement may need to be entered in Peachtree Accounting. To quickly do this, select the Adjust button.


Unreconciled Difference

This is the difference between the statement ending balance and the G/L system balance, less outstanding checks (credits entered in Peachtree but not included on the statement) and including deposits in transit (debits entered in Peachtree but not included on the statement).

When all transactions listed on the bank statement are entered and cleared in Peachtree Accounting and outstanding transactions have been accounted for, the unreconciled difference should be zero (0.00). If not, check the bank statement to make sure that each transaction listed is also entered in Peachtree Accounting. For example, a service charge listed on the statement may need to be entered in Peachtree Accounting. To quickly do this, select the Adjust button.


Clear Checks From

Enter the first check number to clear in a range.


Clear Checks To

Enter the last check number to clear in a range.


OK

Select OK to clear checks based on the range entered.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Account to Reconcile

This identifies the G/L account you selected to reconcile in the Account Reconciliation window.


Account to Reconcile

This identifies the G/L account you selected to reconcile in the Account Reconciliation window.


Statement Date

This identifies the closing date from the bank's statement you entered on the Account Reconciliation window.


Statement Date

This identifies the closing date from the bank's statement you entered on the Account Reconciliation window.


Beginning Withdrawals/Additional Withdrawals

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Beginning Withdrawals/Additional Withdrawals

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Beginning Withdrawals/Additional Withdrawals

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Beginning Deposits/Additional Deposits

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Beginning Deposits/Additional Deposits

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Beginning Deposits/Additional Deposits

Amount: Enter the amount that corresponds to the adjustment or beginning transaction.

Description: Enter a brief description that describes the purpose or nature of the transaction.

Reference: Enter the check number, deposit ticket ID, or other reference that identifies this transaction. Avoid duplicate references, (for example, DEPOSIT or CASH). Each reference should be unique.

Date: Enter the date when the outstanding transaction took place. The date must be in the current or previous accounting period. Note: Beginning transactions are typically dated prior to the general ledger beginning balance date (usually just prior to the first day of the first period you are entering data in Peachtree Accounting).


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated phase record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (job phase) displayed and enter a new one.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type for the phase.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type for the phase


Phase ID

This identifies the phase in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Phases break jobs down into segments determined by time period or by the type of work being done or by any other criteria you may have. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new phase ID. For existing phases, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Phase ID field) to select a phase from the drop-down list.

Phase IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different phase IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use commas or *, ?, or + in the code.


Description

This briefly describes the phase and appears on lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Use Cost Codes

Select this check box if you want to use cost codes with this phase. If you do not use cost codes with this phase, you must select a cost type for the phase.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this phase during year-end processing, select this check box. If you have finished a job, you may want to make the phase inactive. If you try to post any transactions to an inactive phase, a message warns that the phase is inactive. You can still update the phase information in the Maintain Phases window, if needed.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, phases that are not associated with existing transactions and are tagged as inactive will be eligible to purge.


Cost Type

Select a cost type from the drop-down list to show whether the cost was incurred by labor, equipment, material, subcontractor, or other. The default is labor. If the Use Cost Codes check box is selected, then this field is inaccessible. The cost type used will be the one specified for the cost code you use with this phase. If you clear the Use Cost Codes check box, then you must select a Cost Type.


Cost Type

Select a cost type from the drop-down list to show whether the cost was incurred by labor, equipment, material, subcontractor, or other. The default is labor. If the Use Cost Codes check box is selected, then this field is inaccessible. The cost type used will be the one specified for the cost code you use with this phase. If you clear the Use Cost Codes check box, then you must select a Cost Type.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type for the phase.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted. When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a phase record if there are transactions entered that use the phase ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated cost code record.


New

Select this button to clear the record (cost code) displayed and enter a new one.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type.


Cost ID

This identifies the cost code in lookup lists, transactions, and reports. A cost code identifies a specific cost (or category/task) within a phase and provides a greater level of detail for the job. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new cost ID. For existing cost codes, click the lookup button (or press ? in the Cost ID field) to select a cost code from the drop-down list.

Cost IDs are case sensitive; codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different cost IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. You cannot use commas or *, ?, or + in the code.


Description

This briefly describes the cost code and displays on lookup lists, transactions, and reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Inactive

If you plan to purge this cost code during year-end processing, select this check box. If you try to post any transactions to an inactive cost code, a message warns that the cost code is inactive.

Important: After closing the fiscal year, cost codes that are not associated with existing phases and transactions and are tagged as inactive will be eligible to purge.


Cost Type

Select a cost type from the drop-down list to define whether the cost was incurred by labor, equipment, material, subcontractor, or other. The default is labor.


Cost Type

Select a cost type from the drop-down list to define whether the cost was incurred by labor, equipment, material, subcontractor, or other. The default is labor.


General Tab

Select this tab to set the cost type.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a cost code record if there are transactions entered that use the cost code ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated tax table.


Find

Select this button to search for text in the tax table list within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next tax table, if any, that includes the text to be found. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Table

Select this button to set up gross pay and withholding limits for the tax table. This is only used by the Table function of the tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box.

If your formula does use the Table function, then refer to User's Guide for further information.


Tax Table List

Tax ID: This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields.

Tax Name: This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year].

Government: This identifies the type of tax table (federal, state, or local).

Filing Status: This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status.


Tax Table List

Tax ID: This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields.

Tax Name: This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year].

Government: This identifies the type of tax table (federal, state, or local).

Filing Status: This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status.


Tax ID

If you plan to enter a new tax table, enter an ID that is not already in the Tax Table list. You may want to follow the naming conventions of Peachtree Accounting and start the ID with the two-letter postal abbreviation for your state.


Tax Name

The name you choose for your tax table is important because it allows Peachtree Accounting to identify which payroll tax table to use for a particular field. The name has two parts separated by a single space:

Calculation Name: This is the name that you enter as the calculation name.

Payroll Year: This is the last two digits of the calendar year to which this tax table applies.

Hint: You can look at the sample company that comes with Peachtree Accounting for examples.


Filing Status

If this calculation is to be used for all employees regardless of filing status, select "All Filing Statuses" from the drop-down list. If you choose a status other than this, you can create multiple tax tables with the same name, one for each possible filing status.


Appears on Payroll Tax Report Menus

Select this check box to have this calculation appear on the Payroll Tax Report menu or to have the payroll field which uses this calculation appear on the Exception Report. The Taxable_Gross variable must be included in the formula when selecting this check box.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State, or Local.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State, or Local.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's federal, state, or local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Choose one of the following options: Federal, State, or Local.


Locality

Enter the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee's State locality code matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry.

Leave the field blank if you want the tax table calculated for all state locality values.


Locality

Enter the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee's Local locality code matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry.

Leave the field blank if you want the tax table calculated for all local locality values.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete an account record if there are transactions that use that account ID.


Formula

The Formula box contains the equations you used to actually calculate taxes. In most cases, you will not have to do anything here; Peachtree Accounting supplies the equations for most types of taxes. For further information, see the Payroll chapter in your User's Guide.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Deduction

Select this option to subtract the calculated amount from the gross.


Addition

Select this option to add the calculated amount to the gross.


Exception

Select this option for a positive or negative number to be allowed in Payroll calculations. Use Exception for a vacation or sick time field to allow the calculation of a deduction to be positive, or the calculation of an addition to be negative.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting Vendor

Specifies the starting vendor for whom to print the 1099 forms. Select the starting vendor from the drop-down list.


Lower Limit to Print

Specifies the lowest dollar amount for which you want to print the 1099 form, for example, $600.00. In this case, the system will print 1099s for vendors from whom your company purchased $600.00 or more in goods and services. Enter the lower limit to print in this field.


Year to Print

Select this option to print 1099s for the specified year.


Year to Print

Select this option to print 1099s for the specified year.


Starting Vendor Only

Select this button to print the 1099 for the starting vendor only.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to close this window and post (or unpost) the selected journal entries to the general ledger.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Select Journals to Post/Unpost

Select All Journals or choose specific journals to post (or unpost) entries to the general ledger.


All Journals

Select this check box to post (or unpost) each journal to the general ledger.


Cash Disbursements Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all payments to the general ledger.


Cash Receipts Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all receipts to the general ledger.


General Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all General Journal adjustments to the general ledger.


Inventory Adjustments Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all inventory adjustments to the general ledger.


Assemblies Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all assembly adjustments (build/unbuild) to the general ledger.


Payroll Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all payroll transactions to the general ledger.


Purchase Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all purchase invoices to the general ledger.


Sales Journal

Select this check box to post (or unpost) all sales invoice transactions to the general ledger.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that fits the find text. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Sales Tax Code List

Sales Tax Code: This code identifies the sales tax.

Description: This describes the sales tax.

Tax Freight: If your tax authority requires you to add sales tax to freight charges that customers pay for shipping, an X appears in this column. Note: When setting up tax codes, for all tax authorities who require the addition of tax freight, select the Tax Freight check box.


Sales Tax Code List

Sales Tax Code: This code identifies the sales tax.

Description: This describes the sales tax.

Tax Freight: If your tax authority requires you to add sales tax to freight charges that customers pay for shipping, an X appears in this column. Note: When setting up tax codes, for all tax authorities who require the addition of tax freight, select the Tax Freight check box.


Sales Tax Code ID

Sales tax codes are made up of a combination of sales tax authorities and are typically based on the locality of the sale. The sales tax code ID identifies the sales tax code in lookup lists, sales transactions, and reports. Enter up to eight alphanumeric characters for the tax code ID. You may want to use descriptive IDs such as location.

For example, your company may sell an item in a metro area that requires 6% sales tax (4% city, 1% state, and 1 % transportation). The Metro sales tax code combines the three tax authorities to calculate a single percentage.

For more information on setting up sales taxes, select Help.


Sales Tax Code Description

You can enter a description of up to 30 characters. You may want to enter the rate percentage (for example, five percent) or the location.


Sales Tax Authority List

This lists the tax authorities (for example, state, county, and city) that are included in this sales tax code. For each line enter or select sales tax authorities to include in the sales tax code. To display a list of existing sales tax codes, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new sales tax code, type + or double-click the field, which displays the Maintain Sales Tax Authorities window.

Note: Every sales tax code must have at least one sales tax authority component.


Total Sales Tax Rate

This is the sum of all sales tax authority rates listed that, when combined, represent the total sales tax rate for this sales tax code.

If one or more of the listed sales tax authority rates is based on a formula, then this field will display the word Formula.


Tax Freight

Select this check box if you are required to add sales tax to any freight charges that your customers pay for shipping services. This requirement varies from state to state. Check with your local sales tax authority to be sure.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: If the record has outstanding transactions associated with it, you will not be allowed to delete the record. For example, you cannot delete a sales tax code if there are invoices or receipts that use that code.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that fits the find text. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Sales Tax Authority List

ID: This code identifies the sales tax authority.

Description: This describes the sales tax authority.

Account: This is the general ledger account (usually Sales Tax Payable) to which you'll post the amounts of this sales tax authority.

Rate: This is the tax percent for the tax authority.


Sales Tax Authority List

ID: This code identifies the sales tax authority.

Description: This describes the sales tax authority.

Account: This is the general ledger account (usually Sales Tax Payable) to which you'll post the amounts of this sales tax authority.

Rate: This is the tax percent for the tax authority.


Sales Tax Authority ID

Sales tax authorities are individual entities to whom you pay sales taxes (for example, city tax, county tax, state tax, or transportation tax). The sales tax authority ID identifies the sales tax authority in lookup lists and reports. Enter up to eight alphanumeric characters for the tax authority ID. You may want to use descriptive IDs such as city, state, or county.

Note: Sales tax codes are made up of a combination of sales tax authorities and are typically based on the locality of the sale. For example, your company may sell an item in a metro area that requires 6% sales tax (4% city, 1% state, and 1 % transportation). The sales tax code combines the tax authorities to calculate a single percentage.


Sales Tax Authority Description

You can enter a description of up to 30 characters. You may want to enter the rate percentage (for example, one percent) or the location.


Tax Rate

This is the tax percent. For example, entering 1. will give you a tax rate of 1 percent. If you enter 1 without the decimal point, the percentage will be .01.


Tax Payable To

In most cases, this will be the state that you have already set up as a vendor. This is the entity you pay. With the exception of Louisiana, where local tax authorities collect their own sales taxes, the states collect county and municipal taxes. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Tax Payable To

In most cases, this will be the state that you have already set up as a vendor. This is the entity you pay. With the exception of Louisiana, where local tax authorities collect their own sales taxes, the states collect county and municipal taxes. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Tax Payable G/L Account

This is the general ledger account to which you'll post the amounts of this sales tax authority. If all of your sales tax is payable to your state government, you may only want to have one sales tax G/L account. If you also sell items taxed by the federal government, you may want to set up an additional account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Sales Tax Payable G/L Account

This is the general ledger account to which you'll post the amounts of this sales tax authority. If all of your sales tax is payable to your state government, you may only want to have one sales tax G/L account. If you also sell items taxed by the federal government, you may want to set up an additional account.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed record, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the records.

Note: You cannot delete a sales tax authority associated with an existing sales tax code.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Single Tax Rate

Select this option button if the tax rate is single (a percentage of the total sales amount).


Formula

Select this option button if the sales tax rate is two-tier or incorporates a dollar limit imposed by the tax authority.


Based on

Choose whether to apply the sales tax formula to total taxable sales or to each taxable line item of the sale.


up to $

Enter the dollar limit, imposed by the sales tax authority, that is taxed at the first percentage rate.


charge

Enter the tax rate (percentage) at which the dollar limit imposed by the tax authority is taxed.


above that charge

If the sales tax is two-tier, enter the tax rate (percentage) that applies to the sales amount over and above the imposed dollar limit.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Posting Method

Batch Posting: Transactions are saved by the program and then posted in a group. When you use this method, you can print registers and check the batch of transactions before posting journals.

Real-Time Posting: Transactions are posted to the general ledger as they are entered and saved. This method can save you time and is best for most business and network situations.


Posting Method

Batch Posting: Transactions are saved by the program and then posted in a group. When you use this method, you can print registers and check the batch of transactions before posting journals.

Real-Time Posting: Transactions are posted to the general ledger as they are entered and saved. This method can save you time and is best for most business and network situations.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Accrual

Select this option to specify accrual-basis accounting for your company.


Cash

Select this option to specify cash-basis accounting for your company.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the process.


Go Back

Select this button to go back to the previous window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Chart of Accounts

This gauge shows the percentage of company Chart of Accounts information already copied.


Accounting Periods

This gauge shows the percentage of company accounting periods information already copied.


General Ledger

This gauge shows the percentage of General Ledger information already copied.


Statement Formats

This gauge shows the percentage of company statement format information already copied.


Customer Defaults

This gauge shows the percentage of company customer default information already copied.


Vendor Defaults

This gauge shows the percentage of company vendor default information already copied.


Employee Defaults

This gauge shows the percentage of company employee default information already copied.


Item Defaults

This gauge shows the percentage of company item default information already copied.


Job Defaults

This gauge shows the percentage of company job default information already copied.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Go Back

Select this button to go back to the previous window.


Retained Earnings Account

Identifies the retained earnings account you want to use for your company. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to begin the process of converting your QuickBooks company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


OK

Select OK to begin the process of converting your QuickBooks company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


OK

Select OK to begin the process of converting your QuickBooks company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to set up standard payroll fields and establish employee defaults.

Note: If you are not subject to United States payroll, select Cancel. You will have to set up payroll fields manually.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter or select a two-character state abbreviation from the drop-down list. This list includes the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).  If you are not subject to United States payroll, select Cancel. You will have to set up payroll fields manually.

Note: If you have employees that live in a different state, you can modify their individual setup.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Unemployment Percent for your Company

Enter the percentage for unemployment taxes required by the state for your company. Unemployment tax rates may vary depending on your business type or locality within the state. If you are unsure, check with your accountant or local unemployment office. This is an employer-paid tax.

Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7% unemployment).


Do you want to deduct for 401(k) plans?

If your company is currently using a 401(k) plan (or will be in the future), it is recommended that you select Yes. A 401(k) field will be created with no attached calculation. Later you will have the opportunity to set up employee and employer contribution percentages.


Do you want to deduct for 401(k) plans?

If your company is currently using a 401(k) plan (or will be in the future), it is recommended that you select Yes. A 401(k) field will be created with no attached calculation. Later you will have the opportunity to set up employee and employer contribution percentages.


Do you want to record employee meals and tips?

Select Yes if you record employee tips or provide a meal allowance and want these totals to appear on employee W-2 forms. By default, Tips and Meals are memo fields--amounts recorded for reporting and tax calculation but not recorded in the general ledger. Tips and Meals should be left as memo fields unless these items are paid directly by the employer on paychecks.


Do you want to record employee meals and tips?

Select Yes if you record employee tips or provide a meal allowance and want these totals to appear on employee W-2 forms. By default, Tips and Meals are memo fields--amounts recorded for reporting and tax calculation but not recorded in the general ledger. Tips and Meals should be left as memo fields unless these items are paid directly by the employer on paychecks.


Gross Pay Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record employee wages. Typically, this is Salaries Expense or Wages Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Gross Pay Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record employee wages. Typically, this is Salaries Expense or Wages Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Tax Liability Tax Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record payroll tax liabilities. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Liability Tax Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record payroll tax liabilities. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Expense Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record employer-paid payroll tax expenses, for example state unemployment. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Expense Account

Enter or select the general ledger account that will be used to record employer-paid payroll tax expenses, for example state unemployment. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


General

Select this tab to set up default state and locality; assign payroll fields for W-2s, employee, and employer taxes; set up employee custom field labels; and choose how an employee's name will appear in lookup lists and on reports.

Note: Default state and locality and payroll fields do not apply to First Accounting.


Pay Levels

Select this tab to set up hourly and salary payroll field names.


EmployEE Fields

Select this tab to set up default employee payroll fields (deductions and additions).


EmployER Fields

Select this tab to set up default employer payroll fields (employer-paid taxes such as state unemployment).


Employee Defaults

General: Select this tab to set up default state and locality; assign payroll fields for W-2s, employee, and employer taxes; set up employee custom field labels; and choose how an employee's name will appear in lookup lists and on reports.

Note: Default state and locality and payroll fields do not apply to First Accounting.

Pay Levels (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to set up hourly and salary payroll field names.

EmployEE Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to set up default employee payroll fields (deductions and additions).

EmployER Fields (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to set up default employer payroll fields (employer-paid taxes such as state unemployment).


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter a two-character standard U.S. state abbreviation including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only required in certain states. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: These are default settings. You can later modify individual state and local setup, if needed.


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter a two-character standard U.S. state abbreviation including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only required in certain states. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: These are default settings. You can later modify individual state and local setup, if needed.


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter a two-character standard U.S. state abbreviation including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual state setup, if needed.


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter a two-character standard U.S. state abbreviation including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual state setup, if needed.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only required in certain states. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual local setup, if needed.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only required in certain states. If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual local setup, if needed.


Assign Payroll Fields for:

W-2s: Select this button to assign payroll fields to corresponding boxes on the W-2 form.

EmployEE Paid Taxes: Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary.

EmployER Paid Taxes: Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that are required from the employer.


Assign Payroll Fields for:

W-2s: Select this button to assign payroll fields to corresponding boxes on the W-2 form.

EmployEE Paid Taxes: Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary.

EmployER Paid Taxes: Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that are required from the employer.


W-2s

Select this button to assign payroll fields to corresponding boxes on the W-2 form.


W-2s

Select this button to assign payroll fields to corresponding boxes on the W-2 form.


EmployEE Paid Taxes

Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary.


EmployEE Paid Taxes

Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that some states require as deductions from the employee's salary.


EmployER Paid Taxes

Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that are required from the employer.


EmployER Paid Taxes

Select this button to assign payroll fields to tax contributions that are required from the employer.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields let you set up and store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data that you want displayed in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, first select the Enabled check box; then enter the label name.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields let you set up and store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data that you want displayed in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, first select the Enabled check box; then enter the label name.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom Fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Last Name First

Select this if you want employees listed last name first in lookup lists and on reports.


Hourly Field Names

These fields identify various hourly pay levels. The default hourly pay levels are Regular, Overtime, and Special. You can enter up to 20 hourly pay level fields. You may want to rename fields 4 through 20 according to your company's needs; for example, enter pay levels by specific functions: dishwasher, cook, server, etc.

Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters.


Hourly Pay Levels

Field Names: These fields identify various hourly pay levels. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The default hourly pay levels are Regular, Overtime, and Special. You can enter up to 20 hourly pay level fields. You may want to rename fields 4 through 20 according to your company's needs--for example, enter pay levels by specific functions: dishwasher, cook, server, etc.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want gross payment to be distributed. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account here.


Salary Field Names

These fields identify various salaried pay levels. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The default hourly pay levels are Salary, Bonus, and Commission. You can enter up to 20 salary pay level fields. You could rename the fields to be different departments, for example, if you have salaried employees who work for more than one department.


Salary Pay Levels

Field Names: These fields identify various salaried pay levels. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The default salaried pay levels are Salary, Bonus, and Commission. You can enter up to 20 salaried pay level fields. You could rename the fields to be different departments, for example, if you have salaried employees who work for more than one department.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want gross payment to be distributed. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account here.


EmployEE Payroll Fields

You use employee fields to set defaults for how Peachtree Accounting handles employee gross pay including any applicable calculations. These can include various deductions and additions.

Description: Enter the name of the payroll field, or use the defaults.

G/L Account: The account number in the General Ledger where information entered into this field for this employee is posted. Not applicable if the Memo box is checked. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Calculate: Select this check box if the information in this field can be calculated from the adjusted gross and the tax tables.

Tax Name: If this field can be calculated, enter the name of the tax table to use (not the Tax ID) without the payroll year. Press ? to see a list of tax tables.

Amount: If you aren't using a calculation, enter a flat rate here.  Positive numbers are earnings and negative numbers are deductions.

Memo: Select this check box if the information in this field does not affect your company general ledger or financial statements. An example of this would be tips.

Run: Select this check box to indicate that you don't want the balance to be set to zero when you close the year.

Adjust: If this field can be calculated, select this arrow button to select which payroll fields are accumulated to make the adjusted gross for this calculation.


EmployER Payroll Fields

You use employer fields to set defaults for how Peachtree Accounting handles employer-paid taxes and contributions. These payroll fields do not impact the net amount of the employee paycheck.

Description: Enter the name of the payroll field, or use the defaults.

Liability Account: This is the number of the General Ledger liability account you want to use. Typically this is employer-paid payroll tax liability. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Expense Account: This is the number of the expense account you want to use. Typically, this is employer-paid payroll tax expense. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Calculate: Select this check box if the information in this field can be calculated from the adjusted gross and the tax tables.

Tax Name: If this field can be calculated, enter the name of the tax table to use (not the Tax ID) without the payroll year. Press ? to see a list of tax tables.

Adjust: If this field can be calculated, select this arrow button to select which payroll fields are accumulated to make the adjusted gross for this calculation.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Display employee name with:

Select whether to sort employees alphabetically by first name or last name in lookup lists and on reports.


Display employee name with:

Select whether to sort employees alphabetically by first name or last name in lookup lists and on reports.


First Name First

Select this if you want employees listed first name first in lookup lists and on reports.


Continue

Select this button to continue the process.


Go Back

Select this button to go back to the previous window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select Period/ Select Period to Adjust

If this is a new chart of accounts and no transactions have been posted to an account, you can enter a beginning balance for the account for a previous accounting period, the current accounting period, or a future accounting period. When setting up a new chart of accounts, it is best to wait to enter the beginning balances until after you have set up all your accounts. Select the period in which you want to start your beginning balances by highlighting the period and selecting OK.  If you have already entered transactions and need to adjust a beginning balance in a prior period, select the period from this dialog box by highlighting it and selecting OK.

Tip: To change beginning balances prior to Period 1 after entering transactions, switch to Batch posting, change accounting periods to Period 1, and unpost all journals. You will then be able to access account beginning balances.


OK

Select OK to display Beginning Balances or Prior Year Adjustments window based on your period selection.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Select Period/ Select Period to Adjust

If this is a new chart of accounts, and no transactions have been posted to an account, you can enter a beginning balance for the account for a previous accounting period, the current accounting period, or a future accounting period. When setting up a new chart of accounts, it is best to wait to enter the beginning balances until after you have set up all your accounts. Select the period in which you want to start your beginning balances by highlighting the period and selecting OK.  If you have already entered transactions and need to adjust a beginning balance in a prior period, select the period from this dialog box by highlighting it and selecting OK.

Tip: To change beginning balances prior to Period 1 after entering transactions, switch to Batch posting, change accounting periods to Period 1, and unpost all journals. You will then be able to access account beginning balances.


OK

Select OK to save changes and continue to the next step in the apply finance charge process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting Customer

Enter or select the first customer in a range to calculate finance charges. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. If you want to calculate finance charges for all customers eligible, leave this field blank.

Tip: If you want finance charges for just this one customer, select the Starting Customer Only button at the bottom of the window.


Ending Customer

Enter or select the last customer in a range to calculate finance charges. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. If you want to calculate finance charges for all customers eligible, leave this field blank.


Type Mask

Optionally, enter a Customer Type by which to sort customers. Remember that Peachtree Accounting is case sensitive; entering NORTH won't include customers with customer types of "North" or "north."


Date

Enter or select the date for which you want to calculate the finance charges. To select a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Starting Customer Only

Select this button to calculate finance charges for just the first customer selected.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to save changes and continue to the final step in the apply finance charge process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply Finance Charges

Select Yes if you want  Peachtree Accounting to apply calculated finance charges to the customers' current balances.

Select No if you want Peachtree Accounting not to apply finance charges to the customers' balances at this time.

Tip: To preview finance charges before applying amounts to the customers' balances, select No to applying finance charges, and then print the report to the screen or printer. When ready, return to this window and select Yes to applying the charges.


Apply Finance Charges

Select Yes if you want  Peachtree Accounting to apply calculated finance charges to the customers' current balances.

Select No if you want Peachtree Accounting not to apply finance charges to the customers' balances at this time.

Tip: To preview finance charges before applying amounts to the customers' balances, select No to applying finance charges, and then print the report to the screen or printer. When ready, return to this window and select Yes to applying the charges.


Print Calculation Sheet

The Calculation Sheet prints at the end of the Finance Charge report (if one is printed). This information defines how finance charges are calculated. Select Yes to print the instructional text; otherwise, select No.


Print Calculation Sheet

The Calculation Sheet prints at the end of the Finance Charge report (if one is printed). This information defines how finance charges are calculated. Select Yes to print the instructional text; otherwise, select No.


Print Calculation Sheet

The Calculation Sheet prints at the end of the Finance Charge report (if one is printed). This information defines how finance charges are calculated. Select Yes to print the instructional text; otherwise, select No.


Report Destination

The Finance Charge report displays the customer name, reference #, overdue amount, and finance charge.

You can choose to send the report to the printer, screen, or not to print the report at all.

If you selected the No option button for Apply Finance Charges, the Do Not Print Report option is disabled. If you chose not to print a report or calculation sheet, the Print Calculation Sheet option is disabled.


Report Destination

The Finance Charge report displays the customer name, reference #, overdue amount, and finance charge.

You can choose to send the report to the printer, screen, or not to print the report at all.

If you selected the No option button for Apply Finance Charges, the Do Not Print Report option is disabled. If you chose not to print a report or calculation sheet, the Print Calculation Sheet option is disabled.


Report Destination

The Finance Charge report displays the customer name, reference #, overdue amount, and finance charge.

You can choose to send the report to the printer, screen, or not to print the report at all.

If you selected the No option button for Apply Finance Charges, the Do Not Print Report option is disabled. If you chose not to print a report or calculation sheet, the Print Calculation Sheet option is disabled.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to run the Finance Charge report and close this window. If you selected Yes to apply finance charges earlier, the transactions will be created and the customers' balances updated.


Back

Select Back to return to the previous window.


Report Style

Select Summary to print finance charge total for each customer eligible.

Select Detail to list each invoice past due and finance charges applied for each customer eligible.


Report Style

Select Summary to print finance charge total for each customer eligible.

Select Detail to list each invoice past due and finance charges applied for each customer eligible.


Report Order

You can choose to sort the report by customer ID or customer name.


Report Order

You can choose to sort the report by customer ID or customer name.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Account ID

This code identifies the account in your chart of accounts. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters to name the account. Once you enter an ID and select the Save button, you can't change or edit the ID; however, you can change the description.

The naming convention for accounts is important; you want to be able to establish a system that is easily understood by everybody who uses the system. The sample company that comes with Peachtree Accounting uses a standard convention, and can be copied and used as a guideline.

Tips: You cannot use asterisks (*), question marks (?), or plus signs (+). You cannot use leading or trailing spaces. Spaces between characters are allowed. Account numbers are sorted alphabetically with numbers sorted before letters. For example, an account starting with a "6" would list before an account starting with an "A." You need to use leading zeroes to make the numbers sort properly. For example, these numbers are sorted this way: 1, 100, 1000, 27. To properly sort, enter the numbers as 0001, 0027, 0100, and 1000.


Description

You can describe the account such as "Petty Cash," "Cash in Checking," "Cash in Savings," and so on. This prints on reports. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.


Account Type

This identifies the category for which the account is used in financial statement processing. If you are unsure which type to use, ask your accountant or refer to the sample charts of accounts listed in the online Help.

Select an account type from the drop-down list.


Account Type

This identifies the category for which the account is used in financial statement processing. If you are unsure which type to use, ask your accountant or refer to the sample charts of accounts listed in the online Help.

Select an account type from the drop-down list.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Beginning Balance/Prior Year Adjust as of..

This identifies the period you selected prior to displaying this window.


Account List Box

Account ID: This an alphanumeric code that identifies the account. To enter a new account, select the New button.

Account Description: This is the description of the account entered on the Maintain Chart of Accounts window.

Account Type: This identifies the type of the account entered on the Maintain Chart of Accounts window.

Assets, Expenses or Liabilities, Equity, Income: Depending on the Account Type specified, you will either have to enter an amount in the Assets, Expenses column or in the Liabilities, Equity, Income column. Peachtree Accounting tells you which column to enter the amount in by graying out the other column. Enter a positive amount in the column, unless circumstances warrant a negative balance (contra accounts).

For example, if you enter $5,000 as a beginning balance for your checking account in the Assets, Expenses column, you might enter $5,000 in the Liabilities, Equity, Income column for a capital account such as retained earnings to offset this entry. For normal balances, you will just enter positive numbers.


Trial Balance

This is the difference between the sum of assets and expenses and the sum of liabilities, equity, and income. When you are in balance, this amount should equal zero (the two sums should equal each other).

If you are out of balance and select OK (not recommended), an equity account will be created (or updated) to contain the difference of the out-of-balance amount.


Trial Balance

This is the difference between the sum of assets and expenses and the sum of liabilities, equity, and income. When you are in balance, this amount should equal zero (the two sums should equal each other).

If you are out of balance and select OK (not recommended), an equity account will be created (or updated) to contain the difference of the out-of-balance amount.


Total

This identifies the total assets in the column.


Total

This identifies the total liabilities and equity in the column.


Trial Balance

This is the difference between the sum of assets and expenses and the sum of liabilities, equity, and income. When you are in balance, this amount should equal zero (the two sums should equal each other).

If you are out of balance and select OK (not recommended), an equity account will be created (or updated) to contain the difference of the out-of-balance amount.


Trial Balance

This is the difference between the sum of assets and expenses and the sum of liabilities, equity, and income. When you are in balance, this amount should equal zero (the two sums should equal each other).

If you are out of balance and select OK (not recommended), an equity account will be created (or updated) to contain the difference of the out-of-balance amount.


Trial Balance

This is the difference between the the sum of assets and expenses and the sum of liabilities, equity, and income. When you are in balance, this amount should equal zero (the two sums should equal each other).

If you are out of balance and select OK (not recommended), an equity account will be created (or updated) to contain the difference of the out-of-balance amount.


Net Income

This is the difference between income and expenses.


Net Income

This is the difference between income and expenses.


Total

This identifies the total expenses in the column.


Total

This identifies the total income in the column.


Net Income

This is the difference between income and expenses.


Net Income

This is the difference between income and expenses.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


New

Select this button to enter a new account in your chart of accounts.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that includes the text to be found. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close this window

Select this option to close the window. You can then select an option from the File menu for opening or restoring a company.


Open an existing company

Select this option to see a list of existing Peachtree companies from which you can choose one to open.


Set up a new company

Select this option to set up a new Peachtree Accounting company. Peachtree will open the New Company Setup wizard to help get you started.


Convert a QuickBooks® or One-Write® Plus company

Select this option to convert an existing QuickBooks or One-Write Plus company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


Explore a sample company

Select this option to open a sample company. This allows you to explore Peachtree Accounting and even enter data without impacting your own company data.


Learn about Peachtree Accounting through an online tutorial

Select this option to display the Peachtree Accounting online tutorial. The online tutorial guides you through basic transactions in Peachtree Accounting. It also provides overviews of new features in the current release.


Open an existing company

Select this option to see a list of existing Peachtree companies from which you can choose one to open.


Set up a new company

Select this option to set up a new Peachtree Accounting company. Peachtree will open the New Company Setup wizard to help get you started.


Learn about Peachtree Accounting through an online tutorial

Select this option to display the Peachtree Accounting online tutorial. The online tutorial guides you through basic transactions in Peachtree Accounting. It also provides overviews of new features in the current release.


Explore a sample company

Select this option to open a sample company. This allows you to explore Peachtree Accounting and even enter data without impacting your own company data.


Convert a QuickBooks® or One-Write® Plus company

Select this option to convert an existing QuickBooks or One-Write Plus company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


Close this window

Select this option to close the window. You can then select an option from the File menu for opening or restoring a company.


Open an existing company

Select this option to see a list of existing Peachtree companies from which you can choose one to open.


Set up a new company

Select this option to set up a new Peachtree Accounting company. Peachtree will open the New Company Setup wizard to help get you started.


Learn about Peachtree Accounting through an online tutorial

Select this option to display the Peachtree Accounting online tutorial. The online tutorial guides you through basic transactions in Peachtree Accounting. It also provides overviews of new features in the current release.


Explore a sample company

Select this option to open a sample company. This allows you to explore Peachtree Accounting and even enter data without impacting your own company data.


Convert a QuickBooks® or One-Write® Plus company

Select this option to convert an existing QuickBooks or One-Write Plus company to the Peachtree Accounting format.


Close this window

Select this option to close the window. You can then select an option from the File menu for opening or restoring a company.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW). Note: QuickBooks companies are not available in First Accounting.

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Company/File Name

Select the name of the company you want to open by highlighting it and double-clicking. For Peachtree Accounting companies, select the company name from the list. If you choose QuickBooks company type, you must locate and select the QuickBooks data file (COMPANY.QBW).

If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Directories

Use this to select the directory where your company is stored. When the correct directory is selected, Peachtree displays the company name in the File Name list box.


Company Type

Select the type of company to open. You have two choices: Peachtree or QuickBooks.


Company Type

Select the type of company to open. You have two choices: Peachtree or QuickBooks.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


OK

Select OK to close this window and ope the selected company.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without opening a company.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to search for the information entered.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Find

This allows you to search for a string of characters. The search will cover any text you can see in the displayed list, including Reference #, Amount, ID, and Name. For example, if you wanted to search on all the invoices that start with 100, you would enter 100 here.

Enter either upper- or lowercase letters; Find is not case sensitive. Press ENTER after you type the text to find in the entry box.


Graph

This displays a graph of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.


Bracket

This displays information for all outstanding invoices with the chosen aging bracket (for example, 0-30 days).


Numeric

This displays a numeric table of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can also use it to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Select

Select this button to display the Payment Selections window.


Print

Select this button to print the displayed payment information.


Graph or Numeric

Select this button to see an overview of accounts payable, which you can view both graphically and in a numeric table.


Bracket

Select this button to view a summary listing of the transactions that make up the amounts in the selected aging bracket.


Vendor

Select this button to view all transactions for a single vendor that meet the criteria you specified at the bracket level. For example, if you selected the 31-60 bracket, then you will see all the invoices 31-60 days late for a single vendor.


Detail

Select this button to view a specific transaction.


Check

Select this button to print a check for the specified payments.


Display

Select the Numeric option to display a graph of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.

Select the Graphic option to display a numeric table of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.


Numeric

Select this option to display a numeric table of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.


Graph

Select this option to display a graph of accounts payable by age as of a specified date.


Graph Drop-Down List

Pie: Select this to display the graph in pie format.

Bar: Select this to display the graph in horizontal-bar format.

Column: Select this to display the graph in vertical-column format.


Show

Use the drop-down list to select the aging period you want to see account-aging information for. You can choose to see aging information as of today's date, for the current accounting period versus the last period, or for the current accounting period versus the same period last year.


Show

Use the drop-down list to select the aging period you want to see account-aging information for. You can choose to see aging information as of today's date, for the current accounting period versus the last period, or for the current accounting period versus the same period last year.


As of Date

Use the calendar in this field to select the date for which you want to show accounts payable aging.


As of Date

Use the calendar in this field to select the date for which you want to show accounts payable aging.


Show all vendors...

The window displays aging information for all vendors with outstanding balances over $0.00


Payment Aging

This window shows information about overdue invoices from vendors. You can choose to see the information presented numerically by selecting the Numeric option button. Or you can see a graphic representation in the form of a pie, bar, or column chart by selecting the Graph button.


Average Days Outstanding

This shows the average number of days that invoices are outstanding for all vendors with unpaid invoices.


Invoice Amounts and Totals

This window displays the amounts and totals of all invoices for the chosen accounting period.


Dollar Value, 0-30 Days

This shows the dollar value of all outstanding invoices for the 0-30 days past due bracket. Click the field to see detail information about each outstanding invoice in this bracket.


Dollar Value, 31-60 Days

This shows the dollar value of all outstanding invoices for the 31-60 days past due bracket. Click the field to see detail information about each outstanding invoice in this bracket.


Dollar Value, 61-90 Days

This shows the dollar value of all outstanding invoices for the 61-90 days past due bracket. Click the field to see detail information about each outstanding invoice in this bracket.


Dollar Value, 90+ Days

This shows the dollar value of all outstanding invoices for the over 90 days past due bracket. Click the field to see detail information about each outstanding invoice in this bracket.


Total Dollar Value

This shows the total dollar value of all outstanding invoices for the chosen accounting period. Click the field to see detail information about each outstanding invoice in this bracket.


Invoice Amounts and Totals

This window displays the amounts and totals of all invoices for the chosen accounting period.


Aging Bracket Detail

This displays information for all outstanding vendor invoices for all the selected aging bracket. The Total field shows the amount owed for all such invoices.

To pay an individual invoice, select the Pay box for that invoice; the total payment will appear in the Amount to Pay box. You can change this amount as desired.


Aging Bracket Detail

This displays information for all outstanding vendor invoices for all the selected aging bracket. The Total field shows the amount owed for all such invoices.

To pay an individual invoice, select the Pay box for that invoice; the total payment will appear in the Amount to Pay box. You can change this amount as desired.


Days Past Due Drop-Down List

0-30: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 0-30 days past due.

31-60: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 31-60 days past due.

61-90: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 61-90 days past due.

Over 90 days: Select this option to display accounts payable that are over 90 days past due.

Total: Select this option to display all past-due accounts payable.


Days Past Due Drop-Down List

0-30: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 0-30 days past due.

31-60: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 31-60 days past due.

61-90: Select this option to display accounts payable that are 61-90 days past due.

Over 90 days: Select this option to display accounts payable that are over 90 days past due.

Total: Select this option to display all past-due accounts payable.


Aging by Bracket

This window displays aging information for all outstanding vendor invoices that fall within the chosen aging bracket (for example, 0-30 days). The Total field shows the amount owed for all such invoices.

To pay an individual invoice, select it in the invoice list, and enter the amount of payment in the Amount to Pay box.


Amount to Pay

This reflects the total of all vendor invoices that you choose to pay by selecting the Pay check box(es).


Show all vendors...

The window displays aging information for all vendors with outstanding balances over $0.00.


Aging Bracket List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Name: This is the name of the vendor.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Pay: This indicates whether to pay the invoice.


Vendor Detail

This displays information from the vendor record as well as detail information for the selected invoice, including age, amount, and payment information. The Total field shows the amount owed for all such invoices.

To pay an individual invoice, select the Pay box for that invoice; the total payment will appear in the Amount to Pay box. You can change this amount as desired.


Amount to Pay

This reflects the total amount to pay on the vendor invoice that you have chosen to see detail information for.


Show all vendors...

The window displays aging information for all vendors with outstanding balances over $0.00.


Vendor List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Discount Date: This is the date through which any discount applies.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Amount Paid: This is the amount paid to date.

Amount Due: This is the amount due on the due date.

Pay: This indicates whether to pay the amount due.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


All Vendors

Select this option to display payment information for all vendors.


Range

Select this option to display payment information for a range of vendors.


Include Vendors From

Select the first vendor for whom you want to include payment information.


Include Vendors From

Select the first vendor for whom you want to include payment information.


Include Vendors To

Select the last vendor for whom you want to include payment information.


Include Vendors To

Select the last vendor for whom you want to include payment information.


Type Mask

This is the vendor type code. It limits the displayed information to vendors of the specified type code.


All

Select this option to display all vendor balances.


Greater Than

Select this option to display balances for vendors with balances greater than the specified amount.


Less Than

Select this option to display balances for vendors with balances less than the specified amount.


Greater Than Amount

Enter the minimum dollar amount above which you want to display balances. For example, if you enter 500.00, the system will display all balances including 500.01 and greater.


Less Than Amount

Enter the maximum dollar amount below which you want to display balances. For example, if you enter 500.00, the system will display all balances up to and including 499.99.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Item ID

This identifies the inventory item currently selected in the item list. This is the item for which you want to enter or change the beginning balance. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Item Description

this is the short description of the item selected. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Quantity

This is the number of items you have currently in stock. You can change this amount, if desired, to establish a beginning balance.


Unit cost

Enter the cost of the item per unit. If you want to calculate the unit amount, leave this field blank, and enter an amount in the Total Cost field.


Total Cost

This is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the unit amount. If you want to calculate the unit amount, enter an amount here.


Inventory Beginning Balance List

Item ID: This is the item for which you want to enter or change the beginning balance.

Quantity: This is the number of items you have in stock.

Unit cost: Enter the cost of the item per unit. If you want to calculate the unit amount, leave this blank, and enter an amount in the Total Cost entry box.

Total cost: This is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the unit amount. If you want to calculate the unit amount, enter an amount here.


Inventory Beginning Balance List

Item ID: This is the item for which you want to enter or change the beginning balance.

Quantity: This is the number of items you have in stock.

Unit cost: Enter the cost of the item per unit. If you want to calculate the unit amount, leave this blank, and enter an amount in the Total Cost entry box.

Total cost: This is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the unit amount. If you want to calculate the unit amount, enter an amount here.


Total Beginning Balances

This is the sum of the beginning-balance cost balances for all items entered. The total amount here needs to be the same amount you entered in your Chart of Accounts Beginning Balance for Inventory. If this is not the case, your General Ledger and Financial reports will not match your Inventory reports.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next item, if any, that fits the find text. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Inventory Beginning Balance List

Item ID: This is the item for which you want to enter or change the beginning balance.

Quantity: This is the number of items you have in stock.

Unit cost: Enter the cost of the item per unit. If you want to calculate the unit amount, leave this blank, and enter an amount in the Total Cost entry box.

Total cost: This is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the unit amount. If you want to calculate the unit amount, enter an amount here.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit this window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select the Save button to update beginning balance information entered in this window for the job. This button is only available if the Job Entries for tab is selected.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window. This button is only available if when the Job Balances tab is selected.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that fits the find text. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing. This button is only available if when the Job Balances tab is selected.


Add

Select this button to add a new beginning balance amount for the job. This button is only available if the Job Entries for tab is selected.


Remove

Select this button to delete the currently selected beginning balance amount for the job. This button is only available if the Job Entries for tab is selected.


Job Beginning Balances

Job Entries for: Select this tab to enter beginning balance amounts for the selected job.

Job Entries for: Select this tab to list beginning balance amounts for all jobs or to select another job.


Job Entries for

Select this tab to enter beginning balance amounts for the selected job.


Job Entries for

Select this tab to list beginning balance amounts for all jobs or to select another job.


Job Beginning Balances

Job Entries for: Select this tab to enter beginning balance amounts for the selected job.

Job Entries for: Select this tab to list beginning balance amounts for all jobs or to select another job.


Job Beginning Balances

To enter a job beginning balance, select the job from this list, then select the Job Entries for tab.

Job ID: This identifies the job and is used in lookup lists, transactions, and reports.

Description: This is the short description of the job.

Beginning Balance: This is the net sum of all beginning balances entered for this job.


Job Beginning Balances

To enter a job beginning balance, select the job from this list, then select the Job Entries for tab.

Job ID: This identifies the job and is used in lookup lists, transactions, and reports.

Description: This is the short description of the job.

Beginning Balance: This is the net sum of all beginning balances entered for this job.


Total Job Balances

This is the sum of all job beginning balances.


Total Job Balances

This is the sum of all job beginning balances.


Job Beginning Balances

Date: Enter the date associated this job beginning balance amount.

Expenses: Enter the beginning balance expense (cost) for this job.

Revenue: Enter the beginning balance revenue (income) for this job.


Total

This is the sum of all beginning balance expenses and revenue entered for the job.


Total

This is the sum of all beginning balance expenses entered for the job.


Total

This is the sum of all beginning balance revenue entered for the job.


Number of Entries

This is the number of beginning balance amounts entered for the job.


Number of Entries

This is the number of beginning balance expense amounts entered for the job.


Number of Entries

This is the number of beginning balance revenue amounts entered for the job.


Job Beginning Balances

Job Entries for: Select this tab to enter beginning balance amounts for the selected job.

Job Entries for: Select this tab to list beginning balance amounts for all jobs or to select another job.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Invoices for...

Select this tab to enter a customer beginning balance. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer.

Invoice Number: Enter the number of the outstanding invoice. This is required for each beginning balance.

Date: Enter the date the invoice was created.

Purchase Order Number: Enter the customer's purchase order number, if any.

Amount: Enter the amount of the invoice.

A/R Account: Enter the A/R account for this customer's beginning balance if you are using the accrual method. If you are using the cash-basis method, you cannot enter an A/R account. Press ENTER to move to the next line, where you can enter another invoice.


Customer Balances

Select this tab to see all your customers' current balances at a glance. After you look at the current balance, you can enter beginning balance information for a customer using the Invoices for tab.


Customer Beginning Balances: Customer Balances

Select this tab to see all your customers' current balances at a glance. After you look at the current balance, you can enter beginning balance information for a customer using the Invoices for tab.


Customer Beginning Balances: Customer Balances

Select this tab to see all your customers' current balances at a glance. After you look at the current balance, you can enter beginning balance information for a customer using the Invoices for tab.


Customer Beginning Balances: Invoices for...

You can enter a beginning balance for any customer at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer.

Invoice Number-Enter the number of the outstanding invoice. This is required for each beginning balance.

Date-Enter the date the invoice was created.

Purchase Order Number-Enter the customer's purchase order number, if any.

Amount-Enter the amount of the invoice.

A/R Account-Enter the A/R account for this customer's beginning balance if you are using the accrual method. If you are using the cash-basis method, you cannot enter an A/R account. Press ENTER to move to the next line, where you can enter another invoice.


Customer Beginning Balances

You can enter a beginning balance for any customer at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer.

The customer beginning balance must not include any transactions (such as sales) that you have already entered in the task screens, such as the Sales/Invoicing screen, of Peachtree Accounting. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/R account in General Ledger. Be sure that the total amount of your Customer Beginning Balances is equal to the amount you entered as a beginning balance in your Chart of Accounts for your A/R accounts.


Customer Beginning Balances

You can enter a beginning balance for any customer at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices you sent to the customer.

The customer beginning balance must not include any transactions (such as sales) that you have already entered in the task screens, such as the Sales/Invoicing screen, of Peachtree Accounting. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/R account in General Ledger. Be sure that the total amount of your Customer Beginning Balances is equal to the amount you entered as a beginning balance in your Chart of Accounts for your A/R accounts.


Account Balance

This displays the current total balance of all beginning balance invoices entered for this customer.


Number of Transactions

This is the sum of all beginning balance invoices entered for this customer.


Current Accounts Receivable Balance

This is the sum of all customer beginning balance invoices entered in this window. It is important to remember that the total of the beginning balances entered here should equal the total amount you entered in your G/L beginning balances for all Accounts Receivable account types.


Account Balance

This displays the current total balance of all beginning balance invoices entered for this customer.


Number of Transactions

This is the sum of all beginning balance invoices entered for this customer.


Current Accounts Receivable Balance

This is the sum of all customer beginning balance invoices entered in this window. It is important to remember that the total of the beginning balances entered here should equal the total amount you entered in your G/L beginning balances for all Accounts Receivable account types.


Close

Select the Close button to exit this window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that includes the text to be found. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Add

Select this button to add a new transaction line in the displayed window.


Remove

Select this button to delete the currently selected transaction line in the displayed window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Vendor Beginning Balances: Invoices for...

You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices vendors sent you.

Invoice Number: Enter the number of the outstanding invoice. This is required for each beginning balance.

Date: Enter the date the invoice was created.

Purchase Order Number: Enter the purchase order number, if any.

Amount: Enter the amount of the invoice.

A/P Account: Enter the A/P account for this vendor's beginning balance if you are using the accrual method. If you are using the cash-basis method, you cannot enter an A/P Account. Press ENTER to move to the next line, where you can enter another invoice.


Vendor Beginning Balances: Vendor Balances

Select this tab to see all your vendors' current balances at a glance. After you look at the current balance, you can enter beginning balance information for a vendor using the Invoices for tab.


Vendor Balances

Displays a list of vendor balances.

Vendor ID: Identifies the vendor for whom the balance is displayed.

Name: Specifies the name of the vendor for whom the balance is displayed.

Amount: Displays the vendor balance.


Vendor Beginning Balances: Vendor Balances

Select this tab to see all your vendors' current balances at a glance. After you look at the current balance, you can enter beginning balance information for a vendor using the Invoices for tab.


Vendor Beginning Balances: Invoices for...

You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices vendors sent you.

Invoice Number-Enter the number of the outstanding invoice. This is required for each beginning balance.

Date-Enter the date the invoice was created.

Purchase Order Number-Enter the purchase order number, if any.

Amount-Enter the amount of the invoice.

A/P Account-Enter the A/P account for this vendor's beginning balance if you are using the accrual method. If you are using the cash-basis method, you cannot enter an A/P Account. Press ENTER to move to the next line, where you can enter another invoice.


Vendor Beginning Balances

You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices vendors sent you.

The vendor beginning balance must not include any transactions (such as purchases) that you have already entered in the task screens of Peachtree Accounting. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/P account in General Ledger. Be sure that the total amount of your Vendor Beginning Balances is equal to the amount you entered as a beginning balance in your Chart of Accounts for your A/P accounts.


Vendor Beginning Balances

You can enter a beginning balance for any vendor at any time. The beginning balance consists of outstanding invoices. You can enter the numbers of the actual invoices vendors sent you.

The vendor beginning balance must not include any transactions (such as purchases) that you have already entered in the task screens of Peachtree Accounting. These beginning balance amounts are not transferred to your A/P account in General Ledger. Be sure that the total amount of your Vendor Beginning Balances is equal to the amount you entered as a beginning balance in your Chart of Accounts for your A/P accounts.


Account Balance

This displays the current total balance of all beginning balance invoices entered for this vendor.


Number of Transactions

This is the sum of all beginning balance invoices entered for this vendor.


Current Accounts Payable Balance

This is the sum of all vendor beginning balance invoices entered in this window. It is important to remember that the total of the beginning balances entered here should equal the total amount you entered in your G/L beginning balances for all Accounts Payable account types.


Account Balance

This displays the current total balance of all beginning balance invoices entered for this vendor.


Number of Transactions

This is the sum of all beginning balance invoices entered for this vendor.


Current Accounts Payable Balance

This is the sum of all vendor beginning balance invoices entered in this window. It is important to remember that the total of the beginning balances entered here should equal the total amount you entered in your G/L beginning balances for all Accounts Payable account types.


Close

Select the Close button to exit this window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated record.


Find

Select this button to search for information (data entered) anywhere within the current window.


Next

Select this button to display the next transaction, if any, that includes the text to be found. If there is no next instance, selecting this does nothing.


Add

Select this button to add a new transaction line in the displayed window.


Remove

Select this button to delete the currently selected transaction line in the displayed window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to close this window and change to the selected accounting period.

If you are in batch mode, you need to post all your transactions before the program will let you continue.

For both batch and real-time modes, print invoices and/or checks before you change the accounting period.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Company Name

This identifies the name of your business set up in Peachtree Accounting.


Change Accounting Period

Use this to change the accounting period. Typically, you'll do this at the end of each accounting period. Select the period from the drop-down list. You can change this to any other period in the one or two years for which you have set accounting periods.


Calendar Year

This identifies the current payroll year in which you are operating. It is the first of two open payroll years. (Payroll years apply only to Peachtree Accounting, Peachtree Complete, and Peachtree Premium Accounting.)


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


First Purchase Order Number

Peachtree displays the next available purchase order number. You can change this number or enter a new purchase order number you want to assign when printing forms.


Last Purchase Order Date

This displays the date of the last purchase order printed by Peachtree Accounting. You cannot edit this field; it is only for display.

If this is the first time printing purchase orders, enter or select the date when printing forms. After printing purchase orders the first time,  Peachtree Accounting will track the last date each purchase order was printed.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select OK to close this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can also use it to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Select

Select this button to display the Collection Selections window.


Print

Select this button to print the displayed collection information.


Graph or Numeric

Select this button to see an overview of accounts receivable, which you can view both graphically and in a numeric table.


Bracket

Select this button to view a summary listing of the transactions that make up the amounts in the selected aging bracket.


Due Source

Select this button to view all transactions for a single customer that meet the criteria you specified at the bracket level. For example, if you selected the 31-60 bracket, then you will see all the invoices 31-60 days late for a single customer.


Detail

Select this button to view a specific transaction.


Letter

Select this button to print a collection letter.


Display

Select the appropriate option button for the type of display you want to see.

Numeric: Select this option to display a numeric table of accounts receivable by age as of a specified date.

Graph: Select this option to display a graph of accounts receivable by age as of a specified date.


Numeric

Select this option to display a numeric table of accounts receivable by age as of a specified date.


Graph

Select this option to display a graph of accounts receivable by age as of a specified date.


Graph Drop-Down List

Pie: Select this to display the graph in pie format.

Bar: Select this to display the graph in horizontal-bar format.

Column: Select this to display the graph in vertical-column format.


Show Drop-Down List

Select the option that corresponds to the date for which you want to show aging. Your options include the date specified in the As of Date field, one month prior to the specified date, and one year prior to the specified date.


Show Drop-Down List

Select the option that corresponds to the date for which you want to show aging. Your options include the date specified in the As of Date field, one month prior to the specified date, and one year prior to the specified date.


As of Date

Use the calendar in this field to select the date for which you want to show accounts receivable aging.


As of Date

Use the calendar in this field to select the date for which you want to show accounts receivable aging.


Days Past Due Drop-Down List

0-30: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 0-30 days past due.

31-60: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 31-60 days past due.

61-90: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 61-90 days past due.

Over 90 days: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are over 90 days past due.

Total: Select this option to display all past-due accounts receivable.


Days Past Due Drop-Down List

0-30: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 0-30 days past due.

31-60: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 31-60 days past due.

61-90: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are 61-90 days past due.

Over 90 days: Select this option to display accounts receivable that are over 90 days past due.

Total: Select this option to display all past-due accounts receivable.


Aging Bracket List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Name: This is the name of the customer.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Letter: This indicates whether to print a collection letter.


Due Source List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Discount Date: This is the date through which any discount applies.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Amount Received: This is the amount received to date.

Amount Due: This is the amount due on the due date.

Pay: This indicates whether to pay the amount due.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


All Customers

Select this option to display collection information for all customers.


Range

Select this option to display collection information for a range of customers.


Include Customers From

Select the first customer for whom you want to include collection information. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Include Customers From

Select the first customer for whom you want to include collection information. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Include Customers To

Select the last customer for whom you want to include collection information. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Include Customers To

Select the last customer for whom you want to include collection information. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Type Mask

This is the customer type code. It limits the displayed information to customers of the specified type code.


All

Select this option to display all customer balances.


Greater Than

Select this option to display balances for customers with balances greater than the specified amount.


Less Than

Select this option to display balances for customers with balances less than the specified amount.


Greater Than Amount

Enter the minimum dollar amount above which you want to display balances. For example, if you enter 500.00, the system will display all balances including 500.01 and greater.


Less Than Amount

Enter the maximum dollar amount below which you want to display balances. For example, if you enter 500.00, the system will display all balances up to and including 499.99.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select the Save button to update beginning balance information entered in the window for the selected employee record.


Employee ID

Enter or select an employee ID to assign beginning balance amounts. To select an employee, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. You cannot enter a new employee in this area.


Employee ID

Enter or select an employee ID to assign beginning balance amounts. To select an employee, click the Lookup button (or press ? in the Customer ID field) from the drop-down list. You cannot enter a new employee in this area.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Payroll Periods

These columns allow you to separate beginning balance amounts based on payroll periods you define. You can enter up to 52 payroll period columns. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.


Payroll Periods

These columns allow you to separate beginning balance amounts based on payroll periods you define. You can enter up to 52 payroll period columns. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.


Payroll Periods

These columns allow you to separate beginning balance amounts based on payroll periods you define. You can enter up to 52 payroll period columns. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.


Payroll Periods

These columns allow you to separate beginning balance amounts based on payroll periods you define. You can enter up to 52 payroll period columns. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.


Payroll Periods

These columns allow you to separate beginning balance amounts based on payroll periods you define. You can enter up to 52 payroll period columns. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.


Date

Enter or select the date that corresponds to the beginning balance payroll period. In most cases you would enter quarterly balances for past payroll quarters and then enter balances for each payroll period in the current quarter prior to entering actual transactions in Peachtree Accounting.

To choose a date, right click in the Date field.


Payroll Field Amounts

Enter the amount for each employee payroll field. You define the payroll fields under the EmployEE tab in Employee Defaults. Enter all deductions as negative amounts and earnings as positive amounts.

Note: You can use the scroll bar at the bottom of the period box to view your periods. Select the scroll button and drag it until you see the period you want. You can also press the right or left arrow key to move one period at a time right or left.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view additional information. Select the scroll button and drag it until you see the information you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one column at a time right or left.


Net Check

This total reflects the net pay for the payroll period.


Net Check

This total reflects the net pay for the payroll period.


Net Check

This total reflects the net pay for the payroll period.


Net Check

This total reflects the net pay for the payroll period.


Net Check

This total reflects the net pay for the payroll period.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Register Now

Select this button if you are prepared to register Peachtree Accounting. A second window will display that allows you to enter remigration information.


Register Later

Select this option if you not prepared to register Peachtree Accounting at this time. You can use Peachtree Accounting a limited number of times before you need to register. To determine the number of uses you have remaining, select the Register Now button. If you have no remaining uses left and select the Register Later button, the program will shut down.


Sale/Invoice

Select this option to convert the quote to an invoice.  If you have an invoice number for this quote already and will not print the invoice, enter it in the Invoice # field. You may also leave the Invoice # field blank so you can print the assigned number later.


Sale Invoice and Print Now

Select this option to convert the quote to an invoice and immediately print the invoice. Peachtree Accounting opens the standard window for selecting the invoice form you want to use and provides you with the starting invoice number.


Invoice Number

If you have already assigned an invoice number to the quote, enter it here. If you plan to print the invoice, leave this field blank.


Invoice Number

If you have an invoice number for this quote already and will not print the invoice, enter it in this field. If you plan to eventually print the invoice, leave this field blank.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected transaction only or all future transactions that were previously set up to recur.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected transaction only or all future transactions that were previously set up to recur.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Change Recurring Journal Entries

Select This Entry only to change just the current transaction. Select This Entry and all remaining to update future recurring transactions.


Change Recurring Journal Entries

Select This Entry only to change just the current transaction. Select This Entry and all remaining to update future recurring transactions.


Change Recurring Journal Entries

Select This Entry only to change just the current transaction. Select This Entry and all remaining to update future recurring transactions.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Graph

This window or level displays a graph of both current and projected cash amounts for various due dates.


Numeric

This window or level displays a numeric table of both current and projected cash amounts for various due dates.


Spreadsheet

This window or level displays forecasted cash by type of transaction, such as sales to collect, payments to make, payroll to pay, or cash adjustments.


Cash Source

This window or level displays transactions that are due by a specific date.

Note: The Cash Source level of detail is only available for Payments to Make or Sales to Collect.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can also use it to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Refresh

Select this button to update the forecast to include new transactions or to include new transactions and overwrite any manual adjustments.


Print

Select this button to print the forecast.


Graph or Numeric

Select this button to see an overview of actual and projected cash, which you can view both graphically and in a numeric table.


Spreadsheet

Select this button to view forecasted cash by type of transaction, such as sales to collect, payments to make, payroll to pay, or cash adjustments.


Cash Source

Select this button to view transactions that are due by a specific date.

Note: The Cash Source level of detail is only available for Payments to Make or Sales to Collect.


Detail

Select this button to view a specific transaction.


Letter

Select this button to print a collection letter.


Check

Select this button to pay the selected invoice and print a check.


Numeric

Select this option to display a numeric table of both current and projected cash amounts for various due dates.


Numeric

Select this option to display a numeric table of both current and projected cash amounts for various due dates.


Graph

Select this option to display a graph of both current and projected cash amounts for various due dates.


Graph Drop-Down List

Column: Select this to display the graph in vertical column format.

Bar: Select this to display the graph horizontal bar format.


Forecast Drop-Down List

Weekly: Select this to display four weekly forecast periods.

Bi-Weekly: Select this to display four bi-weekly forecast periods.

Monthly: Select this to display four monthly forecast periods.


Forecast Drop-Down List

Weekly: Select this to display four weekly forecast periods.

Bi-Weekly: Select this to display four bi-weekly forecast periods.

Monthly: Select this to display four monthly forecast periods.


Spreadsheet Drop-Down List

Sales to Collect: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due from customers.

Cash Adjustments (+): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing positive cash adjustments.

Payments to Make: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due to vendors.

Payroll to Pay: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing payroll payments due.

Cash Adjustments (-): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing negative cash adjustments.


Spreadsheet Drop-Down List

Sales to Collect: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due from customers.

Cash Adjustments (+): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing positive cash adjustments.

Payments to Make: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due to vendors.

Payroll to Pay: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing payroll payments due.

Cash Adjustments (-): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing negative cash adjustments.


Spreadsheet Drop-Down List

Sales to Collect: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due from customers.

Cash Adjustments (+): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing positive cash adjustments.

Payments to Make: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing invoices due to vendors.

Payroll to Pay: Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing payroll payments due.

Cash Adjustments (-): Select this value to display a spreadsheet showing negative cash adjustments.


As of Date

This is the starting date of the current aging-bracket period.


As of Date

This is the starting date of the current aging-bracket period.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view additional forecast periods. Select the scroll button and drag it until you see the period you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one period at a time right or left.


Spreadsheet List

Customer, Vendor, Employee: Depending on the spreadsheet type specified, the grid displays one of these values. If the grid displays Customer, this is the customer from whom you have sales to collect. If the grid displays Vendor, this is the vendor to whom you have payments to make. If the grid displays Employee, this is the employee to whom you have payroll to pay.

Due By: This is the date by which payment is due.

Amount: This is the amount of payment due.

Due By Date: This field is repeated. It is a series of forecasted due amounts.

Note Button: Select this button to enter a note.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view additional information. Select the scroll button and drag it until you see the information you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one column at a time right or left.


Adjustments List

Adjustments: This is a description of the positive or negative cash adjustment. For example, you might have a customer invoice due by a certain date, but you reached an agreement with the customer whereby he would pay half by the due date and half two weeks later.

Due By Date: This field is repeated. It is a series of forecasted due amounts.

Note Button: Select this button to enter a note.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view additional information. Select the scroll button and drag it until you see the information you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one column at a time right or left.


Sales to Collect Cash Source List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Discount Date: This is the date through which any discount applies.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Amount Received: This is the amount received to date.

Amount Due: This is the amount due on the due date.


Payments to Make Cash Source List

Age: This is the age of the invoice in days.

Reference: This is the invoice number.

Document Date: This is the date the invoice was created.

Discount Date: This is the date through which any discount applies.

Due Date: This is the date the payment is due.

Total Amount: This is the total amount due.

Amount Paid: This is the amount paid to date.

Amount Due: This is the amount due on the due date.

Pay: This indicates whether to pay the amount due.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Refresh Option

Select this option to update the forecast to include new transactions and overwrite any manual adjustments made.


Refresh Option

Select this option to update the forecast to include new transactions. This option does not overwrite any manual adjustments made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Numeric

Select this button to see a set of business summary data or account balances at a specified point in time, displayed in a numeric table.


Spreadsheet

Select this button to see a set of business summary data or account balances projected in a spreadsheet for the ends of sequential periods for comparison purposes.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Refresh

Select this button to update the financial data to include any new transactions.


Print

Select this button to print the displayed financial data.


Numeric

Select this button to see a set of business summary data or account balances at a specified point in time, displayed in a numeric table.


Spreadsheet

Select this button to see a set of business summary data or account balances projected in a spreadsheet for the ends of sequential periods for comparison purposes.


Display

Select the appropriate option button.

Business Summary: Select this option to display a numeric table of summary data consisting of various business ratios or a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.

Key Balances: Select this option to display key account balances in a numeric table or in a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Business Summary

Select this option to display a numeric table of summary data consisting of various business ratios or a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Key Balances

Select this option to display key account balances in a numeric table or in a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Display

Select the appropriate option button.

Business Summary: Select this option to display a numeric table of summary data consisting of various business ratios or a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.

Key Balances: Select this option to display key account balances in a numeric table or in a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Date

Use the calendar in this field to select the as-of date for which you want to show financial data.


Operational Analysis

Displays the following types of financial information: Cost of Sales as a Percentage of Sales, Gross Margin as a Percentage of Sales, and Profit Margin on Sales.


Profitability

Displays the following types of financial information: Return on Total Assets and Return on Net Worth.


Resource Management

Displays the following types of financial information: Current Assets, Current Liabilities, and Current Ratio.


Working Capital

Displays the following types of financial information: Inventory Turnover and Days Accounts Receivable Outstanding.


Cost of Sales as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the cost of purchasing goods, manufacturing goods, or providing services, in relation to the revenue from sales.


Gross Profit as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the raw profit from operations. In other words, it shows the gross profit in relation to revenue from sales.


Net Income as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the reported net income after taxes and other expenses in relation to the revenue from sales.


Return on Total Assets as a Percentage

Return on total assets (ROA) is the ratio of net income to total assets. A high return on assets can be attributed to a high profit margin, a rapid turnover of assets, or a combination of both.


Return on Net Worth as a Percentage

Return on net worth, or investments (ROI), shows what was earned on the investment in the business during the accounting period.


Current Assets

Current assets include the cash and other accounts that will be converted into cash within a year. The relationship between current assets and current liabilities shows the ability of the business to pay off its debt during the normal course of operations.


Current Liabilities

Current liabilities are the obligations that are due within one year.


Current Ratio

This ratio shows total current assets in relation to total current liabilities. The current ratio indicates the collectibility of current liabilities in the case of a real crisis.


Inventory Turnover

Inventory turnover shows the cost of sales in relation to average inventory. This ratio indicates the effectiveness of a company's inventory management.


Days Accounts Receivable Outstanding

This is the average number of days the receivables for a company are outstanding. You can use this measure to provide a broad indication of trends. It also provides some indication of the quality of receivables, as well as an idea of how successful the company is in collecting its outstanding receivables.


Cost of Sales as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the cost of purchasing goods, manufacturing goods, or providing services, in relation to the revenue from sales.


Gross Profit as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the raw profit from operations. In other words, it shows the gross profit in relation to revenue from sales.


Net Income as a Percentage of Sales

This ratio indicates the reported net income after taxes and other expenses in relation to the revenue from sales.


Return on Total Assets as a Percentage

This is the ratio of net income to total assets. A high return on assets can be attributed to a high profit margin, a rapid turnover of assets, or a combination of both.


Return on Net Worth as a Percentage

This ratio shows what was earned on the investment in the business during the accounting period.


Current Assets

Current assets include the cash and other accounts that will be converted into cash within a year. The relationship between current assets and current liabilities shows the ability of the business to pay off its debt during the normal course of operations.


Current Liabilities

Current liabilities are the obligations that are due within one year.


Current Ratio

This ratio shows total current assets in relation to total current liabilities.


Inventory Turnover

Inventory turnover shows the cost of sales in relation to average inventory. This ratio indicates the effectiveness of a company's inventory management.


Days Accounts Receivable Outstanding

This is the average number of days the receivables for a company are outstanding.


Key Balances

Shows the balances for the following: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Open Sales Orders, and Open Purchase Orders.


Operations

Shows the current period and year-to-date balances for the following: Income, Cost of Sales, Expense, and Net Income.


Cash

Cash is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Cash account type. For example, it includes the balances in the Petty Cash account and in the Regular Checking account.


Accounts Receivable

Accounts Receivable is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Accounts Receivable account type. For example, it includes the balances in the Accounts Receivable account and in the Contracts Receivable account.


Inventory

Inventory is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Inventory account type.


Accounts Payable

Accounts Payable is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Accounts Payable account type.


Open Sales Orders

Open Sales Orders are the total amount of sales orders for which payment has not been made.


Open Purchase Orders

Open Purchase Orders are the total amount of purchase orders for which payment has not been made.


Income

Income shows the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Income account type for the current period and for the year to date. For example, it includes the balances in the Sales-Retail account and in the Interest Income account.


Cost of Sales

Cost of Sales shows the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Cost of Sales account type for the current period and for the year to date. For example, it includes the balances in the Direct Labor account and in the Materials Cost account.


Expense

Expense shows the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Expense account type for the current period and for the year to date. For example, it includes the balances in the Bank Charges account and in the Insurance Expense account.


Net Income

Net income is equal to sales less cost of sales less expenses. Net income for the current period and for year to date is shown.


Current Period

This field displays the specified balance for the period your company is in now. For example, if your company has 12 periods that correspond to the calendar months and it is March 27, 2000, then the current period is March, and this field displays the balance for March.


Year to Date

This field displays the specified balance for the periods from the beginning of the year until now. For example, if your company has 12 periods that correspond to the calendar months and it is March 27, 2000, then the field includes the balance from January 1, 2000, through March 27, 2000.


Current Period

This field displays the specified balance for the period your company is in now. For example, if your company has 12 periods that correspond to the calendar months and it is March 27, 2000, then the current period is March, and this field displays the balance for March.


Year to Date

This field displays the specified balance for the periods from the beginning of the year until now. For example, if your company has 12 periods that correspond to the calendar months and it is March 27, 2000, then the field includes the balance from January 1, 2000, through March 27, 2000.


Cash

This field contains the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Cash account type. For example, it includes the balances in the Petty Cash account and in the Regular Checking account.


Accounts Receivable

This field contains the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Accounts Receivable account type. For example, it includes the balances in the Accounts Receivable account and in the Contracts Receivable account.


Inventory

This field contains the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Inventory account type.


Accounts Payable

This field contains the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Accounts Payable account type.


Open Sales Orders

This field contains the total amount of open sales orders.


Open Purchase Orders

This field contains the total amount of open purchase orders.


Income

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Income account type for the current period. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Sales-Retail account and in the Interest Income account.


Cost of Sales

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Cost of Sales account type for the current period. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Direct Labor account and in the Materials Cost account.


Expense

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Expense account type for the current period. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Bank Charges account and in the Insurance Expense account.


Net Income

This is equal to sales less cost of sales less expenses. Net income for the current period is shown.


Income

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Income account type for the year to date. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Sales-Retail account and in the Interest Income account.


Cost of Sales

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Cost of Sales account type for the year to date. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Direct Labor account and in the Materials Cost account.


Expense

This is the sum of the balances in all accounts of the Expense account type for the year to date. For example, the sum includes the balances in the Bank Charges account and in the Insurance Expense account.


Net Income

This is equal to sales less cost of sales less expenses. Net income for the year to date is shown.


Spreadsheet List (Business Summary)

Description: This field contains categories of business summary data, for example, Cost of Sales as a Percentage of Sales and Current Assets.

Period Dates: This represents a comparison table of ending balances for the corresponding business category as of the date specified for the previous 36 accounting periods. The date in the far right column matches the as-of date at the top of the window. The date to the left is the end of the month prior to this date. The next date to the left is one month prior to the second date, and so on.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view business summary data in spreadsheet format for additional periods. Select the scroll button, and drag it until you see the period you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one period at a time right or left.


Spreadsheet List (Key Balances)

Description: This field contains categories of key balances data, for example, Cash and Inventory.

Period Dates: This represents a comparison table of key balances for the corresponding business category as of the date specified for the previous 36 accounting periods. The date in the far right column matches the as of date at the top of the window. The date to the left is the end of the month prior to this date. The next date to the left is one month prior to the second date, and so on.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this scroll bar to view key balances data in spreadsheet format for additional periods. Select the scroll button, and drag it until you see the period you want. You can also press the right or left arrow keys to move one period at a time right or left.


Business Summary

Select this option to display a numeric table of summary data consisting of various business ratios or a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Key Balances

Select this option to display key account balances in a numeric table or in a spreadsheet consisting of projections for the ends of sequential periods.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select a recently opened company...

This window lets you open a company that you have opened recently in Peachtree. These companies are displayed in the list box at the bottom of the window. To open one, just select it in the box, and double-click it or select the OK button.

To locate other Peachtree companies not listed in the box, select the Browse button.


OK

Select this button to open the selected company.


Close

Select this button to close the window without opening a Peachtree Accounting company.


Browse

Select this button to locate and select the Peachtree Accounting company you want to open.


Select a recently opened company...

This window lets you open a company that you have opened recently in Peachtree. These companies are displayed in the list box at the bottom of the window. To open one, just select it in the box, and double-click it or select the OK button.

To locate other Peachtree companies not listed in the box, select the Browse button.


Open

Companies you have opened recently in Peachtree are displayed in the list box at the bottom of the window. To open one now,  select it in the box, and double-click it or select the OK button.

To locate other Peachtree companies not listed in the box, select the Browse button.


Open

Companies you have opened recently in Peachtree are displayed in the list box at the bottom of the window. To open one now,  select it in the box, and double-click it or select the OK button.

To locate other Peachtree companies not listed in the box, select the Browse button.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the most common sales account that you use when selling inventory items.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the most common sales account that you use when selling inventory items.


G/L Inventory Account

Enter or select the most common inventory account that you use when purchasing and selling items.


G/L Inventory Account

Enter or select the most common inventory account that you use when purchasing and selling items.


G/L Cost of Sales Account

Enter or select the most common cost of sales account that you use when selling inventory items.


G/L Cost of Sales Account

Enter or select the most common cost of sales account that you use when selling items.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Imported Files List

File Name: Displays the name of the Quicken QIF file that contains the Quicken balance sheet accounts.

Quicken Account: Identifies the name of the Quicken account listed in the export file. The account name must match the Peachtree equivalent. So if you want to change the Peachtree account name, you must also change the Quicken account name within Quicken, export the QIF file, and then convert the Quicken accounts again.

Peachtree Account: This name defaults from the Quicken account name during the conversion process. Enter the name or number of the corresponding Peachtree account.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Quicken Category List

Quicken Category: Displays the name of the Quicken category.

New Account ID: Displays the original Quicken account name as the new account ID in Peachtree Accounting. Enter the account name or number you want to use in this field. You cannot change this ID in Peachtree Accounting after you finish importing, so be sure you are entering the right information.

Peachtree Account Type: Displays the default account type that Peachtree Accounting assigns to the newly imported account. Select a different account type from the list, if appropriate.


Display Area

Displays the Quicken category you highlighted.


Display Area

Displays the Quicken category you highlighted.


New Account ID

Displays the original Quicken account name as the new account ID in Peachtree Accounting. Enter the account name or number you want to use in this field. You cannot change this ID in Peachtree Accounting after you finish importing, so be sure you are entering the right information.


Peachtree Account Type

Displays the default account type that Peachtree Accounting assigns to the newly imported account. Select a different account type from the drop-down list, if appropriate.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed account information on this window.


Quicken Category List

Quicken Category: Displays the name of the Quicken category.

New Account ID: Displays the original Quicken account name as the new account ID in Peachtree Accounting. Enter the account name or number you want to use in this field. You cannot change this ID in Peachtree Accounting after you finish importing, so be sure you are entering the right information.

Peachtree Account Type: Displays the default account type that Peachtree Accounting assigns to the newly imported account. Select a different account type from the drop-down list, if appropriate.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Convert Payees to Vendors List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee or class to the corresponding Peachtree vendor. The default is for all the payees or classes to become Peachtree vendors. Double-click to remove the X from those payees who are not vendors.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee or class, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Vendor: Identifies the vendor in Peachtree Accounting that the payee or class is being converted to.


Convert Payees to Vendors List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee or class to the corresponding Peachtree vendor. The default is for all the payees or classes to become Peachtree vendors. Double-click to remove the X from those payees who are not vendors.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee or class, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Vendor: Identifies the vendor in Peachtree Accounting that the payee or class is being converted to.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Convert Payees to Customers List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee or class to the corresponding Peachtree customer. The default is for none of the payees or classes to become Peachtree customers. Double-click to add the X if you want the payee or class to become a customer.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee or class, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Customer: Identifies the customer in Peachtree Accounting that the payee or class is being converted to.


Convert Payees to Customers List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee or class to the corresponding Peachtree customer. The default is for none of the payees or classes to become Peachtree customers. Double-click to add an X if you want the payee or class to become a customer.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee or class, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Customer: Identifies the customer in Peachtree Accounting that the payee or class is being converted to.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Convert Classes to Jobs List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken class to the corresponding Peachtree job. The default is for none of the classes to become Peachtree jobs. Double-click to add the X if you want the class to become a job.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Class.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken class, for example, Arena.

Peachtree Job: Identifies the job in Peachtree Accounting that the class is being converted to.


Convert Classes to Jobs List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken class to the corresponding Peachtree job. The default is for none of the classes to become Peachtree jobs. Double-click to add the X if you want the class to become a job.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Class.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken class, for example, Arena.

Peachtree Job: Identifies the job in Peachtree Accounting that the class is being converted to.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the Quicken import process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Convert Payees to Employees List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee to the corresponding Peachtree employee. The default is for none of the payees to become Peachtree employees. Double-click to add an X if you want the payee to become an employee.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Employee: Identifies the employee in Peachtree Accounting that the payee is being converted to.


Convert Payees to Employees List

Convert: Indicates whether to convert the Quicken payee to the corresponding Peachtree employee. The default is for none of the payees to become Peachtree employees. Double-click to add an X if you want the payee to become an employee.

Quicken Type: Specifies the Quicken type, for example, Payee.

Quicken Name/Class: Names or classifies the Quicken payee, for example, Home Depot.

Peachtree Employee: Identifies the employee in Peachtree Accounting that the payee is being converted to.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


OK

Select this button to display the Payroll Tax wizard. This will allow you to update tax tables to the new payroll year.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


OK

Select this button to display the Payroll Tax wizard. This will allow you to update tax tables to the new payroll year.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Select Tax Tables to Update

Select the Update check box to indicate that you want the payroll tax table updated to the new year. When you select a tax table to update, Peachtree copies the existing (old) tax table and adjusts the date in the tax table name. Your existing tax tables are not affected and will remain in the company tax table list.

Note: Only company tax tables that have not been previously updated to the new payroll year are displayed in this list. Global tax tables and current company tax tables are not included here.


Select Tax Tables to Update

Select the Update check box to indicate that you want the payroll tax table updated to the new year. When you select a tax table to update, Peachtree copies the existing (old) tax table and adjusts the date in the tax table name. Your existing tax tables are not affected and will remain in the company tax table list.

Note: Only company tax tables that have not been previously updated to the new payroll year are displayed in this list. Global tax tables and current company tax tables are not included here.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update User-Maintained Tax Table Wizard message

This message appears to inform you that there is a problem with one of your Peachtree tax tables. For more information, click the Help button.


Update

Select this to to update your User-Maintained Payroll Tax Tables to the current payroll tax year.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Table

Select this button to set up gross pay and withholding limits for the tax table. This is used only by the Table function of the Tax formula. If your table does not use the Table function, you do not need to enter anything into this box.

If your formula does use the table function, then refer to User's Guide for further information.


Tax ID

This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Tax ID

This code identifies the tax table when selected for use in payroll fields. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Tax Name

This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year]. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.

Note: The tax table name will display the previous payroll year. When you select Finish in the Update Company Tax Table Wizard, the tax table year is updated.


Tax Name

This identifies the tax table and its version. It is listed as [Calculation Name] [Year]. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.

Note: The tax table name will display the previous payroll year. When you select Finish in the Update Company Tax Table Wizard, the tax table year is updated.


Filing Status

This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Filing Status

This identifies the filing status associated with the tax table. It can be "All Statuses" or an individual filing status. This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Appears on Payroll Tax Report Menus

When this check box is selected, the tax table will appear on the Payroll Tax Report menu, or the payroll field that uses this calculation will appear on the Exception Report. The Taxable_Gross variable must be included in the formula when selecting this check box.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's Federal, State or Local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's Federal, State or Local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's Federal, State or Local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Government

This identifies the government type for the tax table. It means that the tax table will be calculated based on the employee's Federal, State, or Local tax information set up in the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Locality

This identifies the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee state tax locality matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry. If the field is blank, the tax table will be calculated for all state locality values.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Locality

This identifies the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee state tax locality matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry. If the field is blank, the tax table will be calculated for all state locality values.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Locality

This identifies the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee state tax locality matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry. If the field is blank, the tax table will be calculated for all state locality values.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Locality

This identifies the locality code that corresponds to this tax table. If the employee state tax locality matches the value entered here, the tax table will be calculated during payroll entry. If the field is blank, the tax table will be calculated for all state locality values.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Type

Select Deduction to subtract this tax from the gross; select Addition to add the tax to the gross; or select Exception to allow a positive or negative number to be allowed in Payroll calculations. Use Exception for a vacation or sick time field to allow the calculation of a deduction to be positive or the calculation of an addition to be negative.

This field is only for display purposes; it cannot be changed here.


Formula

The Formula box contains the equations you used to actually calculate taxes. In most cases, you will not have to do anything here; Peachtree Accounting supplies the equations for most types of taxes. For further information, see the Payroll chapter in your User's Guide.

Note: This is the only section you can modify or update in this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Deduction

Select this option to subtract the calculated amount from the gross.


Addition

Select this option to add the calculated amount to the gross.


Exception

Select this option for a positive or negative number to be allowed in Payroll calculations. Use Exception for a vacation or sick time field to allow the calculation of a deduction to be positive, or the calculation of an addition to be negative.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. The options below let you find out more about Peachtree's Tax Service, enter your Tax Service registration number if you already have one, or get your registration number from the Peachtree Web site.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. The options below let you find out more about Peachtree's Tax Service, enter your Tax Service registration number if you already have one, or get your registration number from the Peachtree Web site.


Order Peachtree's Tax Service online

Select this button to go to the Peachtree Web site order page.


Order Peachtree's Tax Service online

Select this button to go to the Peachtree Web site order page.


Enter your Peachtree Tax Service registration number

Select this button to go to the Tax Service Registration window and enter your registration number.


Obtain your Peachtree Tax Service registration number

Select this button to go to the Tax Registration page on the Peachtree Web site.


Learn more about Peachtree's Tax Service

Select this button to see online Help about the Peachtree Payroll Tax Service.


Obtain your Peachtree Tax Service registration number

Select this button to go to the Tax Registration page on the Peachtree Web site.


OK

Select OK to close this tax reminder window. For more information on Peachtree Accounting Tax Service, refer to the online Help.


Learn more about Peachtree's Tax Service

Select this button to see online Help about the Peachtree Payroll Tax Service.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. Use the third option above to enter your tax registration number.


Enter your Peachtree Tax Service registration number

Select this button to go to the Tax Service Registration window and enter your registration number.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. Use the third option above to enter your tax registration number.


Payroll Tax Service message

This message appears to inform you that you have not registered for the Peachtree Tax Service for the current year. The options below let you find out more about Peachtree's Tax Service, enter your Tax Service registration number if you already have one, or get your registration number from the Peachtree Web site.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Explore a Sample Company

Allows you to select which sample company you want to open and explore. Choose a sample company and click OK.


OK

Select this button to open the sample company you have chosen.


Close

Select this button to close the window without opening a sample company.


Explore a Sample Company

Allows you to select which sample company you want to open and explore. Choose a sample company and click OK.


Explore a Sample Company

Allows you to select which sample company you want to open and explore. Choose a sample company and click OK.


Explore a Sample Company

Allows you to select which sample company you want to open and explore. Choose a sample company and click OK.


Explore a Sample Company

Allows you to select which sample company you want to open and explore. Choose a sample company and click OK.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Description

This describes the sample company; to select it, click the appropriate option button.


Description

This describes the sample company; to select it, click the appropriate option button.


Description

This describes the sample company; to select it, click the appropriate option button.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Box 2 :  FIT Withheld

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-paid federal withholding tax. The default is Fed_Income.


Box 4 :  FICA Withheld

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-paid social security tax. The default is Soc_Sec.


Box 6:  Medicare Withheld

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-paid Medicare tax. The default is Medicare.


Box 7:  FICA Tips

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-earned tips. The default is Tips if you set up employee Tips using the Payroll Setup wizard. If your employees do not accept or record tips, select None.


Box 8:  Allocated Tips

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-earned tips that are not included as part of gross wages or social security (FICA) tips. The default is None.


Box 9:  Advanced EIC

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee federal earned income credit payments. The default is FEIC if you set up an earned income credit payroll field as described in the Peachtree Accounting User's Guide. If your employees do not qualify, select None.


Box 10:  Dependent Care

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to dependent care payments you make to employees who qualify. If your company does not pay dependent care benefits to employees, select None.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 14

This box is used for miscellaneous information. Enter a brief description; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it.


Box 14

This box is used for miscellaneous information. Enter a brief description; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it.


Box 11:  Nonqualified

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to nonqualified deferred compensation or section 457 benefits that you make to employees who qualify. If your company does not provide these benefits to employees, select None.


Box 17:  State Income Tax

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-paid state withholding tax. The default is State. If your state does not require state income tax, select None.


Box 19:  Local Income Tax

From the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to employee-paid local withholding tax. The default is Local. If your locality does not require local income tax, select None.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions


Box 12

This box is used for miscellaneous deferrals and compensations. Enter a letter code for the type of benefit or payment; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it. You can enter up to three codes and payroll fields. Refer to the instructions included on the federal W-2 form for code descriptions.


Box 14

This box is used for miscellaneous information. Enter a brief description; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it.


Box 14

This box is used for miscellaneous information. Enter a brief description; then from the drop-down list, select the payroll field that corresponds to it.


OK

Select OK to set up standard payroll fields and establish employee defaults.

Note: If you are not subject to United States payroll, select Cancel. You will have to set up payroll fields manually.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


State

This identifies the default state in which most of your employees reside. Enter or select a two-character state abbreviation from the drop-down list. This list includes the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).  If you are not subject to United States payroll, select Cancel. You will have to set up payroll fields manually.

Note: If you have employees that live in a different state, you can modify their individual setup.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality

This identifies the city or county name that requires a local payroll tax. This field is only available if certain states are selected that require local payroll tax. If your employees live in different localities, choose the primary locality for most employees.

Enter the locality where your company resides, or select it from the list if a list is available.


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Locality Tax Rate

This is only accessible for certain states where there are local tax rates. If it is accessible, enter the rate for the locality you've chosen. Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7%).


Unemployment Percent for your Company

Enter the percentage for unemployment taxes required by the state for your company. Unemployment tax rates may vary depending on your business type or locality within the state. If you are unsure, check with your accountant or local unemployment office. This is an employer-paid tax.

Enter a percentage as a whole number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7% unemployment).


Tax Liability Tax Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account that will be used to record payroll tax liabilities. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Liability Tax Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account that will be used to record payroll tax liabilities. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Expense Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account that will be used to record employer-paid payroll tax expenses, for example state unemployment. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure.

Select the Lookup button at the side of the box, or type ? to see a list of accounts. If you want to add an account, type +, or double-click the entry box.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Tax Expense Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account that will be used to record employer-paid payroll tax expenses, for example state unemployment. Typically, this is Payroll Tax Expense account. You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant on which account to use if you're not sure.

Select the Lookup button at the side of the box, or type ? to see a list of accounts. If you want to add an account, type +, or double-click the entry box.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual payroll field setup, if needed.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to close this window and print the reports selected.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Print Reports List

Select the reports you want to print before changing accounting periods or closing the current fiscal year. If you already have printed reports, simply clear the Print check box.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back Up

Select this option to back up your company data (strongly recommended) before beginning the close year process.


Continue

Select this button to begin the close year process. It is strongly recommended that you back up your company data before beginning this process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


Quote #

Shows the Quote # field as it will appear on this template.


Quote #

Shows the Quote # field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Good Thru

Shows the Good Thru field as it will appear on this template.


Good Thru

Shows the Good Thru field as it will appear on this template.


Bill To

Shows the Bill To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship To

Shows the Ship To field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Quote Line Items

Shows the Quote Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax Code

Shows the Sales Tax Code field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Quote Total

Shows the Quote Total field as it will appear on this template.


Quote Total

Shows the Quote Total field as it will appear on this template.


OK

Select this button to return to the template maintenance window.


Template Preview

Shows what the respective task window will look like based on your template design. You cannot edit or use any fields in the Template Preview window. It is for display purposes only.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


SO #

Shows the SO # field as it will appear on this template.


SO #

Shows the SO # field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Close Sales Order

Shows the Close Sales Order field as it will appear on this template.


Bill To

Shows the Bill To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship To

Shows the Ship To field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Order Line Items

Shows the Sales Order Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax Code

Shows the Sales Tax Code field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


SO Total

Shows the SO Total field as it will appear on this template.


SO Total

Shows the SO Total field as it will appear on this template.


OK

Select this button to return to the template maintenance window.


Template Preview

Shows what the respective task window will look like based on your template design. You cannot edit or use any fields in the Template Preview window. It is for display purposes only.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


Customer ID

Shows the Customer ID field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice #

Shows the Invoice # field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice #

Shows the Invoice # field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Bill To

Shows the Bill To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship To

Shows the Ship To field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Customer PO

Shows the Customer PO field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Date

Shows the Ship Date field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Date

Shows the Ship Date field as it will appear on this template.


Terms

Shows the Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Terms

Shows the Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Terms Arrow Button

Shows the Terms arrow button as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Rep ID

Shows the Sales Rep ID field as it will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Order Tab

Shows the Apply to Sales Order tab fields as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Tab

Shows the Apply to Sales tab fields as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Order/Apply to Sales Tab

Shows the Apply to Sales Orders and Apply to Sales tabs as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Order Line Items

Shows the Apply to Sales Order Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Line Items

Shows the Apply to Sales Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


Apply Reimbursable Expenses Arrow Button

Shows the Apply Reimbursable Expenses arrow button as it will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


A/R Account

Shows the A/R Account field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax Code

Shows the Sales Tax Code field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Sales Tax

Shows the Sales Tax field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Freight Amount

Shows the Freight Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice Total

Shows the Invoice Total field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice Total

Shows the Invoice Total field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice Total

Shows the Invoice Total field as it will appear on this template.


Amount Paid at Sale

Shows the Amount Paid at Sale field as it will appear on this template.


Amount Paid at Sale Arrow Button

Shows the Amount Paid at Sale arrow button as it will appear on this template.


Amount Paid at Sale

Shows the Amount Paid at Sale field as it will appear on this template.


Net Amount Due

Shows the Net Amount Due field as it will appear on this template.


Net Amount Due

Shows the Net Amount Due field as it will appear on this template.


OK

Select this button to return to the template maintenance window.


Apply Reimbursable Expenses

Shows the Apply Reimbursable Expenses field as it will appear on this template.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Apply Reimbursable Expenses Arrow Button

Shows the Apply Reimbursable Expenses arrow button as it will appear on this template


Other Applied Receipts and Credit Memos

Shows the Other Applied Receipts and Credit Memos field as it will appear on this template.


Vendor ID

Shows the Vendor ID field as it will appear on this template.


Vendor ID

Shows the Vendor ID field as it will appear on this template.


PO #

Shows the PO # field as it will appear on this template.


PO #

Shows the PO # field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Close Purchase Order

Shows the Close Purchase Order field as it will appear on this template.


Good Thru

Shows the Good Thru field as it will appear on this template.


Good Thru

Shows the Good Thru field as it will appear on this template.


Remit To

Shows the Remit To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship To

Shows the Ship To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Discount Amount

Shows the Discount Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Discount Amount

Shows the Discount Amount field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Displayed Terms

Shows the Displayed Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Purchase Order Line Items

Shows the Purchase Order Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


A/P Account

Shows the A/P Account field as it will appear on this template.


A/P Account

Shows the A/P Account field as it will appear on this template.


PO Total

Shows the PO Total field as it will appear on this template.


PO Total

Shows the PO Total field as it will appear on this template.


OK

Select this button to return to the template maintenance window.


Template Preview

Shows what the respective task window will look like based on your template design. You cannot edit or use any fields in the Template Preview window. It is for display purposes only.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Vendor ID

Shows the Vendor ID field as it will appear on this template.


Vendor ID

Shows the Vendor ID field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice #

Shows the Invoice # field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice #

Shows the Invoice # field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Date

Shows the Date field as it will appear on this template.


Waiting on Bill from Vendor

Shows the Waiting on Bill from Vendor field as it will appear on this template.


Remit To

Shows the Remit To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship To

Shows the Ship To field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Ship Via

Shows the Ship Via field as it will appear on this template.


Terms

Shows the Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Terms

Shows the Terms field as it will appear on this template.


Terms Arrow Button

Shows the Terms arrow button as it will appear on this template.


A/P Account

Shows the A/P Account field as it will appear on this template.


A/P Account

Shows the A/P Account field as it will appear on this template.


Apply to Purchase Order and Apply to Purchases Tabs

Shows the Apply to Purchase Order and Apply to Purchases tabs as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Purchase Order Line Items

Shows the Apply to Purchase Order Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


Apply to Purchases Line Items

Shows the Apply to Purchases Line Items fields as they will appear on this template.


Invoice Total

Shows the Invoice Total field as it will appear on this template.


Invoice Total

Shows the Invoice Total field as it will appear on this template.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Shows the Amount Paid at Purchase field as it will appear on this template.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Shows the Amount Paid at Purchase field as it will appear on this template.


Template Preview

Shows what the respective task window will look like based on your template design. You cannot edit or use any fields in the Template Preview window. It is for display purposes only.


Net Amount Due

Shows the Net Amount Due field as it will appear on this template.


Net Amount Due

Shows the Net Amount Due field as it will appear on this template.


Net Amount Due

Shows the Net Amount Due field as it will appear on this template.


OK

Select this button to return to the template maintenance window.


Help

Select this button to view online Help for this window.


Other Applied Payments and Credit Memos

Shows the Other Applied Payments and Credit Memos field as it will appear on this template.


Other Applied Payments and Credit Memos

Shows the Other Applied Payments and Credit Memos field as it will appear on this template.


Back Up

Select this option to back up your company data (strongly recommended) before running the Integrity Check data utility.


Continue

Select this button to display the Integrity Check window. It is strongly recommended that you back up your company data before beginning this process.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the receipt. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this sale. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the receipt. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this sale. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Process Credit Card

If your customer is paying by credit card, click this button to enter credit card information and the transction authorization code. If the payment was authorized and an authorization code was entered in the Credit Card Information window, "(Approved)" appears beside the Process Credit Card button.


Process Credit Card

If your customer is paying by credit card, click this button to enter credit card information and the transction authorization code. If the payment was authorized and an authorization code was entered in the Credit Card Information window, "(Approved)" appears beside the Process Credit Card button.


Deposit Ticket ID

On the Pay Methods tab of the Customer Defaults window, you can tell Peachtree to assign desposit ticket IDs in Receipts. If you have chosen this option, the current system date appears by default in the Deposit Ticket ID field, but you can change it.

If you have not chosen to assign ticket IDs in Receipts, in the Deposit Ticket ID field, enter the ID number (up to eight characters) from your deposit ticket. This code is used for bank reconciliation. This ID ties receipts to the deposit total. This allows you to clear all the receipts for an entire deposit ticket when reconciling.


Deposit Ticket ID

On the Pay Methods tab of the Customer Defaults window, you can tell Peachtree to assign desposit ticket IDs in Receipts. If you have chosen this option, the current system date appears by default in the Deposit Ticket ID field, but you can change it.

If you have not chosen to assign ticket IDs in Receipts, in the Deposit Ticket ID field, enter the ID number (up to eight characters) from your deposit ticket. This code is used for bank reconciliation. This ID ties receipts to the deposit total. This allows you to clear all the receipts for an entire deposit ticket when reconciling.


Customer ID

The customer ID is based on the ID entered or selected on the invoice. You can't change it here, though you can on the invoice itself.


Name

This is the name associated with the customer ID entered or selected on the invoice. You can't change it here.


Billing Address

This is the billing address of the customer as set up in the customer record. You can't change it here.


Reference

As reference number, enter the check number or credit card number or the word cash. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This is a required field.

Note: If you are entering cash receipts, avoid using "CASH" each time. It is generally a good idea to always use a unique reference number for each receipt transaction. This way, you can easily identify and manage the receipt in reports and Account Reconciliation.


Date

This is the invoice date; it cannot be changed here.


Receipt Amount

Enter the amount the customer is paying at this time.


Payment Method

From the list, select the method of payment this customer is using. The payment methods are entered on the Pay Methods tab of the Maintain Customer Defaults window. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the receipt. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this sale. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the receipt. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the cash account name to apply to this sale. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Time of Sale Receipt

Use this to enter a sales receipt at the time the invoice for the sale is posted.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated template.


New

Select this button to clear the displayed template and enter a new one.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Quote No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Quote No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Good Thru

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Good Thru

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Name

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Bill To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Quote Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax Code

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Quote Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Quote Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed template information in case you have entered it in error.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Preview

Select this button so you can see what the displayed template looks like before saving it.


Template ID

This indicates the ID of the currently chosen template.


Template ID

Either enter an 20-character maximum ID for the template you want to create or use the drop-down list to select the ID of an existing template.


Description

This is a brief description of the current template.


Description

Enter or select a brief description for the displayed template. If you are creating a custom template, you can enter a description of up to 30 characters.


Set template as default

Select the check box if you want the current template to be the default one for Quotes.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box. Then use the drop-down list to select the desired form.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Data Fields

This group box contains fields that show up in the corresponding task window as data fields. You can hide any field marked <Show> by clicking it; the field will then not show up in the window based on the current template. You cannot change any fields marked <Required>.


Click the field to show or hide it on the task window.

Each field marked <Show> can be hidden in the template. This lets you customize the task window based on the current template so that any fields not required for data entry won't show up in the window.

To hide a field marked <Show>, just click it. It will then be marked <Hide>.


Fields marked as <Required> cannot be hidden.

You cannot hide any of the fields marked <Required>. These fields are needed for complete entry of data in the window based on the current template.


This is a <Standard> template; its fields cannot be modified.

Note that the template ID for this template contains the word "Standard." You can't change the fields of any standard template, but you can create a new, custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


To change the template, enter a new template ID.

You can't change the fields of a standard template, but you can create a new custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated template.


New

Select this button to clear the displayed template and enter a new one.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


SO No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


SO No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Name

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Bill To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Order Line Items

Each filed on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax Code

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


SO Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


SO Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed template information in case you have entered it in error.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Preview

Select this button so you can see what the displayed template looks like before saving it.


Template ID

This indicates the ID of the currently chosen template.


Template ID

Either enter an 20-character maximum ID for the template you want to create or use the drop-down list to select the ID of an existing template.


Description

This is a brief description of the current template.


Description

Enter or select a brief description for the displayed template. If you are creating a custom template, you can enter a description of up to 30 characters.


Set template as default

Select the check box if you want the current template to be the default one for Sales Orders.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box. Then use the drop-down list to select the desired form.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship By

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship By

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Data Fields

This group box contains fields that show up in the corresponding task window as data fields. You can hide any field marked <Show> by clicking it; the field will then not show up in the window based on the current template. You cannot change any fields marked <Required>.


Click the field to show or hide it on the task window.

Each field marked <Show> can be hidden in the template. This lets you customize the task window based on the current template so that any fields not required for data entry won't show up in the window.

To hide a field marked <Show>, just click it. It will then be marked <Hide>.


Fields marked as <Required> cannot be hidden.

You cannot hide any of the fields marked <Required>. These fields are needed for complete entry of data in the window based on the current template.


This is a <Standard> template; its fields cannot be changed.

So that standard templates are always available for your use, Peachtree does not permit changing fields in a standard template.


To change the template, enter a new template ID.

You can't change the fields of a standard template, but you can create a new custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated template.


New

Select this button to clear the displayed template and enter a new one.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Name

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Bill To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer PO

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Rep

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Sales Order Tab

Each field on this tab contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Sales Tab

Each field on this tab contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Sales Order/Apply to Sales Tab

Select either of these tabs to choose which fields will appear on this template.


Apply to Sales Order Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Sales Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/R Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax Code

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Amount Paid at Sale

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Amount Paid at Sale

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Sales Tax

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Freight Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Net Due

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Net Due

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed template information in case you have entered it in error.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Preview

Select this button so you can see what the displayed template looks like before saving it.


Template ID

This indicates the ID of the currently chosen template.


Template ID

Either enter an 20-character maximum ID for the template you want to create or use the drop-down list to select the ID of an existing template.


Description

This is a brief description of the current template.


Description

If you are creating a new template, enter a 30-character maximum description for it. If the current template is an existing one, the description of that template will appear.


Set template as default

Select the check box if you want the current template to be the default one for Maintain Sales/Invoicing.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box. Then use the drop-down list to select the desired form.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Other Applied Credits

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Other Applied Credits

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Data Fields

This group box contains fields that show up in the corresponding task window as data fields. You can hide any field marked <Show> by clicking it; the field will then not show up in the window based on the current template. You cannot change any fields marked <Required>.


Click this field to hide or show it on the task window.

Click each field name to change its status from <Hide> to <Show> or vice versa. Fields marked <Required> cannot be hidden.


Fields marked as <Required> cannot be hidden.

Click each field name to change its status from <Hide> to <Show> or vice versa. Fields marked <Required> cannot be hidden.


This is a <Standard> template; its fields cannot be changed.

So that standard templates are always available for your use, Peachtree does not permit changing fields in a standard template.


To change the template, enter a new ID.

While you can't change fields in standard templates, you can create a custom template with custom fields. In the Template ID field, enter a new ID; then proceed to change fields as desired. When finished, save the new template.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated template.


New

Select this button to clear the displayed template and enter a new one.


Vendor ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Vendor ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


PO No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


PO No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Good Thru

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Good Thru

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Name

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Remit To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Discount Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Discount Amount

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Displayed Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/P Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/P Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Purchase Order Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Purchase Order Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Purchase Order Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed template information in case you have entered it in error.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Preview

Select this button so you can see what the displayed template looks like before saving it.


Template ID

This indicates the ID of the currently chosen template.


Template ID

Either enter an 20-character maximum ID for the template you want to create or use the drop-down list to select the ID of an existing template.


Description

This is a brief description of the current template.


Description

Enter or select a brief description for the displayed template. If you are creating a custom template, you can enter a description of up to 30 characters.


Set template as default

Select the check box if you want the current template to be the default one for Purchase Orders.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box.


Always print using a specific form

If you want transactions that you enter in the window always to print using a certain form, select the check box. Then use the drop-down list to select the desired form.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Data Fields

This group box contains fields that show up in the corresponding task window as data fields. You can hide any field marked <Show> by clicking it; the field will then not show up in the window based on the current template. You cannot change any fields marked <Required>.


Click the field to show or hide it on the task window.

Each field marked <Show> can be hidden in the template. This lets you customize the task window based on the current template so that any fields not required for data entry won't show up in the window.

To hide a field marked <Show>, just click it. It will then be marked <Hide>.


Fields marked as <Required> cannot be hidden.

You cannot hide any of the fields marked <Required>. These fields are needed for complete entry of data in the window based on the current template.


This is a <Standard> template; its fields cannot be modified.

Note that the template ID for this template contains the word "Standard." You can't change the fields of any standard template, but you can create a new, custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


To change the template, enter a new template ID.

You can't change the fields of a standard template, but you can create a new custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


Customer Invoice No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Customer Invoice No.

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated template.


New

Select this button to clear the displayed template and enter a new one.


Vendor ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Vendor ID

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice #

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice #

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Name

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Remit To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship To

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Ship Via

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Terms

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/P Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


A/P Account

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Purchase Order Tab

Each field on this tab contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Purchases Tab

Each field on this tab contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Purchase Order/Apply to Purchases Tab

Select either of these tabs to choose which fields will appear on this template.


Apply to Purchase Order Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Apply to Purchases Line Items

Each field on these lines contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Invoice Total

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Amount Paid at Purchase

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Net Due

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Net Due

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Net Amount Due

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed template information in case you have entered it in error.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Preview

Select this button so you can see what the displayed template looks like before saving it.


Template ID

This indicates the ID of the currently chosen template.


Template ID

Either enter an 20-character maximum ID for the template you want to create or use the drop-down list to select the ID of an existing template.


Description

This is a brief description of the current template.


Description

Enter or select a brief description for the displayed template. If you are creating a custom template, you can enter a description of up to 30 characters.


Set template as default

Select the check box if you want the current template to be the default one for Purchases/Receive Inventory.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Date

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Other Payments and Credits

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>.


Other Payments and Credits

Contains one of three values:

<Required>: This means the field is required and cannot be hidden. The field will show on this template.

<Show>: This means the field will show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Hide>.

<Hide>: This means the field will not show on this template. Click the field to change the value to <Show>


Data Fields

This group box contains fields that show up in the corresponding task window as data fields. You can hide any field marked <Show> by clicking it; the field will then not show up in the window based on the current template. You cannot change any fields marked <Required>.


Click the field to show or hide it on the task window.

Each field marked <Show> can be hidden in the template. This lets you customize the task window based on the current template so that any fields not required for data entry won't show up in the window.

To hide a field marked <Show>, just click it. It will then be marked <Hide>.


Fields marked as <Required> cannot be hidden.

You cannot hide any of the fields marked <Required>. These fields are needed for complete entry of data in the window based on the current template.


This is a <Standard> template; its fields cannot be modified.

Note that the template ID for this template contains the word "Standard." You can't change the fields of any standard template, but you can create a new, custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


To change the template, enter a new template ID.

You can't change the fields of a standard template, but you can create a new custom template and change fields in it. Just enter a new ID in the Template ID field, make your changes, and then save the new template.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Customize

Select this button to customize the selected template.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Select a Template List

Displays a list of templates. From the list, select the template you want to customize.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Maintain Employees/Sales Reps

General Tab: Select this tab to set up employee names and address, filing statuses, employee types, date of hire, and beginning balances.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to enter data for custom fields set up in the Employee Defaults window.

Pay Info: Select this tab to enter information about the employee's pay rates, frequency of pay, and whether the employee is hourly or salaried.

Withholding Info: Select this tab to enter the employee's withholding information (federal and state filing statuses).

EmployEE Fields: Select this tab to modify the employee payroll fields if different from the payroll defaults.

EmployER Fields: Select this tab to modify the employer payroll fields for this employee if different from the payroll defaults.

Direct Deposit: Select this tab to modify Peachtree direct deposit fields for the company.


Direct Deposit Allocations

This area lists information about accounts set up as direct deposit accounts for the selected employee.

Account: You can set up as many as four accounts to serve as direct deposit accounts. This information will come from the direct deposit employee's Employee Authorization Agreement.

Account Type: For each direct deposit account, use the drop-down list to choose the appropriate type, either checking or savings.

Routing/Transit Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the routing/transit number of the account.

Bank Acct Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the account number.

Allocation Method: For each direct deposit account you set up, you can choose one of three methods: Percent: The percentage of distribution equals the employee's net pay multiplied by the amount entered in the % field. Amount: A dollar amount (entered in the Fixed Dollar Amount field) that doesn't fluctuate despite differences in employee net pay. Remainder: This method is used to ensure that all of an employee's net pay is distributed in cases where net pay exceeds Percent and Fixed Amount allocations.

Amount: If you aren't using a calculation, enter a flat rate here.  Positive numbers are earnings and negative numbers are deductions.

%: Enter the percentage of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Fixed Dollar Amount: Enter the dollar amount of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Pre-Note Status: This reflects whether a pre-note has been successfully sent to and accepted by the employee's financial institution. If the note has not been sent, the field will read Not Sent.

Pre-Note Date: This displays the date of the latest pre-note sent for this employee direct deposit account. If you haven't sent a note, the field will display the current system date.

Account Reset button: This lets you reset account information for any of the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee


Direct Deposit Allocations

This area lists information about accounts set up as direct deposit accounts for the selected employee.

Account: You can set up as many as four accounts to serve as direct deposit accounts. This information will come from the direct deposit employee's Employee Authorization Agreement.

Account Type: For each direct deposit account, use the drop-down list to choose the appropriate type, either checking or savings.

Routing/Transit Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the routing/transit number of the account.

Bank Acct Number: For each direct deposit account you set up, enter the account number.

Allocation Method: For each direct deposit account you set up, you can choose one of three methods: Percent: The percentage of distribution equals the employee's net pay multiplied by the amount entered in the % field. Amount: A dollar amount (entered in the Fixed Dollar Amount field) that doesn't fluctuate despite differences in employee net pay. Remainder: This method is used to ensure that all of an employee's net pay is distributed in cases where net pay exceeds Percent and Fixed Amount allocations.

Amount: If you aren't using a calculation, enter a flat rate here.  Positive numbers are earnings and negative numbers are deductions.

%: Enter the percentage of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Fixed Dollar Amount: Enter the dollar amount of employee net pay to be distributed to the account.

Pre-Note Status: This reflects whether a pre-note has been successfully sent to and accepted by the employee's financial institution. If the note has not been sent, the field will read Not Sent.

Pre-Note Date: This displays the date of the latest pre-note sent for this employee direct deposit account. If you haven't sent a note, the field will display the current system date.

Account Reset button: This lets you reset account information for any of the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee


Total Distributed - Percentage

This is the total percentage of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up as Percent accounts for the employee.


Total Distributed - Fixed Dollar Amount

This is the total dollar amount of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up as Amount accounts for the employee.


Up arrow button

Use this button to move a selected row up one position in the list of accounts. This will be useful, for example, if you have a (Fixed) Amount account toward the end of the list and want to move it up to make sure that there will be enough net pay to distribute the entire fixed amount to that account.

Whenever you move a row, it is automatically renumbered. For example, if you move Account 2 up one position, it will become Account 1.


Total Distributed

This is the total percentage and fixed dollar amount of net pay distributed to the direct deposit accounts set up for the employee.


Pre-Note Status Message

This tells you about the pre-note status of the currently selected direct deposit account.


Down arrow button

Use this button to move a selected row down one position in the list of accounts. Whenever you move a row, it is automatically renumbered. For example, if you move Account 1 down one position, it will become Account 2.


Type

This identifies type of person that is associated with the event. Choose vendor, customer, or employee/sales rep from the drop-down list.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee associated with the event. When creating events, enter or select an employee ID to associate with the activity. Once selected Peachtree displays the employee's name and phone number. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You cannot change the employee ID when system-generated transaction events are displayed.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer associated with the event. When creating events, enter or select a customer ID to associate with the activity. Once selected, Peachtree displays the customer name, contact name, and phone number. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You cannot change the customer ID when system-generated transaction events are displayed.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor associated with the event. When creating events, enter or select a vendor ID to associate with the activity. Once selected, Peachtree displays the vendor name, contact name, and phone number. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You cannot change the vendor ID when system-generated transaction events are displayed.


Date

This identifies when the event occurred or will occur.  When creating events, enter or select the date you want the event to occur, if different from the current date. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Name

This identifies name and contact information of the employee, customer, or vendor associated with the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Event Type

This describes the kind of event displayed. Choose Call From, Call To, Meeting, Letter From, Letter To, Comment, or Other.

You can define your own event type using Other. Peachtree displays the System type only if a system-generated event is selected when you click the Edit (Records) button. If you have selected a system-generated event, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


System Event Type

This indicates that Peachtree Accounting generated the event based on the transaction conditions set up in the Action Item and Event Log Options window from the Options menu. Peachtree displays system events only if a system-generated event is selected when clicking the Edit button. If a system-generated event is displayed, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Other Event Description

This allows you to define a unique type of event. You enter up to 15 characters.


System Event Information

This identifies key information about the system-generated event (for example, the type of transaction, reference number, due date, and so on). Peachtree displays system events only if a system-generated event is selected when clicking the Edit button. If a system-generated event is displayed, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


System Event Information

This identifies key information about the system-generated event (for example, the type of transaction, reference number, due date, and so on). Peachtree displays system events only if a system-generated event is selected when clicking the Edit button. If a system-generated event is displayed, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


System Event Information

This identifies key information about the system-generated event (for example, the type of transaction, reference number, due date, and so on). Peachtree displays system events only if a system-generated event is selected when clicking the Edit button. If a system-generated event is displayed, click the Detail button to display and edit the original transaction that created the event.


Note

This allows you to add personal and detailed comments about the event. The note appears in the Event Log for the individual and also on the Events tab in the Action Items window. If the event is system-generated, the note immediately follows the description of the transaction in the Event Log and in the Events tab of the Action Items window. You enter up to 255 characters. Press CTRL+ENTER to start a new paragraph.


Display in Action Items

Select this check box if you want the event to display on the Events tab of the Action Items window. You can then choose when (the number of days before or after) you want the event to display. Use this to establish when you want to be reminded about future events.

Note: The event will always display on the individual's Event Log.


Number of Days

This identifies when the event will be displayed on the Events tab of the Action Items window. Enter the number of days before or after which you want the event to display. Use this to establish when you want to be reminded about future events.


Number of Days

This identifies when the event will be displayed on the Events tab of the Action Items window. Choose Before or After to display the event based on the numbers days that you specified. Use this to establish when you want to be reminded about future events.


Completed on

This identifies if and when the event was concluded. If you have completed the activity event, select the Completed on check box, and enter or select the completion date, if different from the current date. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.

Note: You cannot select the Completed on check box or change the completion date of system-generated events.


Completed on

This identifies if and when the event was concluded. If you have completed the activity event, select the Completed on check box, and enter or select the completion date, if different from the current date. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.

Note: You cannot select the Completed on check box or change the completion date of system-generated events.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated event.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating activity for a specified time period. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.

Note: When you select a customer ID, vendor ID, or employee ID, this button becomes available. System-generated events cannot recur.


Open

Select this button to choose and display a previously entered event.


New

Select this button to clear the event displayed and enter a new one.


Detail

Select this button to display and edit the transaction that created the event.

Note: This button is only available when a system-generated transaction event is displayed.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed event. Events can be deleted at any time.

Note: Once an event is completed, you must delete it to remove the item from the action item list.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Events From

Enter or select the date from which you want events to display for this individual. The first day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Events To

Enter or select the last date through which you want events to display for this individual. The last day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Show

From the drop-down list, select the event item status that you want to display. You have the choice of all events, completed events, or uncompleted events. For example, if you choose to show all events, this displays both completed and uncompleted events as of the date you chose.


Sort By

You can sort the Event Log by date or type of event. Choose a sort option from the drop-down list.


Contact Log for:

This identifies the customer, vendor or employee the event log represents. For customers and vendors, the company name and contact information display. For employees, then name and phone number display.

To change the individual you must close this window and select another employee, vendor, or customer record.


Event Filter

This identifies the filter applied when listing events in the Event Log. All Events Type Displayed is the default.

To display specific event types, select the Filter button.


Event Log

This lists events created based on the individual, date selected, and the filter applied. Double-click the event listed to display or change detail information about the event.

Completed: This check box is selected when the event or transaction is completed. Peachtree Accounting will select the check box when system-generated events are completed (for example, an invoice was paid). You must select the Completed check box on all events that you entered.

Date: This identifies when the event occurred or is due.

Type: This identifies what kind of event is displayed.

Note: This displays comments about the event. For system-generated events, the notes display the transaction or event ID, the date the transaction was generated, and the amount of the transaction.


Close

Select this button to exit the window.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window, which allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system-generated events. You can log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can also use this to create a listing of future activity.


Print

Select this button to print a list of displayed events.


Filter

Select this button to choose which type of events you want to display in the Event Log.


Events Selection Criteria

Here, you tell Peachtree which events you want to see and the sort order you want to see them in.

Events From: Enter or select the date from which you want events to display for this individual. The first day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Events To: Enter or select the last date through which you want events to display for this individual. The last day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Show: From the drop-down list, select the event item status that you want to display. You have the choice of all events, completed events, or uncompleted events. For example, if you choose to show all events, this displays both completed and uncompleted events as of the date you chose.

Sort By: You can sort the Event Log by date or type of event. Choose a sort option from the drop-down list.


Events Selection Criteria

Here, you tell Peachtree which events you want to see and the sort order you want to see them in.

Events From: Enter or select the date from which you want events to display for this individual. The first day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Events To: Enter or select the last date through which you want events to display for this individual. The last day of the first open fiscal year is the default. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Show: From the drop-down list, select the event item status that you want to display. You have the choice of all events, completed events, or uncompleted events. For example, if you choose to show all events, this displays both completed and uncompleted events as of the date you chose.

Sort By: You can sort the Event Log by date or type of event. Choose a sort option from the drop-down list.


Contact Log for:

This identifies the customer, vendor or employee the event log represents. For customers and vendors, the company name and contact information display. For employees, then name and phone number display.

To change the individual you must close this window and select another employee, vendor, or customer record.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Activities

Select the check box next to each type of activity that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/P Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of purchasing transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/P Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of purchasing transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/P Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of purchasing transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/P Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of purchasing transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


P/R Transactions

Select the check box if you want to display payroll transaction events in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


A/R Transactions

Select the check box next to each type of sales transaction event that you want to display in the Event Log. You can check or clear these items at any time.


Recurring Events

Similar to transactions, action items can recur in Peachtree Accounting.


Recurring To Do Items

Similar to transactions, tasks can recur in Peachtree Accounting.


Number of Times

This identifies the number of times you want to repeat this task. You can enter any number up to 22. The maximum number of times an entry can recur depends on the transaction's original date and what period you are currently operating in. You can only enter recurring events within the two open fiscal years of Peachtree Accounting.


When to occur

For events, you can select a range of frequencies from daily to yearly.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Change Recurring Events

Select This Event only to change just the current task. Select This Event and all remaining to update future recurring events.


Change Recurring To Do Items

Select This To Do only to change just the current task. Select This To Do and all remaining to update future recurring tasks.


Change Recurring Events

Select This Event only to change just the current task. Select This Event and all remaining to update future recurring events.


Change Recurring Events

Select This Event only to change just the current task. Select This Event and all remaining to update future recurring events.


Change Recurring To Do Items

Select This To Do only to change just the current task. Select This To Do and all remaining to update future recurring tasks.


Change Recurring To Do Items

Select This To Do only to change just the current task. Select This To Do and all remaining to update future recurring tasks.


Number Remaining

This identifies the current number of remaining recurring items in Peachtree Accounting.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Erase a Recurring Event

You can edit or erase recurring action items at any time.


Erase a Recurring To Do Tasks

You can edit or erase recurring action items at any time.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected event only or all future events originally set up to recur.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected event only or all future events originally set up to recur.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected event only or all future events originally set up to recur.


Which to Erase

Choose whether you want to delete the selected event only or all future events originally set up to recur.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Check Date

Enter or select the date to print on all checks to be created by this process.


Invoices Due Before

Enter a date here to include only unpaid invoices due prior to the specified date. For example, enter 1/1/2000 to display all unpaid invoices due as of 12/31/1999.


Or Discounts Lost By

Enter a date here to include only unpaid invoices that cease to qualify for a discount after the specified date.


Include All Invoices

All invoices are included to be paid.


Include Only Invoices ... days past Due Date with balances over ...

This can be used to pay your overdue invoices. For example, if you enter 30 days and $10, Peachtree Accounting will choose to pay only those invoices that are 30 days overdue with a balance of more than $10.


Include Only Invoices ... days past Due Date with balances over ...

This can be used to pay your overdue invoices. For example, if you enter 30 days and $10, Peachtree Accounting will choose to pay only those invoices that are 30 days overdue with a balance of more than $10.


Include Only Invoices ... days past Due Date with balances over ...

This can be used to pay your overdue invoices. For example, if you enter 30 days and $10, Peachtree Accounting will choose to pay only those invoices that are 30 days overdue with a balance of more than $10.


Include Only Invoices ... days past Due Date with balances over ...

This can be used to pay your overdue invoices. For example, if you enter 30 days and $10, Peachtree Accounting will choose to pay only those invoices that are 30 days overdue with a balance of more than $10.


Include Only Invoices ... days past Due Date with balances over ...

This can be used to pay your overdue invoices. For example, if you enter 30 days and $10, Peachtree Accounting will choose to pay only those invoices that are 30 days overdue with a balance of more than $10.


Include All Vendors

Selecting this will include all vendors with invoices that meet the date criteria.


Include Vendors From/To

You can use this to select a range of vendors, or just one, whose invoices you want to pay.


From

Enter or select the vendor ID to start the filter range. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


From

Enter or select the vendor ID to end the filter range. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Type Mask

You set up the vendor type in Maintain Vendors. When you enter the type mask, be sure to enter the type as you entered it for your vendor setup. Peachtree Accounting is case sensitive--if you type NORTH as a type here, vendors with "North" or "north" type will not print.


Always Take Discounts regardless of due date

If selected, discounts will be calculated for all the invoices selected even if the discount date has passed.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Filter Selection

This identifies the filer selection you chose on the previous window. To change this filter, click the Selection button.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Selection (Payments)

This lets you select the vendors and/or choose the type of invoices you want to pay.


Detail

Selecting this button shows, in a list box, the line items that make up the invoice. You cannot edit anything on this window; it is strictly for view.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed in the Receipts window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the date of the displayed transaction.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Check Date

This displays the date entered on the previous Select for Payment filter window; the date cannot be edited here. This is the date that will print on checks created by this process.


Check Date

This displays the date entered on the previous Select for Payment filter window; the date cannot be edited here. This is the date that will print on checks created by this process.


Cash Account

This is the account from which you want to write checks. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Cash Account

This is the account from which you want to write checks. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Discount Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account to which you want to apply the discount. This is a required field.

To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Sort by

This sorts the invoices listed. Select from four possible options: by Invoice Date, by Due Date, or by Vendor.


Sort by

This sorts the invoices listed. Select from four possible options: by Invoice Date, by Due Date, or by Vendor.


Select For Payment Line Items

Invoice Date: This is the date the invoice, credit memo, or prepayment was created. You cannot edit this field.

Due Date: This is the due date of the invoice, credit memo, or prepayment. You cannot edit this field.

Vendor Name: This is the name of the vendor who sent the invoice. You cannot edit this field.

Invoice #: This is the invoice number. You cannot edit this field.

Balance: If you have not made any payments on the invoice, this shows the original invoice amount. If you have made payments, this shows the balance. You cannot edit this field.

Discount Amount: This number defaults from the invoice. If you decide to edit this, the invoice does not get updated.

Pay Amount: If you change the discount amount, this number is updated. You cannot enter an amount greater than the invoice here.

Pay: Select this check box if you want to pay the invoice and have Peachtree print a check.


Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected cash account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected cash account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Total Checks

This is the sum of all payments selected if you complete this process.


Total Checks

This is the sum of all payments selected if you complete this process.


Balance After Checks

this is the difference between the current cash account balance and the sum of the payments selected.


Balance After Checks

this is the difference between the current cash account balance and the sum of the payments selected.


Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected cash account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected cash account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected cash account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional three selections, Preview, Postage, and Report. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the appropriate check form for the invoices you have selected for payment.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the chosen check form will look once printed.

Postage: Click this button to buy and print postage online through the Peachtree Internet Postage Service.

Report: Click this button to print a "pre-check" register that lists all vendor checks that you have currently selected to process. You can use this preview report to examine payment detail, approve selected checks, and prepare the check order before the checks are actually posted and printed.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


All (Select)

Use this button to select all displayed invoices for payment. Peachtree will then check the Pay check boxes for all invoices. If you select the Print button and complete the print process, Peachtree will print checks for all of the invoices.


All (None)

Use this button to deselect all displayed invoices for payment. Peachtree will clear the Pay check boxes for all invoices.


OK

Select this button to close the window and return to the Select for Payment window.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor associated with this invoice. This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor associated with this invoice. This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Date

This identifies the invoice date associated. This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Purchase Invoice Line items

This displays the line items for the invoice selected to pay. Each line includes quantity, item, description, G/L account, unit price, amount, and job ID (not available in First Accounting).

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Date Due

This identifies the date the invoice is due according the payment terms chosen.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Date Due

This identifies the date the invoice is due according the payment terms chosen.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Discount Date

This identifies the latest date on which to pay the invoice and receive a discount according the payment terms chosen.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Discount Date

This identifies the latest date on which to pay the invoice and receive a discount according the payment terms chosen.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Discount Amount

The discount is computed based on the invoice payment terms.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Discount Amount

The discount is computed based on the invoice payment terms.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Invoice Amount

This identifies the total balance for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Invoice Amount

This identifies the total balance for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Amount paid

This identifies total payments thus far for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Amount paid

This identifies total payments thus far for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Balance Due

This identifies total due for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Balance Due

This identifies total due for the invoice.

This information cannot be edited here; it is only for display.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer ID associated with this invoice. The customer ID cannot be changed here, but it can be changed in the Sales/Invoicing window.


Customer Name

This identifies the customer name set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer ID associated with this invoice. The customer ID cannot be changed here, but it can be changed in the Sales/Invoicing window.


Customer Name

This identifies the customer name set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses

Time Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable time tickets associated with this customer.

Expense Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable expense tickets associated with this customer.

Reimbursable Expenses Tab: Select this tab to apply unused job transactions associated with this customer.


Time Tickets Tab

Select this tab to apply billable time tickets associated with this customer.


Expense Tickets Tab

Select this tab to apply billable expense tickets associated with this customer.


Reimbursable Expenses Tab

Select this tab to apply unused job transactions associated with this customer.


Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses

Time Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable time tickets associated with this customer.

Expense Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable expense tickets associated with this customer.

Reimbursable Expenses Tab: Select this tab to apply unused job transactions associated with this customer.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to appear as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Use Ticket Description for Invoicing

Select this option to insert the time ticket description as the line item description on the invoice. This option is only available if No Consolidation is selected.


Use Item Description for Invoicing

Select this option to insert the associated ticket's activity item description as the line item description on the invoice. This option is only available if No Consolidation is selected.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to appear as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Time Ticket Line Items

Ticket Date: This displays the original date that the ticket was entered.

Activity Item: This displays the activity item set up in inventory that is associated with the ticket.

Hours: This displays the time ticket's total duration in decimal format.

Billing Rate: This displays the billing rate assigned to the ticket when calculating the billing amount (ticket amount).

Ticket Amount: This is the hours multiplied by the billing rate.

Invoice Amount: This is the amount that will appear on the invoice if the ticket is selected to be applied. You can change the amount if desired or write up the amount by selecting the Write Up button.

Use: Select this check box to apply the ticket to the invoice. The ticket will appear as an individual line item or be consolidated on the invoice, depending on the consolidation method selected.

No Bill: Select this check box to change the ticket's billing status to non-billable. If the No Bill check box is selected, the ticket will not be used on the invoice and will not be available to apply to any future sales invoices for this customer. To change the billing status after No Bill has been selected, you must display the ticket in the Time Tickets window and change the billing status back to billable or no charge.


Total Time Tickets Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all time tickets listed that are selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Time Tickets Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all time tickets listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Time Tickets Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all time tickets listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Total Time Tickets Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all tickets selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Invoice Amounts Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all invoice amounts for time tickets listed that will be applied to the invoice.


Total Time Tickets Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all time tickets listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Time Tickets Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all time tickets listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Use Ticket Description for Invoicing

Select this option to insert the time ticket description as the line item description on the invoice. This option is only available if No Consolidation is selected.


Use Item Description for Invoicing

Select this option to insert the associated ticket's activity item description as the line item description on the invoice. This option is only available if No Consolidation is selected.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to appear as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Expense Ticket Line Items

Ticket Date: This displays the original date that the ticket was entered.

Charge Item: This displays the charge item set up in inventory that is associated with the ticket.

Quantity: This displays the number of charge item units recorded with this ticket.

Unit Price: This displays the unit price assigned to the ticket when calculating the billing amount (ticket amount).

Ticket Amount: This is the hours multiplied by the billing rate.

Invoice Amount: This is the amount that will appear on the invoice if the ticket is selected to be applied. You can change the amount if desired or write up the amount by selecting the Write Up button.

Use: Select this check box to apply the ticket to the invoice. The ticket will appear as an individual line item or be consolidated on the invoice, depending on the consolidation method selected.

No Bill: Select this check box to change the ticket's billing status to non-billable. If the No Bill check box is selected, the ticket will not be used on the invoice and will not be available to apply to any future sales invoices for this customer. To change the billing status after No Bill has been selected, you must display the ticket in the Expense Tickets window and change the billing status back to billable or no charge.


Total Expense Tickets Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that are selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Expense Tickets Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Expense Tickets Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Total Expense Tickets Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that are selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Invoice Amounts Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all invoice amounts for expense tickets listed that will be applied to the invoice.


Total Expense Tickets Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Expense Tickets Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all expense tickets listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to display as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Reimbursable Expense Line Items

Item: This displays the item ID (if indicated) for the line item from the original purchase.

Description: This displays the description from the original purchase. If you decide to use the reimbursable expense by selecting the Use check box, you can enter or change the description in the line item of the sales invoice.

Date: This displays the original transaction date.

Cost: This displays the original price of the transaction.

Invoice Amt: This displays the amount you entered as the cost when you entered the transaction for the item or service. This amount will appear on the invoice if the reimbursable expense transaction is selected to be applied. You can change manually the amount if desired or write up the amount by selecting the Write Up button.

Use: Selecting this check box indicates the reimbursable expense is to be applied to the invoice. The reimbursable expense will appear as an individual line item on the invoice, depending on the consolidation method selected.

Del: Erases the line item so that it will no longer appear in this window. The actual transaction will not be deleted. Note: If you select to remove the reimbursable expense from use, the transaction will no longer be available to be apply to any future invoice for this customer, even if you erase this invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expense items listed that are selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expense items listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expenses items listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expense items listed that are selected to apply to the invoice.


Total Invoice Amounts Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all invoice amounts for reimbursable expenses listed that will be applied to the invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Not Selected

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expense items listed that will not be applied to the invoice.


Total Reimbursable Expenses Available

This is the sum dollar amount of all reimbursable expenses items listed that can be applied to the invoice.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select OK to save changes, close this window, and apply selected items to the sales invoice.


Write Up

Select this button to display the Select Tickets or Reimbursable Expenses window, where you can do the following: specify which items to write up (all items, by job, by item, or date range), write up a line item by an amount, or write up a line item by a percent.


Remove Write Up

Select this button to remove the write up invoice amount for the item selected, replacing it with the original billing amount or cost.


Use (Select)

Select this button to display the Select Tickets to Use or Select Reimbursable Expenses window. You can choose to use a range of items for this customer including all items listed or select items listed by job, by item, or date range.


(Select to) No Bill or (Select to) Delete

Click the (Select to) No Bill button when tickets are listed to display the Select Tickets to Mark "No Bill" window. You can select not to bill a range of billable tickets for this customer including all tickets listed or select tickets listed by job, by item, or by date range.

Click the (Select to) Delete button when reimbursable expense items are listed to display the Select Reimbursable Expenses to Delete window. You can erase a range of used reimbursable expenses listed for this customer including all items listed or select items listed by job, by item, or date range.


(Clear All) Use

Select this button to clear the Use check box for all items listed in this window.


(Clear All) No Bill or (Clear All) Delete

When tickets are listed, select the (Clear All) (No Bill) button to clear the No Bill check box for all items listed in this window.

When reimbursable expenses are listed, select the (Clear All) (Delete) button to clear the Delete check box for all items listed in this window.


Detail

Select this button to display additional information and descriptions for the selected item. This information is for viewing purposes only.


Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses

Time Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable time tickets associated with this customer.

Expense Tickets Tab: Select this tab to apply billable expense tickets associated with this customer.

Reimbursable Expenses Tab: Select this tab to apply unused job transactions associated with this customer.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to display as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to appear as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Consolidate by

You can consolidate items listed to appear as grouped or single line items on the sales invoice. Choose one method from the drop-down list. No Consolidation is the default setting.


Sort by

You can sort the items listed in this window using several different methods. This can be useful when consolidating line items on the invoice. Choose a sort method from the drop-down list.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Activities

Select this tab to choose the type of activities you want listed on the Action Items Events tab.


Transactions

Select this tab to choose the type of business transactions you would like to have events created for and listed on the Action Items Events tab.


Start Up

Select this tab to set up Action Items window startup options.


Action Items and Event Log Options

Use this window to establish how you want action items listed, and what events you want created automatically.

Activities: Select this tab to select the type of activities that you want listed on the Action Items Events tab.

Transactions: Select this tab to choose the type of business transactions you would like to have events created for and listed on the Action Items Events tab.

Start Up: Select this tab to set up Action Items window startup options.


Activities

This identifies the type of contact events you want listed on the Action Items Events tab. Contact events are not associated with transactions, so these events must be manually created by you.

For each event type you want listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any activities entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Activities

This identifies the type of contact events you want listed on the Action Items Events tab. Contact events are not associated with transactions, so these events must be manually created by you.

For each event type you want listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any activities entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Transactions

This identifies the type of business transactions for which Peachtree Accounting will create events.

Select the Create Event check box next to each type of transaction for which you want events automatically created. If you want the transaction event listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any transactions entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Transactions

This identifies the type of business transactions for which Peachtree Accounting will create events.

Select the Create Event check box next to each type of transaction for which you want events automatically created. If you want the transaction event listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any transactions entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Transactions

This identifies the type of business transactions for which Peachtree Accounting will create events.

Select the Create Event check box next to each type of transaction for which you want events automatically created. If you want the transaction event listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any transactions entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Transactions

This identifies the type of business transactions for which Peachtree Accounting will create events.

Select the Create Event check box next to each type of transaction for which you want events automatically created. If you want the transaction event listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any transactions entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Transactions

This identifies the type of business transactions for which Peachtree Accounting will create events.

Select the Create Event check box next to each type of transaction for which you want events automatically created. If you want the transaction event listed in the Action Items window, select the Display in Action Items check box. You can also enter the number of days before or after the event date you want the item displayed.

Note: Any transactions entered before selecting the Display in Action Items check box will not appear.


Action Item Startup Options

Select the Display Action Items each time a new company is open check box if you want Peachtree to always display the Action Items window when you first start Peachtree Accounting.

Select Always display Tips on top check box if you want the Tips tab to be selected when Peachtree displays the Action Items window during startup. This option is available when the Display Action Items each time a new company is open is selected.


Display Action Items each time a new company is open

Select this option if you want Peachtree to display the Action Items window when you first start Peachtree Accounting.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Date

Enter or select the date through which you want events to appear in the Event Log, if different from the current date. If you want to display future events, select a future date.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Show

From the drop-down list, select the event item status that you want to display. You have the choice of all events, completed events, or uncompleted events. For example, selecting to show all events displays both completed and uncompleted events as of the date you chose. This setting affects only the Events and To Do tabs.


Event Filter

This section shows the types of events that are displayed on the tabs in the window.


Event Filter

This section shows the types of events that are displayed on the tabs in the window


Event Log

This lists events created based on the date selected and the filter applied. Double-click the event listed to display detailed information about the event. To delete an event, select the line, then the Delete button.

Completed: This check box is selected (by Peachtree Accounting) when the event or transaction is completed (for example, an invoice was paid).

Date: This identifies when the event occurred or is due.

ID: This identifies the customer ID, vendor ID,  or employee ID associated with the event.

Company Name: This identifies the customer, vendor, or employee name associated with the event.

Type: This identifies what kind of event is displayed.

Note: For activities, you can enter notes about the event. You can enter up to 160 characters; press CTRL+ENTER to start a new paragraph. For system-generated events, the notes display the transaction or event ID, the date the transaction was generated, and the amount of the transaction.


To Do List

This displays tasks and reminders that you enter. To Do events are not associated with a specific vendor, customer, or employee. You can enter To Do items using this window only.

Done: Select this check box when the task is completed.

Date: This identifies when the task occurred or is due.

Completed: This identifies the date when the task was completed.

Note: This describes the task. You can enter up to 160 characters; press CTRL+ENTER to start a new paragraph.


Alert List

Alerts are conditions in your company that you want to be aware of as they happen in order to take further action. This list notifies you that certain events have occurred based on conditions that you specified. For example, you may want to be alerted if the quantity of an inventory item drops below 100. You can check the alerts on a daily basis by using this tab; the alerts remain on the list until the conditions of the alert are corrected.

To create an alert condition, select the Set Alert button, and fill in the necessary information.


Event Log

This lists events created based on the date selected and the filter applied. Double-click the event listed to display detailed information about the event. To delete an event, select the line, then the Delete button.

Completed: This check box is selected (by Peachtree Accounting) when the event or transaction is completed (for example, an invoice was paid).

Date: This identifies when the event occurred or is due.

ID: This identifies the customer ID, vendor ID,  or employee ID associated with the event.

Company Name: This identifies the customer, vendor, or employee name associated with the event.

Type: This identifies what kind of event is displayed.

Note: For activities, you can enter notes about the event. You can enter up to 160 characters; press CTRL+ENTER to start a new paragraph. For system-generated events, the notes display the transaction or event ID, the date the transaction was generated, and the amount of the transaction.


Close

Select this button to exit this window.


Delete

Select this button to delete the selected item.

Note: Once an event or To Do item is completed, you must delete it to remove the item from the action item list.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can also use this to create a listing of future activity.


Print

Select this button to print a list of displayed events, to do items, or alerts (depending on the tab currently selected).


Alert

Select this button to set up alerts for this company. Alerts are notifications when a certain event has occurred, is about to occur, or needs to occur. This allows you to set alerts for employees, vendors, customers, inventory items, and General Ledger accounts that meet certain criteria.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating To Do items for a specified time period. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Events

Select this tab to display the Event Log based on the date selected. Peachtree displays both system-generated and manually entered events here.


To Do

Select this tab to display tasks and reminders that you enter.


Alerts

Select this tab to display alert notifications. You can also set up alert conditions from this tab.


Action Items

Alerts: Select this tab to display alert notifications. You can also set up alert conditions from this tab.

To Do: Select this tab to display tasks and reminders that you enter.

Events: Select this tab to display the Event Log based on the date selected. Peachtree displays both system-generated and manually entered events here.


Action Items

Alerts: Select this tab to display alert notifications. You can also set up alert conditions from this tab.

To Do: Select this tab to display tasks and reminders that you enter.

Events: Select this tab to display the Event Log based on the date selected. Peachtree displays both system-generated and manually entered events here.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


E-mail

Select this button to generate e-mail messages based on alert conditions.


Options

Select this button to open the Action Items and Events Options window.


Payment Terms

Select this tab to set up default payment terms and G/L accounts for your vendors.


Account Aging

Select this tab to set up how invoices are aged and what aging brackets will be used for Accounts Payable.


Custom Fields

Select this tab to set up custom field labels for your vendor records.


Vendor Defaults:

Payment Terms: Select this tab to set up default payment terms and G/L accounts for your vendors.

Account Aging: Select this tab to set up how invoices are aged and what aging brackets will be used for Accounts Payable.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to set up custom field labels for your vendor records.

1099 Settings (not available in First Accounting): Select this tab to make 1099 settings for each General Ledger account in your chart of account.


Standard Terms

Select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of month to determine the standard (default) type of payment you make to vendors.


Standard Terms

Select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of month to determine the standard (default) type of payment you make to vendors.


Standard Terms

Select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of month to determine the standard (default) type of payment you make to vendors.


COD

Select this option if you purchase items COD (cash on delivery) from most of your vendors.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Prepaid

Select this option if most of your vendors require you to prepay for goods and services.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Due in number of days

Select this option if most of your vendors require you to pay invoices within a specific number of days. For example, all invoices are due within 30 days of the original invoice date.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Due on a day next month

Select this option if most of your vendors require you to pay invoices by a specified day of the month. For example, all invoices are due on the 15th of each month.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Due at the end of month

Select this option if most of your vendors require you to pay invoices by the last day of the month. For example, all March invoices are due March 31; all April invoices are due April 30.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which your vendors will not allow early payment discounts.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which your vendors will not allow early payment discounts.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which your vendors will not allow early payment discounts.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that your vendors allow as a discount if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals; for example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that your vendors allow as a discount if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals; for example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit allowed by your vendors. When a vendor balance exceeds this total, Peachtree will display a warning message.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit allowed by your vendors. When a vendor balance exceeds this total, Peachtree will display a warning message.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default purchase and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new vendor records. The purchase G/L account can later be changed in each vendor record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default purchase and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new vendor records. The purchase G/L account can later be changed in each vendor record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default purchase and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new vendor records. The purchase G/L account can later be changed in each vendor record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default purchase and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new vendor records. The purchase G/L account can later be changed in each vendor record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default purchase and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new vendor records. The purchase G/L account can later be changed in each vendor record.


G/L Purchase Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default purchase (expense) account when entering vendor information. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


G/L Purchase Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default purchase (expense) account when entering vendor information. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


G/L Purchase Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default purchase (expense) account when entering vendor information. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each vendor invoice is, including the age of any balances. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each vendor invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each vendor invoice is, including the age of any balances. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each vendor invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each vendor invoice and balance is. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each vendor invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Default Vendor Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Payables report and the Payment Manager in Analysis (not available in Peachtree First Accounting). The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text for the columns in the Aged Payables report and the brackets in the Payment Manager. Note: Payment Manager is not available in First Accounting.


Default Vendor Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Payables report and the Payment Manager in Analysis (not available in First Accounting). The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text for the first column in the Aged Payables report and the first bracket in the Payment Manager. Note: Payment Manager is not available in First Accounting.


Default Vendor Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Payables report and the Payment Manager in Analysis (not available in First Accounting). The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text for the second column in the Aged Payables report and the third bracket in the Payment Manager. Note: Payment Manager is not available in First Accounting.


Default Vendor Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Payables report and the Payment Manager in Analysis (not available in First Accounting). The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text for the third column in the Aged Payables report and the third bracket in the Payment Manager. Note: Payment Manager is not available in First Accounting.


Default Vendor Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Payables report and the Payment Manager in Analysis (not available in First Accounting). The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text for the fourth column in the Aged Payables report and the fourth bracket in the Payment Manager. Note: Payment Manager is not available in First Accounting.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Vendors window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


1099 Settings

Select this tab to make 1099 settings for each General Ledger account in your chart of account.


1099 Settings

This tab lets you make 1099 settings for your General Ledger accounts.

G/L Account ID and G/L Account Description: These are the IDs and account descriptions of all General Ledger accounts you set up in your chart of accounts.

1099 Settings: The drop-down list lets you make 1099 assignments for each of the listed General Ledger accounts. You can choose from the following:

Box 1 or Box 7: This is the default setting for all General Ledger accounts. It allows the calculation of contractor payments to be based on the 1099 type you have set up for each contractor in Vendor Defaults (either Independent Contractor or Interest).

1099-MISC, Box 7 Only: Select this option to report miscellaneous income for each contractor you pay more than $600 annually. Peachtree will then make miscellaneous income calculations for all contractor payments credited to the chosen General Ledger account.

1099-INT, Box 1 Only: Select this option to report interest income for each contractor you have paid at least $10 in interest as a loan. Peachtree will then make interest income calculations for all contractor payments credited to the chosen General Ledger account.

None: Select this option if you don't want either miscellaneous income or interest income calculations to be made for the chosen General Ledger account.


Reset Default

Select this button to return all General Ledger accounts to their default 1099 settings. Box 1 or Box 7 is the default setting for all accounts.


Payment Terms

Select this tab to set up default payment terms and G/L accounts for your customers.


Finance Charges

Select this tab to set up when and how finance charges are calculated for your customers.


Account Aging

Select this tab to set up how invoices are aged and what aging brackets will be used for Accounts Receivable.


Custom Fields

Select this tab to set up custom field labels for your customer records.


Payment Methods

Select this tab to set up payment methods for your customers.


Customer Defaults

Payment Terms: Select this tab to set up default payment terms and G/L accounts for your customers.

Account Aging: Select this tab to set up how invoices are aged and what aging brackets will be used for Accounts Receivable.

Custom Fields: Select this tab to set up custom field labels for your customer records.

Finance Charges: Select this tab to set up when and how finance charges are calculated for your customers.

Payment Methods: Select this tab to set up payment methods for your customers.


Standard Terms

To determine the standard (default) type of payment your customers make, select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of the month.


Standard Terms

To determine the standard (default) type of payment your customers make, select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of the month.


Standard Terms

Select COD, Prepaid, Due in number of days, Due on day of month, or Due at end of month to determine the standard (default) type of payment your customers make.


COD

Select this option if you sell items COD (cash on delivery) to most of your customers.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Prepaid

Select this option if you require most of your customers to prepay for goods and services.

Note: If you select COD or Prepaid, there are no additional terms options to enter.


Due in number of days

Select this option if you require most of your customers to pay invoices within a specific number of days. For example, all invoices are due within 30 days of the original invoice date.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Due on a day next month

Select this option if you require most of your customers to pay invoices by a specified day of the month. For example, all invoices are due on the 15th of each month.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Due at the end of month

Select this option if you require most of your customers to pay invoices by the last day of the month. For example, all March invoices are due March 31; all April invoices are due April 30.

Note: When selecting this option, you must enter additional field information to completely define the default payment term.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days after the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date that the invoice is due.


Net Due in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date before the invoice becomes due.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which you will not allow customers to get discounts.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which you will not allow customers to get discounts.


Discount in ... Days

Enter the number of days past the invoice date beyond which you will not allow customers to get discounts.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that you will allow to customers as a discount, if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals; for example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Discount %

Enter the percent of the total invoice amount that you will allow to customers as a discount, if payment is made within the Discount Days range. Enter fractions as decimals; for example, two-and-one-half percent should be entered as 2.5.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit you allow your customers. When a customer balance exceeds this total, Peachtree will display a warning message.


Credit Limit

Enter the total amount of credit you allow your customers. When a customer balance exceeds this total, Peachtree will display a warning message.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default sales and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new customer records. The sales G/L account can later be changed in each customer record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default sales and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new customer records. The sales G/L account can later be changed in each customer record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default sales and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new customer records. The sales G/L account can later be changed in each customer record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default sales and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new customer records. The sales G/L account can later be changed in each customer record.


G/L Link Accounts

These accounts identify the default sales and discount G/L accounts that will be assigned when setting up new customer records. The sales G/L account can later be changed in each customer record.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default sales (income) account when entering customers. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default sales (income) account when entering customers. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


G/L Sales Account

Enter or select the account ID you want to use as the default sales (income) account when entering customers. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Discount G/L Account

Enter the number of the account you want to use for discounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field. You must enter an account number here.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each customer invoice and balance is. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each customer invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each customer invoice and balance is. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each customer invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Age Invoices By

Choose between Invoice Date or Due Date. If you age by Invoice Date, this will show how old each customer invoice and balance is. If you age by Due Date, this will show how overdue each customer invoice is. Many people choose to age customers by Invoice Date and vendors by Due Date.


Default Customer Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Receivables report and the Collection Manager in Analysis. The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the 2nd column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the 1st column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text of each aging column in the Aged Receivables report and the brackets in the Collection Manager.


Default Customer Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Receivables report and the Collection Manager in Analysis. The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the first column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text of the first aging column in the Aged Receivables report and the first bracket in the Collection Manager.


Default Customer Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Receivables report and the Collection Manager in Analysis. The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text of the second aging column in the Aged Receivables report and the second bracket in the Collection Manager.


Default Customer Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Receivables report and the Collection Manager in Analysis. The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


# of Days

This can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text of the third aging column in the Aged Receivables report and the third bracket in the Collection Manager.


Default Customer Aging Categories

Use this to set the ranges of days and the column headings for the Aged Receivables report and the Collection Manager in Analysis. The columns print from right to left starting with the first column. The # of Days box can be either the number of days beyond the invoice date or beyond the due date, depending on what you enter in the Age Invoices By box.

For example, entering 0 for the first column would display all current invoices. Entering 15 for the second column would display all invoices that are not current and up to 15 days overdue. Entering 30 in the third column displays all invoices that are more than 15 days overdue to those that are 30 days overdue. The fourth column will show all invoices that are more than 30 days overdue.


Column Heading

This identifies the heading text of the fourth aging column in the Aged Receivables report and the fourth bracket in the Collection Manager.


Finance Charges

Finance charges can be calculated and applied to your customers for invoices that are past due. Once finance charges are applied, they are added to your customer statements.  In order to apply finance charges, the Charge Finance Charges option must be selected here. Once finance charges are activated, you can set conditions for calculating finance charges.

Note: Finance charges are not applied automatically in Peachtree Accounting. This is done from the Tasks menu, selecting Finance Charges.


Charge Finance Charges

Select the Charge Finance Charges check box to allow finance charges to be calculated for all customers by default, when requested. Once finance charges are applied, they are added to your customer statements.

Note: Finance charges are not applied automatically in Peachtree Accounting. This is done from the Tasks menu, selecting Finance Charges.


Finance Charges

Finance charges can be calculated and applied to your customers for invoices that are past due. Once finance charges are applied, they are added to your customer statements. In order to apply finance charges, the Charge Finance Charges option must be selected here. Once finance charges are activated, you can set conditions for calculating finance charges.

Note: Finance charges are not applied automatically in Peachtree Accounting. This is done from the Tasks menu, selecting Finance Charges.


Charge Finance Charges ... On Invoices XX days overdue

Enter the point at which finance charges should be applied to overdue invoices. For example, a finance charge will be imposed on the balance due after a 30-day grace period.

Finance charges are calculated from the first day the invoice becomes overdue, not this grace period.


Charge Finance Charges ... On Invoices XX days overdue

Enter the point at which finance charges should be applied to overdue invoices. For example, a finance charge will be imposed on the balance due after a 30-day grace period.

Finance charges are calculated from the first day the invoice becomes overdue, not this grace period.


Charge Finance Charges ... On Invoices up to

Enter the balance amount over which the second interest rate will apply.

On balances below this rate, the rate in the Annual Interest Rate field will apply. On balances over this amount, the second interest rate applies. This lets you offer different rates to customers depending on the balance their accounts carry.


Charge Finance Charges ... On Invoices up to

Enter the balance amount over which the second interest rate will apply.

On balances below this rate, the rate in the Annual Interest Rate field will apply. On balances over this amount, the second interest rate applies. This lets you offer different rates to customers depending on the balance their accounts carry.


Charge Finance Charges ... Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances at or below the specified dollar amount.


Charge Finance Charges ... Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances at or below the specified dollar amount.


Charge Finance Charges ... Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances at or below the specified dollar amount.


Charge Finance Charges ... Maximum Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances above the specified dollar amount.

Tip: If you want to enter only one rate, enter the same amount in both boxes.


Charge Finance Charges ... Maximum Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances above the specified dollar amount.

Tip: If you want to enter only one rate, enter the same amount in both boxes.


Charge Finance Charges ... Maximum Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate for balances above the specified dollar amount.

Tip: If you want to enter only one rate, enter the same amount in both boxes.


Charge Finance Charges ... Minimum Finance Charge

Enter the minimum finance charge dollar amount that will apply when a customer is late with a payment. If the calculated amount is less than the minimum displayed here, the minimum amount will be used. The default minimum amount is 50 cents.


Charge Finance Charges ... Minimum Finance Charge

Enter the minimum finance charge dollar amount that will apply when a customer is late with a payment. If the calculated amount is less than the minimum displayed here, the minimum amount will be used. The default minimum amount is 50 cents.


Charge Interest on Finance Charges

Select this check box if you want to compound late charges. In other words, do you want to charge late charges on late charges?

Note: This is not allowed by law in some states. Check your local regulations before choosing this option.


Charge Interest on Finance Charges

Select this check box if you want to compound late charges. In other words, do you want to charge late charges on late charges?

Note: This is not allowed by law in some states. Check your local regulations before choosing this option.


Finance Charge G/L Account

This identifies the G/L account that will be used when applying finance charges (for example, Finance Charge Income). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Finance Charge G/L Account

This identifies the G/L account that will be used when applying finance charges (for example, Finance Charge Income). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Payment Methods

Enter up to 10 payment methods that your company accepts from customers. The payment methods you enter here will display in a list on the Sales/Invoicing and Receipts screens. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Payment Methods

Enter up to 10 payment methods that your company accepts from customers. The payment methods you enter here will display in a list on the Sales/Invoicing and Receipts screens. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Payment Methods

Enter up to 10 payment methods that your company accepts from customers. The payment methods you enter here will display in a list on the Sales/Invoicing and Receipts screens. A few examples are: Cash, Check, AutoDeposit, AMEX, Discover, MasterCard, and VISA.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Appears on invoices and statements as

Select how you want your finance charges to appear on sales invoices and customer statements from the drop-down list. Choose Late Charge, Finance Charge, or enter your own label (for example Late Fee, Service Charge, Participation Fee, and so on). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. If the Charge Finance Charges check box is selected, then this field is required and cannot be blank.

Note: Some state regulations do not allow businesses to use the term "Finance Charge" on customer statements when billing for past due balances. Only banks are allowed to use this term in these states. Check with your accountant to ensure that this regulation does not apply to your area.


Appears on invoices and statements as

Select how you want your finance charges to appear on sales invoices and customer statements from the drop-down list. Choose Late Charge, Finance Charge, or enter your own label (for example Late Fee, Service Charge, Participation Fee, and so on). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. If the Charge Finance Charges check box is selected, then this field is required and cannot be blank.

Note: Some state regulations do not allow businesses to use the term "Finance Charge" on customer statements when billing for past due balances. Only banks are allowed to use this term in these states. Check with your accountant to ensure that this regulation does not apply to your area.


Appears on invoices and statements as

Select how you want your finance charges to appear on sales invoices and customer statements from the drop-down list. Choose Late Charge, Finance Charge, or enter your own label (for example Late Fee, Service Charge, Participation Fee, and so on). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. If the Charge Finance Charges check box is selected, then this field is required and cannot be blank.

Note: Some state regulations do not allow businesses to use the term "Finance Charge" on customer statements when billing for past due balances. Only banks are allowed to use this term in these states. Check with your accountant to ensure that this regulation does not apply to your area.


Print finance charge warning message (on invoices) as

Select this check box to if you want Peachtree Accounting to print a message in invoices that warns about incurring finance (late) charges. Enter the message you want to print on the invoice in the Finance charge warning message field below the check box. For example, "Overdue invoices are subject to late charges."

Tip: You can also use this message to display a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or company announcement on all invoices.


Print finance charge warning message (on invoices) as

Select this check box to if you want Peachtree Accounting to print a message in invoices that warns about incurring finance (late) charges. Enter the message you want to print on the invoice in the Finance charge warning message field below the check box. For example, "Overdue invoices are subject to late charges."

Tip: You can also use this message to display a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or company announcement on all invoices.


Assign Deposit Ticket IDs

You can choose to have Peachtree assign deposit ticket IDs to customer payments either at the time the receipt is recorded in the Receipts window or at the time the receipt is selected for deposit in the Select for Deposit window.


In Receipts

Select this option if you want Peachtree to assign a deposit ticket ID at the time a customer payment is recorded in the Receipts window.


In Select for Deposit

Select this option if you want Peachtree to assign a deposit ticket ID at the time a receipt is selected for deposit in the Select for Deposit window.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box, then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Jobs window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Print Options Tab

Select this tab to define which type of customer accounts you want to print statements for and indicate whether you want to print your company's name and address on invoices and statements. You can also decide to include a warning message on printed invoices if finance charges are applied.


Dunning Messages Tab

Select this tab to define dunning message text that will print on statements.


Statement/Invoice Defaults

Statement Print Options Tab: Select this tab to define which type of customer accounts you want to print statements for and indicate whether you want to print your company's name and address on invoices and statements.

Dunning Messages Tab: Select this tab to define dunning message text that will print on statements.


Statement Print Options Tab:

Select this tab to define which type of customer accounts that you want to print statements for and indicate whether you want to print your company's name and address on invoices and statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Print your company name, address, phone, and fax on invoices and statements

Select this check box to print your company information on invoices and statements (for example, plain paper invoices).


Print your company name, address, phone, and fax on invoices and statements

Select this check box to print your company information on invoices and statements (for example, plain paper invoices).


Print Statement Options

These options identify balance activity that is required before printing customer statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Statement Print Options Tab:

Select this tab to define which type of customer accounts that you want to print statements for and indicate whether you want to print your company's name and address on invoices and statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports


Zero Balances

This option determines if and when you want customers who have no balance due (zero) to receive statements. Choose Always, Only when above options apply, or Never from the drop-down list.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Negative Balances

This option determines if and when you want customers who have negative or credit balances to receive statements. Choose Always, Only when above options apply, or Never from the drop-down list.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Any activity since the last statement was printed

Select this option if you want to print statements for customers with any activity in this accounting period, regardless of the customer's balance due. This is the default setting.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Balance at least...

Select this option if you want customers whose balance due is greater than or equal to the entered amount to receive statements. If you enter 0.00 as the amount, statements will print for all customers with zero or positive balances.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Balance at least...

Enter the minimum balance amount required to print statements. If you enter 0.00 as the amount, statements will print for all customers with zero or positive balances.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


At least one invoice ... past due

Select this option if you want customers who have an unpaid invoice that is overdue by the entered number of days or more to receive a statement, regardless of that customer's balance due. Enter the minimum number of days an invoice can be overdue in order to print customer statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


At least one invoice ... past due

Enter the minimum number of days an invoice can be overdue in order to print customer statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


At least one invoice ... past due

Select this option if you want customers who have an unpaid invoice that is overdue by the entered number of days or more to receive a statement, regardless of that customer's balance due. Enter the minimum number of days an invoice can be overdue in order to print customer statements.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Negative Balances

This option determines if and when you want customers who have negative or credit balances to receive statements. Choose Always, Only when above options apply, or Never from the drop-down list.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Dunning Messages

Select this tab to define dunning message text that will print on statements. You can set up four different dunning messages to print on statements--one message per aging period.

Peachtree Accounting prints the message that corresponds to the customer's oldest invoice on statements. For example, if a customer has current invoices and an invoice that is 60 days past due, Peachtree Accounting will use the dunning statement that corresponds to the 60-day invoice.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the first dunning message on statements.

Tip: Enter a low number (zero) on the first message and enter dunning message text that reflects a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or announcement.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the first dunning message on statements.

Tip: Enter a low number (zero) on the first message and enter dunning message text that reflects a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or announcement.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the first dunning message on statements.

Tip: Enter a low number (zero) on the first message and enter dunning message text that reflects a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or announcement.


First Dunning Message

Enter the text to print the first dunning message on statements. For example, "Thanks for your business."

Tip: Enter text that reflects a standard thank-you message, advertising message, or announcement.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the second dunning message on statements.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the second dunning message on statements.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the second dunning message on statements.


Second Dunning Message

Enter the text to print the second dunning message on statements. For example, "You may have forgotten this bill. Thanks for your attention."


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the third dunning message on statements.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the third dunning message on statements.


Invoices ... overdue

Enter the number of days an invoice can be overdue to print the third dunning message on statements.


Third Dunning Message

Enter the text to print the third dunning message on statements. For example, "Please attend to this payment as soon as possible."


All other invoices

Enter the text to print the fourth dunning message on statements. For example, "Your account is severely overdue. Please remit a payment as soon as possible."


Fourth Dunning Message

Enter the text to print the fourth dunning message on statements. For example, "Your account is severely overdue. Please remit a payment as soon as possible."


Dunning Messages

Select this tab to define dunning message text that will print on statements. You can set up four different dunning messages to print on statements--one message per aging period.

Peachtree Accounting prints the message that corresponds to the customer's oldest invoice on statements. For example, if a customer has current invoices and an invoice that is 60 days past due, Peachtree Accounting will use the dunning statement that corresponds to the 60-day invoice.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Zero Balances

This option determines if and when you want customers who have no balance due (zero) to receive statements. Choose Always, Only when above options apply, or Never from the drop-down list.

Note: If you do not select any of the activity options and select Never for the Negative and Zero balance options, no statements will ever print despite the customer range selected in Reports.


Print your company name, address, phone, and fax on invoices and statements

Select this check box to print your company information on invoices and statements (for example, plain paper invoices).


OK

Select OK to display the Select Employees to Pay window listing paychecks based on your selection here.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees that meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees that meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees that meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees that meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees that meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Methods

You can select Hourly or Salary, or both.


Include Pay Methods

You can select Hourly or Salary, or both.


From

Enter or select the first employee in the range. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.

Note: Employee records set up as sales representatives only will not display in the Employee ID list here.


To

Enter or select the last employee in the range. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.

Note: Employee records set up as sales representatives only will not display in the Employee ID list here.


Type

This indicates which employees within the range you want. Choose between the following options:

All: Includes all employees. This is the default.

Range: You can enter a range of types here. Enter the types in the same case that you entered in the employee's file.

Mask: Depending on how you set up employee types you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal: This option looks for a perfect match. Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal: Only employees with types equal to or greater than will appear.

Less than or equal: Only employees with types less than or equal to will appear.


From

If you selected the Range option, enter the starting type value here.

Mask

If you entered the Mask option, enter the employee type. Depending on how you set up employee types, you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal

Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal

Only employees with types equal to or greater than what is entered here will appear.

Less than or equal

Only employees with types less than or equal to what is entered here will appear.


To

If you selected the Range option, enter the ending type value here.


From

If you selected the Range option, enter the starting type value here.

Mask

If you entered the Mask option, enter the employee type. Depending on how you set up employee types, you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal

Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal

Only employees with types equal to or greater than what is entered here will appear.

Less than or equal

Only employees with types less than or equal to what is entered here will appear.


To

If you selected the Range option, enter the ending type value here.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Include Employees

This group box lets you choose whether you want to select all or a range of employees for payment. If you choose a range, you can use the From and To fields to set the range, and you can further limit that range using the Type drop-down list.


Filter Selection

This identifies the criteria you specified when selecting employees to pay in the Filter Selection window. To change this, click the Selection button.


Check Date

Enter or select the date you want to assign for the paychecks, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. You can enter only dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Check Date

Enter or select the date you want to assign for the paychecks, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period displays if you are not in the current period. You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.

Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date.


Pay Period End Date

Enter or select the last date in the payroll period for this payroll run. This date will be used when calculating quarterly earnings. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Pay Period End Date

Enter or select the last date in the payroll period for this payroll run. This date will be used when calculating quarterly earnings. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account. The last cash account that you used to post payroll entries is typically selected. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the paycheck. This would generally be a cash (checking) account. The last cash account that you used to post payroll entries is typically selected. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Select Employees to Pay List

Based on your selection criteria, employee information appears, including name, net check amount, and pay level field names. You can enter information in the following fields only:

Hours: If you set up the employee as hourly, then the number of hours worked for the pay period will appear here.

Salary: If you set up the employee as salaried, the employee's salary amount for the pay period will appear here. You can modify it if necessary.

# Weeks: This shows the pay period for the employees: (1) weekly, (2) bi-weekly or semi-monthly, (4) monthly, and (52) annually.

Pay: Select this check box to include the employee when you print checks.

DD: If an employee is set up for direct deposit, select this check box to print a non-negotiable advice form notifying that a deposit has been made to the employee's account(s).


Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


All (Select)

Use this button to select all displayed employees for payment. Peachtree will then check the Pay check boxes for all employees. If you select the Print button and complete the print process, Peachtree will print paychecks for all of the employees.


Total Checks

This is the sum of the net amount of all checks selected.


Balance after Checks

This is the net balance of your cash account if the checks selected are printed.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Balance after Checks

This is the net balance of your cash account if the checks selected are printed.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the check date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Employee Uses Electronic Time

If employees are listed with an (e) next to their names, this indicates that they are set up to be paid using hours imported from ADP's Electronic Time and Attendance program.


Close

Select Close to exit this window without printing checks.


Selection

Select this button to display or change the filter selection of employees listed.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional two additional selections,

Preview and Report. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the appropriate check form for the invoices you have selected for payment.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the chosen check form will look once printed.

Report: Click this button to print a "pre-check" register that lists all employee paychecks that you have currently selected to process.


Detail

Selecting this button displays the employee/employer fields, as well as the salary/hourly amounts for the selected check. You can change the accounts and the hours/amounts.


Jobs

Select this button to apply the selected employee's salary to different jobs. To set up jobs, select Jobs from the Maintain menu.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed at the bottom of this window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the check date.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Select Employees to Pay List

Based on your selection criteria, proposed employee payroll transactions are listed. Transaction information including employee name, net check amount, and pay level field amounts appear. You can enter information in the following fields:

Hours: If you set up the employee as hourly, then the number of hours worked for the pay period will appear here.

Salary: If you set up the employee as salaried, the employee's salary amount for the pay period will appear here. You can modify it if necessary.

# Weeks: This shows the pay period for the employees: (1) weekly, (2) bi-weekly or semi-monthly, (4) monthly, and (52) annually.

Pay: Select this check box to include the employee when you print checks.

DD: Select this check box to create a notification of deposit (non-negotiable) for an employee who receives direct deposit.


Total Checks

This is the sum of the net amount of all checks selected.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


All (None)

Use this button to deselect all displayed employees for payment. Peachtree will clear the Pay check boxes for all employees.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee selected in the Select Employees to Pay window. It cannot be changed here.


Employee Name

This identifies the employee selected in the Select Employees to Pay window. It cannot be changed here.


Employee Uses Time Tickets

This indicates that the employee is set up to be paid using time-ticket hours through the payroll period end date.


Hours Worked/Salary

Hourly Fields/Salary Fields: This shows the fields for hourly or salary employees set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each employee's hourly or salary field is based on the employee setup. To change the account ID, enter a ? to see a list of existing accounts, or enter a + or double-click to enter a new account.

Hours/Amount: You can adjust the hours for hourly employees or the amount for salaried employees.


Hours Worked/Salary

Hourly Fields/Salary Fields: This shows the fields for hourly or salary employees set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each employee's hourly or salary field is based on the employee setup. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Hours/Amount: You can adjust the hours for hourly employees or the amount for salaried employees.


Employee/Employer Fields

Field Name: This is the name of the employee or employer payroll field set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each payroll field is based on the employee setup. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Amount: In most cases, the amount is calculated for you. You can adjust the amount of the payroll field for this employee, if necessary.


Employee/Employer Fields

Field Name: This is the name of the employee or employer payroll field set up in Employee Defaults.

Account: The account displayed for each payroll field is based on the employee setup. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Amount: In most cases, the amount is calculated for you. You can adjust the amount of the payroll field for this employee, if necessary.


Gross Pay

This identifies the adjusted gross that is used when calculating payroll fields. In most cases it is the sum total of all wages less any pretax deductions.


Gross Pay

This identifies the adjusted gross that is used when calculating payroll fields. In most cases it is the sum total of all wages less any pretax deductions.


Net Pay

This identifies the net amount of the paycheck after all payroll fields have been added or deducted from the gross pay.


Net Pay

This identifies the net amount of the paycheck after all payroll fields have been added or deducted from the gross pay.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Direct Deposit Allocations

Account: These are the four direct deposit accounts set up for the employee on the Direct Deposit tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Distribution: This displays the percentage or fixed dollar amount to be distributed to each account. If the word Remainder appears for an account, it was set up as a Remainder account.

Amount: This is the total dollar amount of the distribution to each direct deposit account.


Direct Deposit Allocations

Account: These are the four direct deposit accounts set up for the employee on the Direct Deposit tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Distribution: This displays the percentage or fixed dollar amount to be distributed to each account. If the word Remainder appears for an account, it was set up as a Remainder account.

Amount: This is the total dollar amount of the distribution to each direct deposit account.


Company Alert List

This identifies alerts for employees, vendors, customers, inventory items, and general ledger accounts that meet certain criteria. You can set a different alert for each line. The description of the alert that is highlighted is displayed in the Current Alert box at the bottom of the window.

E-mail: Select this check box for Peachtree to generate e-mail messages for this alert condition. After you select E-mail check box, fill in the E-mail Information at the bottom of this window.

Apply to: Select customers, vendors, employees, inventory items, or General Ledger accounts from the drop-down list.

From/To: Use this to select a range; use the Lookup button to display your choices.

Type: This is the type of alert you can set. This lists the type of alerts you can set, depending on what you entered in the Apply to box.

Condition: Use this to select the circumstance (more than, less than, equal to, and so on) under which you want to be notified with the alert.

Amount: Enter the amount as part of the condition.


Current Alert

This describes the alert currently selected in the list.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


To

Type the e-mail address of person or company you want to send this alert to. Separate each address with a semicolon.


Address Book

Click this button to open the Peachtree Address Book. The Address Book contains e-mail addresses that you have previously entered in Peachtree.


CC

Type the e-mail address of the person or company you want to send a copy of this e-mail alert to. Separate each address with a semicolon.


Address Book

Click this button to open the Peachtree Address Book. The Address Book contains e-mail addresses that you have previously entered in Peachtree.


Bcc

Type the e-mail address of the person or company you want to send a copy of this e-mail alert to. The e-mail address that is entered in this field will be hidden from others who receive the message. Separate each address with a semicolon.


Address Book

Click this button to open the Peachtree Address Book. The Address Book contains e-mail addresses that you have previously entered in Peachtree.


Subject

Type the topic of the message.


Standard Message (check box)

Click this check box to include a Peachtree-generated standard message in your e-mail message. The contents of the message is displayed next to the check box.


Standard Message (text)

The Standard Message is a Peachtree-generated message that contains transaction-specific information about this alert condition. To include the Standard Message in this alert e-mail message, select the Standard Message check box.


E-mail Note (check box)

Click this check box to include a comment or note in this e-mail message. The contents of the note is displayed next to the check box.


E-mail Note (text)

Type the note or comment in the space provided. To include this E-mail Note in this alert e-mail message, select  the E-mail Note check box.


Row

Click this button to open the Row toolbar menu. From the Row toolbar menu, you can select the following buttons:

Add: Click the Add button to insert a new Alert condition.

Remove: Click the Remove button to delete the currently selected Alert condition.


Help

Click this button to open the Help menu. From the Help menu, you can select the following:

About this Window: Select this option to open an overivew of how this window works.

How Do I: Select this option to open a list of step-by-step instructions associatied with this window.

What's This: Select this option to get information about specific fields on this window. After you select What's This, click the field that you want to learn more about.


Name

Enter the name of the customized report, report group, financial statement, or import/export template. You can enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.

If you want to change a report, report group, financial statement, or import/export template, save the modified version using a different name. Saving it as the original name will overwrite the original version. Saving it as a different name will rename the item, but the name of the original version is still present in the list. Then, remove the original version (if you will no longer be using it) by clicking the Delete button at the top of the Select a Report or Select for Import Export window.

Note: You cannot delete standard reports, financial statements, or import/export templates that came with your Peachtree Accounting package.


Name Drop-Down List

Displays the name of the available reports, forms, or financial statements. Select the report, form, or financial statement you want to save as a different name.


Description

Enter a brief statement that describes the report, report group, financial statement, form, or import/export template. This description will display in the Description field when the item is selected in the Select a Report or Select for Import Export window. You enter up to 160 alphanumeric characters.


DOS Filename

This appears only when saving forms in the Forms Design window. It represents the current filename of the selected form in the list. By default, hese form files are located in the directory where Peachtree is installed. If you are renaming a form, Peachtree Accounting will create a new filename. To examine the new filename, you must return to this window after saving the form. Knowing the filenames of customized forms is helpful when backing up your data.


DOS Filename

This appears only when saving forms in the Forms Design window. It represents the current filename of the selected form in the list. By default, hese form files are located in the directory where Peachtree is installed. If you are renaming a form, Peachtree Accounting will create a new filename. To examine the new filename, you must return to this window after saving the form. Knowing the filenames of customized forms is helpful when backing up your data.


DOS Filename

This appears only when saving forms in the Forms Design window. It represents the current filename of the selected form in the list. By default, hese form files are located in the directory where Peachtree is installed. If you are renaming a form, Peachtree Accounting will create a new filename. To examine the new filename, you must return to this window after saving the form. Knowing the filenames of customized forms is helpful when backing up your data.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Item ID

This identifies the inventory item currently selected in the Maintain Inventory Items window. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Item Description

this is the short description of the item. It is for display purposes and cannot be changed here.


Price Level 1

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the first price level. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Price Level 1

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the first price level.


Price Level 2

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the second price level. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Price Level 2

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the second price level.


Price Level 3

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the third price level. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Price Level 3

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the third price level.


Price Level 4

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the fourth price level. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Price Level 4

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the fourth price level.


Price Level 5

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the fifth price level. (Quotes and sales orders are not available in First Accounting.)


Price Level 5

Enter the item sales price amount to display on quotes, sales orders, and invoices for the fifth price level.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Program Area

This list displays the name of each program area that you can select, for example, Accounts Receivable. Each program area contains reports that you can then select for importing and exporting.


Selected Program Area Name

This field displays the name of the program area you selected in the Program Area list.


Reports List

This list displays the name of each report associated with the selected program area. For example, it displays "Sales Journal" if you selected Accounts Receivable in the program area. You can select the reports in this list for importing and exporting.


Description of Import/Export Template

This identifies the import/export template selected. You can enter description text when saving a customized template.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Delete

Select this button to delete the file.


Import

Select this button to import a file from another program to Peachtree Accounting.


Export

Select this button to export a file from Peachtree Accounting to another program.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


A/R Account

Enter or select the primary accounts receivable account that you will use when recording sales.


A/R Account

Enter or select the primary accounts receivable account that you will use when recording sales.


A/P Account

Enter or select the primary accounts payable account that you will use when recording purchases.


A/P Account

Enter or select the primary accounts payable account that you will use when recording purchases.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Area

This list displays the name of each report area that you can select, for example, Accounts Receivable. Each report area contains reports that you can then select for one of the available functions, such as printing.


Report Area

This list displays the name of each report area that you can select, for example, Accounts Receivable. Each report area contains reports that you can then select for one of the available functions, such as printing.


Report List

This list displays the name of each report associated with the selected report area. For example, it displays "Sales Journal" if you selected Accounts Receivable in the report area. You can select the reports in this list for one of the available functions, such as printing.


Report List

This list displays the name of each report associated with the selected report area. For example, it displays "Sales Journal" if you selected Accounts Receivable in the report area. You can select the reports in this list for one of the available functions, such as printing.


Report Description

This identifies the report, financial statement, or form currently selected. You can enter description text when saving a customized report, financial statement, or form.


Report Description

This identifies the report, financial statement, or form currently selected. You can enter description text when saving a customized report, financial statement, or form.


Preview

Select this button to display the report on your computer screen.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Group

Select this button to group reports, financial statements, and views together so that you can print them in a batch.

If you select this button when report groups are displayed in the report list, it will open the report group that is highlighted so that you can add or delete reports.


Delete

Select this button to delete the selected report.


Print

Select this button to print the selected report, form or financial statement.


Design

Select this button to display a design window, which lets you make design changes to the selected report, form, or financial statement.


Copy

Select this button to copy reports or financial statements from one company to another.


Excel

Click this button to insert a copy of the selected Peachtree Accounting report into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Peachtree will open the Microsoft Excel program and insert the report into a new worksheet, retaining most of the report's original format.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Styles

Select this button to maintain the styles used in your reports. You can choose the standard report elements (such as company name and date) you want to appear on the report and also choose the fonts used to display and print these elements.

In addition, you can choose the default report style used in each report area (such as Accounts Payable) of Peachtree Accounting.


Financial Statement Wizard

Select this button to activate the Financial Statement Wizard, which will walk you through the process of designing statements. The button is active only when working in the financial statements area.


Order Peachtree Checks and Forms

Click this text to jump to a Web page from which you can order checks or other forms (invoices, purchase orders, labels, tax forms, etc.).


Learn more about Peachtree Direct Deposit

To learn more about the Peachtree Direct Deposit Service, click the informational link.


Order Peachtree Checks and Forms

Click this text to jump to a Web page from which you can order checks or other forms (invoices, purchase orders, labels, tax forms, etc.).


Order Peachtree Checks and Forms

Click this text to jump to a Web page from which you can order checks or other forms (invoices, purchase orders, labels, tax forms, etc.).


Select a Company

Choose a company that has the report you'd like to copy.


Browse

Select this button to search for a company that has the report you'd like to copy.


Report Type

Identifies report groups from which to copy. Select the type of financial statement or report from the drop-down list.

Note: If you choose financial statement report group and want to include predefined financial statements in the list, select the Include Standard Financial Statements check box below.


Select Report

Select the report or financial statement to copy. This report will copy from the company you chose above to the current open company.


New Name

Type a name for the report you are copying here. You can enter up to 30 characters (letters and numbers).


Description

Enter a short description for the report you are copying. You can enter up to 160 characters (letters and numbers).


Include Standard Financial Statements

Check this box to choose from custom and standard financial statements in the report selection list. Leave the box unchecked to choose from custom financial statements only.


Status Bar

Displays helpful information about copying reports and financial statements.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Copy

Select this button to copy reports and financial statements from one company to another.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Company Name

Select the name of the company you want to backup by highlighting it and double-clicking. If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary


Company Name

Select the name of the company you want to backup by highlighting it and double-clicking. If Peachtree does not display your company name in the list, the path may be incorrect. Check the Directories field and change this, if necessary.


Directories

Use this to select the directory where your company is stored. When the correct directory is selected, Peachtree displays the company name in the File Name list box.


Directories

Use this to select the directory where your company is stored. When the correct directory is selected, Peachtree displays the company name in the File Name list box.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


Drives

From the drop-down list, select the drive where you keep your company information.


OK

Select OK to close this window and add the selected company to the Online Backup Company List.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without selecting a company for Online Backup.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Text to Print

Enter the text that you want to appear in either the body text, header, or footer.


Insert Special

Select this button to insert a special code in place of the text. The Insert Special Code window will appear, letting you select the desired code.


Font

Select the Font arrow button to choose a new font for the text to appear in. The standard Windows Font window will appear, letting you make your selection.


Font

This shows the font currently selected for the text to appear in.


Alignment

Use the drop-down list to select how you want the body text, header, or footer aligned on the report.


Page Break After Printing Text

Select this check box if you want the report to begin on a new page after the body text is printed.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Insert Special Code

Here, you can choose a special code for header labels in reports and financial statements. Using the special codes enables you to print labels that are variable, such as the current date, time, or period, without having to manually enter them. Select the special code name and code you want to use.

Special Code Name: Identifies the special code, for example, Current Accounting Period.

Special Code: Displays the actual code, for example, $(currper)$.


Insert Special Code

Here, you can choose a special code for header labels in reports and financial statements. Using the special codes enables you to print labels that are variable, such as the current date, time, or period, without having to manually enter them. Select the special code name and code you want to use.

Special Code Name: Identifies the special code, for example, Current Accounting Period.

Special Code: Displays the actual code, for example, $(currper)$.


Column Definitions

Column: Specifies the column number. This is a display-only field.

Contents: Determines the contents of the column, for example, Balance. Select the contents you want from the drop-down list.

Title: Names the column. Enter the column title in this field.

Alignment: Specifies how to align the title, either to the left, right, or center of the column. Select an option for aligning the title.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Column Title Font Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Font window, where you can specify the font information.


Column Title Font Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Font window, where you can specify the font information.


Insert Special

Select this button to insert a special code into the column title. The Insert Special Code window will appear, letting you select the desired code.


Column Definitions

Print: Indicates whether to print this column. Select this check box to print this column.

Column: Specifies the column number. This is a display-only field.

Contents: Determines the contents of the column, for example, Balance. Select the contents you want from the drop-down list.

Title: Names the column. Enter the column title in this field.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement, for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement, for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Percentage

These selections let you set up the column as a percentage of two other columns.

Use Column: Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator or denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement. For example, you may choose column 1 as the numerator and column 2 as the denominator to arrive at the value of a new column 3. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Ratio

These selections let you set up the column as a ratio to another column.

Use Column: Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator of the ratio. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Account Range: Specifies the account range you have chosen as denominator of the ratio. Use the arrow button to select the range.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement, for example, column 2. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement, for example, column 2. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Balance Amount

These selections tell the system how to display the balance amount.

Qualifier: Determines which balance amounts to display, for example, only debits. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Time Frame: Determines the period for which balance amounts are displayed, for example, current. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Round: Determines how to round balance amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Qualifier

Determines which balance amounts to display, for example, only debits. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Qualifier

Determines which balance amounts to display, for example, only debits. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Time Frame

Determines the period for which balance amounts are displayed, for example, current. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Time Frame

Determines the period for which balance amounts are displayed, for example, current. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Round

Determines how to round activity amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Round

Determines how to round activity amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Alignment Options arrow button

Select this arrow button to display the Alignment Options window, where you can set the alignment for balance amounts.


Alignment Options arrow button

Select this arrow button to display the Alignment Options window, where you can set the alignment for balance amounts.


Alignment Options

Specifies the current chosen method of aligning balance amounts.


Formula Activity

These selections let you set up the column by performing activity on another column that modifies its original value. For example, you may want the column you are defining to show the difference (variance) between two columns displaying budget and actual figures. So you would tell the system to subtract the value of the actual column from that of the budget column.

(Operator): Specifies the arithmetic operator to use in calculating the activity amount: add, subtract, or multiply. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Constant: Specifies the constant value to use in the calculation. Enter the constant value.

Round: Determines how to round activity amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Alignment Options arrow button: Select this arrow button to display the Alignment Options window, where you can set the alignment for balance amounts.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the first element in the formula--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


(Operator)

Specifies the arithmetic operator to use in calculating the activity amount: add, subtract, or multiply. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the first element in the formula--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


(Operator)

Specifies the arithmetic operator to use in calculating the activity amount: add, subtract, or multiply. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the second element in the formula--for example, column 3. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the second element in the formula--for example, column 3. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Constant

Specifies the constant value to use in the calculation. Enter the constant value.


Round

Determines how to round activity amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Round

Determines how to round activity amounts, for example, by whole dollars. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Alignment Options arrow button

Select this arrow button to display the Alignment Options window, where you can set the alignment for balance amounts.


Alignment Options arrow button

Select this arrow button to display the Alignment Options window, where you can set the alignment for balance amounts.


Alignment Options

Specifies the current chosen method of aligning balance amounts.


Text

Specifies the text for a text column. Enter the text you want for this column.


Text

Specifies the text for a text column. Enter the text you want for this column.


Percentage

These selections let you set up the column as a percentage of two other columns.

Use Column: Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator or denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement. For example, you may choose column 1 as the numerator and column 2 as the denominator to arrive at the value of a new column 3. Select an option from the drop-down list.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Column Title Font Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Font window, where you can specify the font information.


Column Title Font

This is the font currently selected for the column title to appear in.


Account Range Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Select Accounts window. This window lets you specify account types to include for the denominator in calculating a ratio on the financial statement, as well as a range of accounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Selected/Not Selected

This shows whether you have selected an account range to use as the basis of the ratio.


Column XX Properties

Choose the properties that will determine how each individual column appears in the financial statement.


Department Mask

Masks (or filters out) the departments you do not want to include. Enter the appropriate characters to mask these departments and include the department you want.


Width

Enter the number of characters wide that you want the column to be.


Format

Indicates whether to format the column total as a dollar amount when the value in the Contents field is a numeric type, for example, Balance and YTD Activity. If this field is disabled, then the value is not a numeric type. Select this check box if the value in the Contents field is a numeric type and you want to format the column total as a dollar amount.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator of the ratio. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator of the ratio. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Ratio

These selections let you set up the column as a ratio to another column.

Use Column: Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator of the ratio. Select an option from the drop-down list.

Account Range: Specifies the account range you have chosen as denominator of the ratio. Use the arrow button to select the range.


Account Range Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Select Accounts window. This window lets you specify account types to include for the denominator in calculating a ratio on the financial statement, as well as a range of accounts. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Insert Special

Select this button to insert a special code into the column title. The Insert Special Code window will appear, letting you select the desired code.


Department Mask

Masks (or filters out) the departments you do not want to include. Enter the appropriate characters to mask these departments and include the department you want.


Align Title

Use the drop-down list to tell Peachtree how you want the title of the column to align with the column.


Move Up

Select this button to move the selected column up one position in the list of columns.


Move Down

Select this button to move the selected column down one position in the list of columns.


To

Displays the last account to be used in calculating a ratio on the financial statement. Select the last account in the range. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Include

Indicates whether the corresponding account type is used in calculating a ratio on the financial statement. Select each check box to include the corresponding account type.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Include these General Ledger accounts

This lets you select a range of accounts to include in the ratio. Use the Lookup buttons to choose the first and last accounts in the range you want to include.


Account Name

Once you have chosen the first account in the range you want to include, this will display the account name--for example, Regular Checking Account.


Account Name

Once you have chosen the last account in the range you want to include, this will display the account name--for example, Accounts Receivable.


Font Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Font window, where you can specify the font information for this line.


To

Displays the last account to be used on the report in connection with this line. Select the last account in the range.


Include

Indicates whether the corresponding account type is used on the report in connection with this line. Select each check box to include the corresponding account type.


Alignment

Use the drop-down list to tell Peachtree how you want the line description to align with the column, either on the left or right of the column.


Font

This is the font currently selected for displaying and printing the line.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Account Range

Enter a range of General Ledger Accounts to include on the report.

From: Displays the first account to be used on the report in connection with this line. Select the first account in the range.

To: Displays the last account to be used on the report in connection with this line. Select the last account in the range.


From

Displays the first account to be used on the report in connection with this line. Select the first account in the range.


To

Displays the last account to be used on the report in connection with this line. Select the last account in the range.


Header Text/Rollup Mask

This field is enabled if you choose either Summary or Rollup in the Print field.

Header Text: Specifies the summary label. This field is enabled only if you chose Summary in the Print field. Enter the text to label the summary.

Rollup: Specifies the Rollup Mask. This field is enabled only if you chose Rollup in the Print field. Enter the name of the mask to use.


Print

Detail: Prints every account within the range specified. Peachtree inserts the account description (from the chart of accounts) into any column with a Description source and inserts the appropriate amount into any columns that are defined to take amounts. If no accounts are found within the range, nothing is printed.

Summary: Amounts are determined by the most recent column definition, but only the sum of all amounts are printed.

Rollup: You can enter a Rollup Mask that summarized a group of accounts into a single subtotal. These subtotals appear in any column defined to take amounts. The account number and description that print are the number/description for the first account specified by the mask. (These only print if you have specified columns for description and account ID.)


Header Text/Rollup Mask

This field is enabled if you choose either Summary or Rollup in the Print field.

Header Text: Specifies the summary label. This field is enabled only if you chose Summary in the Print field. Enter the text to label the summary.

Rollup: Specifies the Rollup Mask. This field is enabled only if you chose Rollup in the Print field. Enter the name of the mask to use.


Reverse Sign (Debit as Credit)

Specifies which sign prints with the amounts. If this check box is selected, debits print with < > and credits print without < >. This only changes the way the numbers are printed, not the way they are calculated.


Font

This shows the font currently selected for the total to appear in.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Total Level

Designates the level of this total on the report. You can specify one of eight levels of subtotals or Level 9 (Grand Total). Select the total level from the drop-down list.


Text

Specifies the text to print with the total. Enter the text you want to print.


Font Arrow Button

Select this arrow button to display the Font window, where you can specify the font information for the total.


Alignment

Specifies the alignment for the total. You can choose to print the total to the right or left of the column. Select an option from the list.


Print on Report

Specifies whether this total will print on the report even if the total shows a zero balance. If the check box is selected, the total will print on the report no matter what the balance.


Reverse Sign (Debit as Credit)

Specifies which sign prints with the amounts. If this check box is selected, debits print with < > and credits print without < >. This only changes the way the numbers are printed, not the way they are calculated.


Overline Style

Specifies the style of the line over this total, if any. Your options include None and Single. Select an option from the list.


Underline Style

Specifies the style of the line under this total, if any. Your options include None, Single, and Double. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Sample

Shows you how this total looks on the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Item ID: Select this option to summarize by item ID.

Billing Status: Select this option to summarize by billing status.

Job, Phase: Select this option to summarize by job or phase.

Detailed: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Item ID: Select this option to summarize by item ID.

Billing Status: Select this option to summarize by billing status.

Job, Phase: Select this option to summarize by job or phase.

Detailed: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Pay End Date

Specifies the end of the pay period. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Pay End Date

Specifies the end of the pay period. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a drop-down list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which tickets to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which tickets to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which tickets to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Recorded by Drop-Down List

Determines how the information on the report is recorded.

All: Select this option if the information is recorded by both employee and vendor.

Employee: Select this option if the information is recorded by employee.

Vendor: Select this option if the information is recorded by vendor.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the export file.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Import Langauge) format.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a drop-down list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Import Langauge) format.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Import Langauge) format.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Journal: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per general journal, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Apply

Select this button to apply the changes you have made to report options for the currently displayed report. Peachtree will make the changes and display them on the computer screen.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field.

Header: Indicates whether this field is a header on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field a header.

Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field.

Header: Indicates whether this field is a header on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field a header.

Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Select All

Select this button to place a check mark in all check boxes on the tab.


Deselect All

Select this button to remove all check marks from all check boxes on the tab.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the report to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Report Sections

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Font: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the arrow button to change the font.

Label: Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Special button to insert a special code into the label text.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default file.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Special

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field. You must select the Label field before you select the Special button.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. Printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned if you are using a preprinted form.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers or vendors to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the report. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the report. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top and left margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items that you want displayed in the Forms Design window.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and to align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and to align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers or vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers or vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers or vendors as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers or vendors as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers or vendors but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers or vendors and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers/vendors as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers or vendors and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers/vendors as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers or vendors but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers/vendors as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers or vendors. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Time Frame

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

Current Period: Select this option to display or print the report for this period.

Current 3 Periods: Select this option to display or print the report for the three most recent periods, including this period.


Time Frame

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

Current Period: Select this option to display or print the report for this period.

Current 3 Periods: Select this option to display or print the report for the three most recent periods, including this period.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period or select it from the list in this field.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period or select it from the list in this field.


Print Page Numbers

Indicates whether to print page numbers on the report. Select this check box if you want to print page numbers.


Show Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to show zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to show zero amounts.


Print All Words Capitalized

Indicates whether to display and print the report in all capital letters. Select this check box if you want to use all capital letters.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the report. Enter the right margin in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the report. Enter the right margin in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the report. Enter the right margin in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the report. Enter the left margin in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the report. Enter the left margin in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the report. Enter the left margin in inches.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the report. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the report. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want.


Financial Statements

Complete the information on the Options tab to set options, such as right and left margins, for displaying and printing financial statements.


Financial Statements

Complete the information on the Options tab to set options, such as right and left margins, for displaying and printing financial statements.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Center on Page

Select this check box if you want each page of the report to be centered on the page instead of left justified when it is printed.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Sales Rep ID: Select this option to summarize by sales rep.

Customer: Select this option to summarize by customer.

Detail: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Sales Rep ID: Select this option to summarize by sales rep.

Customer: Select this option to summarize by customer.

Detail: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


 If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show All

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Include Customers With No Activity and a Zero Balance

Indicates whether to include customers with no activity and a zero balance on the report. Select this check box if you want to include these customers.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Accounting Method for Sales Taxes Drop-Down List

Determines the accounting method for paying sales taxes.

Cash Basis: Select this option if you want to use the cash basis.

Accrual Basis: Select this option if you want to use the accrual basis.


Accounting Method for Sales Taxes Drop-Down List

Determines the accounting method for paying sales taxes.

Cash Basis: Select this option if you want to use the cash basis.

Accrual Basis: Select this option if you want to use the accrual basis.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Select All

Select this button to place a check mark in all check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Include Vendors With No Activity and a Zero Balance

Indicates whether to include vendors with no activity and a zero balance on the report. Select this check box if you want to include these vendors.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a drop-down list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Show Totals Only

Indicates whether to show totals only on the report. Select this check box if you want to show totals only.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Tax ID

Identifies the payroll tax (for example, FICA EE or FUTA).


Tax ID

Identifies the payroll tax (for example, FICA EE or FUTA).


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the report (for example, Quarter ending June, 2001).


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the report (for example, Quarter ending June, 2001).


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default file.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Tax to Check

Specifies the tax to check for exceptions (for example, Social Security or Medicare).


Tax to Check

Specifies the tax to check for exceptions (for example, Social Security or Medicare).


Tax to Adjust to

Specifies the tax to adjust to (for example, Social Security or Medicare).


Tax to Adjust to

Specifies the tax to adjust to (for example, Social Security or Medicare).


Prepare Correcting Entries

Indicates whether to prepare correcting entries for the exception. Select this check box if you want the system to prepare correcting entries.


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the report (for example, Quarter ending June, 2001).


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the report (for example, Quarter ending June, 2001).


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Tax

Determines the payroll withholding tax or taxes displayed or printed in the report. You can choose to see all taxes, all federal taxes, or all or a selection of state or local taxes.

From the drop-down list, select the tax or taxes you want to see in the report.


Tax

Determines the payroll tax or taxes displayed or printed on the report. You can choose to see all taxes, all federal taxes, or all or a selection of state or local taxes.

From the drop-down list, select the tax or taxes you want to see in the report.


State

Determines which state or states appear in the report. You can choose to see all states or an individual state you pay withholding taxes to.

From the drop-down list, select All to see taxes for all states you pay withholding taxes to; or select the individual state you want to see withholding taxes for.

Note: This field will not be available if in the Tax field you've selected either All or Federal.


State

If you have chosen either State or Local in the Tax field, this determines which state or states appear in the report. You can choose to see all states or an individual state to which you pay withholding taxes for your employees.

From the drop-down list, select All to see taxes for all states to which you pay withhold taxes; or select the individual state for which you want to see withholding taxes reported.

Note: This field will not be available if you have chosen either All or Federal in the Tax field.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which employees to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Journal: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per general journal, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Report Format

Determines the format in which the report is displayed or printed. The options include:

Detail: Provides a detailed report on the status of your general ledger.

Summary by Day: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per day, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Period: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per period, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Summary by Transaction: Provides a summarized report of total debits and credits, per transaction, for the selected accounts and time frame.

Select the option that corresponds to the format you want for the report.


Include Accounts With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include accounts with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include accounts with zero amounts.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Hide Period Subtotals on Multi-Period Report

If you've chosen a time frame for the General Ledger report that covers more than one accounting period, select this option to hide the subtotal amounts for each individual period appearing on the report. It will eliminate redundancy and in some cases save paper.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available periods.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of periods.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account from the list.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which accounts to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Include Items With No Quantity on Hand

Indicates whether to include items with no quantity on hand on the report. Select this check box if you want to include these items.


Include Items With No Activity

Indicates whether to include items with no activity on the report. Select this check box if you want to include these items.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first period from which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the drop-down list.


From Date

Specifies the first period from which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the drop-down list.


To Date

Specifies the last period in the range of dates for the report.  Select the period from the drop-down list.


To Date

Specifies the last period in the range of dates for the report.  Select the period from the drop-down list.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first period from which you want to export information. Select the period from the drop-down list.


From Date

Specifies the first period from which you want to export information. Select the period from the drop-down list.


To Date

Specifies the last period in the range of dates for the export.  Select the period from the drop-down list.


To Date

Specifies the last period in the range of dates for the export.  Select the period from the drop-down list.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all the Show check marks from all check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Include Items With No Activity

Indicates whether to include items with no activity on the report. Select this check box if you want to include these items.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which items to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Job: Select this option to summarize by job.

Job, Phase: Select this option to summarize by job and phase.

Job, Phase, Cost Code: Select this option to summarize by job, phase, and cost code.

GL Account: Select this option to summarize by GL account.

Detail: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Summarize by Drop-Down List

Determines how the report is summarized.

Job: Select this option to summarize by job.

Job, Phase: Select this option to summarize by job and phase.

Job, Phase, Cost Code: Select this option to summarize by job, phase, and cost code.

GL Account: Select this option to summarize by GL account.

Detail: Select this option to summarize by transaction.


Include Jobs With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include jobs with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include jobs with zero amounts.


Subtotal by G/L Account

Indicates whether to include subtotals by G/L account on the report. Select this check box if you want to include subtotals by G/L account.


Time Frame

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Time Frame

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available dates.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of dates.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


Time Frame

All: Select this option to display or print the report for all available dates.

Range: Select this option to display or print the report for a range of dates.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the report for the current period.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


From Period

Specifies the first period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


To Period

Specifies the last period in the range of periods for the report. Enter the period, or select it from the list in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Include Jobs With Zero Amounts

Indicates whether to include jobs with zero amounts on the report. Select this check box if you want to include jobs with zero amounts.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which jobs to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form to test the alignment of text on the form.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Vertical: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type up or down on the form. Enter the amount to shift type up as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type down as a positive number.


Horizontal: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type left or right on the form. Enter the amount to shift type left as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type right as a positive number.


Horizontal: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type left or right on the form. Enter the amount to shift type left as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type right as a positive number.


Horizontal: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type left or right on the form. Enter the amount to shift type left as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type right as a positive number.


Horizontal: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type left or right on the form. Enter the amount to shift type left as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type right as a positive number.


Horizontal: Shift Type

Specifies the amount in inches to shift type left or right on the form. Enter the amount to shift type left as a negative number. Enter the amount to shift type right as a positive number.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Unprinted Invoices

Select this option if you want to print the form for unprinted invoices.


Unprinted Invoices

Select this option if you want to print the form for unprinted invoices.


Printed Invoices

Select this option if you want to print the form for printed invoices.


Form to Print

Determines the particular invoice form to be printed, for example, Invoice Plain Service. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular invoice form to be printed, for example, Invoice Plain Service. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


First Invoice Number

Specifies the first invoice number to be printed. Enter the first invoice number you want to print.


First Invoice Number

Specifies the first invoice number to be printed. Enter the first invoice number you want to print.


Last Date for Which Invoices Will Print

Specifies the last date for which invoices will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which Invoices Will Print

Specifies the last date for which invoices will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular quote form to be printed, for example, Quote Plain Service. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular quote form to be printed, for example, Quote Plain Service. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


First Quote Number

Specifies the first quote number to be printed. Enter the first quote number you want to print.


First Quote Number

Specifies the first quote number to be printed. Enter the first quote number you want to print.


Last Date for Which Quotes Will Print

Specifies the last date for which quotes will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which Quotes Will Print

Specifies the last date for which quotes will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular statement form to be printed, for example, Statement Plain. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular statement form to be printed, for example, Statement Plain. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Date

Use the drop-down list to select the date or range of dates for which you want to print statement information.


Statement Type

Displays options that determine the type of statement to be printed. Select the check box that corresponds to the type of statement you want to print.


Balance Forward

Select this option if you want Peachtree to consolidate a customer's unpaid balance from month to month. The total balance from the previous statement is shown as a balance-forward amount, and any new invoices or receipts display beneath it.


Open Item

Select this option if you want Peachtree to list each outstanding invoice that still has a balance due. These statements do not consolidate open invoices on the next statement. Therefore, no previous balance will appear.


Date

Use the drop-down list to select the date or range of dates for which you want to print statement information.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Print Detail for

Choose to print detail information for sales and credit memos, receipts, or both.


Sales/Credit Memos

Select this option button to print detail information for sales and credit memos.


Receipts

Select this option button to print detail information for receipts.


From

This is the start date of the range of dates you want to print statement information for. Enter an start date, or select it from the calendar.


From

This is the start date of the range of dates you want to print statement information for. Enter an start date, or select it from the calendar.


To

This is the end date of the range of dates you want to print statement information for. Enter an end date, or select it from the calendar.


To

This is the end date of the range of dates you want to print statement information for. Enter an end date, or select it from the calendar.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

Select the check box if you want to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Customer Labels Continuous. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Customer Labels Continuous. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which customer labels are sorted, for example, by customer ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which customer labels are sorted, for example, by customer ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Name

This is the name of the default printer you have chosen for forms printing.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular collection form to be printed, for example, Overdue < 30 Soft. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular collection form to be printed, for example, Overdue < 30 Soft. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Letter Date

Specifies the date to be printed on the collection form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Letter Date

Specifies the date to be printed on the collection form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer Name

This is the name of the default printer you have chosen for forms printing.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

Select the check box if you want to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular disbursement check form to be printed, for example, AP Preprint 1 Stub. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Form to Print

Determines the particular disbursement check form to be printed, for example, AP Preprint 1 Stub. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


First Check Number

Specifies the first check number to be printed. Enter the first check number you want to print.


First Check Number

Specifies the first check number to be printed. Enter the first check number you want to print.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account from which the check amounts will be taken. Select the account ID from the list. Typically, this is the cash account you specified the last time you processed payments to vendors.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account from which the check amounts will be taken. Select the account ID from the list. Typically, this is the cash account you specified the last time you processed payments to vendors.


Last Date for Which Checks Will Print

Specifies the last date for which checks will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which Checks Will Print

Specifies the last date for which checks will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, PO Plain. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, PO Plain. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


First P.O. Number

Specifies the first purchase order number to be printed. Enter the first purchase order number you want to print.


First P.O. Number

Specifies the first purchase order number to be printed. Enter the first purchase order number you want to print.


Last Date for Which P.O. Will Print

Specifies the last date for which purchase orders will print. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which P.O. Will Print

Specifies the last date for which purchase orders will print. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8 1/2 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters per inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and to align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines per inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and to align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate vendors as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate vendors but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate vendors and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the vendors as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate vendors and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same vendors. You can mail the originals to the vendors as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate vendors but not e-mail duplicate copies to those vendors. You can mail the originals to the vendors as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate vendors. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular 1099 form to be printed, for example, 1099-MISC. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular 1099 form to be printed, for example, 1099-MISC. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Lower Limit to Print

Specifies the lowest dollar amount for which you want to print the 1099 form, for example $600.00. In this case, the system will print 1099s for vendors from whom your company purchased $600.00 or more more in goods and services. Enter the lower limit to print in this field.


Lower Limit to Print

Specifies the lowest dollar amount for which you want to print the 1099 form, for example $600.00. In this case, the system will print 1099s for vendors from whom your company purchased $600.00 or more more in goods and services. Enter the lower limit to print in this field.


Year to Print

Specifies the year for which to print the 1099 forms. Select the year from the drop-down list.


Year to Print

Specifies the year for which to print the 1099 forms. Select the year from the drop-down list.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer Name

This is the name of the default printer you have chosen for forms printing.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Vendor Labels Continuous. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Vendor Labels Continuous. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which vendor labels are sorted, for example, by vendor ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which vendor labels are sorted, for example, by vendor ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top and left margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor potion.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which vendors to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular disbursement check form to be printed, for example, PR Preprint 1 Stub. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Form to Print

Determines the particular disbursement check form to be printed, for example, PR Preprint 1 Stub. Select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


First Check Number

Specifies the first check number to be printed. Enter the first check number you want to print.


First Check Number

Specifies the first check number to be printed. Enter the first check number you want to print.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account from which the check amounts will be taken. Select the account ID from the list. Typically, this is the cash account you specified the last time you processed payroll.


Cash Account

Identifies the cash account from which the check amounts will be taken. Select the account ID from the list. Typically, this is the cash account you specified the last time you processed payroll.


Last Date for Which Checks Will Print

Specifies the last date for which checks will print. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which Checks Will Print

Specifies the last date for which checks will print. Enter the date or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular payroll form to be printed, for example, State Qtly Wage List Worksheet. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular payroll form to be printed, for example, State Qtly Wage List Worksheet. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


SDI Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SDI already paid this quarter. Enter the SDI amount paid.


SDI Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SDI already paid this quarter. Enter the SDI amount paid.


SUI Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SUI already paid this quarter. Enter the SUI amount paid.


SUI Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SUI already paid this quarter. Enter the SUI amount paid.


SIT Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SIT already paid this quarter. Enter the SIT amount paid.


SIT Previously Paid This Quarter

Specifies the amount of SIT already paid this quarter. Enter the SIT amount paid.


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the state quarterly payroll, for example, Quarter Ending March, 2000. Select the quarter from the drop-down list.


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the state quarterly payroll, for example, Quarter Ending March, 2000. Select the quarter from the drop-down list.


State to Print

Specifies the state for which to print the state quarterly payroll, for example, GA. Enter the 2-character abbreviation for the state.


State to Print

Specifies the state for which to print the state quarterly payroll, for example, GA. Enter the 2-character abbreviation for the state.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, 940-EZ. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, 940-EZ. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


FUTA Deposited for the Year

Specifies the amount of FUTA placed on deposit for the year. Enter the FUTA amount deposited.


FUTA Deposited for the Year

Specifies the amount of FUTA placed on deposit for the year. Enter the FUTA amount deposited.


SUTA Paid This Year

Specifies the amount of SUTA paid this year. Enter the SUTA amount paid.


SUTA Paid This Year

Specifies the amount of SUTA paid this year. Enter the SUTA amount paid.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer Name

This is the name of the default printer you have chosen for forms printing.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor potion.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, FedForm 941 1999. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print from the drop-down list.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, FedForm 941 1999. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Total Deposits for Quarter

Specifies the amount of deposits associated with this form for the quarter. Enter the amount deposited.


Total Deposits for Quarter

Specifies the amount of deposits associated with this form for the quarter. Enter the amount deposited.


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the 941 forms, for example, Quarter Ending March, 2000. Select the quarter from the drop-down list.


Quarter to Print

Specifies the quarter for which to print the 941 forms, for example, Quarter Ending March, 2000. Select the quarter from the drop-down list.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer Name

This is the name of the default printer you have chosen for forms printing.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, W-2 1999 Standard. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed, for example, W-2 1999 Standard. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor potion.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular purchase order form to be printed. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Employee Labels 3 X 10. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular label form to be printed, for example, Employee Labels 3 X 10. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which customer labels are sorted, for example, by employee ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Sort Order

Determines the order in which customer labels are sorted, for example, by employee ID. From the drop-down list, select the sort order you want.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which employees to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Insert Special Code

Here, you can choose a special code for header labels in reports and financial statements. Using the special codes enables you to print labels that are variable, such as the current date, time, or period, without having to manually enter them. Select the special code name and code you want to use.

Special Code Name: Identifies the special code, for example, Current Accounting Period.

Special Code: Displays the actual code, for example, $(currper)$.


Insert Special Code

Here, you can choose a special code for header labels in reports and financial statements. Using the special codes enables you to print labels that are variable, such as the current date, time, or period, without having to manually enter them. Select the special code name and code you want to use.

Special Code Name: Identifies the special code, for example, Current Accounting Period.

Special Code: Displays the actual code, for example, $(currper)$.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Insert Special Code

Here, you can choose a special code for header labels in reports and financial statements. Using the special codes enables you to print labels that are variable, such as the current date, time, or period, without having to manually enter them. Select the special code name and code you want to use.

Special Code Name: Identifies the special code, for example, Current Accounting Period.

Special Code: Displays the actual code, for example, $(currper)$.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Sample

Shows you how the data and totals look after you select an alignment option.


Data and Totals Aligned

Select this option if you want data and totals aligned in the column.


Data and Totals Tiered

Select this option if you want data and totals tiered in the column.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


New Report Name

Enter the name of the new financial statement you are want to create. You can enter up to 30 characters (letters and numbers).


Source Company

Use the drop-down list to choose the company from which you want to copy a financial statement format.


Report to be Copied

Use the drop-down list to choose the financial statement whose format you want to copy.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of period for which you want to generate the report information. Select the period from the list in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Unprinted Credit Memos

Select this option if you want to print the form for unprinted credit memos.


Unprinted Credit Memos

Select this option if you want to print the form for unprinted credit memos.


Printed Credit Memos

Select this option if you want to print the form for printed credit memos.


Form to Print

Determines the particular credit memo form to be printed, for example, Credit Memo Plain. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular credit memo form to be printed, for example, Credit Memo Plain. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


First Credit Memo Number

Specifies the first credit memo number to be printed. Enter the first credit memo number you want to print.


First Credit Memo Number

Specifies the first credit memo number to be printed. Enter the first credit memo number you want to print.


Last Date for Which Credit Memos Will Print

Specifies the last date for which credit memos will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Last Date for Which Credit Memos Will Print

Specifies the last date for which credit memos will print. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor position.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your customers, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Path Name of Export Files

Specifies the current location of the files you are importing. Enter the path. This can be a Quicken (QIF) export file, a One-Write Plus export file, or a Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS export file.


Path Name of Export Files

Specifies the current location of the files you are importing. Enter the path. This can be a Quicken (QIF) export file, a One-Write Plus export file, or a Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS export file.


Path Name of Export Files

Specifies the current location of the files you are importing. Enter the path. This can be a Quicken (QIF) export file, a One-Write Plus export file, or a Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS export file.


PCA Company Code

This identifies the two-character company code used in Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS to access the company data. Enter the two-character company code, and select OK to begin the import process.


PCA Company Code

This identifies the two-character company code used in Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS to access the company data. Enter the two-character company code, and select OK to begin the import process.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Path Name of Export Files

Specifies the current location of the files you are importing. Enter the path. This can be a Quicken (QIF) export file, a One-Write Plus export file, or a Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS export file.


Browse

Browse for the file you'd like to import.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Truncate Long Description

Indicates whether to truncate long descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


As of Date

Specifies the as-of date for which you want to generate the report information. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a drop-down list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select this button to view online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Truncate Transaction Description

Indicates whether to truncate long transaction descriptions on the report. Select this check box if you want to truncate long descriptions.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to export data. The date options vary depending on the type of export template selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the export. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select this check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to- Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to- Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which users to use.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which users to use.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which users to use.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which customers to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to view online Help for this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which vendors to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Report (Export) Order

Determines the order in which data is exported. For example, you can sort data by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of export template selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the export.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.


Fields

Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.


Options

Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is included in the export file. This tab is unavailable for import files.

Fields: Select this tab to indicate whether specific fields will appear in the import or export file.

Options: Select this tab to set options for the import or export file, such as the name of the file and whether the file should have field headings.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Tax Registration Number

Once you have registered your Peachtree Accounting product, you will have to register with the Peachtree Tax Service before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas. This process includes entering your tax registration number. To obtain this number, visit Peachtree Software's Web site or call Peachtree Software.


Tax Registration Number

Once you have registered your Peachtree Accounting product, you will have to register with the Peachtree Tax Service before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas. This process includes entering your tax registration number. To obtain this number, visit Peachtree Software's Web site or call Peachtree Software.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

Before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

Before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

Before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Peachtree Tax Service Registration Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to go to and register with the Peachtree Tax Service at the Peachtree Software Web site. Once you have completed the process, you will be provided a registration number.


Peachtree Tax Service Registration Phone Number

If you do not have access to the Internet, you can call Peachtree to register with the Peachtree Tax Service. Once you have answered a few questions, a customer service representative will provide you a registration number.


Peachtree Tax Service Registration Phone Number

If you do not have access to the Internet, you can call Peachtree to register with the Peachtree Tax Service. Once you have answered a few questions, a customer service representative will provide you a registration number.


Peachtree Tax Service Registration Phone Number

If you do not have access to the Internet, you can call Peachtree to register with the Peachtree Tax Service. Once you have answered a few questions, a customer service representative will provide you a registration number.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Serial Number

This is the serial number of your Peachtree Accounting product, which you supplied to Peachtree Software when you registered your copy of the product. The serial number appears for reference only; you cannot edit it.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

You have already registered your Peachtree Accounting product, but before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register in this window with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

You have already registered your Peachtree Accounting product, but before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register in this window with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Register Peachtree Tax Service

You have already registered your Peachtree Accounting product, but before you can start working with Peachtree tax formulas, you must register in this window with the Peachtree Tax Service. You need to enter your tax registration number, which you can obtain from Peachtree Software's Web site or by calling Peachtree Software.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record new time-ticket durations or update existing time tickets.


New

Select this button to clear the time ticket displayed and enter a new one. This button is only available when the Daily tab is selected.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered time ticket. This button is only available when the Daily tab is selected.


Employee/Vendor

This identifies who is performing this activity. Select either Employee or Vendor from the drop-down list.

Note: In Time/Expense reports, the Employee/Vendor field is referred to as Recorded by ID.


Employee ID

Enter or select the employee ID that corresponds to the person performing this activity. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: Sales reps cannot be selected. Only individuals established as employees or both (employee and sales rep) can record time tickets.


Vendor ID

Enter or select the vendor ID that corresponds to the person (or company) performing this activity. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Employee/Vendor Name

This identifies the name of person or company that is performing the activity based on the selected employee ID or vendor ID.


Time Tickets

Daily: Select this tab to enter or display individual time tickets.

Weekly: Select this tab to enter and display time tickets in a weekly time sheet format. To display or edit time ticket detail listed in the Weekly tab, first select the duration cell that corresponds to the ticket. Then, select the Daily tab.


Daily

Select this tab to enter or display individual time tickets.


Weekly

Select this tab to enter and display time tickets in a weekly time sheet format. To display or edit time-ticket detail listed in the Weekly tab, first select the duration cell that corresponds to the ticket. Then, select the Daily tab.


Ticket Number

This identifies individual time or expense ticket entries. A ticket number is automatically assigned when you begin entering a new ticket. Ticket numbers increase by one based on the last ticket entered and saved. You cannot assign or alter a ticket number. When you record activities in the weekly time sheet, a time ticket is created with a unique ticket number for each day that you enter a duration.

Note: Time tickets and expense tickets share the same numbering sequence.


Ticket Number

This identifies individual time or expense ticket entries. A ticket number is automatically assigned when you begin entering a new ticket. Ticket numbers increase by one based on the last ticket entered and saved. You cannot assign or alter a ticket number. When you record activities in the weekly time sheet, a time ticket is created with a unique ticket number for each day that you enter a duration.

Note: Time tickets and expense tickets share the same numbering sequence.


Ticket Date

Enter or select the date of the activity, if different from the current date. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date. You are permitted to enter dates within the previously closed fiscal year and the two currently open fiscal years. Common reasons for entering ticket dates for the previously closed fiscal year include recording time-ticket hours last year that you intend to bill a customer this year.


Ticket Date

Enter or select the date of the activity, if different from the current date. Click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field to choose a date. You are permitted to enter dates within the previously closed fiscal year and the two currently open fiscal years. Common reasons for entering ticket dates for the previously closed fiscal year include recording time-ticket hours last year that you intend to bill a customer this year.


Ticket Has Been Used in Sales/Invoicing

This indicates that the ticket has already been applied to a customer invoice. You can apply a time or expense ticket only once to customer invoices. After the ticket has been applied to a sales invoice, you cannot apply the ticket again.

Note: If you erase a line item that references an applied ticket in the sales invoice, the ticket will still indicate that it has been used in Sales/Invoicing. You will not be able to apply it to another invoice. To keep your ticket transactions consistent with your sales invoices, you should erase the entire invoice and re-create it, omitting the line that you want to erase.

Hint: If you erase an invoice created from time and/or expense tickets, then all time and expense tickets applied to this invoice will no longer be marked as "Has been used in Sales/Invoicing." You can apply these tickets to a new sales invoice.


Activity Item

This identifies how time is spent when performing services for a customer, job, or internal administrative work.

Enter or select the activity ID that corresponds to the person performing this activity. Activity items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing activity items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new activity item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, if you want to record time spent on a phone conversation with a client, you might set up and select a Teleconference activity item.


Activity Item

This identifies how time is spent when performing services for a customer, job, or internal administrative work.

Enter or select the activity ID that corresponds to the person performing this activity. Activity items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing activity items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new activity item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, if you want to record time spent on a phone conversation with a client, you might set up and select a Teleconference activity item.


Activity Item

This identifies how time is spent when performing services for a customer, job, or internal administrative work.

Enter or select the activity ID that corresponds to the person performing this activity. Activity items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing activity items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new activity item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, if you want to record time spent on a phone conversation with a client, you might set up and select a Teleconference activity item.


Customer/Job/Administrative

For whom or why is this activity being performed? You have three choices:

Customer: The activity is being performed for a customer who does not have a job set up in Job Costing.

Job: The activity is being performed for a job, phase, or cost code set up in Job Costing.

Administrative: The activity being performed is not associated with a customer or job. For example, you might record bookkeeping time as an administrative activity. Administrative time tickets are automatically given a nonbillable billing status. You can change the billing status; however, since no customer or job can be associated with it, administrative tickets cannot be used in Sales/Invoicing.

Note: In Time/Expense reports, the Customer ID /Job ID field is referred to as Completed for ID.


Customer ID

Enter or select the customer ID that corresponds to the customer for whom this activity is being performed. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Job ID

Enter or select the job ID that corresponds to the job (project) for which this activity is being performed. To select an existing job, from the drop-down list click the Lookup folder button (or press ? in the Job ID field). If a  job uses phases, you can select the phase ID or cost ID to correspond to the job's activity.


Customer/Job Name

This identifies the name of customer or job for whom or why this activity is being performed.  The name is based on the selected customer ID or job ID.


Pay Level

If this time ticket is being recorded by an employee, you can select a pay level associated with the activity being performed. Pay levels are set up in the Pay Info tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Rep window. It can be an hourly pay level or salary pay level based on how the employee is set up. If the employee is set up to be paid hourly based on time-ticket hours recorded during the payroll period, the pay level selected here will be used in payroll entry. Pay levels entered here for salaried employees are used for report purposes only.

Note: Only employee pay levels set up with a defined rate appear in the Pay Level drop-down list for time tickets. If the pay level is not selected or left blank in the Time Ticket window, the time ticket will not be available to use in Payroll.


Pay Level

If this time ticket is being recorded by an employee, you can select a pay level associated with the activity being performed. Pay levels are set up in the Pay Info tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Rep window. It can be an hourly pay level or salary pay level based on how the employee is set up. If the employee is set up to be paid hourly based on time-ticket hours recorded during the payroll period, the pay level selected here will be used in payroll entry. Pay levels entered here for salaried employees are used for report purposes only.

Note: Only employee pay levels set up with a defined rate appear in the Pay Level drop-down list for time tickets. If the pay level is not selected or left blank in the Time Ticket window, the time ticket will not be available to use in Payroll.


Has Been Used in Payroll Check Box

This indicates that the time ticket has already been applied to one or more of the employee's paychecks during payroll entry. If the "Has been used in Payroll" check box is clear, then this time ticket is available to apply to an employee's paycheck during payroll entry. You can apply time-ticket hours to an employee paycheck only if the employee is set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps as using the Hourly-Time Tickets payment method.

Hint: If you do not want this time ticket to be included in total time-ticket hours calculated during payroll entry, you can select this check box (even though the ticket was never used in Payroll).  If the check box is already selected (the ticket was actually used during a previous payroll entry), you can clear this box. Clearing this check box permits the time-ticket hours to be recorded a second time for the employee during payroll entry. However, your Time/Expense reports may display conflicting information.


Manual Time Entry

Select this option if you already know the hours during which the activity was performed. You can enter a start and end time to allow Peachtree to calculate the duration. You cannot enter an amount in the Duration field while this option is selected.


Timed Duration

Select this option if you want Peachtree to actively time your activity. To start timing the activity, select the Start button. When you have completed the task, select the Stop button. Peachtree will calculate the duration for you. You can also enter an amount directly into the Duration field. When the timer starts running, it adds to your manually entered time.


Start Time

This identifies the time at which the activity began. Enter the start time using the HOUR:MINUTES AM/PM format (for example, 8:30 AM). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.


Start Time

This identifies the time at which the activity began. Enter the start time using the HOUR:MINUTES AM/PM format (for example, 8:30 AM). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.


End Time

This identifies  the time at which the activity concluded. Enter ending time using the HOUR:MINUTES AM/PM format (for example, 1:30 PM). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Note: A ticket duration can span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes.


End Time

This identifies  the time at which the activity concluded. Enter ending time using the HOUR:MINUTES AM/PM format (for example, 1:30 PM). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Note: A ticket duration can span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes.


Break

This identifies the amount of time that should not be included when calculating duration. Enter the break time using the HOUR:MINUTES format (for example, 1:30 ).You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Break is typically time spent away from the specific activity. For example, if you take a one-hour lunch break between 9:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Peachtree will calculate the time-ticket duration as seven hours (eight hours less the one-hour lunch break).

Note: A ticket duration may span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes.


Break

This identifies the amount of time that should not be included when calculating duration. Enter the break time using the HOUR:MINUTES format (for example, 1:30 ).You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Break is typically time spent away from the specific activity. For example, if you take a one-hour lunch break between 9:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Peachtree will calculate the time-ticket duration as seven hours (eight hours less the one-hour lunch break).

Note: A ticket duration may span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes.


Start Timer/Stop Timer

To start actively timing the activity, select the Start button. This will begin timing the activity field in second intervals. When you have completed the task, select the Stop button. Peachtree will stop clocking the time in the Duration field. If you select the Start Timer button once again, the duration will continue from the last saved value.

Note: You cannot have more than one timer active (running) for an employee or vendor at the same time on a computer. You must stop the timer before closing the Time Tickets window, closing a company, or exiting Peachtree. Before saving or exiting, you must select the Stop Timer button. Then, you can save the ticket and close the window.

Hint: If you need to keep the timer running in the background while you perform other Peachtree Accounting activities, you can minimize the window by selecting the Minimize button in the upper-right corner of the window. The window will reduce the Time Ticket window to a button on your Peachtree Accounting desktop. To restore the window, double-click the Time Ticket button.


Duration

This identifies the total time spent performing the activity. If you selected the Manual Time Entry option, then you can enter a start time, end time, and break to have Peachtree calculate the duration. You cannot enter an amount in the Duration field while this option is selected. If you selected the Timed Duration option, then select the Start button to begin timing the activity and the Stop button to stop recording time for the activity. Or, you can enter an amount directly in the Duration field.

Duration amounts are entered using the HOUR:MINUTES format (for example, 1:30). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Note: A ticket duration may span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes. Also, time-ticket duration must be a positive amount before saving time tickets. You cannot create a negative time ticket.


Duration

This identifies the total time spent performing the activity. If you selected the Manual Time Entry option, then you can enter a start time, end time, and break to have Peachtree calculate the duration. You cannot enter an amount in the Duration field while this option is selected. If you selected the Timed Duration option, then select the Start button to begin timing the activity and the Stop button to stop recording time for the activity. Or, you can enter an amount directly in the Duration field.

Duration amounts are entered using the HOUR:MINUTES format (for example, 1:30). You can also select the up and down arrows to adjust a time component.

Note: A ticket duration may span two days, but it cannot exceed 23 hours and 59 minutes. Also, time-ticket duration must be a positive amount before saving time tickets. You cannot create a negative time ticket.


Billing Type

Billing type gives you the flexibility of choosing from multiple billing rates. Choose a billing type from the drop-down list. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

Employee Rate: Select this option to assign an employee billing rate set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.

Activity Rate: Select this option to assign an activity-item billing rate set up in Maintain Inventory Items. You can choose any of the ten billing rates established if the default pricing level is not satisfactory.

Override Rate: Select this option to enter a desired billing rate, overriding the employee's established billing rate or one of the activity item's multiple billing rates set up in inventory.

Flat Fee: Select this option to ignore the duration of the time ticket and charge a single fee for the activity performed. The Billing Rate field is not available when selecting this option. Enter the desired amount to charge for this activity in the Billing Amount field.


Billing Type

Billing type gives you the flexibility of choosing from multiple billing rates. Choose a billing type from the drop-down list. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

Employee Rate: Select this option to assign an employee billing rate set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.

Activity Rate: Select this option to assign an activity-item billing rate set up in Maintain Inventory Items. You can choose any of the ten billing rates established if the default pricing level is not satisfactory.

Override Rate: Select this option to enter a desired billing rate, overriding the employee's established billing rate or one of the activity item's multiple billing rates set up in inventory.

Flat Fee: Select this option to ignore the duration of the time ticket and charge a single fee for the activity performed. The Billing Rate field is not available when selecting this option. Enter the desired amount to charge for this activity in the Billing Amount field.


Billing Rate

This is used to calculate the billing amount for the activity being performed on this time ticket. Billing rates must be positive amounts. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

If you selected the Employee Rate billing type, this rate will correspond to the billing rate set up for this employee in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. If you selected the Activity Rate billing type, you can select from multiple billing rates set up for this activity in Maintain Inventory. Peachtree will first use the default sales price level set up for the customer. You can select any of the billing rates listed. If you selected Override Rate billing type, you must enter a billing rate in this field. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, the billing rate field will not be available.


Billing Rate

This is used to calculate the billing amount for the activity being performed on this time ticket. Billing rates must be positive amounts. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

If you selected the Employee Rate billing type, this rate will correspond to the billing rate set up for this employee in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. If you selected the Activity Rate billing type, you can select from multiple billing rates set up for this activity in Maintain Inventory. Peachtree will first use the default sales price level set up for the customer. You can select any of the billing rates listed. If you selected Override Rate billing type, you must enter a billing rate in this field. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, the billing rate field will not be available.


Billing Rate

This is used to calculate the billing amount for the activity being performed on this time ticket. Billing rates must be positive amounts. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

If you selected the Employee Rate billing type, this rate will correspond to the billing rate set up for this employee in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. If you selected the Activity Rate billing type, you can select from multiple billing rates set up for this activity in Maintain Inventory. Peachtree will first use the default sales price level set up for the customer. You can select any of the billing rates listed. If you selected Override Rate billing type, you must enter a billing rate in this field. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, the billing rate field will not be available.


Billing Status

This identifies whether or not a ticket is billable in its current state. Select a billing status from the drop-down list.

Billable: Select this option if the ticket should be available to apply to customer invoices.

Non-Billable: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices. This status is automatically applied if this is an administrative ticket.

Hold: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices until the ticket's status is changed to billable.

No Charge: Select this option to apply a zero billing amount. This ticket will be available to apply to customer invoices.


Billing Status

This identifies whether or not a ticket is billable in its current state. Select a billing status from the drop-down list.

Billable: Select this option if the ticket should be available to apply to customer invoices.

Non-Billable: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices. This status is automatically applied if this is an administrative ticket.

Hold: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices until the ticket's status is changed to billable.

No Charge: Select this option to apply a zero billing amount. This ticket will be available to apply to customer invoices.


Unit Duration

This is the Duration time converted to decimal format [HOURS.MINUTES]. It is used when calculating the billing amount. You cannot change the unit duration on the Daily tab without changing the Duration field itself. Unit duration minutes are calculated as [MINUTES] divided by 60.


Unit Duration

This is the Duration time converted to decimal format [HOURS.MINUTES]. It is used when calculating the billing amount. You cannot change the unit duration on the Daily tab without changing the Duration field itself. Unit duration minutes are calculated as [MINUTES] divided by 60.


Billing Amount

This identifies the dollar amount that can be used when applying time tickets to sales invoices. If you selected the Employee Rate, Activity Rate, or Override Rate billing type, then the billing amount is calculated as the billing rate multiplied by the unit duration. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, then you can enter an amount in the Billing Amount field.

Note: Billing amounts must be zero or greater before saving time tickets. You cannot create a ticket with a negative billing amount. If you want to enter a credit item on a customer's sales invoice that is related to a Time & Billing ticket, you must manually enter a negative line item on the sales invoice. The time ticket itself will not be adjusted.


Billing Amount

This identifies the dollar amount that can be used when applying time tickets to sales invoices. If you selected the Employee Rate, Activity Rate, or Override Rate billing type, then the billing amount is calculated as the billing rate multiplied by the unit duration. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, then you can enter an amount in the Billing Amount field.

Note: Billing amounts must be zero or greater before saving time tickets. You cannot create a ticket with a negative billing amount. If you want to enter a credit item on a customer's sales invoice that is related to a Time & Billing ticket, you must manually enter a negative line item on the sales invoice. The time ticket itself will not be adjusted.


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This is the short description for the time ticket that can be applied to a customer invoice. You can enter up to 160 characters. Typically, this description is used for billing purposes. When applying time tickets to customer invoices, you can choose to display the ticket description entered here or the activity item description set up in Maintain Inventory (provided the applied tickets are not consolidated).


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This is the short description for the time ticket that can be applied to a customer invoice. You can enter up to 160 characters. Typically, this description is used for billing purposes. When applying time tickets to customer invoices, you can choose to display the ticket description entered here or the activity item description set up in Maintain Inventory (provided the applied tickets are not consolidated).


Internal Memo

This is a personal note about the activity that is included only for internal purposes. You can enter notes on how time was spent performing this activity. Memos cannot be added to a customer invoice or employee paycheck; however, they can be displayed in reports. You can enter up to 2000 characters. To begin a new paragraph, press CTRL+J.

Hint: A ticket memo can be displayed in Sales/Invoicing to assist in billing. To display the ticket memo, select the Detail button in the Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses window.


Internal Memo

This is a personal note about the activity that is included only for internal purposes. You can enter notes on how time was spent performing this activity. Memos cannot be added to a customer invoice or employee paycheck; however, they can be displayed in reports. You can enter up to 2000 characters. To begin a new paragraph, press CTRL+J.

Hint: A ticket memo can be displayed in Sales/Invoicing to assist in billing. To display the ticket memo, select the Detail button in the Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses window.


Week Including

Enter or select a date within the week to be displayed on the weekly time sheet. After entering a date, Peachtree will display the week (Monday through Sunday) that includes that date. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Week Including

Enter or select a date within the week to be displayed on the weekly time sheet. After entering a date, Peachtree will display the week (Monday through Sunday) that includes that date. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for a given day of the week.


Daily Hours Totals

This is equal to the sum of all time-ticket hours recorded for the week.


Weekly Time Sheet

This displays all the time tickets for a selected employee or vendor based on the Week Including date (Monday through Sunday that corresponds to the selected date). Each unit duration entered under a daily column represents an individual time ticket for a given activity item, customer, job, administrative task, billing status, and billing rate.

Note: To display or edit time-ticket detail listed in the Weekly tab, first select the duration cell that corresponds to the ticket. Then, select the Daily tab. Also, time tickets saved with zero durations do not appear in the weekly time sheet. To edit or view these tickets, you must select the Daily tab.

Select Help for more information.


Weekly Time Sheet

This displays all the time tickets for a selected employee or vendor based on the Week Including date (Monday through Sunday that corresponds to the selected date). Each unit duration entered under a daily column represents an individual time ticket for a given activity item, customer, job, administrative task, billing status, and billing rate.

Note: To display or edit time-ticket detail listed in the Weekly tab, first select the duration cell that corresponds to the ticket. Then, select the Daily tab. Also, time tickets saved with zero durations do not appear in the weekly time sheet. To edit or view these tickets, you must select the Daily tab.

Select Help for more information


Time Tickets

Daily: Select this tab to enter or display individual time tickets.

Weekly: Select this tab to enter and display time tickets in a weekly time sheet format. To display or edit time ticket detail listed in the Weekly tab, first select the duration cell that corresponds to the ticket. Then, select the Daily tab.


Billing Type

Billing type gives you the flexibility of choosing from multiple billing rates. Choose a billing type from the drop-down list. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

Employee Rate: Select this option to assign an employee billing rate set up in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps.

Activity Rate: Select this option to assign an activity-item billing rate set up in Maintain Inventory Items. You can choose any of the ten billing rates established if the default pricing level is not satisfactory.

Override Rate: Select this option to enter a desired billing rate, overriding the employee's established billing rate or one of the activity item's multiple billing rates set up in inventory.

Flat Fee: Select this option to ignore the duration of the time ticket and charge a single fee for the activity performed. The Billing Rate field is not available when selecting this option. Enter the desired amount to charge for this activity in the Billing Amount field.


Billing Rate

This is used to calculate the billing amount for the activity being performed on this time ticket. Billing rates must be positive amounts. This field is not available when recording administrative tickets.

If you selected the Employee Rate billing type, this rate will correspond to the billing rate set up for this employee in Maintain Employees/Sales Reps. If you selected the Activity Rate billing type, this rate will correspond to one of five multiple billing rates set up in inventory for this activity item. Peachtree will first use the default sales price level set up for the customer. You can select any of the five billing rates listed. If you selected Override Rate billing type, you must enter a billing rate in this field. If you selected Flat Fee billing type, the billing rate field will not be available.


Billing Status

This identifies whether or not a ticket is billable in its current state. Select a billing status from the drop-down list.

Billable: Select this option if the ticket should be available to apply to customer invoices.

Non-Billable: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices. This status is automatically applied if this is an administrative ticket.

Hold: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices until the ticket's status is changed to billable.

No Charge: Select this option to apply a zero billing amount. This ticket will be available to apply to customer invoices.


Delete

Select this button to remove the displayed time ticket information in case you have entered it in error.


Print

Select this button to print a weekly time sheet for a selected vendor or employee.


Row

This button works like a drop-down list. To see the options available, click the button.

Add: This button lets you add a row to the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row above which you want to enter the new line, and then click Add.

Remove: This button lets you delete a row from the line-item grid at the bottom of the window. First select the row you want to delete, and then click Remove.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record a new expense ticket or update an existing ticket.


New

Select this button to clear the expense ticket displayed and allow you to enter a new one.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered expense ticket.


Employee/Vendor

This identifies who is recording the expense. From the drop-down list, select either Employee or Vendor.

Note: In Time/Expense reports, the Employee/Vendor field is referred to as Recorded by ID.


Employee ID

Enter or select the employee ID that corresponds to the person recording the expense. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: Sales reps cannot be selected. Only individuals established as employees or both (employee and sales rep) can record expense tickets.


Vendor ID

Enter or select the vendor ID that corresponds to the person (or company) recording this expense. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Employee/Vendor Name

This identifies the name of the person or company that is recording the expense based on the selected employee ID or vendor ID.


Ticket Number

This identifies individual time or expense ticket entries. A ticket number is automatically assigned when you begin entering a new ticket. Ticket numbers increase by one based on the last ticket entered and saved. You cannot assign or alter a ticket number. When you record activities in the weekly time sheet, a time ticket is created with a unique ticket number for each day that you enter a duration.

Note: Time tickets and expense tickets share the same numbering sequence.


Ticket Number

This identifies individual time or expense ticket entries. A ticket number is automatically assigned when you begin entering a new ticket. Ticket numbers increase by one based on the last ticket entered and saved. You cannot assign or alter a ticket number. When you record activities in the weekly time sheet, a time ticket is created with a unique ticket number for each day that you enter a duration.

Note: Time tickets and expense tickets share the same numbering sequence.


Ticket Date

Enter or select the date of the expense, if different from the current date. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field. You are permitted to enter dates within the previously closed fiscal year and the two currently open fiscal years. Common reasons for entering ticket dates for the previously closed fiscal year include recording expenses last year that you intend to bill a customer this year.


Ticket Date

Enter or select the date of the expense, if different from the current date. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field. You are permitted to enter dates within the previously closed fiscal year and the two currently open fiscal years. Common reasons for entering ticket dates for the previously closed fiscal year include recording expenses last year that you intend to bill a customer this year.


Charge Item

This identifies the expense recorded by an employee or vendor when company resources are used for a customer or job.

Charge items are also used to record administrative expenses within the company and even employee out-of-pocket expenses. Enter or select the item ID that corresponds to the charge item associated with this expense. Charge items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing charge items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new charge item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, charge could be set up when making copies of a document, sending a fax, or paying an outside expert. Mileage or parking fees that employees paid out of pocket are examples of reimbursable employee charge items.


Charge Item

This identifies the expense recorded by an employee or vendor when company resources are used for a customer or job.

Charge items are also used to record administrative expenses within the company and even employee out-of-pocket expenses. Enter or select the item ID that corresponds to the charge item associated with this expense. Charge items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing charge items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new charge item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, charge could be set up when making copies of a document, sending a fax, or paying an outside expert. Mileage or parking fees that employees paid out of pocket are examples of reimbursable employee charge items.


Charge Item

This identifies the expense recorded by an employee or vendor when company resources are used for a customer or job.

Charge items are also used to record administrative expenses within the company and even employee out-of-pocket expenses. Enter or select the item ID that corresponds to the charge item associated with this expense. Charge items are set up in the Maintain Inventory Items window. To display a list of existing charge items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new charge item, type + or double-click the field.

For example, charge could be set up when making copies of a document, sending a fax, or paying an outside expert. Mileage or parking fees that employees paid out of pocket are examples of reimbursable employee charge items.


Customer/Job/Administrative

For whom or why is this expense being recorded? You have three choices:

Customer: The expense is being recorded for a customer who does not have a job set up in Job Costing.

Job: The expense is being recorded for a job, phase, or cost code set up in Job Costing.

Administrative: The expense being recorded is not associated with a customer or job. For example, you might record a business lunch as an employee administrative expense. Administrative time tickets are automatically given a non-billable billing status. You can change the billing status; however, since no customer or job can be associated with it, administrative tickets cannot be used in Sales/Invoicing.

Note: In Time/Expense reports, the Customer ID /Job ID field is referred to as Completed for ID.


Customer ID

Enter or select the customer ID that corresponds to the customer for whom the expense is being recorded. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.


Job ID

Enter or select the job ID that corresponds to the job (project) for which the expense is being recorded. To select an existing job, click the Lookup folder button (or press ? in the Job ID field) from the drop-down list. If a  job uses phases, you can select the phase ID or cost ID to correspond to the job's activity.


Customer/Job Name

This identifies the name of customer or job for whom or why the expense is being recorded. The name is based on the selected customer ID or job ID.


Reimbursable to Employee

Select this check box if the expense cost is reimbursable to the employee. This option is only available if you selected Employee as the expense ticket type. Expense tickets selected as reimbursable to the employee can be displayed in the Reimbursable to Employee Expense report.


Ticket Has Been Used in Sales/Invoicing

This indicates that the ticket has already been applied to a customer invoice. You can only apply a time or expense ticket once to customer invoices. After the ticket has been applied to a sales invoice, you cannot apply the ticket again.

Note: If you erase a line item that references an applied ticket in the sales invoice, the ticket will still indicate that it has been used in Sales/Invoicing. You will not be able to apply it to another invoice. To keep your ticket transactions consistent with your sales invoices, you should erase the entire invoice and re-create it, omitting the line that you want to erase.

Hint: If you erase an invoice created from time and/or expense tickets, then all time and expense tickets applied to this invoice will no longer be marked as "Has been used in Sales/Invoicing." You can apply these tickets to a new sales invoice.


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This is the short description for the expense ticket that can be applied to a customer invoice. You can enter up to 160 characters. Typically, this description is used for billing purposes. When applying tickets to customer invoices, you can choose to display the ticket description entered here or the charge item description set up in Maintain Inventory (provided the applied tickets are not consolidated).


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This is the short description for the expense ticket that can be applied to a customer invoice. You can enter up to 160 characters. Typically, this description is used for billing purposes. When applying tickets to customer invoices, you can choose to display the ticket description entered here or the charge item description set up in Maintain Inventory (provided the applied tickets are not consolidated).


Internal Memo

This is is a personal note about the expense that is included only for internal purposes. Memos cannot be added to a customer invoice; however, they can be displayed in reports. You can enter up to 2000 characters. To begin a new paragraph, press CTRL+J.

Hint: A ticket memo can be displayed in Sales/Invoicing to assist in billing. To display the ticket memo, select the Detail button in the Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses window.


Internal Memo

This is is a personal note about the expense that is included only for internal purposes. Memos cannot be added to a customer invoice; however, they can be displayed in reports. You can enter up to 2000 characters. To begin a new paragraph, press CTRL+J.

Hint: A ticket memo can be displayed in Sales/Invoicing to assist in billing. To display the ticket memo, select the Detail button in the Apply Tickets/Reimbursable Expenses window.


Quantity

Enter the number of charge item units for this ticket. Not all expense situations require a quantity; therefore, this field is not required.


Quantity

Enter the number of charge item units for this ticket. Not all expense situations require a quantity; therefore, this field is not required.


Unit Price

This is the rate used to calculate the billing amount for the charge item recorded on this expense ticket. You can select any of the price levels listed in the Unit Price field or enter an alternate rate. Price levels for charge items are set up in Maintain Inventory. Peachtree first uses the default sales price level set up for the customer. If you selected Job as the time ticket type and the job does not correspond to a particular customer, then the first sales price set up in inventory will be selected. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Inventory Items.


Unit Price

This is the rate used to calculate the billing amount for the charge item recorded on this expense ticket. You can select any of the price levels listed in the Unit Price field or enter an alternate rate. Price levels for charge items are set up in Maintain Inventory. Peachtree first uses the default sales price level set up for the customer. If you selected Job as the time ticket type and the job does not correspond to a particular customer, then the first sales price set up in inventory will be selected. The names of the price levels that appear when you open the drop-down list can be customized in Maintain Default Information for Inventory Items.


Billing Status

This identifies whether or not a ticket is billable in its current state. Select a billing status from the drop-down list.

Billable: Select this option if the ticket should be available to apply to customer invoices.

Non-Billable: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices. This status is automatically applied if this is an administrative ticket.

Hold: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices until the ticket's status is changed to billable.

No Charge: Select this option to apply a zero billing amount. This ticket will be available to apply to customer invoices.


Billing Status

This identifies whether or not a ticket is billable in its current state. Select a billing status from the drop-down list.

Billable: Select this option if the ticket should be available to apply to customer invoices.

Non-Billable: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices. This status is automatically applied if this is an administrative ticket.

Hold: Select this option if the ticket should not be available to apply to customer invoices until the ticket's status is changed to billable.

No Charge: Select this option to apply a zero billing amount. This ticket will be available to apply to customer invoices.


Billing Amount

This identifies the dollar amount that can be used when applying expense tickets to sales invoices. The billing amount is calculated as the quantity multiplied by the unit price. If you enter an alternate amount in this field, the quantity will be changed to reflect the new amount based on the unit price selected. Billing amounts must be zero or greater before saving expense tickets.

Note: You cannot create a ticket with a negative billing amount. If you want to enter a credit item on a customer's sales invoice that is related to a Time & Billing ticket, you must manually enter a negative line item on the sales invoice. The expense ticket itself will not be adjusted.


Billing Amount

This identifies the dollar amount that can be used when applying expense tickets to sales invoices. The billing amount is calculated as the quantity multiplied by the unit price. If you enter an alternate amount in this field, the quantity will be changed to reflect the new amount based on the unit price selected. Billing amounts must be zero or greater before saving expense tickets.

Note: You cannot create a ticket with a negative billing amount. If you want to enter a credit item on a customer's sales invoice that is related to a Time & Billing ticket, you must manually enter a negative line item on the sales invoice. The expense ticket itself will not be adjusted.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed ticket, if permitted. You can delete any time ticket that is not marked "Has been used in Sales/Invoicing ." If the ticket is "used," you cannot delete the ticket. In order to remove a used ticket, you must purge it.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


First Sales Order Number

The next available sales order number appears. You can change this number or enter a new sales order number you want to assign when printing forms.


Last Sales Order Date

This displays the date of the last sales order printed by Peachtree Accounting. You cannot edit this field; it is only for display.

If this is the first time printing sales orders, enter or select the date that you are printing forms. After printing sales orders the first time,  Peachtree Accounting will track the last date each sales order was printed.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Form to Print

Determines the particular sales order form to be printed, for example, Plain Sales Order w/Totals. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Form to Print

Determines the particular sales order form to be printed, for example, Plain Sales Order w/Totals. From the drop-down list, select the form you want to print.


Date Drop-Down List

Today: Select this option to display or print the form for today's date.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the form for the current period.

This Quarter: Select this option to display or print the form for the current quarter.

This Year: Select this option to display or print the form for the current year.

This Week to Date: Select this option to display or print the form for the current week to date.


Date Drop-Down List

Today: Select this option to display or print the form for today's date.

This Period: Select this option to display or print the form for the current period.

This Quarter: Select this option to display or print the form for the current quarter.

This Year: Select this option to display or print the form for the current year.

This Week to Date: Select this option to display or print the form for the current week to date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the form. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the form.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Align

Select this button to align the type on the form.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form. If you are using a preprinted form, printing a practice form is especially useful in making certain the text is correctly aligned.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.


Format

Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.


Design

Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Default Printer Button

Select this button to choose a different printer for printing the form.


Default Printer

Displays the default printer for printing the form. Select the arrow button in this area to change the default printer.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Number of Copies

Specifies the number of copies of the form to be printed. The default is 1. If you want to change the default, type the number of copies you want to print.


Margins

Displays the margins of the form to be printed in inches. Enter the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the form.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the form to be printed. Enter the top margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the form to be printed. Enter the left margin of the form in inches.


Paper Size

Displays the paper size of the form to be printed in inches. Enter or select the paper size information as appropriate.


Custom Paper Size

Indicates whether the form you are working with is a custom paper size. Select the check box if the form is a width and length other than 8.5 by 11 inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the form to be printed. Enter the paper width of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the form to be printed. Enter the paper length of the form in inches.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


DOS Filename

This is the DOS filename under which the form you want to print is stored.


Display in Designer

Displays options that determine the items that appear on the form. Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to display.


Command Description

Indicates whether to display descriptions of command objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display command descriptions.


Sample Data

Indicates whether to display sample data on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display sample data.


Order Number

Indicates whether to display the order numbers of the fields on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display order numbers.


Pictures

Indicates whether to display the actual pictures of picture objects on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display the pictures.


Cursor Position

Indicates whether to display a window showing the current cursor position while working with this form. Select the check box to display the cursor potion.


Grid Options

Displays options that determine grid appearance and functionality. Select these options as appropriate.


Inches

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in inches.


Centimeters

Select this option to display the grid or ruler in centimeters.


Horizontal Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your characters-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Horizontal Snap to Grid feature.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Characters Per Inch

Specifies the number of characters per inch. Select the number of characters per inch from the drop-down list.


Vertical Snap to Grid

Indicates whether to pull an object toward the closest grid line that matches your lines-per-inch setting and snap it into place. When this feature is enabled, it is easy to create many objects and align them quickly. Select the check box to enable the Vertical Snap to Grid feature.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Lines Per Inch

Specifies the number of lines per inch. Select the number of lines per inch from the drop-down list.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Form Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on a form, such as which customers to include.

Format: Select this tab to set format options for the form, such as the top and left margins.

Design: Select this tab to set options for Forms Design, such as whether to display a ruler or a grid.

E-mail: Select this tab to set e-mail options for the form, including whether or not to print copies of the form and how forms should be numbered.


Ruler

Indicates whether to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a ruler.


Grid

Indicates whether to display a grid on the form you are working with. Select the check box to display a grid.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Bottom Margin

Specifies the bottom margin of the form to be printed. Enter the bottom margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


Right Margin

Specifies the right margin of the form to be printed. Enter the right margin of the form in inches.


E-mail Tab

The E-mail tab lets you set e-mail options for the form. It will be available only for those forms that you can e-mail to either a customer or vendor, which include collection letters, credit memos, customer quotes, customer statements, invoices, packing slips, and purchase orders.

Actions: These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.

E-mail Options: This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Actions

These options determine whether or not the form will be sent to appropriate customers as an e-mail attachment or simply printed as a paper copy. If you choose to send the form as an attachment, you can also decide whether you want to print a paper duplicate or print a paper original and send a duplicate as the attachment.


Send an e-mail <form> only. Do not print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to send the form as an attachment to appropriate customers but not print duplicate paper versions of the form.


Send an e-mail <form> and print a paper duplicate.

Select this option if you want to e-mail the form to appropriate customers and also print paper duplicate versions of the form, which you can mail to the customers as desired.


Print a paper <form> and send an e-mail duplicate.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals of the form for appropriate customers and also e-mail duplicate copies of the forms to the same customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


Print only a paper copy.

Select this option if you want to print paper originals for the appropriate customers but not e-mail duplicate copies to those customers. You can mail the originals to the customers as desired.


E-mail Options

This group box lists the number of the first paper form to be printed. If you want the e-mail copies of the form you are sending to have different starting numbers, you can enter that number in the text box. Also, you can choose to see each e-mail onscreen before sending. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Your first paper <form> number is

This displays the number of the first paper form of this form type that you have printed. This will appear for all credit memos, customer quotes, invoices, and packing slips. The number that appears cannot be edited.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Number e-mail forms differently starting with

If you want a different form number to appear on the versions that you e-mail to your vendors, enter the new number here.


Show me each e-mail before sending

Select this if you want to see an onscreen version of each e-mail being sent to appropriate customers. In this case, you'll be able to send each e-mail individually after verifying the contents onscreen.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Customer ID

This identifies the customer ID associated with this invoice. The customer ID cannot be changed here, but it can be changed in the Sales/Invoicing window.


Customer Name

This identifies the customer name set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Selection Criteria

You can optionally select a group of items listed. Choose all items, by job, by item, or date range.


Selection Criteria

You can optionally select a group of items listed. Choose all items, by job, by item, or date range.


Selection Criteria

You can optionally select a group of items listed. Choose all items, by job, by item, or date range.


Selection Criteria

You can optionally select a group of items listed. Choose all items, by job, by item, or date range.


Job

Enter or select the job ID associated with line items you want to select.


Job

Enter or select the job ID associated with line items you want to select.


Item

Enter or select the item ID associated with line items you want to select.


Item

Enter or select the item ID associated with line items you want to select.


Item

Enter or select the activity item ID associated with line items you want to write up or down.


Item

Enter or select the charge item ID associated with line items you want to write up or down.


Date Range: From

Enter or select the starting date in the range of dates you want to use for selecting items.


Date Range: From

Enter or select the starting date in the range of dates you want to use for selecting items


Date Range: To

Enter or select the ending date in the range of dates you want to use for selecting items.


Date Range: To

Enter or select the ending date in the range of dates you want to use for selecting items.


Write lines up/down by amount

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified dollar amount.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to add $10.00 to all selected items.

To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Write lines up/down by percent

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified percentage.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to mark up all selected items 10%.

Enter percentage as whole number (e.g. 2, 3.5, or 10). To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Write lines up/down by amount

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified dollar amount.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to add $10.00 to all selected items.

To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Write lines up/down by amount

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified dollar amount.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to add $10.00 to all selected items.

To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Write lines up/down by percent

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified percentage.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to mark up all selected items 10%.

Enter percentage as whole number (e.g. 2, 3.5, or 10). To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Write lines up/down by percent

Select this option to write up or down selected items by a specified percentage.  This gives you the ability to bill your customers above or below cost. For example, you may want to mark up all selected items 10%.

Enter percentage as whole number (e.g. 2, 3.5, or 10). To write down items, enter a negative amount.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select OK to close this window.


Employee/Vendor ID

This identifies the employee or vendor ID assigned to the time ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee/Vendor ID

This identifies the employee or vendor ID assigned to the time ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee/Vendor Name

This identifies the employee or vendor name associated with the time ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee/Vendor Name

This identifies the employee or vendor name associated with the time ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Number

This displays the ticket number assigned to the selected ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Number

This displays the ticket number assigned to the selected ticket. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Date

This displays the original date that the ticket was entered. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Date

This displays the original date that the ticket was entered. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This identifies the ticket description that will be added to the invoice, if selected. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Ticket Description for Invoicing

This identifies the ticket description that will be added to the invoice, if selected. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Internal Memo

This identifies the ticket memo describing details about the ticket. Internal memos are for company use only and cannot be applied or printed on invoices. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Internal Memo

This identifies the ticket memo describing details about the ticket. Internal memos are for company use only and cannot be applied or printed on invoices. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Check Number

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Check Number

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor ID

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Vendor Name

This identifies the vendor assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Purchase Invoice #

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Purchase Invoice #

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee ID

This identifies the employee assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee Name

This identifies the employee assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Employee Name

This identifies the employee assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Check Number

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Check Number

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Purchase Invoice #

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Reference

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Reference

This identifies the reference number associated with the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Date

This identifies the date assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Description

This identifies the description information assigned to the job transaction. You cannot edit this field; it is for display purposes only.

Purchase Invoice: The line item description is displayed, if available.

Payment: The line item payment description is displayed, if available.

Paycheck: No description is displayed for this type of transaction.

General Journal Entry: The line item description is displayed, if available.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Date

This identifies the date of the transaction. You cannot edit the date here; it is only for display.


Date

This identifies the date of the transaction. You cannot edit the date here; it is only for display.


Reference

This identifies the reference number of the transaction. It could be an invoice number, PO number (not First Accounting), credit memo number, or check number. You cannot edit the reference number here; it is only for display.


Reference

This identifies the reference number of the transaction. It could be an invoice number, PO number (not First Accounting), credit memo number, or check number. You cannot edit the reference number here; it is only for display.


G/L Accounts Notice

General Ledger accounts are not updated for purchase orders until you apply items received to a purchase invoice. Likewise, quotes and sales orders do not update G/L accounts until you record the sales invoice (Peachtree Accounting, Peachtree Complete, and Peachtree Premium Accounting only).


Journal Tab

This displays the transaction's corresponding journal entry. The name of the journal tab depends on the type of transaction.


Journal Tab

Depending on the type of transaction, the corresponding journal name appears.


Journal Tab

Depending on the type of transaction, the corresponding journal name appears.


Accounting Behind the Screens Line Items

Account Number: This is the account ID corresponding to the line item distribution for this transaction. You can modify the transaction by changing the account IDs of journal distributions listed. Note: Not all account IDs can be changed from this window.

Description: This identifies reference information about the distribution. It cannot be changed here.

Debit: This identifies the dollar amount debited (increase/decrease) from this account.

Credit: This identifies the dollar amount credited (increase/decrease) to this account.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increased) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increased) for this transaction.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increased) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increased) for this transaction.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increased) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increased) for this transaction.


Accounting Behind the Screens Line Items

Account Number: This is the account ID corresponding to the line-item distribution for this transaction. You can modify the transaction by changing the account IDs of journal distributions listed. Note: Not all account IDs can be changed from this window.

Description: This identifies reference information about the distribution. It cannot be changed here.

Debit: This identifies the dollar amount debited (increase/decrease) from this account.

Credit: This identifies the dollar amount credited (increase/decrease) to this account.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.


Distribution Totals

Debit: This identifies the total dollar amount of debits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.

Credit: This identifies the total dollar amount of credits (increase/decrease) for this transaction.


Journal Tab

This displays the transaction's corresponding journal entry. The name of the journal tab depends on the type of transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Continue

Select this button to continue the process.


Go Back

Select this button to go back to the previous window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Maintain Item Prices Filter List

Filter: Lists the fields you can use to filter (select) items for price adjustment.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). Select the appropriate option.

From: Typically used to specify a starting point for a range. If appropriate, select the starting point.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window.


Detail

Select this button to display a transaction from the search results list.


Refresh

Select this button to reset all of the filter settings.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Find Transactions

Enter your search criteria.


Find Transactions

Enter your search criteria.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to search.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to search.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the search. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar button to the right of this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the search. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar button to the right of this field.


To  Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the search. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar button to the right of this field.


To  Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the search. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar button to the right of this field.


Filter Settings

Enter your search criteria here. The more information you enter, the more narrow the search results.

Type: Defines the criterion to search for.

From: The start of the Type criterion range, if applicable.

To: The end of the Type criterion range, if applicable.

Transaction Type: Enter the type of transaction to search for: All, Quote, Sales Order, Sale/Invoice, Receipt, Purchase Order, Purchase, Payment, Time Ticket, Expense Ticket, Payroll Entry, General Journal Entry, Inventory Adjustment, Assembly, Credit Memo, Vendor Credit Memo. If blank, Find Transactions searches all transaction types.

Reference Number: Search all or define a range with the From and To fields.

Customer, Vendor, or Employee ID: Specify one of the IDs or search all IDs.

Job ID: Search all Job IDs or define a range using the lookup fields in the From and To columns.

Item ID: Search all Item IDs or define a range using the lookup fields in the From and To columns.

Transaction Amount: Search all Transaction Amounts or define a range using Range, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less Than the specific dollar amounts you enter in the From and To columns.

General Ledger Account: Search all General Ledger Accounts or define a range using the lookup fields in the From and To columns.


Find

Click the Find button to begin the search.


Find

Click the Find button to begin the search.


Stop

Select this button to terminate the search.


Find

Use this button to begin the search.


Display Results

To display a transaction from the search results list, either double-click the transaction or highlight the transaction and click the Detail button.

You can sort the results by any of the headings in the list. To sort by Name, for example, click once on the Name heading. To reverse the order, click the heading again.


Display Results

To display a transaction from the search results list, either double-click the transaction or highlight the transaction and click the Detail button.

You can sort the results by any of the headings in the list. To sort by Name, for example, click once on the Name heading. To reverse the order, click the heading again.


Display Results

To display a transaction from the search results list, either double-click the transaction or highlight the transaction and click the Detail button.

You can sort the results by any of the headings in the list. To sort by Name, for example, click once on the Name heading. To reverse the order, click the heading again.


Status Bar

Displays helpful information about your search and search results. Indicates when a search is in progress, and how many records were found during the search.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window


Add

Select this button to add a new line item to the transaction.


Remove

Select this button to remove a single line item from the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Payment Line Items

Account No.: This is the expense account you want to distribute the line-item amount to.

If you selected an existing vendor in the Write Checks window, this field will default to the expense account entered in Maintain Vendors.

If you entered a new vendor in the Write Checks window, this field will display the default purchase account entered in Maintain/Default information/Vendors.

Accept the default, or change it as needed.

Description: This is the description of the line item. It defaults to the expense account description from the Write Checks window. Accept the default, or change it as needed.

Amount: Enter the amount for this line item.

Job (not in First Accounting): Enter or select a job ID if you want to distribute the line-item amount to a specific job.


Amount Distributed

This is the amount of all line-item distributions you have entered so far in the window.


Amount Remaining

This is the amount that still needs to be distributed in order for all line-item distributions to equal the amount the check is written for.


Transaction Total

This is the total amount of the check you want to write.


Amount Distributed

This is the amount of all line-item distributions you have entered so far in the window.


Amount Remaining

This is the amount that still needs to be distributed in order for all line-item distributions to equal the amount the check is written for.


Transaction Total

This is the total amount of the check you want to write.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Company Name

This identifies the name of your business. Company names cannot be entirely numeric (for example, 90210); they must contain at least one alpha character. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for the company name.


Company Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your company. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


Company Address

Enter the street address, PO box, or suite number of your company. You can enter the address in two lines that can contain up to 30 characters each.


City

Enter the city in which your company resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

From the drop-down list, choose a two-character state abbreviation for your company address. This list includes the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI). This is a required field.


State

From the drop-down list, choose a two-character state abbreviation for your company address. This list includes the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI). This is a required field.


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP code for your company address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where your company is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Telephone

Enter your company's primary phone number. You can enter up to 20 digits including a valid U.S. area code.


Fax Number

Enter the phone number of your company's primary fax machine. You can enter up to 20 digits including a valid U.S. area code.


Federal Employer ID

Enter the 11-character federal employer ID assigned to your business. The Internal Revenue Service requires that each business have a unique federal employer ID.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


State Unemployment ID

Enter your company's state unemployment ID, if required by your state. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


Form of Business

Identifies your company's type of business. Values include Corporation (default), S Corporation, Partnership, Sole Proprietorship, and Limited Liability Company. Your selection here determines which type of equity accounts are set up or used in your chart of accounts. You can change the type of business anytime.


Posting Method

Allows you to switch accounting methods to either the real-time method or batch method of posting.

Real-Time Posting: Transactions are posted to the General Ledger as they are entered and saved. This method can save you time and is best for most business and network situations.

Batch posting: The transactions are saved by the program and then posted in a group.  When you use batch posting, you can print registers and check the batch of transactions before you post.

You can switch posting methods at any time.


Posting Method

Select this arrow button to choose the posting method, either real time or batch.


Accounting Method

This is the accounting method (accrual or cash basis) you chose when you set up the company. The accounting method determines how Peachtree Accounting handles General Ledger, Accounts Receivable, and Accounts Payable transactions. You cannot change it.


Accounting Method

This is the accounting method (accrual or cash basis) you chose when you set up the company. You cannot change it.


Posting Method

Displays the current posting method: real-time or batch posting. You can change posting methods at any time.


Use Audit Trail

Select this option to activate Peachtree Accounting's audit trail.  The audit trail is a security option that logs when a person enters data, maintains (edits) existing data, and removes data. The audit trail provides accountability of users, deters users from fraudulent activity or mistakes, and tracks transaction history. The Audit Trail report can trace fraudulent activity and other accounting adjustments you may not know were completed.


Direct Deposit

Select this arrow button to enter company and payroll information for direct deposit.


State Employer ID

Enter the state employer ID assigned to your business. Most states' departments of revenue require the state employer ID. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


Web Site

Enter your company's Web site address (URL) on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)

To display your company's Web site, click the Internet button to the right of the Web Site field (or choose View Web Page from the Edit menu). This launches your default Internet browser and locates the address.


E-mail

Enter your company's primary e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. For example, you might enter sales@company.com or support@company.com.

To send an e-mail message to this address, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message.  (This is not available in First Accounting.)


Direct Deposit

This is your company's current direct deposit status (Active or Inactive).  Active means your company is using Peachtree direct deposit; Inactive means your company is not.


Direct Deposit

This is your company's current direct deposit status (Active or Inactive).  Active means your company is using Peachtree direct deposit; Inactive means your company is not.


Directory

This displays the directory path where the currently selected Peachtree company resides. The field is for information only and cannot be edited.


E-mail

Enter your company's primary e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. For example, you might enter sales@company.com or support@company.com.

To send an e-mail message to this address, click the E-mail button to the right of the E-mail field (or choose Send E-mail from the Edit menu). Your default e-mail program will start with this address applied in a new message. (This is not available in First Accounting.)


Learn about Payroll and Inventory Upgrade Features

Click this link to go to the Peachtree Web site, where you can learn more about how to upgrade to take advantage of Peachtree's Payroll and Inventory components.


OK

Select OK to display here the Select Employees to Pay window listing paychecks based on your selection.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Include Time Tickets for

If you are paying employees based on time tickets, enter or select a payroll period ending date here. All unused time-ticket hours entered with dates falling in the pay period chosen will appear to be processed in the check.

To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees who meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees who meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees who meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees who meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Frequencies

You have several choices: Weekly, Bi-Weekly (every two weeks), Semi-Monthly, Monthly, and Annually. All employees who meet these criteria will be selected to pay.


Include Pay Methods

You can select Hourly or Salary, or both.


Include Pay Methods

You can select Hourly or Salary, or both.


To

Enter or select the last employee in the range. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: The records of employees set up as sales representatives only will not appear in the Employee ID list here.


To

Enter or select the last employee in the range. To display a list of existing employees, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new employee, type + or double-click the field.

Note: The records of employees set up as sales representatives only will not appear in the Employee ID list here.


Type

This indicates which employees within the range you want. Choose between the following options:

All: Includes all employees. This is the default.

Range: You can enter a range of types here. Enter the types in the same case in which you entered them in the employee's file.

Mask: Depending on how you set up employee types, you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal: This option looks for a perfect match. Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal: Only employees with types equal to or greater than will appear.

Less than or equal: Only employees with types less than or equal to will appear.


From

If you selected the Range option, enter the starting type value here.

Mask

If you entered the Mask option, enter the employee type. Depending on how you set up employee types, you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal

Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal

Only employees with types equal to or greater than what is entered here will appear.

Less than or equal

Only employees with types less than or equal to what is entered here will appear.


To

If you selected the Range option, enter the ending type value here.


From

If you selected the Range option, enter the starting type value here.

Mask

If you entered the Mask option, enter the employee type. Depending on how you set up employee types, you can enter types with asterisks (*) as wildcard characters.

Equal

Only employees with the types entered here will appear.

Greater than or equal

Only employees with types equal to or greater than what is entered here will appear.

Less than or equal

Only employees with types less than or equal to what is entered here will appear.


To

If you selected the Range option, enter the ending type value here.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file


Browse

Click this button to search the drives connected to your computer.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Backup File

This is the first window of the Restore Wizard. Here, you select a previously made backup file to restore. Peachtree backup files have the extension .ptb.

Click Next once you've selected your backup file.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Select this option to restore to an existing company.


Select this option to restore to a new company, creating the new company "on-the-fly".


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Browse

Click this button to search for a company folder.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Select Company

Here, you select the company to restore to. You can restore to an existing company--one that you've previously set up--or you can restore to a new company, bypassing the process of setting up a new company.

Warning! If you select to restore to an existing company, you can browse to a directory and select a company to restore to. If you accidentally chose the wrong company, you could effectively delete that company's data by overwriting it with the new company's data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything goes wrong.

Click Next when you've selected a company to restore to.


Restore Wizard - Restore Options

You can restore any combination of these three options: company data, customized forms, and Web transactions.

Note: Peachtree First Accounting cannot restore Web transactions.

Click Next once you've set the restore options.


Company Data

Select this option to restore company data, including records and transactions.


Customized Forms

Select this option to restore customized forms.


Web Transactions

Select this option to restore Web transactions in the Peachtree Web Transaction Center.


Restore Wizard - Restore Options

You can restore any combination of these three options: company data, customized forms, and Web transactions.

Note: Peachtree First Accounting cannot restore Web transactions.

Click Next once you've set the restore options.


Restore Wizard - Restore Options

You can restore any combination of these three options: company data, customized forms, and Web transactions.

Note: Peachtree First Accounting cannot restore Web transactions.

Click Next once you've set the restore options.


Restore Wizard - Restore Options

You can restore any combination of these three options: company data, customized forms, and Web transactions.

Note: Peachtree First Accounting cannot restore Web transactions.

Click Next once you've set the restore options.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Restore Wizard - Confirmation

On this window, you verify the choices you have made before restoring. When you select Finish on this window, the Restore process will begin.

Warning! The Restore process will overwrite the information in the Restore location with the backed up data. So be very careful when undertaking this step, to make sure you've selected the right backup and the right company to restore to. Also, make sure you have current backups in case anything should go wrong.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated memorized transaction.


New

Select this button to clear the memorized transaction displayed and enter a new one.


Select

Click this button to enter the displayed memorized transaction data in the Sales/Invoicing task window.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized sales invoice. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name/billing address set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name/billing address set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Invoice Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity sold of this item. Once the quantity is entered, it is multiplied by the unit price to determine the Amount.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line item. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (called "Maintain Items" in First Accounting) will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an item or enter a new number.

Tax: This represents the item's sales tax type. Enter ? to see a list of available tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction.


Memorized Invoices

Use this to enter an save customer invoices that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter an invoice from scratch.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed memorized transaction, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Transaction ID

Enter a maximum 20-character ID to identify this memorized invoice. Or use the Lookup button to select an existing ID.


Description

Enter a maximum 24-character alphanumeric description to identify this memorized invoice. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Memorized Invoices

Use this to enter an save customer invoices that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter an invoice from scratch.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized sales invoice. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name/billing address set up in the customer record. The customer name cannot be edited here, but it can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can change the adress for this invoice. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Drop Ship

If this memorized transaction is a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated memorized transaction.


New

Select this button to clear the memorized transaction displayed and enter a new one.


Select

Click this button to enter the displayed memorized transaction data in the Payments task window.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Description

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this memorized payment. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple vendors, leave the Vendor ID field blank.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this memorized payment. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple vendors, leave the Vendor ID field blank.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only; it does not appear on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can enter it in the Forms Designer.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only; it does not appear on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can enter it in the Forms Designer.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.


Payment Line items

Quantity:  Enter the number of items being purchased. You must enter a quantity if you entered a stock-type inventory item. (Stock-type inventory items are not available in First Accounting.)

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each item you are purchasing, if applicable. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items (called "Maintain Items" in First Accounting) will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


Maintain Memorized Payments

You can enter and save common transactions such as vendor payments for later use. For example, you may want to repeat a transaction previously used several times for a vendor. Using memorized transactions can save time in repetitive data-entry tasks.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed memorized transaction, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Memorized Payments

Use this to enter an save payments to vendors that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter a payment from scratch.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Check Amount

This field is calculated for you; it is for display only.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name and address of vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, the name and address appear automatically. You can change them for this payment; just type in your changes.


Memorized Payments

Use this to enter an save payments to vendors that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter a payment from scratch.


Memorized Payments

Use this to enter an save payments to vendors that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter a payment from scratch.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated memorized transaction.


New

Select this button to clear the memorized transaction displayed and enter a new one.


Select

Click this button to enter the displayed memorized transaction data in the Quotes task window.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized quote. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name and address set up in the customer record. The customer name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name and address set up in the customer record. The customer name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Quote Line Items

Quantity: Enter the quantity sold of this item. Once the quantity is entered, it is multiplied by the unit price to determine the amount.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each line item. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account number to use when recording this sale. If you enter an item number, the sales account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the customer's default G/L sales account will be used.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Tax: This identifies the item's sales tax type. Enter a ? to display a list of different tax types.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the quantity by the unit price.

Job: If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.


A/R Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this sale. This applies only if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/R account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.


Freight Amount

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Memorized Quotes

Use this to enter an save customer quotes that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter an quote from scratch.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed memorized transaction, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Memorized Quotes

Use this to enter an save customer quotes that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter an quote from scratch.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized quote. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Bill To

This identifies the customer name and address set up in the customer record. The customer name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Customers/Prospects window.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this invoice. You can use the Ship to field to edit the shipping address. Just select the arrow button next to the field. Use the scroll box to get to the top of the list and select the address to change.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Ship To

This identifies the shipping address for this quote. You can change the address for this quote. On the address lines provided, type in the new address information.


Drop Ship

If this memorized transaction is a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Freight

Enter the freight charges, if applicable, for this transaction here.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated memorized transaction.


New

Select this button to clear the memorized transaction displayed and enter a new one.


Select

Click this button to enter the displayed memorized transaction data in the Purchase Orders task window.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this memorized purchase order. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple vendors, leave the Vendor ID field blank.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address set up in the vendor record. The vendor name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Maintain Vendors window.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address set up in the vendor record. The vendor name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Maintain Vendors window.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Purchase Order Line Items

Quantity:  Enter the number of items being purchased. You must enter a quantity if you entered a stock type inventory item.

Item: Enter or select the item ID for each item you are purchasing, if applicable. To display a list of existing items, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new item, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter up to 160 characters for the description. Selecting the button displays the full-length description if it is longer than the first line.

G/L Account: Enter or select the General Ledger income account to use when recording this purchase. If you enter an item ID, the inventory account you entered for the item in Maintain Inventory Items will be the default. If you do not select an inventory item, the vendor's default G/L purchase account will be used.

Unit Price: You can either accept the number that defaults here when you entered an inventory item or enter a new number.

Amount: Peachtree Accounting calculates the amount by multiplying the Quantity by the Unit Price.

Job: If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


A/P Account

Enter or select a valid General Ledger account to use when recording money owed for this purchase. This only applies if your company uses the accrual method of accounting. If your company uses the cash-basis method, then you can't enter an A/P account. The default for the field will be the last account entered. If no account has been entered, this field will be blank.

Note: The A/P account will not be affected until you receive and post the invoice from the vendor.


Maintain Memorized Purchase Orders

You can enter and save common transactions such as purchase orders for later use. For example, you may want to repeat a transaction previously used several times for a vendor. Using memorized transactions can save time in repetitive data entry tasks.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed memorized transaction, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Memorized Purchase Orders

Use this to enter an save customer quotes that you issue on a repeating basis. Memorized transactions will save you the time it would take to enter an quote from scratch.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this memorized purchase order. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple vendors, leave the Vendor ID field blank.


Remit To

This identifies the vendor's name and address set up in the vendor record. The vendor name/address cannot be edited here, but they can be edited in the Maintain Vendors window.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized purchase order. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Customer ID

Enter or select a customer ID to associate with this memorized purchase order. To display a list of existing customers, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new customer, type + or double-click the field.

Tip: To enter a memorized transaction that could be used for multiple customers, leave the Customer ID field blank.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, click the arrow button next to the Ship To field.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, just type in the new address.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, just type in the new address.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, just type in the new address.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order, just type in the new address.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order,  just type in your changes.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order,  just type in your changes.


Ship To

Defaults to the primary address listed for your company. You can make changes here that will affect only this purchase or purchase order. To change the company shipping address for this purchase order,  just type in your changes.


Drop Ship

If this memorized transaction is a drop shipment from vendor to customer, check the check box.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You can't edit this field.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You can't edit this field.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You can't edit this field.


Purchase Order Total

This is the total amount of the purchase order. You can't edit this field.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record information entered in the window as a new or updated memorized transaction.


New

Select this button to clear the memorized transaction displayed and enter a new one.


Select

Click this button to enter the displayed memorized transaction data in the General Journal Entry task window.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Transaction ID

Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for a new memorized transaction ID. You cannot use *, ?, or + in the code. For existing memorized transactions, you can choose to look up the transaction you want.

The code is case sensitive, so codes A1 and a1 are seen as two different transaction IDs. Numbers sort before letters, and capital letters sort before non-capital letters. It's important to use consistent and logical coding. You might want to code your most popular items so that they will appear first.


Description

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Description

Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters that describe the memorized transaction. The description appears in the Memorized Transaction lookup list box.


Reference

This identifies the General Journal adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

If you enter a number, Peachtree Accounting automatically adds 1 to the number each time you use the General Journal Entry.

Unlike when you enter other transactions, General Journal entries can have duplicate reference numbers. For example, recurring depreciation entries or accrued monthly estimates of income tax might need common reference numbers.


Reference

This identifies the General Journal adjustment. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

If you enter a number, Peachtree Accounting automatically adds 1 to the number each time you use the General Journal Entry.

Unlike when you enter other transactions, General Journal entries can have duplicate reference numbers. For example, recurring depreciation entries or accrued monthly estimates of income tax might need common reference numbers.


Reverse Transaction

A reversing transaction is one that is the exact reverse of an adjusting entry. Select this check box to indicate that the currently displayed General Journal transaction will be reversed the first day of the following accounting period. Peachtree Accounting will automatically generate a reversing transaction that will be posted to the General Ledger. The amounts and accounts are the same; the debits and credits are merely reversed.

Note: You cannot edit the system-generated reversing transaction. To remove the reversed transaction, you must display the original transaction and clear the Reverse Transaction check box or erase the entire original entry.


General Journal Entry Line Items (Distributions):

Account Number: Enter or select the General Ledger account ID you want to debit or credit for this part of the journal entry. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter a description of the transaction. Tip: If you enter a description and press the Add button, the description is copied to the new line.

Debit: Enter the debit amount of this transaction.

Credit: Enter the credit amount of this transaction.

Job (not available in First Accounting): If you are tracking job cost, enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction.

Remember that total debit amount must equal total credit amount. The balance of the transaction is given in the Out of Balance field. For assistance on debit and credit adjustments, consult your accountant.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Totals

The totals are displayed from the total debit and credit amounts. They cannot be edited.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


Out of Balance

These fields cannot be edited. The out-of-balance total is either a debit amount or a credit amount that represents the difference between debits and credits. The balance amount must be zero before you can save this window.


General Journal Entry Line Items (Distributions):

Account Number: Enter or select the General Ledger account ID you want to debit or credit for this part of the journal entry. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter a description of the transaction. Tip: If you enter a description and press the Add button, the description is copied to the new line.

Debit: Enter the debit amount of this transaction.

Credit: Enter the credit amount of this transaction.

Job (not available in First Accounting): Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.

Remember that total debit amount must equal total credit amount. The balance of the transaction is given in the Out of Balance field. For assistance on debit and credit adjustments, consult your accountant.


Delete

Select this button to delete the displayed memorized transaction, if permitted.  When you're finished deleting, select Close, not Save, in order to delete the transaction.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Memorized Journal Entry

This window lets you save common transactions such as General Journal entries and adjustments for later use.


General Journal Entry Line Items (Distributions):

Account Number: Enter or select the General Ledger account ID you want to debit or credit for this part of the journal entry. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Description: Enter a description of the transaction. Tip: If you enter a description and press the Add button, the description is copied to the new line.

Debit: Enter the debit amount of this transaction.

Credit: Enter the credit amount of this transaction.

Job (not available in First Accounting): Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.

Remember that total debit amount must equal total credit amount. The balance of the transaction is given in the Out of Balance field. For assistance on debit and credit adjustments, consult your accountant.


Display Passwords

The Security Code that appears is a random-generated code that along with its corresponding Access Key allows you access to user passwords. To obtain an Access Key, you must contact Peachtree Technical Support.


Display Passwords

The Security Code that displays is a random-generated code that along with its corresponding Access Key allows you access to user passwords. To obtain an Access Key you must contact Peachtree Technical Support.


Display Passwords

The Security Code that appears is a random-generated code. Along with its corresponding Access Key, this code allows you access to user passwords. To obtain an Access Key, you must contact Peachtree Technical Support.


OK

Select OK to display user records and passwords (if you have entered a valid Access Key).


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select OK to display the Maintain Users window.


Yes

Select this if you would like to install the missing add-on program.


No

Select this if you would not like to install the missing add-on program


Learn About

Select this button to learn more about Peachtree Accounting add-ons.


Help

Select this to see Help about the window.


This add-on program is not installed

The selected add-on program is not installed on your computer. If you would like to install it, place the appropriate program CD in your CD-ROM drive, and select Yes. Otherwise, select No to close the window without installing the add-on.


This add-on program is not installed

The selected add-on program is not installed on your computer. If you would like to install it, place the appropriate program CD in your CD-ROM drive, and select Yes. Otherwise, select No to close the window without installing the add-on.


State

Identifies the primary state in which most of your employees reside. Enter or select from the drop-down list the two-character postal abbreviation for the primary state in which your employees live. Use standard U.S. state abbreviations including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual state setup, if needed.


State

Identifies the primary state in which most of your employees reside. Enter or select from the drop-down list the two-character postal abbreviation for the primary state in which your employees live. Use standard U.S. state abbreviations including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual state setup, if needed.


State

Identifies the primary state in which most of your employees reside. Enter or select from the drop-down list the two-character postal abbreviation for the primary state in which your employees live. Use standard U.S. state abbreviations including District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual state setup, if needed.


Locality

Identifies the name of the city or county that requires a local payroll tax. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual local setup, if needed.


Locality

Identifies the name of the city or county that requires a local payroll tax. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual local setup, if needed.


Locality

Identifies the name of the city or county that requires a local payroll tax. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). If your employees live in different localities, enter or choose the primary locality for most employees.

Note: This is a default setting. You can later modify individual local setup, if needed.


Enter the Locality Tax Rate

Specifies the tax rate for the local area. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). Enter the tax rate, if applicable. For example, enter 1--not 0.01--for 1.0%.


Enter the Locality Tax Rate

Specifies the tax rate for the local area. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). Enter the tax rate, if applicable. For example, enter 1--not 0.01--for 1.0%.


Enter the Locality Tax Rate

Specifies the tax rate for the local area. This field is available and required only in certain states. If there are no locality tax tables for the state you selected, then the Locality fields are disabled (not accessible). Enter the tax rate, if applicable. For example, enter 1--not 0.01--for 1.0%.


Unemployment Percent for Your Company

Specifies the percentage of gross wages your company contributes for unemployment insurance. Enter the percentage that your state requires your company to pay for unemployment insurance. Enter a percentage as a number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7% unemployment). If you are unsure about this percentage, check with your accountant.


Do You Want to Record Employee Meals and Tips?

Indicates that you want to record employee meals and tips. By default, the Tips and Meals payroll fields are memo fields. Their amounts are logged for reporting and tax calculations, but no entry is posted to the General Ledger. Select this option to record employee meals and tips.

Select Yes to create payroll fields for employee tips and meals; otherwise, select No.


Unemployment Percent for Your Company

Specifies the percentage of gross wages your company contributes for unemployment insurance. Enter the percentage that your state requires your company to pay for unemployment insurance. Enter a percentage as a number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7% unemployment). If you are unsure about this percentage, check with your accountant.


Unemployment Percent for Your Company

Specifies the percentage of gross wages your company contributes for unemployment insurance. Enter the percentage that your state requires your company to pay for unemployment insurance. Enter a percentage as a number (for example, enter 2.7--not 0.027--for 2.7% unemployment). If you are unsure about this percentage, check with your accountant.


Do You Want to Record Employee Meals and Tips?

Indicates that you want to record employee meals and tips. By default, the Tips and Meals payroll fields are memo fields. Their amounts are logged for reporting and tax calculations, but no entry is posted to the General Ledger. Select this option to record employee meals and tips.

Select Yes to create payroll fields for employee tips and meals; otherwise, select No.


Default G/L Accounts

Payroll default General Ledger (G/L) accounts need to be established and associated with standard payroll fields. Later you can establish General Ledger accounts for specific pay rates and payroll fields, if desired.


Gross Pay Account

Specifies the default G/L account you will use to record employee gross pay or wages. Typically, this is the Salaries Expense or Wages Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each pay rate or salary type, if desired.


Gross Pay Account

Specifies the default G/L account you will use to record employee gross pay or wages. Typically this is the Salaries Expense or Wages Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each pay rate or salary type, if desired.


Gross Pay Account

Specifies the default G/L account you will use to record employee gross pay or wages. Typically, this is the Salaries Expense or Wages Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each pay rate or salary type, if desired.


Tax Liability Account

Specifies the default G/L liability account you will use for most employee and employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual liability accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


Tax Liability Account

Specifies the default G/L liability account you will use for most employee and employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual liability accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


Tax Liability Account

Specifies the default G/L liability account you will use for most employee and employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Payable or Federal Payroll Taxes Payable account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual liability accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


Tax Expense Account

Specifies the default G/L expense account you will use for most employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


Tax Expense Account

Specifies the default G/L expense account you will use for most employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


Tax Expense Account

Specifies the default G/L expense account you will use for most employer payroll taxes. Typically, this is the Payroll Tax Expense account. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

Note: You must enter an account here. Consult with your accountant about which account to use if you're not sure. Later you can set up individual expense accounts for each payroll tax, if desired.


401(k) Liability Account

Specifies the liability G/L account you will use to record 401(k) contributions. This typically is the default liability account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, 401(k) Deductions Payable) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Payable). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


401(k) Plan Not Offered

Indicates whether a 401(k) plan is offered. Select this option if a plan is not offered through your company.


401(k) Plan, Employee Contributions Only

Indicates whether the 401(k) plan is set up for employee contributions only. Select this option if the plan involves employee contributions only (no matching employer contributions).


401(k) Plan, Employee Contributions With Matching Employer Contributions

Indicates whether the 401(k) plan is set up for employee contributions with matching employer contributions. Select this option if the plan involves both employee and employer matching contributions.


401(k) Plan, Employee Contributions With Matching Employer Contributions

Indicates whether the 401(k) plan is set up for employee contributions with matching employer contributions. Select this option if the plan involves both employee and employer matching contributions.


Current Federal 401(k) Deduction Limit

Specifies the maximum amount an employee can contribute annually toward his or her 401(k) plan. Enter the current maximum amount (for example, 10,000.00). The latest global tax table establishes the current default limit. In most cases you do not need to change this amount.


Current Federal 401(k) Deduction Limit

Specifies the maximum amount an employee can contribute annually toward his or her 401(k) plan. Enter the current maximum amount (for example, 10,000.00). The latest global tax table establishes the current default limit. In most cases you do not need to change this amount.


401(k) Liability Account

Specifies the liability G/L account you will use to record 401(k) contributions. This typically is the default liability account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, 401(k) Deductions Payable) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Payable). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


401(k) Liability Account

Specifies the liability G/L account you will use to record 401(k) contributions. This typically is the default liability account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, 401(k) Deductions Payable) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Payable). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Percentage of Matching Contribution

Specifies the percentage of the employee contribution your company will match, for example, 100 percent. In this case, if your employee contributes $150 per pay period, the employer would contribute an additional $150. Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Matching Contribution

Specifies the percentage of the employee contribution your company will match, for example, 100%. In this case, if your employee contributes $150 per pay period, the employer would contribute an additional $150. Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Matching Contribution

Specifies the percentage of the employee contribution your company will match, for example, 100%. In this case, if your employee contributes $150 per pay period, the employer would contribute an additional $150. Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match at Higher Rate

Specifies the maximum percentage of the employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match at the higher percentage. For example, your company will match employee contributions up to 4%. Enter the maximum percentage as a positive number between 0 and 100. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match at Higher Rate

Specifies the maximum percentage of the employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match at the higher percentage. For example, your company will match employee contributions up to 4%. Enter the maximum percentage as a positive number between 0 and 100. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match at Higher Rate

Specifies the maximum percentage of the employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match at the higher percentage. For example, your company will match employee contributions up to 4%. Enter the maximum percentage as a positive number between 0 and 100. For example, enter 4.0--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Excess Contributions

Specifies the percentage of the employees' excess contributions that your company will match. For example, your company will match 100% of employee contributions up to 4%. Your company will contribute 50% on contributions in excess of 4%.

Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Excess Contributions

Specifies the percentage of the employees' excess contributions that your company will match. For example, your company will match 100% of employee contributions up to 4%. Your company will contribute 50% on contributions in excess of 4%.

Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Excess Contributions

Specifies the percentage of the employees' excess contributions that your company will match. For example, your company will match 100% of employee contributions up to 4%. Your company will contribute 50% on contributions in excess of 4%.

Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Excess Contributions

Specifies the percentage of the employees' excess contributions that your company will match. For example, your company will match 100% of employee contributions up to 4%. Your company will contribute 50% on contributions in excess of 4%.

Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Percentage of Excess Contributions

Specifies the percentage of the employees' excess contributions that your company will match. For example, your company will match 100% of employee contributions up to 4%. Your company will contribute 50% on contributions in excess of 4%.

Enter the percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match

Specifies the maximum percentage of employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match. Enter the maximum percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match

Specifies the maximum percentage of employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match. Enter the maximum percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match

Specifies the maximum percentage of employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match. Enter the maximum percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Maximum Employer Match

Specifies the maximum percentage of employees' adjusted gross wages that your company will match. Enter the maximum percentage that your company will match as a positive number between 0 and 999. For example, enter 4--not 0.04--for 4%.


Vacation time not tracked

Select this option if you do not offer vacation time to your employees.


Vacation time issued in a lump sum

Select this option if your employees earn all their vacation time at once (for example, at the beginning of each payroll year). Later, you can assign earned vacation time (for example, 2 weeks or 80 hours per year) as a beginning balance in each employee's record.


Vacation time accrues each payroll period

Select this option if your employees earn vacation time throughout the payroll year. This sets up a standard number of vacation hours each employee will earn and accrue each payroll period. However, you may want to customize each employee setup. For example, you may offer some employees more earned vacation hours than other employees.


Number of hours to be accrued each year

If vacation time accrues each pay period, enter the total number of vacation hours for a year. For example, if you offer most of your employees two weeks' paid vacation that is earned throughout the payroll year, enter 80.0 hours here. Each payroll period, employees will earn a prorated amount of this total.


Number of hours to be accrued each year

If vacation time accrues each pay period, enter the total number of vacation hours for a year. For example, if you offer most of your employees two weeks' paid vacation that is earned throughout the payroll year, enter 80.0 hours here. Each payroll period, employees will earn a prorated amount of this total.


Run

Select this check box if unused vacation hours carry forward (run) into the next year.


Sick time not tracked

Select this option if you do not offer sick time to your employees.


Sick time issued in a lump sum

Select this option if your employees earn all their sick time at once (for example, at the beginning of each payroll year). Later, you can assign earned sick time (for example, 1 week or 40 hours per year) as a beginning balance in each employee's record.


Sick time accrues each payroll period

Select this option if your employees earn sick time throughout the payroll year. This sets up a standard number of sick hours each employee will earn and accrue each payroll period. However, you may want to customize each employee setup. For example, you may offer some employees more earned sick hours than other employees.


Number of hours to be accrued each year

If sick time accrues each pay period, enter the total number of sick hours for a year. For example, if you offer most of your employees five sick days a year that are earned throughout the payroll year, enter 40.0 hours. Each payroll period, employees will earn a prorated amount of this total.


Number of hours to be accrued each year

If sick time accrues each pay period, enter the total number of sick hours for a year. For example, if you offer most of your employees five sick days a year that are earned throughout the payroll year, enter 40.0 hours. Each payroll period, employees will earn a prorated amount of this total.


Run

Select this check box if unused sick hours carry forward (run) into the next year.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Back

Select this button to return to the previous window in the wizard.


Next

Select this button to move to the next window in the wizard.


Finish

Select this button to establish employee defaults and standard payroll fields that you have chosen while working with the Payroll Setup wizard.


Do You Want to Record Employee Meals and Tips?

Indicates that you want to record employee meals and tips. By default, the Tips and Meals payroll fields are memo fields. Their amounts are logged for reporting and tax calculations, but no entry is posted to the General Ledger. Select this option to record employee meals and tips.

Select Yes to create payroll fields for employee tips and meals; otherwise, select No.


Do You Want to Record Employee Meals and Tips?

Indicates that you want to record employee meals and tips. By default, the Tips and Meals payroll fields are memo fields. Their amounts are logged for reporting and tax calculations, but no entry is posted to the General Ledger. Select this option to record employee meals and tips.

Select Yes to create payroll fields for employee tips and meals; otherwise, select No.


401(k) Plan Options

401(k) contributions are generally pretax deductions in which a specified percentage of the employee's gross wages is taken out prior to taxes and placed into a savings plan set up by the company. Both the savings plan and proceeds are tax-deferred by the U.S. Government. As an incentive, some companies will also match a percentage of the employee 401(k) contributions.

Select the option that corresponds to your company's 401(k) plan offering.


401(k) Expense Account

Specifies the account you will use to record the expense for matching employer contributions. This typically is the default company expense account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, Pension/Profit-Sharing Plan Expense) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


401(k) Expense Account

Specifies the account you will use to record the expense for matching employer contributions. This typically is the default company expense account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, Pension/Profit-Sharing Plan Expense) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


401(k) Expense Account

Specifies the account you will use to record the expense for matching employer contributions. This typically is the default company expense account associated specifically with the 401(k) plan (for example, Pension/Profit-Sharing Plan Expense) or a general benefits account (for example, Employee Benefits Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Current ID

Specifies the current record ID.


Current ID

Specifies the current record ID.


New ID

Specifies the new record ID. Enter the ID you are changing to in this field. When you change an ID, all data records and transactions associated with the changed record will reflect the new ID. This includes previous transactions.


New ID

Specifies the new record ID. Enter the ID you are changing to in this field. When you change an ID, all data records and transactions associated with the changed record will reflect the new ID. This includes previous transactions.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window. When you change an ID, all data records and transactions associated with the changed record will reflect the new ID. This includes previous transactions.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Backup Reminder

Select this check box if you want to be prompted to back up in a specified number of days. If the specified number of days have elapsed since your last Peachtree Accounting backup, a reminder message will appear when you close the company or exit the program.


Backup Reminder

Select this check box if you want to be prompted to back up in a specified number of days. If the specified number of days have elapsed since your last Peachtree Accounting backup, a reminder message will appear when you close the company or exit the program.


Backup Days

Specifies the number of days that determine how often you are reminded to back up. Use the Up and Down arrow keys to select the days.


Back Up Now

Select this button to enter or select where you want to save your Peachtree Accounting backup file. If you are not prepared to back up your company data at this time, select Close.


Close

Select this button to close the window without backing up.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Include company name

Select this check box if you want to incorporate your company name in the backup file name.  The file name will then include your company name before the current system date. For example, if today is March 5, 2004, Peachtree will name the backup file

<company name>-030504.ptb.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Save

Select this button to save new or changed information on this window.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Report Order

Determines the order in which the report is displayed or printed. For example, you can sort the report by record ID, record name, transaction date, and so on. Sort options vary depending on the type of report selected.

From the drop-down list, select the sort option that corresponds to the order you want for the report.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Account ID

Identifies the account for which you want to display or print the report. Select the account ID from the list.


Print Report in Summary Format

Indicates whether to print the report in summary format. Select this check box if you want to print a summary.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


Date

Enter or select a time frame in which to display or print data on the report. The date options vary depending on the type of report selected. Options can include: All, Range, Today, Exact Date, This Period, This Quarter, This Year, This Week-to-Date, This Month-to-Date, This Period-to-Date, This Quarter-to-Date, and This Year-to-Date.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


From Date

Specifies the first date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


To Date

Specifies the last date in the range of dates for the report. Enter the date, or select it from the calendar in this field.


Apply

Select this button to apply any changes you have made to the options in the Report Options window--for example, a new report order or filter range. Peachtree will apply the changes to the displayed report, and you will be able to see the effects of the changes onscreen or on the printed report.

Note: The Apply button is not available when you access the Report Options window from the Select a Report window.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Some fields are not available

You chose to see the report in summary format. Please note that some fields will not be available in the summary form of the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Field Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include a field on the report. Select the check box to show the field.

Title: Indicates whether the field name will appear as a column title on the report. Select the check box, if available, to make the field name appear as a column title.

Field: Identifies the name of the data field. The icon in front of the field name indicates whether the field will appear as single or multiple lines of data for each transaction.

Column Break: Indicates whether there is a column break on the report after the field. Select the check box, if available, to include a column break after the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears on the report.


Show All

Select this button to place a check mark in all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Show None

Select this button to remove all check marks from all the Show check boxes on the tab.


Import/Export to XML

Select the check box to import or export the default file in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.


Font Settings

Show: Indicates whether to include the specific report section. Select the Show check box to include the section.

Section: Identifies the section (for example, Report Totals).

Font Detail: Displays the font for this section of the report. Select the Font (A) button to change the font.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Import/Export File Button

Select this button to choose a different file for importing or exporting.


Import/Export File

Displays the default file for importing or exporting. To change the default file, select the arrow button in this area.


Export Options

Displays options for exporting a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


Include Headings

Indicates whether to include headings in the file you are exporting. Select the check box to include headings.


If Export File Exists

Displays options that determine how the Export process treats an existing export file. Select the appropriate option in this area.


Ask, Then Overwrite

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to overwrite an existing export file, then overwrite it.


Overwrite Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to overwrite an existing export file without first asking.


Ask, Then Append

Select this option if you want the Export process to ask whether to append an existing export file, then append it.


Append Without Asking

Select this option if you want the Export process to append an existing export file without first asking.


Import Options

Displays one or more options for importing a file. Select the appropriate options in this area.


First Row Contains Headings

Indicates whether the first row of the report contains headings. Select the check box if you want the first row to have headings.


Warn if Duplicate Reference

Indicates whether the Import process displays a warning if there is a duplicate reference. Select the check box if you want the Import process to display a warning.


Filter

Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.


Fields

Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.


Fonts

Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Label field.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Report Tabs

Filter: Select this tab to determine the information that is displayed on the report, such as which account to include.

Fields: Select this tab to set field options for the report, such as whether to include a column break after a field.

Fonts: Select this tab to set format options for the report, such as which font to use for the various report sections.


Print

Select this button to print the report.


Display

Select this button to display the report.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up

Select this button to move the currently selected row up one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Move Down

Select this button to move the currently selected row down one position in the grid of fields. This will change the field's column position in the displayed report.


Field Style

There can be only one field style per column in displayed and printed reports. That is, if you have one or more single-line fields in a column, you cannot have a multi-line field in the same column.

Single-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.

Multi-line Field Style: Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Single-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on a single line on the displayed or printed report.


Multi-line Field Style

Fields marked with this icon appear on multiple lines on the displayed or printed report.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Style

Select an existing style from the drop-down list. Or, in the text box, enter the name of a new style you want to create.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 1 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 1 Report Label field.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Title 2 Report Label

Specifies the text label to be used for this section of the report. Select this field to enter a label. You can also select the Insert button to insert a special code into the label text.


Insert

Select this button to display a window that lets you insert a special code in the Table 2 Report Label field.


Filter Range

Filter: Contains fields used to select specific information for the report.

Type: Lets you specify all or a subset of the records within the filter (for example, Range). For some data records you can choose the Equal to option, which lets you select multiple data records.

From: If you select Range as the type, the From box lets you specify a starting point for a range. If you select Equal to as the type, the From box lets you select multiple records from a Lookup list.

To: Typically used to specify an ending point for a range. If appropriate, select the ending point.


Register Now

Select this button if you are prepared to enter registration information for your Peachtree Accounting product.


Register Later

Select this button if you are not prepared to register your Peachtree Accounting product. You can use the Peachtree Accounting program a limited number of times before you must register.

Note: If you have no remaining uses left and select the Register Later button, Peachtree Accounting will shut down. If you start Peachtree Accounting again, you will be prompted to register again.


Peachtree Registration

To register your software, select Register Now. You will be prompted to enter a your product serial number and registration number.

To skip the registration process, select Register Later. You have only a limited number uses of the program before you must register it.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this to accept the changes and close the window.


Cancel

Select this to close the window without making any changes.


Restore Defaults

Select this to restore the toolbars to their default settings.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Void Invoice Date

Enter or select the date on which you want to void the invoice.


Void Invoice Date

Enter or select the date on which you want to void the invoice.


Void Existing Invoice

This part of the window lists information about the invoice you have chosen to void.

Number: This is the number of the original invoice.

Date: This is the date the original invoice was issued.

Source: This indicates where the invoice was created; it will always be Accounts Receivable (AR).

Amt: This is the total dollar amount of the original invoice.

Customer Name: This is the name of the customer that the original invoice was issued to.


Number

This is the number of the original invoice.


Date

This is the date the original invoice was issued.


Source

This indicates where the invoice was created; it will always be Accounts Receivable (AR).


Amt

This is the total dollar amount of the original invoice.


Customer Name

This is the name of the customer that the original invoice was issued to.


Customer Name

This is the name of the customer that the original invoice was issued to.


Date

This is the date the original invoice was issued.


Source

This indicates where the invoice was created; it will always be Accounts Receivable (AR).


Number

This is the number of the original invoice.


Amt

This is the total dollar amount of the original invoice.


OK

Select OK to void this invoice and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Restore

Select this button to restore the backed up company files and close the window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Customized Forms

Select this check box if you want to restore backed up user-defined forms, such as custom invoices, that have been created for the company.


Company Data

Select this check box if you want to restore all files that contain backed-up company data.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Web Transactions

Select this check box if you want to restore all backed up Internet transactions for your company.

Note: Peachtree First Accounting cannot restore Web transactions.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Organization Name

This identifies your business name to Peachtree Software during the registration process. If you are operating more than one company in Peachtree, consider an organization name that indicates your group of businesses. The Organization Name field is required in order to register your products. You can enter up to 30 characters.


Organization Name

This identifies your business name to Peachtree Software during the registration process. If you are operating more than one company in Peachtree, consider an organization name that indicates your group of businesses. The Organization Name field is required. You can enter up to 30 characters.


Serial Number

Identifies your licensed copy of the Peachtree product. Enter your Peachtree serial number here.

The product serial number is located on the Peachtree CD holder.


Serial Number

Identifies your licensed copy of the Peachtree product. Enter your Peachtree serial number here.

The product serial number is located on the Peachtree CD holder.


Serial Number

Identifies your licensed copy of the Peachtree product. Enter your Peachtree serial number here.

The product serial number is located on the Peachtree CD holder.


Registration Number

Unlocks the Peachtree Accounting program for licensed usage. You must enter a registration number before continuing to use Peachtree Accounting. When you contact Peachtree and register your product, you will be provided a registration number. If do not enter a registration number, you will have a limited number of times you can use the program before you must register.


Registration Number

Unlocks the Peachtree Accounting program for licensed usage. You must enter a registration number before continuing to use Peachtree Accounting. When you contact Peachtree and register your product, you will be provided a registration number. If do not enter a registration number, you will have a limited number of times you can use the program before you must register.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Peachtree Software Registration Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to go to and register your product at the Peachtree Software Web site. Once you have completed the process, you will be provided a registration number.


Register Peachtree Accounting

Registration is very important because it ensures you timely program updates and upgrade offers, exciting new product information, payroll tax service information, technical support options, and a variety of other benefits.

Note the number of times that you may use Peachtree Accounting before you're required to register.


Peachtree Software Registration Phone Number

If you do not have access to the Internet, you can call Peachtree to register your product. Once you have answered a few questions, a customer service representative will provide you a registration number.


Peachtree Software Registration Phone Number

If you do not have access to the Internet, you can call Peachtree to register your product. Once you have answered a few questions, a customer service representative will provide you a registration number.


OK

Select this button to save your registration information and close this window.


Register Later/Cancel

If you are not prepared to register your Peachtree product, select this button. You can use the Peachtree program a limited number of times before you must register. Note the remaining number of uses before you continue.

Once you have registered the product, this button will change to a Cancel button. The function of the button is to close the window without saving any changes.

Note: If you have no remaining uses left and select the Register Later button, Peachtree will shut down. If you start Peachtree again, you will be prompted to register again.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Product Type and Release Number

Identifies the version of Peachtree Accounting that is currently installed on your computer.


Customer ID

When you contact Peachtree and register your product, you will be provided a new customer ID number. If do not enter a customer ID and registration number as issued by Peachtree, you will have a limited number of times you can use the program before you must register.


Customer ID

When you contact Peachtree and register your product, you will be provided a new customer ID number. If do not enter a customer ID and registration number as issued by Peachtree, you will have a limited number of times you can use the program before you must register.


OK

Select this to close the window.


Help

Select this for to see Help for the window.


Click this button to make your choice.


Next

Click this button to go to the next window.


Close

Select this to close the window.


Close

Select the Close button to close the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


Save

If you're using the Real-Time posting method, this button will save and post the displayed transaction to your journals. If you're using the Batch posting method, this button will save the transaction information without posting it.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional selection, Preview. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print deposit tickets one at a time.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the ticket will look once printed.


Delete

This button is available only when you edit a displayed deposit. Select this button to clear the Deposit check box for all receipts and to clear the Deposit Ticket Date and Deposit Ticket ID fields as well.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Account ID

This is the ID of the general ledger account from which you want to get receipts for deposit. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button.


Account ID drop-down list

This is a list of the general ledger accounts from which you can select receipts for deposit. Select the Lookup button to see the list of all available accounts.


Account Description

This is the description of the general ledger account from which you have chosen to select receipts for desposit.


Deposit Ticket Date

This is the date that will appear on the printed deposit ticket once you select and save receipts for deposit.


Deposit Ticket Date

This is the date that will appear on the printed deposit ticket once you select and save receipts for deposit. To select a new date, enter it in the text box or choose it using the Calendar button in the field.


Deposit Ticket ID

When you enter the Select for Deposit window, a suggested deposit ticket number automatically appears in this field. However, you can change it to your own alphanumeric ticket number (8 characters maximum).


Deposit Ticket ID

When you enter the Select for Deposit window, a suggested deposit ticket number automatically appears in this field. However, you can change it to your own alphanumeric ticket number (8 characters maximum).


Total Cash

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is cash.


Total Cash

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is cash.


Total Checks

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is check.


Total Checks

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is check.


Total Other

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is other than cash or check, such as credit card.


Total Other

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is other than cash or check, such as credit card.


Total Deposit

The total amount of all receipts for deposit.


Total Deposit

The total amount of all receipts for deposit.


Receipts for Deposit

Date: The date when the receipt was entered and saved in the Receipts window. This is for display only.

Received From: The customer/vendor name entered for the receipt in the Receipts window. This is for display only.

Payment Method: The transaction type for the deposit, such as cash or credit card, that was entered in the Receipts window. This is for display only.

Check/Ref No.: The check or reference number associated with the receipt. This is for display only.

Amount: The amount of the receipt to be deposited. This is for display only.

Deposit: Select this check box to add the receipt to the deposit. The receipt will then appear on the printed deposit ticket.


All (Select)

Use this button to select all displayed receipts for deposit. The Deposit check box for all receipts will then be checked, and all receipts will appear on the deposit ticket.


All (None)

Use this button to deselect all displayed receipts for deposit. The Deposit check box for all receipts will then be cleared and will not be included on the deposit ticket.


Total Checks

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is check.


Total Other

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is other than cash or check, such as credit card.


Total Cash

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is cash.


Total Checks

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is check.


Total Other

The total amount of all receipts for deposit whose payment method is other than cash or check, such as credit card.


Total Deposit

The total amount of all receipts for deposit.


Select for Deposit

Use this window to combine multiple customer receipts into a single bank deposit.


Select for Deposit

Use this window to combine multiple customer receipts into a single bank deposit.


Deposit Ticket Date

This is the date that will appear on the printed deposit ticket once you select and save receipts for deposit.


Select for Deposit

Use this window to combine multiple customer receipts into a single bank deposit.


OK

Click this button to start.


Save

Select this button to save the current transaction.


Close

Select this button to close the window without saving any changes to the current transaction. (The cash account and filter settings will be saved.)


New

Select this button to create a new transaction in the register.


Select

Click this button to select from previously memorized transactions.


Memorize

Click this button to open the Maintain Memorized Payment dialog. The information from the payment that was highlighted in the register will fill in the fields of the memorized payment.


Print

Print: Click the Print button to print the Account Register report. The report filter window will open.

Preview: Click the arrow button to drop-down the Preview button, to see onscreen how the report will look when printed.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the highlighted transaction.

Void: Click this button to void the highlighted transaction.


Sort by:

You can change the order in which transactions appear on the register. Click the down-arrow button to open a list of options.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the highlighted transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect or vendor. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Cash Account

Enter or select the Cash account ID to use for these Account Register transactions. In most cases, this would be the account debited for receipts or credited for payments.


Cash Account

Enter or select the Cash account ID to use for these Account Register transactions. In most cases, this would be the account debited for receipts or credited for payments.


Cash Account

Enter or select the Cash account ID to use for these Account Register transactions. In most cases, this would be the account debited for receipts or credited for payments.


Show Transactions for:

You can filter the transactions that show on the register by date. Click the down-arrow button to open up a list of options.


Show Transactions for:

You can filter the transactions that show on the register by date. Click the down-arrow button to open up a list of options.


Register

Edit: This column will display a graphic if the transaction can be edited in the register. You can only edit those transactions that originated on the Account Register. You can drill-down on many other types of transactions. (To drill-down is to double-click on the transaction; it will open in the Task window where it originated.)

Date: This is the date of the transaction. It defaults to today's system date.

Type: The transaction type can be either Payment or Receipt. This column will be disabled for recurred transactions.

Payee/Paid By: Select the Vendor ID (payment) or Customer ID (receipt) for the transaction.

Payment: Enter the amount of the payment.  You can enter negative or positive values.

Receipt: Enter the amount of the receipt.  You can enter negative or positive values.

Reference: Enter a reference number, such as the check number. Required for receipts, but not for payments.

G/L Account: Enter a GL account to balance the entry to the cash account.

Split: Click this button if more than one account needs to be updated.

Memo: Enter or confirm the value in the Memo field. For receipts, this defaults to the deposit ticket ID that was used for the last saved receipt. For payments, it is blank. You might enter the date or your purchase order number.

Sales Tax: Enter the sales tax amount, if necessary.

Balance: Keeps a running balance of the selected cash account.


Total

This field keeps a running total of all amounts displayed in the Balance column of the register as it is currently filtered. This amount will always be visible, even if you selected not to recalculate account balances in Global Options.


Total

This field keeps a running total of all amounts displayed in the Balance column of the register as it is currently filtered. This amount will always be visible, even if you selected not to recalculate account balances in Global Options.


Sort by:

You can change the order in which transactions appear on the register. Click the down-arrow button to open a list of options.


Sort by:

You can change the order in which transactions appear on the register. Click the down-arrow button to open a list of options.


Save

Click this button to save the highlighted transaction. In real-time posting, the transaction is posted to your journals. In batch posting, the transaction is saved to be posted later.


Reconcile

Click this button to open the Account Reconciliation window, where you can reconcile the current Cash account.


Refresh

Click this button to update the register with any changes that have occurred, including changes from other workstations.


Find

This lets you find transactions displayed in the Account Reconciliation window. Enter the transaction reference ID in the Find text box, and then select Find Next.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window.


Find button

Select this button to locate transactions that meet the search criteria entered in the Find text box. Once you've found a transaction, you can keep clicking the Find button to find additional listed transactions that match the search criteria.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns you cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Find text box

Enter the reference ID of the transaction you want to locate in the Account Reconciliation window. You can also enter the ? wild card character to find any single character and the * wild card to find any string of characters.


Match Case

Select this check box if you want Peachtree to find only those transactions that match the case (for example, all capital letters) of the transaction ID you entered in the Find text box.


Reference Number

Select this if you want to clear bank checks or deposits by specifying a range of reference numbers.


Date Range

Select this if you want to clear bank checks or deposits that fall within a specified range of dates.


From

Enter the first number in the range of transaction reference numbers.


To

Enter the last number in the range of transaction reference numbers.


From

Enter or select the starting date in the range. Use the calendar button to select a date.


To

Enter or select the ending date in the range. Use the calendar button to select a date.


OK

Select OK to clear checks or deposits based on the range entered.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Clear checks and bank debit transactions\Clear desposits and bank credit transactions

You have a choice of two options for clearing checks or deposits.

Reference Number: Select this if you want to clear bank checks or deposits by specifying a range of reference numbers.

Date Range: Select this if you want to clear bank checks or deposits that fall within a specified range of dates.


Click here or phone

Your 30-day evaluation copy of Crystal Reports has expired. To learn about Crystal Reports for Peachtree and order a copy of the software, click the informational link, or phone Peachtree Sales at 1-800-336-1420.


Click Help or phone

Your 30-day evaluation copy of Crystal Reports has expired. To learn about Crystal Reports for Peachtree and order a copy of the software, click the Help button, or phone Peachtree Sales at 1-800-336-1420.


OK

Select this button to close this window.


Help

Select the Help button to learn more about Crystal Reports for Peachtree, including ordering information.


OK

Closes the window.


About Peachtree Accounting

Identifies the release and version of Peachtree that is installed on your computer.


Item Tax Types

Select the default item tax type from the drop-down list. This indicates whether or not an item is exempt from sales tax.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Print

Select this button to print the chosen form.


Preview

Select this button to see onscreen how the form will look when printed from the currently chosen printer.


First [form] number

This displays the number of the first form to print. If you have not entered a form number for the transaction, Peachtree will use the next sequential number based on the last form printed. You can change this number unless the form is a sales order.

If you've entered the form number in the task window, or if you're working with a preexisting form that already has a number assigned to it, Peachtree will use this number; you won't be able to change it.


Change Form

Select this button to choose a different form to print or e-mail.


Number of Copies

Enter the number of copies of the form you want to print.


Cash Account

Enter or use the Lookup button to select the cash account out of which the payment will be made.

Note: This field appears only if you are working in the Cash or Payment Manager.


Diddly Squat


Printer Setup

Select this button to change printers or print properties before printing the form.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window without saving any changes you have made.


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form to test the alignment of text on the form.


Form Design

Select this button to display the selected form on the Forms Design window, where you can make design changes to the form.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Form

Print Forms: These options let you choose the first form number to print, the number of copies to print, and the cash account from which to draw the payment represented by the form. In addition, you can change the form to print if desired; select the Change Form button. Note: The Cash Account field appears only if you are printing from the Cash or Payment Manager.

E-mail Forms: These options let you choose the first form number to use, as well as the format you want to use for attaching the form to the e-mail message, either PDF or Rich Text. In addition, you can change the form to send if desired; select the Change Form button.


First [form] number

This displays the number of the first form to print. If you have not entered a form number for the transaction, Peachtree will use the next sequential number based on the last form printed. You can change this number unless the form is a sales order.

If you've entered the form number in the task window, or if you're working with a preexisting form that already has a number assigned to it, Peachtree will use this number; you won't be able to change it.


First [form] number

This displays the number of the first form to print. If you have not entered a form number for the transaction, Peachtree will use the next sequential number based on the last form printed. You can change this number unless the form is a sales order.

If you've entered the form number in the task window, or if you're working with a preexisting form that already has a number assigned to it, Peachtree will use this number; you won't be able to change it.


Last form used

This displays the name of the last form printed--for example, A/R Invoice - Plain Paper.


Last form used

This displays the name of the last form printed--for example, AR Plain Paper.


Number of Copies

Enter the number of copies of the form you want to print.


Cash Account

Enter or use the Lookup button to select the cash account out of which the payment will be made.

Note: This field appears only if you are working in the Cash or Payment Manager.


Cash Account

Enter or use the Lookup button to select the cash account out of which the payment will be made.

Note: This field appears only if you are working in the Cash or Payment Manager.


Printer

This group box lists the name, status, type, and location of the printer that will print the form. It also lists a comment if any is available for this printer.

The printer that will print the form is either the Windows default printer (set up from Windows Start>Settings>Printers) or, if the form is a custom form, the default printer set up always to print that form. However, you can change printers or print properties for the current print job. To do so, select the Printer Setup button.


Name

This is the name of the printer that will print the form.


Type

This is the type of printer that will print the the form.


Where

This is the physical location of the printer that will print the form.


Comment

This is a comment, if one is available, about the printer that will print the form.


Send

Select this button to e-mail the chosen form to either customer or vendor.


Name

This is the name of the printer that will print the form.


Type

This is the type of printer that will print the the form.


Where

This is the physical location of the printer that will print the form.


Comment

This is a comment, if one is available, about the printer that will print the form.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without completing this print job.


Printer

Displays a list of the available printers. From the list, select the printer you want to use for this print job.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Setup

Select this button to set up the printer for printing this form.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Order

Specifies the order number of the data you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Sample Data or Template

Displays a character representation of what will print in the data object. Typically, this is used to determine the maximum number of alpha or numeric characters you are allowed when printing the data. The text box is labeled "Sample Data" if you have chosen a text type field. Whatever characters you enter here print on practice forms (for example, xXXXX). You can enter up to 1,000 characters. For fields that include multiple lines of information, type a space between each section to represent a line break.

If you have chosen a numeric type field (such as number, currency, quantity, or price), the text box below the Data Field Name is labeled "Template." Although whatever you enter here prints as sample data on practice forms, it is also used to format the numbers when actual data is printed. If you enter NNN.nn, the amount that prints on the form cannot exceed three digits to the left of the decimal point or two digits to the right.


Sample Data or Template

Displays a character representation of what will print in the data object. Typically, this is used to determine the maximum number of alpha or numeric characters you are allowed when printing the data. The text box is labeled "Sample Data" if you have chosen a text type field. Whatever characters you enter here print on practice forms (for example, xXXXX). You can enter up to 1,000 characters. For fields that include multiple lines of information, type a space between each section to represent a line break.

If you have chosen a numeric type field (such as number, currency, quantity, or price), the text box below the Data Field Name is labeled "Template." Although whatever you enter here prints as sample data on practice forms, it is also used to format the numbers when actual data is printed. If you enter NNN.nn, the amount that prints on the form cannot exceed three digits to the left of the decimal point or two digits to the right.


Data Drop-Down List

Contains the list of data fields and related information for this form. From the list, select the field you want to work with.

Data Field Name: Identifies a data field on this form, for example, Invoice Number.

Data File: Identifies the file in which the data field resides, for example, Invoice file.

Data Type: Specifies the data type for this data field, for example, text.


Data Drop-Down List

Contains the list of data fields and related information for this form. From the list, select the field you want to work with.

Data Field Name: Identifies a data field on this form, for example, Invoice Number.

Data File: Identifies the file in which the data field resides, for example, Invoice file.

Data Type: Specifies the data type for this data field, for example, text.


Font Style Arrow Button

Select this button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the selected data.


Data Font

Identifies the font for the data object. Select the arrow button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the data object.


Font Style Arrow Button

Select this button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for negative number data.


Data Font (Negative Number)

Identifies the font for the data object when it is is a negative number. Select the arrow button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the data object.


Alignment Drop-Down List

Contains options that let you align the selected data.

Left: Select this option if you want to align the data to the left of the form.

Right: Select this option if you want to align the data to the right of the form.

Center: Select this option if you want to align the data to the center of the form.


Print Zero Dollar Amounts

Indicates whether to print zero dollar amounts for the data, if applicable. Select this check box if you want to print zero dollar amounts.


Fill Character

Allows you to enter a single character that will be used to fill up unused space within a field. For example, the Check Amount in a currency data field on check forms could fill unused space with asterisks (****$3.95). The fill character can be used only if the text fits on a single line on the form. For most fields, the default is a blank character.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the selected data. Enter the data width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the selected data. Enter the data width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the selected data. Enter the data height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the selected data. Enter the data height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the selected data on the form. Enter the left position you want for the data. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the selected data on the form. Enter the left position you want for the data. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the selected data on the form. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. Enter the top position you want for the data. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the selected data on the form. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. Enter the top position you want for the data. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Text

Displays the text color for the selected data.


Background

Displays the background color for the selected data.


Text

Displays the text color for negative-number data.


Background

Displays the background color for negative-number data.


None

Select this button if you do not want a border around the selected data.


Box

Select this button if you want a border around the selected data.


Line Color Arrow Button

Select this button to display an array of colors from which you can select a line color for the border of the selected data.


Line Color

Displays the line color of the border for the selected data.


Thickness Drop-Down List

Contains line thickness options for the border around the selected data.

Hairline: Select this option if you want a hairline border.

Thin: Select this option if you want a thin border.

Medium: Select this option if you want a medium border.

Heavy: Select this option if you want a heavy border.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Order

Specifies the order number of the text object you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Sample Text

Displays a sample of the text for the text object. Type your text here, just as it should be displayed on the form.


Insert Data

Select this button to display the Insert Data Object window, which lets you embed a data object within a text object.


Font Style Arrow Button

Select this button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the text object.


Alignment Drop-Down List

Contains options that let you align the text object.

Left: Select this option if you want to align the data to the left of the form.

Right: Select this option if you want to align the data to the right of the form.

Center: Select this option if you want to align the data to the center of the form.


Fill Character

Allows you to enter a single character that will be used to fill up unused space within a field. For example, enter a period (.) as the fill character to print leader dots (Description.......). The fill character can be used only if the text fits on a single line on the form. For most fields, the default is a blank character.


Object Font

Identifies the font for the selected text object. Select the arrow button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the text object.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the text object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal place-accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the text object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal place-accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the text object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the text object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the text object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the text object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the text object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the text object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Text

Displays the text color for the text object.


Background

Displays the background color for the text object.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Read Next File Record

Select this option if you want the system to read the next record in the file. For example, if you are working with an invoice form, the system would read the next invoice.


Read Next Line Item Record

Select this option if you want the system to read the line item. For example, if you are working with an invoice form, the system would read the next item listed on the invoice.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Edit Object Order List

Contains a list of objects and related information for this form. From the list, select the object you want to work with.

Order: Specifies the order number of the object on the form.

Object Type: Specifies the type of object (for example, text).

Description: Describes the object (for example, company name and address).


Edit Object Order List

Contains a list of objects and related information for this form. From the list, select the object you want to work with.

Order: Specifies the order number of the object on the form.

Object Type: Specifies the type of object (for example, text).

Description: Describes the object (for example, company name and address).


Move

Select the Up arrow button to move the highlighted object up one position in the list. Select the Down arrow button to move the highlighted object down one position in the list.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Edit

Select this button to display the appropriate object properties window, where you can edit the properties of the highlighted object.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Move Up Arrow Button

Select this button to move the highlighted object up one position in the list.


Move Down Arrow Button

Select this button to move the highlighted object down one position in the list.


Print

Select this button to print the list of objects.


Command

Select this button to display the Command Object window, where you can select an appropriate command for the highlighted object.


Real

Select this button to print the real form (instead of a practice form).


Practice

Select this button to print a practice form to test the alignment of text on the form.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Form Design

Select this button to display the selected form on the Forms Design window, where you can make design changes to the form.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Edit

Select this button to display the picture object on the Paint window, where you can edit it. For example, you can widen the border of the picture object in Paint.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the picture object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the picture object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the picture object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the picture object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the picture object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the picture object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the picture object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the picture object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Order

Specifies the order number of the picture object you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Name

Specifies the name of the picture file selected on the Open Picture window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the rectangle object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the rectangle object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the rectangle object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the rectangle object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the rectangle object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the rectangle object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the rectangle object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the rectangle object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Order

Specifies the order number of the rectangle object you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Line Color Arrow Button

Select this button to display an array of colors from which you can select a color for the line around the rectangle object.


Line Color

Displays the color of the line around the rectangle object.


Fill Color Arrow Button

Select this button to display an array of colors from which you can select a color for the fill, or background, within the rectangle object.


Fill Color

Displays the color of the fill, or background, within the rectangle object.


Thickness Drop-Down List

Contains line thickness options for the line around the rectangle object.

Hairline: Select this option if you want a hairline line.

Thin: Select this option if you want a thin line.

Medium: Select this option if you want a medium line.

Heavy: Select this option if you want a heavy line.


Thickness Drop-Down List

Contains line thickness options for the line around the rectangle object.

Hairline: Select this option if you want a hairline line.

Thin: Select this option if you want a thin line.

Medium: Select this option if you want a medium line.

Heavy: Select this option if you want a heavy line.


Line

Contains options for setting line thickness and color, as well as an option for setting the fill color for the rectangle object.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the page. Enter the left margin in inches.


Left Margin

Specifies the left margin of the page. Enter the left margin in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the page. Enter the top margin in inches.


Top Margin

Specifies the top margin of the page. Enter the top margin in inches.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the paper (for example, 7.000 inches). Enter the paper width in inches.


Paper Width

Specifies the width of the paper (for example, 7.000 inches). Enter the paper width in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the paper (for example, 5.000 inches). Enter the paper length in inches.


Paper Length

Specifies the length of the paper (for example, 5.000 inches). Enter the paper length in inches.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


File Name Edit Control

Displays the name of the picture file you selected in the File Name Drop-Down list (for example, Logo.bmp).


File Name Edit Control

Displays the name of the picture file you selected in the File Name Drop-Down list (for example, Logo.bmp).


File Name Drop-Down List

Displays the name of all files available in the location you specified on this window. Select the picture file you want to place on the form.


File Name Drop-Down List

Displays the name of all files available in the location you specified on this window. Select the picture file you want to place on the form.


Directories

Specifies the path where the picture file is located. Select each directory until you have specified all directories in the path.


List Files of Type Drop-Down List

Displays a list of file types (for example, .BMP). Select the appropriate type for the picture file.


List Files of Type Drop-Down List

Displays a list of file types (for example, .BMP). Select the appropriate type for the picture file.


Drives Drop-Down List

Specifies the drive where the picture file is located. Select the appropriate drive.


Drives Drop-Down List

Specifies the drive where the picture file is located. Select the appropriate drive.


Preview

Indicates whether you want to display an actual picture of the picture object on the form. Select this check box if you want to display a picture.


Preview Picture

Displays an actual picture of the picture object if you have selected the Preview check box on this window.


Preview Picture

Displays an actual picture of the picture object if you have selected the Preview check box on this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Data Drop-Down List

Contains a list of data fields and related information. Select the field you want to work with from the list.

Data Field Name: Identifies a data field (for example, Invoice Number).

Data File: Identifies the file in which the data field resides (for example, Invoice file).

Data Type: Specifies the data type for this data field (for example, Text).


Data Drop-Down List

Contains a list of data fields and related information. Select the field you want to work with from the list.

Data Field Name: Identifies a data field (for example, Invoice Number).

Data File: Identifies the file in which the data field resides (for example, Invoice file).

Data Type: Specifies the data type for this data field (for example, Text).


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Starting - X

Specifies the X axis where the line starts on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Starting - X

Specifies the X axis where the line starts on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Starting - Y

Specifies the Y axis where the line starts on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Starting - Y

Specifies the Y axis where the line starts on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Ending - X

Specifies the X axis where the line ends on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Ending - X

Specifies the X axis where the line ends on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Ending - Y

Specifies the Y axis where the line ends on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Ending - Y

Specifies the Y axis where the line ends on the form. Enter this value. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Order

Specifies the order number of the line object you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Thickness Drop-Down List

Contains line thickness options for the line object.

Hairline: Select this option if you want a hairline line.

Thin: Select this option if you want a thin line.

Medium: Select this option if you want a medium line.

Heavy: Select this option if you want a heavy line.


Line Color Arrow Button

Select this button to display an array of colors from which you can select a color for the line object.


Line Color

Displays the color of the line object.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Order

Specifies the order number of the field you are working with. If you want to change the order number, type the new number in this field.


Field Settings

Show Field: Indicates whether to show a field within the group object. Select the check box to show the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears within the group object. You cannot change this number.

Field Name: Identifies the field (for example, Federal ID). You cannot change this name.

Number Format: Contains the number symbol (#) when the field is an amount. Select this field to display the Number Formatting window, where you can enter the format you want to use for the amount. For example, you might want to change the number of decimal places.

Field Title: Specifies the heading of this field's column. You can edit this field as necessary.

Column Width: Specifies the width of the column for this field. You can edit this field as necessary.

Title Alignment: Determines how the field title is aligned within its column. You can align it to the left, right, or center of the column.


Font Arrow Button

Select this button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the selected field.


Data Font

Identifies the font for the data fields. Select the arrow button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the data fields.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Width

Specifies the width of the object. Enter the width. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Object Height

Specifies the height of the object. Enter the height. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Left Position

Specifies the left position of the object on the form. Enter the left position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


Top Position

Specifies the top position of the object on the form. Enter the top position. You can enter any number from 0 through 31 inches, with 3-decimal-place accuracy. This number can be in inches or centimeters, depending on the option you selected on the Design tab.


None

Select this button if you do not want a border around the selected field.


Box

Select this button if you want a border around the selected field.


Grid

Select this button if you want a border around the outside of the grid.


Line Color Arrow Button

Select this button to display an array of colors from which you can select a line color for the border of the selected object.


Line Color

Displays the line color of the border for the selected object.


Move Up Arrow Button

Select this button to move the highlighted field up one position in the list.


Move Down Arrow Button

Select this button to move the highlighted field down one position in the list.


Text

Displays the text color for the selected field.


Background

Displays the background color for the selected field.


Field Title Font Arrow Button

Select this button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the title of the selected field.


Title Font

Identifies the font for the title fields. Select the arrow button to display the Font window, which lets you choose a font for the title fields.


Text

Displays the text color for the title of the selected field.


Background

Displays the background color for the title of the selected field.


Thickness Drop-Down List

Contains line thickness options for the border around the object.

Hairline: Select this option if you want a hairline border.

Thin: Select this option if you want a thin border.

Medium: Select this option if you want a medium border.

Heavy: Select this option if you want a heavy border.


Field Settings

Show Field: Indicates whether to show a field within the group object. Select the check box to show the field.

Column Number: Specifies the number of the column in which the field appears within the group object. You cannot change this number.

Field Name: Identifies the field (for example, Federal ID). You cannot change this name.

Number Format: Contains the number symbol (#) when the field is an amount. Select this field to display the Number Formatting window, where you can enter the format you want to use for the amount. For example, you might want to change the number of decimal places.

Field Title: Specifies the heading of this field's column. You can edit this field as necessary.

Column Width: Specifies the width of the column for this field. You can edit this field as necessary.

Title Alignment: Determines how the field title is aligned within its column. You can align it to the left, right, or center of the column.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Formatting

Determines the format for this number. For example, -NNNNNN.nn specifies six digits to the left of the decimal and two to the right, with a negative number acceptable, and no commas. Enter the format as appropriate.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Use Printer Font

Indicates whether to use the printer font rather than the font available with your Windows software.

Select this check box if you want to use the printer font. You will want to use the printer font if your printer cannot support True Type fonts or if you have an older printer and you want to print the text faster.


Font Drop-Down List

Displays a list of available fonts. From the list, select the font you want to use for the highlighted object.


Font Drop-Down List

Displays a list of available fonts. From the list, select the font you want to use for the highlighted object.


Font Style Drop-Down List

Displays the available styles for the highlighted font.

Regular: Select this style for regular text.

Italic: Select this style for italic text.

Bold: Select this style for bold text.

Bold Italic: Select this style for bold italic text.


Font Style Drop-Down List

Displays the available styles for the highlighted font.

Regular: Select this style for regular text.

Italic: Select this style for italic text.

Bold: Select this style for bold text.

Bold Italic: Select this style for bold italic text.


Font Drop-Down List

Displays a list of available font sizes. Select from the list the font size you want to use for the highlighted font.


Font Drop-Down List

Displays a list of available font sizes. Select from the list the font size you want to use for the highlighted font.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Effects

Displays options that define effects applied to the text of the highlighted object.


Strikeout

Indicates whether to display a strikeout line through the center of the text of the highlighted object. Select this check box if you want to display a strikeout line.


Underline

Indicates whether to display a line under the text of the highlighted object. Select this check box if you want to display an underline.


Text

Displays an array of colors that you can choose for the text of the highlighted object. From the list, select the color you want.


Text

Displays an array of colors that you can choose for the text of the highlighted object. From the list, select the color you want.


Sample

Displays a sample of the selected font with its related options applied.


Sample

Displays a sample of the selected font with its related options applied.


Color

Displays arrays of color that you can apply to the text and background of the highlighted object.


Background

Displays an array of colors that you can choose for the background of the highlighted object. From the list, select the color you want from the list.


Background

Displays an array of colors that you can choose for the background of the highlighted object. From the list, select the color you want from the list.


OK

Select this button to begin copying the Peachtree Accounting report to a Microsoft Excel workbook based on the file settings you have chosen.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Create a new Microsoft Excel workbook

Select this option to copy the Peachtree Accounting report to a new Microsoft Excel file. The Peachtree Accounting report data will be inserted into a blank worksheet. The worksheet name will be the same as the Peachtree Accounting report name.


Add a new worksheet to an existing Microsoft workbook

Select this option to copy the Peachtree Accounting report to an existing Microsoft Excel file. Enter the file name or click the Browse button to select the file. The Peachtree Accounting report data will be inserted into a new blank worksheet, appending the file. The new worksheet name will be the same as the Peachtree Accounting report name.


File Name

Enter the existing Microsoft Excel workbook file name, or click the Browse button to select the file.


Browse

Click this button to select the existing Microsoft Excel file that you want to append.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select a form to print

This lets you can select a new form to print.


Select a form to print

This displays all available forms. Select one from the list.


Description

This is a description of the form chosen in the Select a form to print list box.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select a form to print

This lets you can select a new form to print.


Select a form to preview

This displays all available forms. Select one from the list.


Select a form to preview

This displays all available forms. Select one from the list.


Description

This is a description of the form chosen in the Select a form to preview list box.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Select a form to preview

This displays all available forms. Select one from the list.


OK

Select OK to search for the information entered.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Find

This allows you to search for a string of characters. The search will cover any text you can see in the displayed list, including Reference #, Amount, ID, and Name. For example, if you wanted to search on all the invoices that start with 100, you would enter 100 here.

Enter either upper- or lowercase letters; Find is not case sensitive. Type the text to find in the entry box, and then press ENTER.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Completion Indicator

Displays the system's progress as it performs this task.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Default Purchase Account

Specifies the default purchase account to use with this company. To display a list of existing purchase-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default Sales Account

Specifies the default sales account to use with this company. To display a list of existing sales-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Default Purchase Account

Specifies the default purchase account to use with this company. To display a list of existing purchase-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default Sales Account

Specifies the default sales account to use with this company. To display a list of existing sales-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


FIFO (First in, First out)

Select this option if you want to use the FIFO (first in, first out) method of inventory costing.

The FIFO method keeps track of the price you paid for each group of units you receive at the same time at the same unit cost. However, FIFO costs your sales and values your inventory as if the items you sell are the ones that you have had in stock for the longest time. You will want to use the FIFO method when you charge costs against revenue in the order in which costs occur. (FIFO generally yields the highest possible amount of net income during periods of constantly rising costs because costs increase regardless of the fact you may receive merchandise prior to the cost increase. In periods of declining cost, the effect is reversed.)


LIFO (Last in, First out)

The LIFO method keeps track of the price you paid for each group of units you receive at the same time at the same unit cost. LIFO (last in, first out) costs your sales and values your inventory as if the items you sell are the ones you have received most recently (and remain unsold). Select LIFO when you charge the most recent inventory costs against revenue. (LIFO yields the lowest possible amount of net income in periods of constantly rising costs because the cost of the most recently acquired item more closely approximates the replacement cost of the item. In periods of declining costs, the effect is reversed.)


Average Costing

Select this option if you want to use the average costing method of inventory costing.

The average costing method keeps track of the cost for each stock-type item. Each time you make a purchase, the average cost for that item is recalculated. Whenever you sell an inventory item that has an average cost type, Peachtree Accounting uses the average cost it has been tracking to compute the Cost of Goods Sold. The Cost of Goods Sold is the average cost times the quantity of the item sold. On a daily basis, an entry is made to the Cost of Goods Sold account, encompassing all sales for the day.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to display online Help about this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing.  When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing.  When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing.  When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility. It tells you what questions the utility will ask you in order that the QuickBooks company is converted properly. When finished reading the text in the window, select Next to proceed with conversion


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the QuickBooks to Peachtree Conversion Utility are designed to ask you how you want your converted company to be set up. Choice you will make include costing method, accounting method, default accounts for purchases and sales, and the accounting periods into which your fiscal year will be divided.


Click Help....Click Next....

To see online Help for any window, select the Help button at the bottom of the window. To proceed to the next window, select the Next button. On subsequent windows the Back button will be enabled; select it to return to the previous window.


Click Help or Continue

To see Help for any window, select the Help button at the bottom of the window. To proceed to the next window, select the Next button. On subsequent windows the Back button will be enabled; select it to return to the previous window.


Accrual

Select this option if you want your converted company to use the accrual accounting method, in which case income is recorded when you invoice customers.


Cash

Select this option if you want your converted company to use the cash-basis accounting method, in which case income is recorded when you receive cash from customers.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


12 monthly accounting periods

Select this option if you want your converted company's fiscal year to be divided into twelve periods matching the calendar months.


Accounting periods that do not match the calendar months

Select this option if you want your converted company's fiscal year to be divided into periods that don't match calendar months. The conversion utility will let you divide the year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Accounting Periods

This window lets you select the accounting-period structure you want to use for your converted company's fiscal year. Though most companies use monthly accounting periods, Peachtree allows you to divide your company's fiscal year into as many as thirteen accounting periods.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Accounting Periods

Select the desired option: twelve accounting periods corresponding to the months of the calendar year or accounting periods that do not match the calendar year. If you choose the second option, when you click the Next button, the Custom Accounting Periods window appears, letting you set up these periods.


Custom Accounting

You have chosen to divide your converted company's fiscal year into periods that don't match the calendar year. This window lets you choose the number of accounting periods you want, the month and year the fiscal year begins, the first year in which you will enter payroll, and the first period in which you will enter company data.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


How many accounting periods?

Enter or select the number of accounting periods into which to divide your company's fiscal year. You can choose up to thirteen periods.


First fiscal year

Enter or select the start date of your company's first fiscal year.


First year you will be entering payroll data

Enter or select the first year in which you will enter payroll for your company.


First period you will be entering data

Enter or select the first period in which you will enter company data.


Custom Accounting Periods

This table automatically displays the accounting periods and dates you have chosen for your company's fiscal year.

Period: This column lists the periods into which the fiscal year is divided.

From: This column displays the start date of each period in your company's fiscal year.

To: This column displays the end date of eahc period in the fiscal year.


Custom Accounting

You have chosen to divide your converted company's fiscal year into periods that don't match the calendar year. This window lets you choose the number of accounting periods you want, the month and year the fiscal year begins, the first year in which you will enter payroll, and the first period in which you will enter company data.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Company Name

This displays the name of the company you are converting.


Accounting Method

This displays the chosen accounting method (cash basis or accrual) for your new Peachtree company.


Accounting Periods

This displays the number of accounting periods into which your new company's fiscal year will be divided.


First Period

This displays the date of the first accounting period in which you'll be entering data for your new company.


Default Purchase Account

This displays the account number of your new company's default purchase account.


Default Sales Account

This displays the account number of your new company's default sales account.


Inventory Costing Method

This displays the inventory costing method (LIFO, FIFO, average costing) chosen for your new company.


Complete Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Convesion Utility. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to complete the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Monthly Accounting Periods

You have chosen to divide your converted company's fiscal year into twelve periods matching the calendar year. This window lets you choose the month and year the fiscal year begins, the first month in which you will be entering company data, and the first year in which you will enter payroll.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Month

Enter or select the month in which your company's first fiscal year will begin.


Year

Enter or select the year in which your company's first fiscal year will begin.


Month

Enter or select the month in which you'll start entering company data.


Year

Enter or select the year in which you'll start entering company data.


Year

Enter or select the first year in which you'll enter company payroll data.


Monthly Accounting Periods

You have chosen to divide your converted company's fiscal year into twelve periods matching the calendar year. This window lets you choose the month and year the fiscal year begins, the first month in which you will be entering company data, and the first year in which you will enter payroll.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

This window lets you select the purchase and sales accounts to use in your converted company. The default purchase account is typically an expense or inventory account. Peachtree requires a default purchase account for each vendor, so the account you choose will be used for all vendors converted from Quickbooks. However, during invoicing or payment, you can change this account if desired.

The default sales account is typically an income account. Peachtree requires a default sales account for each customer, so the account you choose will be used for all converted customers. But during invoicing and entering receipts, you can change this account if desired.

 When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.


Default Purchase Account

Specifies the default purchase account to use with this company. To display a list of existing purchase-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default Sales Account

Specifies the default sales account to use with this company. To display a list of existing sales-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Default Sales Account

Specifies the default sales account to use with this company. To display a list of existing sales-type accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. From the displayed list, select the account you want to use from the list. Or, to add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


FIFO (First in, First out)

Select this option if you want to use the FIFO (first in, first out) method of inventory costing.

The FIFO method keeps track of the price you paid for each group of units you receive at the same time at the same unit cost. However, FIFO costs your sales and values your inventory as if the items you sell are the ones that you have had in stock for the longest time. You will want to use the FIFO method when you charge costs against revenue in the order in which costs occur. (FIFO generally yields the highest possible amount of net income during periods of constantly rising costs because costs increase regardless of the fact you may receive merchandise prior to the cost increase. In periods of declining cost, the effect is reversed.)


LIFO (Last in, First out)

The LIFO method keeps track of the price you paid for each group of units you receive at the same time at the same unit cost. LIFO (last in, first out) costs your sales and values your inventory as if the items you sell are the ones you have received most recently (and remain unsold). Select LIFO when you charge the most recent inventory costs against revenue. (LIFO yields the lowest possible amount of net income in periods of constantly rising costs because the cost of the most recently acquired item more closely approximates the replacement cost of the item. In periods of declining costs, the effect is reversed.)


Average Costing

Select this option if you want to use the average costing method of inventory costing.

The average costing method keeps track of the cost for each stock-type item. Each time you make a purchase, the average cost for that item is recalculated. Whenever you sell an inventory item that has an average cost type, Peachtree Accounting uses the average cost it has been tracking to compute the Cost of Goods Sold. The Cost of Goods Sold is the average cost times the quantity of the item sold. On a daily basis, an entry is made to the Cost of Goods Sold account, encompassing all sales for the day.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing.  When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing.  When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Welcome

This is the first window in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard. It tells you what questions the wizard will ask in order to convert your One-Write Plus company properly. After reading the text in this window, select Next to proceed with conversion.


Welcome

This is the first window in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard. It tells you what questions the wizard will ask in order to convert your One-Write Plus company properly. After reading the text in this window, select Next to proceed with conversion


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


Click Help

To see online Help for any window, select the Help button at the bottom of the window. To proceed to the next window, select the Next button. On subsequent windows the Back button will be enabled; select it to return to the previous window.


Click Next

To proceed to the next window, select the Next button. On subsequent windows the Back button will be enabled; select it to return to the previous window.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


You will be asked about:

The windows in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard are designed to ask you how you want your converted company set up in Peachtree. You will be able to select a costing method, accounts for inventory (sales, inventory, and cost of sales), and default accounts for purchases and sales.


Accrual

Select this option if you want your converted company to use the accrual accounting method, in which case income is recorded when you invoice customers.


Cash

Select this option if you want your converted company to use the cash-basis accounting method, in which case income is recorded when you receive cash from customers.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Accounting Method

This window lets you select the accounting method you want your converted company to use, either accrual or cash basis.  When finished working in the window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper accounting method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


FIFO (First In, First Out)

Select this option to use the FIFO inventory costing method for the company that you are converting. With FIFO, the cost of an inventory item is determined by assuming that the oldest items are to be sold first.


LIFO (Last In, First Out)

Select this option to use the LIFO inventory costing method for the company that you are converting. With LIFO, the cost of an inventory item is determined by assuming that the newest items are to be sold first.


Average Costing

Select this to use the average inventory costing method for the company that you are converting. With average costing, the cost of an inventory item is determined by the average price of all items.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Costing Method

This window lets you choose the costing method you want your converted company to use: FIFO (First in, First out), LIFO, (last in, last out), or average costing. When finished working in this window, select Next to continue with conversion.

Note: Be sure you choose the proper costing method for your converted company; one you choose a method, you cannot change it.


Inventory Accounts

In this window of the Conversion wizard, you will select sales and inventory accounts for the items being converted to Peachtree. You will also select a default cost of sales account for the company being converted.


Inventory Accounts

In this window of the Conversion wizard, you will select sales and inventory accounts for the items being converted to Peachtree. You will also select a default cost of sales account for the company being converted.


Sales

Select the account that you want to use as the designated sales account for the items that are being converted. The account you select will not be used as the default for all inventory items. This selection affects only items being converted from One-Write Plus.


Inventory Accounts

In this window of the Conversion wizard, you will select sales and inventory accounts for the items being converted to Peachtree. You will also select a default cost of sales account for the company being converted.


Inventory

Select the account that you want to use as the designated inventory account for items that are being converted. The account you select will not be used as the default for all inventory items. This selection affects only items being converted from One-Write Plus.


Inventory

Select the account that you want to use as the designated inventory account for items that are being converted. The account you select will not be used as the default for all inventory items. This selection affects only items being converted from One-Write Plus.


Cost of Sales

Select a cost of sales account for use in the company that is being converted the cost of sales account you select here will be used as the default for this company once it's converted to Peachtree.


Cost of Sales

Select a cost of sales account for use in the company that is being converted the cost of sales account you select here will be used as the default for this company once it's converted to Peachtree.


Default Purchase Account

Select the default purchase account (usually an expense or inventory account) for all vendors converted from One-Write Plus.

Note: The default purchase account you choose here applies only to converted vendors. After conversion, you will still have to set up a Peachtree default purchase account in Vendor Defaults.


Default Sales Account

Select the default sales account (usually an income account) for all customers converted from One-Write Plus.

Note: The default sales account you choose here applies only to converted customers. After conversion, you will still have to set up a Peachtree default sales account in Customer Defaults.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

In this window of the Conversion wizard, you will select default purchase and sales accounts for all vendors and customers converted from One-Write Plus. The defaults that you select will apply only to converted vendors and customers. After conversion, you will still need to set up default acounts in Peachtree.


Sales and Purchase Defaults

In this window of the Conversion wizard, you will select default purchase and sales accounts for all vendors and customers converted from One-Write Plus. The defaults that you select will apply only to converted vendors and customers. After conversion, you will still need to set up default acounts in Peachtree.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Converting

Once the conversion process begins, you will not be able to select any of the buttons on this window. During the conversion, the progress bar will advance until the conversion process is complete.


Converting

Once the conversion process begins, you will not be able to select any of the buttons on this window. During the conversion, the progress bar will advance until the conversion process is complete.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Begin Conversion

This window displays all the options you have chosen in the other windows of the Conversion wizard. Verify that the information is correct, and then select Convert to begin the conversion process. Or, if any of the displayed information is not as desired, select Back to return to earlier windows, and then make any needed corrections.


Congratulations!

This is the final window in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard. You have successfully converted your One-Write Plus company to the Peachtree format. Click the Finish button to close the Conversion wizard and begin using your Peachtree company.


Congratulations!

This is the final window in the One-Write Plus Conversion wizard. You have successfully converted your One-Write Plus company to the Peachtree format. Click the Finish button to close the Conversion wizard and begin using your Peachtree company.


QuickBooks

Select this to convert a QuickBooks company to Peachtree format.


One-Write Plus

Select this to convert a One-Write Plus company to Peachtree format.


OK

Once you have chosen the company type you want to convert, select OK to continue with conversion.


Close

Select this to close the window without selecting a conversion option.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


QuickBooks versions that can be converted

Peachtree can convert companies that were created in QuickBooks Versions 6 and 1999-2002, as well as the Pro, Enterprise, and Accountant editions.


One-Write Plus versions that can be converted

Peachtree can convert companies that were created in One-Write Plus Versions 8.0, 8.01, and 8.02.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


New Company Setup - Introduction

When you set up your company, you provide Peachtree with basic information such as name and address. In addition, you select your chart of accounts, choose your accounting and posting methods, and specify how your accounting periods are set up.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


Company Name

Identifies the name of the business you are setting up. Company names cannot be entirely numeric (for example, 90210); they must contain at least one alpha character. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for the company name.


Company Name

Identifies the name of the business you are setting up. Company names cannot be entirely numeric (for example, 90210); they must contain at least one alpha character. Enter up to 39 alphanumeric characters for the company name.


Address Line 1

Used for the first line of the address; typically, it specifies the street number and name. Enter the first line of the address.


Address Line 1

Used for the first line of the address; typically, it specifies the street number and name. Enter the first line of the address. You can enter up to 30 characters for each address line.


Address Line 2

Used for the second line of the address; typically, it specifies the apartment or suite number. Enter the second line of the address.


Address Line 2

Used for the second line of the address; typically, it specifies the apartment or suite number. Enter the second line of the address.


City

Identifies the city for the address. Enter the name of the city. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Identifies the state for the address. Enter the 2-character abbreviation for the state, or select it from the drop-down list.


ZIP Code

Specifies the ZIP code for the address. Enter the ZIP code.


Country

Identifies the country for the address. Enter the country where your company is located. This field is optional. You need to enter a country only if you do business outside the United States.


Country

Identifies the country for the address. Enter the country where your company is located. This field is optional. You need to enter a country only if you do business outside the United States.


Telephone

Specifies the main telephone number at your company. Enter your company's main telephone number.


Telephone

Specifies the main telephone number at your company. Enter your company's main telephone number.


Fax

Enter your company's fax number.


Fax

Enter your company's fax number.


Business Type

Specifies your company's business type and determines what type of equity accounts will be set up in your new company. Values in the list include Corporation, Limited Liability Corporation, Partnership, S Corporation, and Sole Proprietorship. From the drop-down list, select your company's business type.

Select the Help button for more information about business types.


Business Type

Specifies your company's business type and determines what type of equity accounts will be set up in your new company. Values in the list include Corporation, Limited Liability Corporation, Partnership, S Corporation, and Sole Proprietorship. From the drop-down list, select your company's business type.

Select the Help button for more information about business types.


Federal Employer ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay federal taxes. Enter your company's 12-character federal employer ID.


Federal Employer ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay federal taxes. Enter your company's 12-character federal employer ID.


State Employer ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay state taxes. Enter your company's state employer ID. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


State Employer ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay state taxes. Enter your company's state employer ID. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


State Unemployment ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay state unemployment insurance. Enter your state unemployment ID. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


State Unemployment ID

Specifies the number you use to identify your company when you pay state unemployment insurance. Enter your state unemployment ID. You can enter up to 20 characters for this field.


New Company Setup - Company Information

You use this window to enter basic information about your company. Enter this information, and click Next to continue.

Note: You can change company information at any time.


Web Site

Identifies your company's Web site. Enter the Web site address (URL) on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)


Web Site

Identifies your company's Web site. Enter the Web site address (URL) on the Internet, if known. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the Web address using the www.company.com format. (Do enter the "http://" prefix.)


E-mail

Identifies your company's e-mail address. Enter the primary e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. For example, you might enter sales@company.com or support@company.com.


E-mail

Identifies your company's e-mail address. Enter the primary e-mail address for correspondence on the Internet. You can enter up to 64 characters. Enter the address using the name@company.com format. For example, you might enter sales@company.com or support@company.com.


Set up a new company based on one of several sample companies

Select this option to copy basic setup information from one of many sample businesses that Peachtree Accounting provides. If you are new to Peachtree Accounting, this is a useful shortcut to set up your company. Later, you can change certain settings to meet your company's specific business needs.


Copy settings from an existing Peachtree Accounting company

Select this option if you want to copy setup information from another Peachtree company or you are rebuilding a Peachtree Accounting company.


Convert a company from another accounting program

Select this option if you want to import company data from Peachtree Complete Accounting for DOS, Quicken, or some other program.


Build your own company

Select this option if you want to create a company from scratch. This option is recommended only for experienced users who are comfortable setting up accounting information.


New Company Setup - Chart of Accounts

You need to establish how your new company will be set up. Choose an option, and select Next to continue.


Consolidate existing Peachtree Accounting Companies

Select this option if you want to combine the charts of accounts of a number of Peachtree companies to create a new consolidated chart of accounts. The result will be a consolidated company incorporating a group of subsidiary companies.


Set up a new Retail, Service, Construction, Manufacturing, or Distibution company, using a simplified chart of accounts

Select this option to copy basic setup information from a sample retail, service, contruction, manufacturing, or distribution company. The sample chart of accounts provided for each of these five business types contains only the basic accounts you need to get started. You can modify the accounts later, according to your needs.


New Company Setup - Chart of Accounts

Your company's chart of accounts is a complete list of all account names that will be used in the General Ledger. Each account is associated with an account ID to help locate it when recording data. Charts of accounts may vary depending on the type of business. Choose to copy the simplified chart of accounts from a sample retail, service, construction, manufacturing, or distribution company. This is a useful shortcut to set up your company. Later, you can modify the chart of accounts to meet the specific needs of your business.


Available Charts of Accounts

Lists the available charts of accounts from sample companies that Peachtree provides. From the list, select the sample chart of accounts you want to base your company on.

To view more information about an industry, select the business type from the list, and click the About Your Industry button. To display the Chart of Accounts you selected, click the View Chart of Accounts button.


About Your Industry

Select this button to view information about the industry associated with the chart of accounts you selected in the Available Charts of Accounts list.


View Chart of Accounts

Select this button to view the chart of accounts you selected in the Available Charts of Accounts list.


New Company Setup - Chart of Accounts

You can choose to copy setup information from another Peachtree Accounting company. This option is useful if you have already set up a company and want to save time entering default information. This option should also be used if you are rebuilding a company.

Select one of the available companies listed, and click Next to continue.


Available Peachtree Companies

Lists the existing companies within Peachtree Accounting that are available to base your new company on. Select the Peachtree Accounting company that you want to copy.


Accounts List

Lists the chart of accounts in the existing company you selected in the Available Peachtree Companies list.  To display the chart of accounts for an existing company, choose the company name from the list; then click the View Chart of Accounts button.


View Chart of Accounts

Select this button to view the chart of accounts for the company you selected in the Available Peachtree Companies list.


Chart of Accounts

This copies account IDs, descriptions, account types, and budget information from the selected company. If you choose not to copy a chart of accounts, it is strongly recommended that you set up the required retained earnings account immediately following New Company Setup. Select this check box to copy the chart of accounts.


Accounting Periods

This copies the number and dates of accounting periods from the selected company. Select this check box to copy accounting periods.


Statement and Report Formats

This copies all customized financial statements that were designed in the selected company. Select this check box to copy statement and report formats.


General Ledger Defaults

This copies General Ledger default information entered in the selected company. Select this check box to copy general ledger defaults.


Customer Defaults

This copies customer and statement/invoice default information entered in the selected company. Select this check box to copy customer and statement/invoice defaults.


Vendor Defaults

This copies vendor default information entered in the selected company. Select this check box to copy vendor defaults.


Employee Defaults

This copies employee default information entered in the selected company, including payroll setup and company payroll tax tables. This option is not selected by default since most companies have a unique payroll setup. However, if you are rebuilding your company, make sure to select this option. Select this check box to copy employee defaults.


Inventory Item Defaults (in First Accounting, Item Defaults)

This copies item default information entered in the selected company. Select this check box to copy item defaults.


Job Defaults

This copies job default information entered in the selected company. Select this check box to copy job defaults.


New Company Setup - Copy Company Information

You can choose to copy specific setup information from the selected Peachtree Accounting company. This option is useful if you have already set up a company and want to save time entering default information. Select which company settings you want to copy, and click Next to continue.


Accrual

Select this option if your company will use the accrual accounting method. Income is recorded as you invoice customers, and expenses are recorded when you receive bills from vendors, regardless of when cash is actually exchanged. This presents a truer picture of income and expenses. Most companies use this method.

Check with your accountant to determine the method you should use in your business.


Cash

Select this option if your company will use the cash-basis accounting method. Income is recorded when cash (checks, money orders, or currency) is received, and expenses are recorded when paid. However, unpaid credit sales and purchases do not show on ledgers, which can present a misleading picture of income and expenses.

Check with your accountant to determine the method you should use in your business.


New Company Setup - Accounting Method

The accounting method determines how Peachtree Accounting handles General Ledger, Accounts Receivable, and Accounts Payable transactions. Choose an accounting method, and select Next to continue.

Important:  Once you choose the accounting method and complete the New Company Setup wizard, you cannot change it for this company. Check with your accountant to determine the best method you should use in your business.


New Company Setup - Accounting Method

The accounting method determines how Peachtree Accounting handles General Ledger, Accounts Receivable, and Accounts Payable transactions. Choose an accounting method, and select Next to continue.

Important:  Once you choose the accounting method and complete the New Company Setup wizard, you cannot change it for this company. Check with your accountant to determine the best method you should use in your business.


Real-Time Posting

Select this option if you want transactions posted to the journals and the General Ledger as they are entered and saved. This method can save you time and is best for most business and network environments. Most companies use this method.


Batch Posting

Select this option if you want to save transactions and later post them all in a group. When you use batch posting, you can print registers and check the batch of transactions before posting them to the journals.


New Company Setup - Posting Method

The posting method determines how Peachtree Accounting processes transactions to journals and the General Ledger. Choose a posting method, and select Next to continue.

Note:  You can switch posting methods at any time.


New Company Setup - Posting Method

The posting method determines how Peachtree Accounting processes transactions to journals and the General Ledger. Choose a posting method, and select Next to continue.

Note:  You can switch posting methods at any time.


12 monthly accounting periods

Select this option if you want each accounting period's starting and ending dates to match those of the 12 calendar months. You can choose to start your fiscal year in January or any other month of the year. Most companies follow this fiscal year structure. Most companies use this setup.


Accounting periods that do not match the calendar months

Select this option if you want to set up a custom fiscal year structure. For example, you may want four accounting periods per year, or possibly 13 four-week accounting periods per year.


New Company Setup - Accounting Periods

Accounting periods are units of time that divide your fiscal year for reporting purposes. In Peachtree Accounting you can set up up to 13 accounting periods per fiscal year. Select an accounting period setup option, and select Next to continue.


New Company Setup - Monthly Accounting Period Setup

Starting dates need to be established for setting up your company and entering data. Once you establish a starting date, Peachtree Accounting will automatically set up monthly accounting periods for your first two fiscal years. Enter your starting dates, and select Next to continue.


When Do You Want Your First Fiscal Year to Start? (Month)

Specifies the month your first fiscal year starts. Select the month from the drop-down list.


When Do You Want Your First Fiscal Year to Start? (Year)

Specifies the year your first fiscal year starts. Select the year from the drop-down list.


What is the First Month You Will Be Entering Data? (Month)

Specifies the month you will first enter data. Select the month from the drop-down list.


What is the First Month You Will Be Entering Data? (Year)

Specifies the year you will first enter data. Select the year from the drop-down list.


What is the First Year You Will Be Entering Payroll?

Specifies the year you will first enter payroll. Select the year from the drop-down list.


How Many Accounting Periods Do You Want in a Fiscal Year?

Specifies the number of accounting periods in your fiscal year. From the drop-down list, select the number of periods.


What is the First Year You Will Be Entering Payroll Data?

Specifies the year you will first enter payroll data. Enter the year, or select it from the drop-down list.


What is the First Period You Will Be Entering Data?

Specifies the period you will first enter data. Enter the period, or select it from the drop-down list.


Accounting Periods List

Period: Specifies the accounting period.

From: Specifies the first day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.

To: Specifies the last day in the accounting period. Enter the appropriate date for each period.


New Company Setup - Custom Accounting Periods

The number of accounting periods and starting dates need to be established for setting up your company and entering data. Enter your fiscal year setup, and select Next to continue.


What Is the Start Date of Your First Fiscal Year?

Specifies the start date of your first fiscal year that you will be tracking. Enter this date or select it from the calendar.


New Company Setup - Defaults

This lists all the standard vendor, inventory (not in First Accounting), and customer defaults that will be set up in your Peachtree Accounting company. You will have the opportunity later to change these settings and set up new information by using the Setup Checklist or by selecting menu options from the Maintain menu.

Select Next to continue.


Stock Costing Method

This lists the default stock costing method that will be set up for you during new company setup.


Assembly Costing Method

This lists the default assembly costing method that will be set up for you during new company setup.


Vendor Information

This lists the default vendor information that will be set up for you during new company setup.


Inventory Costing Information

This lists the default inventory costing methods that will be set up for you during new company setup.


New Company Setup - Finish

Select Finish to save all settings for the new company you've just created.

Even though many company defaults have been set up for you, you still need to enter data records for your company's customers, vendors, employees, and so forth, as well as to select related defaults. Peachtree provides a Setup Guide that will walk you through the remainder of the setup process. When you click the Finish button, the Peachtree Today Welcome page will appear. To see the Setup Guide, just click the Setup Guide link.


New Company Setup - Finish

Select Finish to save your company settings. Then you can begin importing or converting data from another accounting program.


Type of Peachtree Accounting company

From the drop-down list, choose the type of Peachtree company that you would like your new company to be compatible with.


New Company Setup - Monthly Accounting Period Setup

Starting dates need to be established for setting up your company and entering data. Once you establish a starting date, Peachtree Accounting will automatically set up monthly accounting periods for your first two fiscal years. Enter your starting dates, and select Next to continue.


When Do You Want Your First Fiscal Year to Start? (Month)

Specifies the month your first fiscal year starts. Select the month from the drop-down list.


When Do You Want Your First Fiscal Year to Start? (Year)

Specifies the year your first fiscal year starts. Select the year from the drop-down list.


What is the First Month You Will Be Entering Data? (Month)

Specifies the month you will first enter data. Select the month from the drop-down list.


What is the First Month You Will Be Entering Data? (Year)

Specifies the year in which you will first enter data. Select the year from the drop-down list.


Available Charts of Accounts

Lists the available charts of accounts from sample companies that Peachtree provides. From the list, select the sample chart of accounts you want to base your company on.

To view more information about an industry, select the business type from the list, and click the About Your Industry button. To display the Chart of Accounts you selected, click the View Chart of Accounts button.


About Your Industry

Select this button to view information about the industry associated with the chart of accounts you selected in the Available Charts of Accounts list.


View Chart of Accounts

Select this button to view the chart of accounts you selected in the Available Charts of Accounts list.


New Company Setup - Chart of Accounts

Your company's chart of accounts is a complete list of all account names that will be used in the General Ledger. Each account is associated with an account ID to help locate it when recording data. Charts of accounts may vary depending on the type of business. Choose to copy the simplified chart of accounts from a sample retail, construction, manufacturing, or distribution company. This is a useful shortcut to set up your company. Later, you can modify the chart of accouts to meet the specific needs of your business.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Displays online Help for this window.


Check your desired options.


QuickBooks

Select this option if you want to convert a company in any of the listed versions of QuickBooks to Peachtree Accounting format.


One-Write Plus

Select this option if you want to convert a company in any of the listed versions of One-Write Plus to Peachtree Accounting format.


OK

Select this button to complete your choice of conversion options and close this window.


Close

Select this button to close the window without making a choice.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Convert a Company

This window lets you choose the type of company you want to convert to Peachtree Accounting format. Choose to convert either a QuickBooks or a One-Write Plus company. However, the utility supports conversion of only the listed versions of QuickBooks and One-Write Plus.


Headers and Footers

The third Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the number and text of headers and footers that appear on your new financial statement.


Date Range

The fourth Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the range of dates that the new financial statement will cover.


Columns

The fifth Financial Statement wizard window lets you decide how many columns will appear on the new financial statement and the types of data that those columns will contain. You can also tell the wizard the titles you want to appear at the head of each column.

The sixth Financial Statement wizard window lets you tell the wizard how you want those columns to appear, including how the titles should align and how many characters wide the column will be.


Formatting and Fonts

The seventh Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the fonts in which headers, footers, column titles, data, and totals will appear in the new statement.

The eighth Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose format options for the new financial statement, including the width in inches of the margins and whether page numbers should appear on the statement. In addition, you can choose the default printer you want Peachtree to use in printing the statement.


Headers and Footers

The third Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the number and text of headers and footers that appear on your new financial statement.


Date Range

The fourth Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the range of dates that the new financial statement will cover.


Columns

The fifth Financial Statement wizard window lets you decide how many columns will appear on the new financial statement and the types of data that those columns will contain. You can also tell the wizard the titles you want to appear at the head of each column.

The sixth Financial Statement wizard window lets you tell the wizard how you want those columns to appear, including how the titles should align and how many characters wide the column will be.


Formatting and Fonts

The seventh Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose the fonts in which headers, footers, column titles, data, and totals will appear in the new statement.

The eighth Financial Statement wizard window lets you choose format options for the new financial statement, including the width of the margins and whether page numbers will appear on it. In addition, you can choose the default printer you want Peachtree to use in printing the statement.


Financial Statement Wizard - Introduction

The wizard lets you design a new financial statement by choosing an existing statement design to model the new one. Then you tell the wizard how you want the new statement to look by specifying attributes such as the headers and footers that will appear on the statement and the range of dates that the statement will cover.

Select Next to begin designing your new financial statement. Select Help to display more information about this window.


Click Next to continue

Select Next to begin designing your new financial statement.


Click Help for more information

Select Help to display more information about this window.


Financial Statement Wizard - Introduction

The wizard lets you design a new financial statement by choosing an existing statement design to model the new one. Then you tell the wizard how you want the new statement to look by specifying attributes such as the headers and footers that will appear on the statement and the range of dates that the statement will cover.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


Financial Statement Wizard - Introduction

The wizard lets you design a new financial statement by choosing an existing statement design to model the new one. Then you tell the wizard how you want the new statement to look by specifying attributes such as the headers and footers that will appear on the statement and the range of dates that the statement will cover.

Select Next to begin setting up your new company. Select Help to display more information about this window.


Financial Statement

This window lets you choose a model on which to base your new financial statement. Use the drop-down list in the Financial Statement Template field to choose an existing financial statement to use as template for the new one you're designing. The wizard will set up the new statement exactly like the existing one.


Financial Statement

Use the drop-down list in the Financial Statement Template field to choose an existing financial statement to use as template for the new statement you're designing. The wizard will set up the new statement exactly like the existing one.


Financial Statement

Use the drop-down list in the Financial Statement Template field to choose an existing financial statement to use as template for the new statement you're designing. The wizard will set up the new statement exactly like the existing one.


Financial Statement Template

Use the drop-down list to choose an existing financial statement to use as template for the new statement you're designing.


Financial Statement Name

Enter a name (30 characters maximum) and a description for the new statement you're creating.


Financial Statement Name

Enter a name and description for the new statement you're creating.


Name

Enter a name (30 characters maximum) for the new statement you're creating.


Description

Enter a description (160 characters maximum) for the new statement you're creating.


Financial Statement Template

The list box lists all existing financial statements. Select one to use as template for the new statement you're designing.


Name

Enter a name (30 characters maximum) for the new statement you're creating.


Description

Enter a description (160 characters maximum) for the new statement you're creating.


Headers and Footers

This window lets you choose the number and text of headers and footers that will appear on your new financial statement.


Headers and Footers

Choose the number and text of headers and footers that will appear on your new financial statement.


Special Data Fields

You can insert special data fields representing variable information in your headers and footers. Special data fields are surrounded by dollar signs and brackets like this: $(compnam)$. If you insert this particular data field into a header or footer, Peachtree will print or display your company name. You can either type in the special data field or use the Insert button to select one from a drop-down list.


Special Data Fields

You can insert special data fields representing variable information in your headers and footers. Special data fields are surrounded by dollar signs and brackets like this: $(compnam)$. If you insert this particular data field into a header or footer, Peachtree will print or display your company name. You can either type in the special data field or use the Insert button to select one from a drop-down list.


Print

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want a header or footer to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want a header or footer to print.


Header 1

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Header 1 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Header 1 to print.


Header 2

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Header 2 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Header 2 to print.


Header 3

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Header 3 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Header 3 to print.


Header 4

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Header 4 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Header 4 to print.


Footer 1

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Footer 1 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Footer 1 to print.


Footer 2

Select the check box to tell the wizard you want Footer 2 to print on the statement. Deselect the check box if you don't want Footer 2 to print.


Header 1

Enter the text you want to use for statement Header 1 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Header 2

Enter the text you want to use for statement Header 2 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Header 3

Enter the text you want to use for statement Header 3 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Header 4

Enter the text you want to use for statement Header 4 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Footer 1

Enter the text you want to use for statement Footer 1 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Footer 2

Enter the text you want to use for statement Footer 2 (200 characters maximum). To enter a special data field, select the Insert button; then choose from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Header 1. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Header 2. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Header 3. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Header 4. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Footer 1. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Insert

Select this button to insert a special data field into the text of Footer 2. Select the desired field from the drop-down list.


Dates

This window lets you choose the range of dates that will appear on the new financial statement you're designing.


Dates

This window lets you choose the range of dates that will appear on the new financial statement you're designing.


General Ledger Account Masking

If your company's general ledger is set up to handle account masking, you can use an account mask to limit account totals displayed on the statement to a chosen department, division, or location.


General Ledger Account Masking

If your company's general ledger is set up to handle account masking, you can use an account mask to limit account totals displayed on the statement to a chosen department, division, or location.


General Ledger Account Masking

If your company's general ledger is set up to handle account masking, you can use an account mask to limit account totals displayed on the statement to a chosen department, division, or location.


General Ledger Account Masking

If your company's general ledger is set up to handle account masking, you can use an account mask to limit account totals displayed on the statement to a chosen department, division, or location.


General Ledger Account Masking

If your company's general ledger is set up to handle account masking, you can use an account mask to limit account totals displayed on the statement to a chosen department, division, or location. For more information on account masking, select the Help button at the bottom of the window.


Time Frame

Use the drop-down list to select a time frame covered by the financial statement you're creating: the current period, the current three months, or a range of dates. If you choose a range of dates, the From and To field will become active so you can enter the range.


From

Enter the first date in the range of dates you want the financial statement to cover.


To

Enter the last date in the range of dates you want the financial statement to cover.


Account Mask

Enter the department mask you want to use to limit the account totals that appear on the statement.


Account Mask

Enter the department mask you want to use to limit the account totals that appear on the statement.


Time Frame

Use the drop-down list to select a time frame covered by the financial statement you're creating: the current period, the current three months, or a range of dates. If you choose a range of dates, the From and To field will become active so you can enter the range.


From

Enter the first date in the range of dates you want the financial statement to cover.


To

Enter the last date in the range of dates you want the financial statement to cover.


Column Properties

This window lets you choose up to 30 different columns of data that can appear on the financial statement you're designing. For each column you want to add to the statement, you first select the type of data you want the column to display, then enter the title that you want to appear at the head of the column on the printed or displayed statement.


Column Properties

This window lets you choose up to 30 different columns of data that can appear on the financial statement you're designing. For each column you want to add to the statement, you first select the type of data you want the column to display, then enter the title that you want to appear at the head of the column on the printed or displayed statement.


Column Properties

This window lets you choose up to 30 different columns of data that can appear on the financial statement you're designing. For each column you want to add to the statement, you first select the type of data you want the column to display, then enter the title that you want to appear at the head of the column on the printed or displayed statement.


Column Properties

For each column you want to add to the statement, you must select the type of data you want the column to display and the title that you want to appear at the head of the column on the printed or displayed statement.

Contents: Use the drop-down list to select the type of data you want to appear in the column: Description, Text, Activity, Balance, Year to Date, Percentage, Ratio, or Formula. If you want no data to appear in the column, select <Not Used>.

Title: Enter the title you want to appear at the head of the column.


Column Type

This box displays a description of the column type you have chosen. Each column type prints a different type of data. For example, a Description column prints the name of the account contained in the statement.


Up Arrow

This button lets you move a selected column up in the list of columns. Each time you click the button, the selected column will move up one position.

Whenever you move a column, the wizard automatically renumbers it. For example, if you move Column #3 up one position, it will become Column #2.


Down Arrow

This button lets you move a selected column down in the list of columns. Each time you click the button, the selected column will move down one position.

Whenever you move a column, the wizard automatically renumbers it. For example, if you move Column #3 down one position, it will become Column #4.


Column X Properties

Choose the properties that will determine how each individual column appears in the new financial statement you're creating.


Column X Properties

Choose the properties that will determine how each individual column appears in the new financial statement you're creating.


No additional properties

When you see this label, you don't need to choose any additional properties for the type of data you have chosen to appear in the column.


Text

Enter the text that you would like to appear in the column (a maximum of 13 characters). The text you enter will appear on every line of the column.


Text

Enter the text that you would like to appear in the column (a maximum of 13 characters). The text you enter will appear on every line of the column.


Qualifier

Use the drop-down list to select a qualifier that will limit the amount displayed for an account's activity. You can choose net activity, only debits, or only credits.


Qualifier

Use the drop-down list to select a qualifier that will limit the amount displayed for an account's activity. You can choose net activity, only debits, or only credits.


Time Frame

Use the drop-down list to select a time frame for which you want to display an account's activity. You can choose any period in the current year, the previous year, or two years ago. Or you can choose totals from the current year, pervious year, or two years ago.


Time Frame

Use the drop-down list to select a time frame for which you want to display an account's activity. You can choose any period in the current year, the previous year, or two years ago. Or you can choose totals from the current year, pervious year, or two years ago.


Round

Use the drop-down list to select how want to round off the amount displayed for an account's activity. You can choose to round to whole dollars or to thousands of dollars.


Round

Use the drop-down list to select how want to round off the amount displayed for an account's activity. You can choose to round to whole dollars or to thousands of dollars.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the numerator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Ratio

Use the drop down list to select the column you want to use as numerator in calculating the ratio that will appear in the column. Then select Account Range to choose a range of accounts to divide the numerator by in order to calculate the ratio.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Use Column

Specifies which column you want to use for the denominator in calculating a percentage on the financial statement--for example, column 1. Select an option from the drop-down list.


Account Range

Select this button to choose a range of accounts to divide the numerator by in order to calculate the ratio that will appear in the column.


Selected/Not Selected

This indicates whether or not you have selected a range of accounts on which to base the calculated ratio that will appear in the column.

To select a range of accounts, click the Account Range button.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the first element in the formula that will determine what appears in the column. Select a column--for example, column 1--from the drop-down list.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the first element in the formula that will determine what appears in the column. Select a column--for example, column 1--from the drop-down list.


Operation

Specifies the operation used to arrive at the formula that determines what will appear in the column. Use the drop-down list to select an operation--for example, Add to. Then, for example, if you have chosen column 1 as the first element in the equation and column 2 as the second element, Peachtree will add the column 1 amount to the column 2 amount to calculate the amount that will appear in the column.


Operation

Specifies the operation used to arrive at the formula that determines what will appear in the column. Use the drop-down list to select an operation--for example, Add to. Then, for example, if you have chosen column 1 as the first element in the equation and column 2 as the second element, Peachtree will add the column 1 amount to the column 2 amount to calculate the amount that will appear in the column.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the second element in the formula that will determine what appears in the column. Select an column--for example, column 2--from the drop-down list.


Column

Specifies which column you want to use as the second element in the formula that will determine what appears in the column. Select an column--for example, column 2--from the drop-down list.


Dollar Amount

Instead of using a column as the second element in the formula that will determine what appears in the column, you can enter a dollar amount. So, for example, if you have chosen column 1 as the first element in the formula and have chosen to add it to the second element, you could enter a dollar amount such as 100.00, and Peachtree will add that to the amount in column 1. The total will then appear in the column.


Round

This lets you choose how you want to round the final amount that appears in the column. Use the drop-down list to selecting rounding to the nearest dollar or the nearest thousand dollars or to select no rounding at all.


Round

This lets you choose how you want to round the final amount that appears in the column. Use the drop-down list to selecting rounding to the nearest dollar or the nearest thousand dollars or to select no rounding at all.


Align data and totals in the column

If you want the data and the totals that appear in the column to be aligned, select this option button.


Indent totals from data

If you want totals that appear in the column to be indented rather than aligned with the data that appears in the column, select this option button.


Percentage

Use the drop down lists to select the columns you want to use as numerator and denominator in calculating the percentage that will appear in the column.


Percentage

Use the drop down lists to select the columns you want to use as numerator and denominator in calculating the percentage that will appear in the column.


Ratio

Use the drop down list to select the column you want to use as numerator in calculating the ratio that will appear in the column. Then select Account Range to choose a range of accounts to divide the numerator by in order to calculate the ratio.


Column Options

Once you have defined the columns that will appear on the financial statement you're creating (in the Column Properties window), the Column Options window lets you select attributes that tell Peachtree how you want each column to print. These attributes include whether you want to have a secondary title, how you want the title to align with the column, and the overall width of the column.


Column Options

Once you have defined the columns that will appear on the financial statement you're creating (in the Column Properties window), the Column Options window lets you select attributes that tell Peachtree how you want each column to print. These attributes include whether you want to have a secondary title, how you want the title to align with the column, and the overall width of the column.


Column Options

Once you have defined the columns that will appear on the financial statement you're creating (in the Column Properties window), the Column Options window lets you select attributes that tell Peachtree how you want each column to print. These attributes include whether you want to have a secondary title, how you want the title to align with the column, and the overall width of the column.


Column Options

Once you have defined the columns that will appear on the financial statement you're creating (in the Column Properties window), you select a number of other attributes that tell Peachtree how you want each column to print.

Contents: Select each column that you have already defined. The Column Options group box on the right side of the window will become active, and you can enter the additional print attributes here.

Title: If you haven't already done so, enter the title you want to appear at the head of the column.


Column Type

This box displays a description of the column type you have chosen. Each column type prints a different type of data. For example, a Description column prints the name of the account contained in the statement.


Column X Options

Choose the attributes that will determine how each individual column prints on the new financial statement you're creating.


Account Mask

This shows the department mask, if any, you have chosen to limit the account totals that appear on the statement. If the column selected is a Year to Date, Activity, or Balance column, you can change the mask if desired.


Account Mask

This shows the department mask, if any, you have chosen to limit the account totals that appear on the statement. If the column selected is a Year to Date, Activity, or Balance column, you can change the mask if desired.


Secondary Title

Enter a second title for this column, if desired (42 characters maximum).


Secondary Title

Enter a second title for this column, if desired (42 characters maximum).


Align the title with the...

Use the drop-down list to select an alignment for the title: centered on the column, aligned with the right side of the column, or aligned with the left side of the column.


Align the title with the...

Use the drop-down list to select an alignment for the title: centered on the column, aligned with the right side of the column, or aligned with the left side of the column.


This column will be X characters wide

Enter the total number of characters wide you want this column to be.


This column will be X characters wide

Enter the total number of characters wide you want this column to be.


This column will be X characters wide

Enter the total number of characters wide you want this column to be.


Print this column

Select the check box if you want this column to print on the statement. Otherwise, deselect the box.


Print dollar signs

Select the check box if you want dollar signs to appear before dollar amounts in this column. Otherwise, deselect the box.


Fonts

This window lets you select or change the fonts that will appear for each section of the financial statement you're designing. Sections include headers; footers; and column titles, data, and totals.


Fonts

This window lets you select or change the fonts that will appear for each section of the financial statement you're designing. Sections include headers; footers; and column titles, data, and totals.


Header 1

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 1 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 2

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 2 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 3

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 3 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 4

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 4 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 1

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 1 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 2

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 2 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 3

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 3 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Header 4

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Header 4 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Header 1 on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Header 2 on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Header 3 on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Header 4 on the financial statement.


Column Titles

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display column titles on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Column Data

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display column data on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Totals

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display data totals on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Footer 1

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Footer 1 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Footer 2

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Footer 2 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Column Titles

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display column titles on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Column Data

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display column data on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Totals

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display data totals on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Footer 1

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Footer 1 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


Footer 2

This shows the font that Peachtree will use to print and display Footer 2 on the financial statement. Use the Fonts button (A) to change the current font.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for column titles on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for column data on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for data totals on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Footer 1 on the financial statement.


A (Fonts)

Select this button to choose the font and font attributes that will appear for Footer 1 on the financial statement.


Print Page Numbers

Select this check box to have page numbers print on the financial statement.


Show Zero Amounts

Select this check box if you want the financial statement to display zero dollar amounts.


Print All Words Capitalized

Select this check box if you want the financial statement to display the names of accounts with initial capital letters--for example Long-Term Liabilities.


Center on Page

Select the check box if you want the financial statement to be centered on the page rather than left justified.


Formatting

This window lets you choose options that determine how your financial statement will print or display on the screen, including whether page numbers and zero dollar amounts will appear.


Formatting

This window lets you choose options that determine how your financial statement will print or display on the screen, including whether page numbers and zero dollar amounts will appear.


Default Printer

Select the printer you want Peachtree to always use when printing the financial statement.


Default Printer

Select the printer you want Peachtree to always use when printing the financial statement.


Default Printer

This is the name of the printer that Peachtree will always use when printing the financial statement.


Arrow Button

Select this button to choose a new default printer. The standard Windows print dialog will appear, and you can choose a printer from the drop-down list in the Name field. The printers that appear in the list were all set up through the Windows Settings options.


Right Margin

Enter the width in inches of the right margin of the financial statement.


Left Margin

Enter the width in inches of the left margin of the financial statement.


Right Margin

Enter the width in inches of the right margin of the financial statement


Left Margin

Enter the width in inches of the left margin of the financial statement.


Finish

When you see this window, you have successfully completed design of your new financial statement. Now, choose one of the four listed options, and then select the Finish button.


Finish

When you see this window, you have successfully completed design of your new financial statement. Now, choose one of the four listed options, and then select the Finish button.


Display your new financial statement

Select this option button and the Finish button to see your new financial statement displayed on the screen.


Open the Financial Statement Design window

Select this option button and the Finish button to see go directly to the Financial Statement Design window with your new statement in design mode. Here, you can make additional changes as desired.


Create a new financial statement with the same settings

Select this option button and the Finish button to return to the first Financial Statement Wizard window. You can then begin designing a new financial statement, and the wizard will use the statement you just designed as template for the brand-new statement.


Create another new financial statement using this wizard

Select this option button and the Finish button to return to the first Financial Statement Wizard window. You can then begin designing a new financial statement using the wizard.


Reminder

This is a reminder that if you need to make any additional changes to the statement you just designed, you can always go to the Financial Statements Design window and make changes there. Both Peachtree Accounting Help and the User's Guide have instructions on working in this window.


Reminder

This is a reminder that if you need to make any additional changes to the statement you just designed, you can always go to the Financial Statements Design window and make changes there. Both Peachtree Accounting Help and the User's Guide have instructions on working in this window.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Printer Font

This identifies the font chosen to print the data.


Background Color

Check this box if you want a background color for the area of this object.


Background Color

You can select a background color for the area of this object. Click the arrow, and then make your selection from the Windows Color dialog.


Background Color

This identifies the chosen background color for the object.


Sample Data

Check the box if you want to display sample data, which determines the maximum number of alpha or numeric characters allowed when printing data.


Number of copies

Use the spin control to select the number of copies of the form you want to print.


Number of copies

Use the spin control to select the number of copies of the form you want to print.


Order Number

Shows the current order number of the object. You can change the order if necessary.


Border

You can apply a border or box around this object.


Border Thickness

Enter or select the thickness in points for the border. Zero equals no border.


Border Thickness

Enter or select the thickness in points for the border. Zero equals no border.


Border Color

If you entered a Thickness, you can click the arrow to select a color for the border.


Border Color

If you entered a Thickness, you can click the arrow to select a color for the border.


Border Color

If you entered a Thickness, you can click the arrow to select a color for the border.


Apply Fill Color

Check this box to specify a fill color for this shape object.


Fill Color

If you checked the Apply Fill Color box, you can click the arrow to select a fill color


Fill Color

If you checked the Apply Fill Color box, you can click the arrow to select a fill color.


Top Position

Enter the distance between the top edge of the page to the top edge of this object.

Note: This option is not available for polygon objects.


Top Position

Enter the distance between the top edge of the page to the top edge of this object.


Left Position

Enter the distance between the left edge of the page to the left edge of this object.

Note: This option is not available for polygon objects.


Left Position

Enter the distance between the left edge of the page to the left edge of this object.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.

Note: This option is not available for polygon objects.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Object Width

Enter the width of the object.

Note: This option is not available for polygon objects.


Object Width

Enter the width of the object.


Fill Color Fields

Check this box to specify a fill color for this shape object.


Size and Location

Enter the size or location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.

Note: Size and location options are not available for polygon objects.


Order Number

Shows the current order number of the object. You can change the order if necessary.


Sample Text

Displays a sample of the text for the text object. Type your text here, just as it should be displayed on the form.


Insert Data Object

Click this button to insert a data object within this text object. For example, you might type "Dear," then insert the Customer Contact name.


Font

You can use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog. Check background color to fill the text object with a color.


Use Printer Font

Check this box to use your default printer font.


Select Font

Click the arrow to select a font from the Windows font dialog.


Select Font

Click the arrow to select a font from the Windows font dialog.


Background Color

Check this box if you want to have a background color fill the area of the text object.


Background Color

Click the arrow to select from the standard Windows color palette.


Background Color

Click the arrow to select from the standard Windows color palette.


Size and Location

Enter the size or location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Left Position

Enter the distance between the top edge of the page to the top edge of this object.


Left Position

Enter the distance between the left edge of the page to the left edge of this object.


Left Position

Enter the distance between the left edge of the page to the left edge of this object.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Object Width

Enter the width of the object.


Object Height

Enter the width of the object.


Formatting

You can align the text as left justified, right justified, or centered. The fill character fills up unused space within a field on one horizontal line.


Fill Character

Enter a single character to fill up unused space within a field. For example, enter a period (.) as the fill character to print leader dots (Description.....). The fill character can only be used if the text fits on a single line on the form.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Order Number

Shows the current order number of the object. You can change the order if necessary.


Data Field Name

Click on the arrow to select from a list of data fields available for this type of form.


Sample Data

The sample data determines the maximum number of alpha or numeric characters allowed when printing the data. For numeric fields, it is also used to format the numbers (example, -NNNN.nn).


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Background Color

Check this box if you want a background color for the area of this object.


Background Color

You can select a background color for the area of this object.


Background Color

You can select a background color for the area of this object.


Negative Data Font

For numeric fields, you can specify the font and background color for negative numbers (for example, red).


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Use Printer Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to select from the Windows Font dialog.


Background Color

Check this box if you want a background color for the area of this object.


Background Color

You can select a background color for the area of this object.


Background Color

You can select a background color for the area of this object.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Size and Location

Enter the size or location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Left Position

Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the object.


Left Position

Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the object.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Object Width

Enter the width of the object.


Object Height

Enter the width of the object.


Formatting

You can align the text as left justified, right justified, or centered. The fill character fills up unused space within a field on one horizontal line.


Formatting

You can align the text as left justified, right justified, or centered. The fill character fills up unused space within a field on one horizontal line.


Print zero dollar amounts

Check this box to print zero dollar amounts for numeric fields.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the data object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Border

You can draw a border or box around the text object. Check the Apply box, then set the line thickness and color.


Sample Data

The sample data determines the maximum number of alpha or numeric characters allowed when printing the data. For numeric fields, it is also used to format the numbers (example, -NNNN.nn).


Order Number

Shows the current order number of the object. You can change the order if necessary.


Define Fields

Check the data fields to include in this group object. You can format numeric fields by clicking on the # sign button.


Move Field

Use these arrow buttons to move the field up or down in the list, thus changing the column in which the field displays.


Move Field

Use these arrow buttons to move the field up or down in the list, thus changing the column in which the field displays.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Data Font

Use your default printer font, or uncheck the box and click the arrow to display the Windows Font dialog. You can also set a background color for the area of the object.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Field Title Font

You can set font characteristics for the column headings of the group object, including a background color.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Left Position

Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the object.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Object Height

Enter the height of the object.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Object Width

Enter the width of the object.


Size and Location

Enter the size and location of this object. The Top and Left Positions are from the edge of the page, not the margin.


Border

Choosing Table inserts vertical lines between columns of data fields. Choosing Grid inserts vertical lines between columns and horizontal lines between rows or line items. You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Border

Choosing Table inserts vertical lines between columns of data fields. Choosing Grid inserts vertical lines between columns and horizontal lines between rows or line items. You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Border

Choosing Table inserts vertical lines between columns of data fields. Choosing Grid inserts vertical lines between columns and horizontal lines between rows or line items. You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Border

Choosing Table inserts vertical lines between columns of data fields. Choosing Grid inserts vertical lines between columns and horizontal lines between rows or line items. You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Border

Choosing Table inserts vertical lines between columns of data fields. Choosing Grid inserts vertical lines between columns and horizontal lines between rows or line items. You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Thickness

You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Thickness

You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Line Color

You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Line Color

You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Line Color

You can choose the line color and line thickness for the box, table, or grid.


Row Spacing

You can check this box and then define the spacing between rows of data fields in the Group object. You can enter any amount from -10 to 100. The default is 1; that means the height of the font plus 1 point. The negative amount allows you to tighten the spacing to account for letters that drop below the line (y, g, etc.); this can be useful when you print on lined paper.


Row Spacing

You can check this box and then define the spacing between rows of data fields in the Group object. You can enter any amount from -10 to 100. The default is 1; that means the height of the font plus 1 point. The negative amount allows you to tighten the spacing to account for letters that drop below the line (y, g, etc.); this can be useful when you print on lined paper.


Row Spacing

You can check this box and then define the spacing between rows of data fields in the Group object. You can enter any amount from -10 to 100. The default is 1; that means the height of the font plus 1 point. The negative amount allows you to tighten the spacing to account for letters that drop below the line (y, g, etc.); this can be useful when you print on lined paper.


Row Spacing

You can check this box and then define the spacing between rows of data fields in the Group object. You can enter any amount from -10 to 100. The default is 1; that means the height of the font plus 1 point. The negative amount allows you to tighten the spacing to account for letters that drop below the line (y, g, etc.); this can be useful when you print on lined paper.


Move Command

Click the arrow buttons to move the highlighted object up or down in the list.


Move Command

Click the arrow buttons to move the highlighted object up or down in the list.


Insert Additional Commands

While in the Properties window, you can insert additional Read Next File Record or Line Item Record commands.


Insert Additional Commands

While in the Properties window, you can insert additional Read Next File Record or Line Item Record commands.


Order List

Order is very important for command objects. They must immediately follow the data record(s) they should update.


Insert Data Object

Scroll through the list and select the data object you wish to insert.


Insert Data Object

Scroll through the list and select the data object you wish to insert. Select OK to insert the object.


Cancel

Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Opens a help topic about this window.


Display Commands

Check this box to show all command objects on the form. They display as a red "C" inside a gray box.


Display Sample Data

Select this option to display sample data (xXXXX) or numeric templates (-NNNN.nn) for each data object. Clearing this option displays the actual data field name.


Display Order Numbers

Select this option to display the order numbers next to each object. Order numbers display as red numbers in a yellow block.


Display Ruler

Select this option to display a ruler on the top and left sides of the Forms Design window. The ruler will show inches or centimeters based on your selected grid options.


Display Margin Cropping

Select this option to have objects outside the margin be cropped or cut off at the margin.


Display Outline of OLE Objects

Select this option to place a dotted line or border around OLE objects. This outline is useful for placing the object; it does not print.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this dialog.


Cancel

Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to open a help topic about this window.


Number Format

Numbers that appear before the decimal point are designated with a capital N, and numbers that appear after the decimal point are designated with a lower case n. Press the Help button for more.


Read next file record

Select this option if you want the system to read the next record in the file. File records are usually entities (customers, vendors, employees).


Read next line item record

Select this option if you want the system to move to the next line item (as on invoices, checks, statements, etc.).


Command Object Type

Select a Read next file record command for entities (customers, vendors, employees) and a Read next line item record for line items (as on invoices, checks, statements, etc.).


Cancel

Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Click this button to open a help topic about this window.


Adjust objects up or down

Enter a number in inches to move the objects on the form vertically. Enter a negative number to move the form up and a positive number to move the form down.


Adjust objects left or right

Enter a number in inches to move the objects on the form horizontally. Enter a negative number to move the form to the left and a positive number to move the form to the right.


OK

Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Cancel

Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Click this button to open a help topic about this window.


Practice

After adjusting the form, click this button to test your adjustments.


Properties

Click this button to view the properties window for the highlighted object.


Properties drop-down list

This displays the order, type, and field property of the selected object.


Show Grid

Check this box to display intersecting lines that help you align objects on the form.


Lines or Dots

The grid can display as either lines or dots.


Lines or Dots

The grid can display as either lines or dots.


Inches or Centimeters

Each object's size and location coordinates, the design window ruler, and the cursor position box all reflect the measurement option you select.


Inches or Centimeters

Each object's size and location coordinates, the design window ruler, and the cursor position box all reflect the measurement option you select.


Snap to Grid

These options force objects to line up with the nearest horizontal or vertical grid line (whether shown or invisible).


Snap to Grid

These options force objects to line up with the nearest horizontal or vertical grid line (whether shown or invisible).


Number of Copies

The number of copies you select will default in the Windows Print dialog whenever you print this form.


Number of Copies

The number of copies you select will default in the Windows Print dialog whenever you print this form.


Move Object

Use the arrow keys to move the highlighted object up or down in the list.


Move Object

Use the arrow keys to move the highlighted object up or down in the list.


Edit

Opens the Properties window for the highlighted object.


Delete

Deletes the highlighted object, from the list and the form.


Print

Prints the Object Order list.


Order List

The list shows all objects on the form and the order in which they will print.


OK

Select OK to print using the Windows default printer.


Cancel

Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Click this button to open a help topic about this window.


OK

Select OK to print using the Windows default printer.


OK

Select OK to print using the Windows default printer.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Column (Grid) Heading Buttons

These headings identify the contents of a column in a table or grid.

To resize a column heading, move your mouse pointer over the line between two heading buttons, and drag your moe.

To sort the list based on a specific heading, double-click the column heading button.


Register

Select this button to update your registration information with a new product serial number.


Close

Select this button to close this window and exit Peachtree Accounting.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Register

Select this button to update your registration information with a new product serial number.


Close

Select this button to close this window and exit Peachtree Accounting.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


Another Peachtree User is Using the Same Serial Number

Two or more users on your network have started Peachtree using the same registered serial number. For more information about multiuser solutions, visit Peachtree's Web site or call the number mentioned in this message.

If you have recently purchased a new license and need to update your registration information, click the Register button.


OK

Select this button to close this window and exit Peachtree Accounting.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Another User is Accessing This Company

Two or more users have started Peachtree and are trying to access the same company data. Peachtree First Accounting does not have multiuser functionality. Select Help for more information.


Another User is Accessing This Company

Two or more users have started Peachtree and are trying to access the same company data. Peachtree First Accounting does not have multiuser functionality. Select Help for more information.


Another User is Accessing This Company

Two or more users have started Peachtree and are trying to access the same company data. Peachtree First Accounting does not have multiuser functionality. Select Help for more information.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Another User is Accessing This Company

Two or more users have started Peachtree and are trying to access the same company data. Peachtree First Accounting does not have multiuser functionality. Select Help for more information.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Another User is Accessing This Company

Two or more users have started Peachtree and are trying to access the same company data. Peachtree First Accounting does not have multiuser functionality. Select Help for more information.


Peachtree Software Web Address

If you have access to the Internet, click this text to learn more about multiuser solutions at the Peachtree Software Web site.


Peachtree Software Sales Phone Number

To purchase a multiuser version of Peachtree Complete Accounting, call Peachtree Software at this number.


Fast Add

Select this button if you want Peachtree to create a new record automatically for the ID you entered that is not in the database. Peachtree will create the record, and you can go on entering the transaction you were working on. Later, you can go to the appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) and enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Set Up

Select this button if you want to manually create a record for the ID you entered that is not in the database. The appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) will appear, and you can immediately enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Invalid ID

You see this window when you are creating a transaction and you enter an ID that is not currently in the database. You have two choices:

Fast Add: Select this button to have Peachtree automatically add a new record to the database for the ID. Later, you can go to the appropriate Maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) and enter information to complete the new record.

Set Up: Select this button if you want to manually add a record to the database for the ID. The appropriate Maintenance window will appear, and you can immediately enter information to complete the new record.


Invalid ID

Use this window to enter a record ID that is not currently in the database. You have two choices:

Fast Add: Select to have Peachtree automatically add a new record to the database for the ID. Later, you can go to the appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) and enter information to complete the new record.

Set Up: Select if you want to manually add a record to the database for the ID. The appropriate maintenance window will appear, and you can immediately enter information to complete the new record.


Fast Add

Select this button if you want Peachtree to create a new record automatically for the ID you entered that is not in the database. Peachtree will create the record, and you can go on entering the transaction you were working on. Later, you can go to the appropriate Maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) and enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Fast Add

Select this button if you want Peachtree to create a new record automatically for the ID you entered that is not in the database. Peachtree will create the record, and you can go on entering the transaction you were working on. Later, you can go to the appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) and enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Set Up

Select this button if you want to manually set up a record for the ID you entered that is not in the database. The appropriate Maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) will appear, and you can immediately enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Set Up

Select this button if you want to manually create a record for the ID you entered that is not in the database. The appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) will appear, and you can immediately enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Set Up

Select this button to manually create a record for the ID you entered that is not in the database. The appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Jobs) will appear, and you can enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Invalid ID

You see this window when you are creating a transaction and you enter an ID that is not currently in the database. Select the Set Up button to manually add a record to the database for the ID. The appropriate Maintenance window will appear, and you can enter information to complete the new record.


Invalid ID

Use this window to enter a record ID that is not currently in the database. Select the Set Up button to manually add a record to the database for the ID. The appropriate maintenance window will appear, and you can enter information to complete the new record.


Set Up

Select this button to manually create a record for the ID you entered that is not in the database. The appropriate maintenance window (for example, Maintain Vendors) will appear, and you can enter the pertinent information to complete the new record.


Help

Select the Help button to see online Help about this window.


Select a Pricing Level

This pricing level is used to start the calculation. Use one of the existing pricing levels, average cost, or last cost.


Select an Operation to Perform

This defines the mathematical operation to perform in the calculation. Increase or decrease the price by a percentage or a specific amount.


Enter a Numeric Value

Enter the specific amount or percentage to increase or decrease the price.


Calculated Item Price

This field displays the calculated priced based on the formula you set up.


Select the Rounding Amount

Indicate here the amount in which to round up the price. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (as defined in the field that appears to the right when this option is selected), or to the next whole dollar amount.


Enter a Numeric Value

Enter the specific amount to round the price.


Calculated Item Price

This field displays the calculated priced based on the formula you set up.


OK

Select this button to exit the window and save your changes.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Default

Select this button to reset all fields in this price calculation to their default values.


Help

Select this button to get help about this window.


Inventory Item Defaults: Price Levels (Item Defaults in First Accounting)

Use this tab to define the default price levels for items you have in stock. Changes in the default price levels will not affect individually priced items unless those items are reset to the default calculations. Changes in the default prices will affect all new items placed into inventory.

Price Level: The Peachtree system name for the price level.

Level Name: You can customize the name of each level to fit your business needs.

Enabled: To activate a price level, select the Enabled check box. If you decide not to use the field, clear the Enabled check box. If disabled, this price level is not available to any item.

Default Calculation: The current calculation for this price level.

Edit: Select the Edit button to amend the default calculation. Changes made here will only affect new items. Existing items will be affected only if they are reset to the default calculation.


Inventory Item Defaults: Price Levels (Item Defaults in First Accounting)

Use this tab to define the default price levels for items you have in stock. Changes in the default price levels will not affect individually priced items unless those items are reset to the default calculations. Changes in the default prices will affect all new items placed into inventory.


Default G/L Accounts

Enter or select  the default General Ledger accounts for each item's class of inventory. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

G/L Sales Account: This is typically Income type accounts for all item classes.

G/L Inventory/Wage Expense Account: For stock and assembly items, this an Inventory-type account; for non-stock, service, and labor accounts, this is typically use a salary or wage expense account.

G/L Cost of Sales Account: This is a Cost of Sales type account.

Costing Method: This identifies the default method (FIFO, LIFO, or Average Cost) used when costing stock and assembly items.


Default G/L Accounts

Enter or select  the default General Ledger accounts for each item class. To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.

G/L Sales Account: This is typically Income type accounts for all item classes.

G/L Inventory/Wage Expense Account: For stock and assembly items, this an inventory-type account; for non-stock, service, and labor accounts, this is typically use a salary or wage expense account. Note: Stock and assembly items do not apply to First Accounting.

G/L Cost of Sales Account: This is a Cost of Sales type account.

Costing Method (not in First Accounting): This identifies the default method (FIFO, LIFO, or Average Cost) used when costing stock and assembly items.


Default G/L Accounts

Enter or select  the default General Ledger accounts for each item class. You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click to add a new account. For stock and assembly items you must also select a Costing method (not available in First Accounting).


Default G/L Accounts

Enter or select  the default General Ledger accounts for each item class. You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click to add a new account. For stock and assembly items you must also select a Costing method (not available in First Accounting).


Default G/L Accounts

Enter or select  the default General Ledger accounts for each item class. You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click to add a new account. For stock and assembly items you must also select a Costing method (not available in First Accounting).


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click to add a new account.


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). You can either enter a ? to see a list of the accounts or press + or double-click to add a new account.


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


G/L Freight Account

Enter or select  the default General Ledger account that will be debited when charging freight during a sale (typically, Freight Expense). To display a list of existing accounts, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new account, type + or double-click the field.


Item Tax Type

These identify the different reasons for sales taxation and exemptions provided by your state. You enter up to 25 item tax types.

Field: The number here identifies the tax type. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Description: Enter a tax type description (for example, taxable, exempt, or food). You can enter only one taxable description.

Tax: Select this check box if the item is taxable.


Item Tax Type

These identify the different reasons for sales taxation and exemptions provided by your state. You enter up to 25 item tax types.

Field: The number here identifies the tax type. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Description: Enter a tax type description (for example, taxable, exempt, or food). You can enter only one taxable description.

Tax: Select this check box if the item is taxable.


Item Tax Type

These identify the different reasons for sales taxation and exemptions provided by your state. You enter up to 25 item tax types.

Field: The number here identifies the tax type. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Description: Enter a tax type description (for example, taxable, exempt, or food). You can enter only one taxable description.

Tax: Select this check box if the item is taxable.


Item Tax Type

These identify the different reasons for sales taxation and exemptions provided by your state. You enter up to 25 item tax types.

Field: The number here identifies the tax type. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Description: Enter a tax type description (for example, taxable, exempt, or food). You can enter only one taxable description.

Tax: Select this check box if the item is taxable.


Ship Methods

These identify the different reasons for sales taxation and exemptions provided by your state. You enter up to 10 different shipping methods.

Field: The number here identifies the shipping method. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Ship Method: Enter a shipping method (for example, courier, hand deliver, or best way). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Ship Methods

These identify the different shipping methods available for delivery of your company's items. You enter up to 10 different shipping methods.

Field: The number here identifies the shipping method. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Ship Method: Enter a shipping method (for example, courier, hand deliver, or best way). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Ship Methods

These identify the different shipping methods available for delivery of your company's inventory items. You enter up to 10 different shipping methods.

Field: The number here identifies the shipping method. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Ship Method: Enter a shipping method (for example, courier, hand deliver, or best way). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Ship Methods

These identify the different shipping methods available for delivery of your company's items. You enter up to 10 different shipping methods.

Field: The number here identifies the shipping method. This number is used by Peachtree Accounting and is for display only.

Ship Method: Enter a shipping method (for example, courier, hand deliver, or best way). You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Enabled Check Box

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.

If you decide not to use a field, clear the Enabled check box. The data will remain, but it will be inaccessible. If you decide you want to use the field again, select the Enabled check box.


Custom Field Labels

Custom fields allow you to store data unique to your business. Enter custom field labels here that identify the type of data you want displayed in the Maintain Inventory Items window.

To activate a custom field, select the Enabled check box; then enter the field label.


Calculate Price for

This displays the price level for which you are calculating a new price.


Select a Pricing Level

This pricing level is used to start the calculation. Use one of the existing pricing levels, current cost, last cost, or No Calculation.


Select an Operation to Perform

This defines the mathematical operation to perform in the calculation. Increase or decrease the price by a percentage or a specific amount.


Enter a Numeric Value

Enter the specific amount or percentage to increase or decrease the price.


Select the Rounding Amount

Indicate here the amount in which to round up the price. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (as defined in the field that appears to the right when this option is selected), or to the next whole dollar amount.


Enter a Numeric Value

Enter the specific amount to round the price.


OK

Select this button to exit the window and save your changes.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select this button to get help about this window.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Recalculate

Select this button to calculate price changes for the selected items based on the new price options you have chosen.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Item ID

This is the item ID for the current item.


Item ID

This is the description of the current item.


Quantity on Hand

This is the quantity of hand of the current item.


Last Cost

This is the last cost recorded for the current item.


Multiple Price Levels

Use this window to define different prices for the same item for different circumstances (for instance, sales, special customers, employee prices, etc.).

Level: The pricing level for this specific item. The pricing levels are defined in Inventory Defaults (in First Accounting called "Item Defaults").

Price: The item's calculated price for each pricing level.

Note: The following two fields are available only in Peachtree Complete and Peachtree Premium Accounting.

Calculation: The current calculation for this price level. You can enable and disable calculations on the Inventory Item Defaults window.

Edit: Select the Edit button to amend the calculation for this item. Changes made here will only affect this item. If you change this item from the default, changes in the default level (on the Inventory Item Defaults window) will not affect this item unless it is reset to the default.


Prices displayed in red....

When you see prices displayed in red, it's an indication that changes have been made to item prices and that the related item price levels don't reflect these changes. As an example, you might have changed Price Level 1 on the General tab of Maintain Inventory Items, but price levels with calculations based on Price Level 1 do not yet reflect this change (for example, a price level based on the calculation Price Level 1 + 10.00). Use the Recalculate button to update price levels to match the changes that have occurred.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to update sales-price information for the selected inventory items.


Select (Items)

Click this button to select a single item, a range of items, or all inventory items that will appear in the Maintain Item Prices window.


Print

Select this button to print a report of the item price changes displayed in this window.


All (Select)

Click this button to select all items listed in the displayed window.


All (None)

Click this button to clear the selection of all items listed in the displayed window.


Detail

Select this button to display additional information about the selected item. The information that appears is strictly for review purposes.


Recalculate

Select this button to calculate price changes for the selected items based on the new price options you have chosen.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Recalculate Prices

Select the check box next to the pricing level to have Peachtree update the price when the item's base price changes or a related pricing level changes.


Level's current calculation and new cost information

If this option is chosen, selected price levels and items that use cost or level one in calculating the price are recalculated based on the current cost or the updated level-one price. Recalculations using this option look at any item-level calculations you have set up (in Maintain Inventory Items).


Level's default calculation

If this option is chosen, each price level and item selected are recalculated using the calculation in Inventory Item Defaults. Any customized calculations you may have set up for individual items (in Maintain Inventory Items) are overridden.


Calculation selected below

If this option is chosen, any existing calculations for the selected price levels and items are overridden, based on the parameters you choose here.


Item/Description

The item ID and description appear here. To change the listed items, click the Select (Items) toolbar button.

Last Cost: This displays the last unit cost recorded for the item.

New Price/Price Level: The new price per price level will be the same until you manually change the item price or select a New Price option and click the Recalculate button.

Select: Select this check box next to each item for which you want to change item prices, or use the All or None button to select all items or none. (All are selected by default.)


Item/Description

The item ID and description appear here. To change the listed items, click the Select (Items) toolbar button.

Last Cost: This displays the last unit cost recorded for the item.

New Price/Price Level: The new price per price level will be the same until you manually change the item price or select a New Price option and click the Recalculate button.

Select: Select this check box next to each item for which you want to change item prices, or use the All or None button to select all items or none. (All are selected by default.)


Use

This pricing level is used to start the calculation. Use one of the existing pricing levels, average cost, or last cost.


Enter a Numeric Value

Enter the specific amount or percentage to increase or decrease the price by.


Enter an amount

Enter the specific amount to increase or decrease the price by.


Increase/Decrease by Percent

If you have chosen to increase/decrease the item price by percent, enter the desired percent value in this box.


Round New Value to

Enter the amount to round up the price by. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (as defined in the field that appears to the right when this option is selected), or to the next whole dollar amount.


Specific Cent

If you choose to round the price by a specific cent, enter the desired cent value in this box.


Increase/Decrease by Percent

If you have chosen to increase/decrease the item price by percent, enter the desired percent value in this box.


Horizontal Scroll Bar

Use this to scrool left and right through the Item List.


Price Calculation Definition

Calculate the price of the items selected by using one of the following criteria:

Level's current calcuation, and new cost information: Use the current calculation with no changes.

Level's default calculation: Use the default calculation set up in Inventory Item Defaults.

Calculation selected below: Override the calculations and specify your own using the criteria in the formula:

1. Select a pricing value to base the calculation on: Use one of the existing pricing levels, average cost, or last cost. The formula uses this unit price to start the calculation.

2. Select a mathematical operation to perform: Increase or decrease the price by a percentage or a specific amount.

3. Enter the numeric value to use in the operation: Enter the specific amount to increase or decrease the price.

4. Select the rounding amount for this operation: The price will round up to the amount indicated here. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (defined in the field to the right), or to the next whole dollar.


Price Calculation Definition

Calculate the price of the items selected by using one of the following criteria:

Level's current calcuation, and new cost information: Use the current calculation with no changes.

Level's default calculation: Use the default calculation set up in Inventory Item Defaults.

Calculation selected below: Override the calculations and specify your own using the criteria in the formula:

1. Select a pricing value to base the calculation on: Use one of the existing pricing levels, average cost, or last cost. The formula uses this unit price to start the calculation.

2. Select a mathematical operation to perform: Increase or decrease the price by a percentage or a specific amount.

3. Enter the numeric value to use in the operation: Enter the specific amount to increase or decrease the price.

4. Select the rounding amount for this operation: The price will round up to the amount indicated here. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (defined in the field to the right), or to the next whole dollar.


Use

This pricing level is used to start the calculation. Use one of the existing pricing levels, average cost, or last cost.


And

This defines the mathematical operation to perform in the calculation. Increase or decrease the price by a percentage or a specific amount.


Round New Value to

Enter the amount to round up the price by. Select from no rounding, round to a specific cent (as defined in the field that appears to the right when this option is selected), or to the next whole dollar amount.


UPC / SKU

Select this if you want items to be able to share UPC/SKU (Universal Price Code/Stock Keeping Unit) values.


UPC / SKU

Select this if you want inventory items to be able to share UPC/SKU (Universal Price Code/Stock Keeping Unit) values.


UPC / SKU

Select this if you want inventory items to be able to share UPC/SKU (Universal Price Code/Stock Keeping Unit) values.


Quantity Available

Select this if you want Peachtree to consider the number of units of an item appearing on purchase orders when calculating an item's quantity available.


Quantity Available

Select this if you want Peachtree to consider the number of units of an item appearing on purchase orders when calculating an item's quantity available.


Quantity Available

Select this if you want Peachtree to consider the number of units of an item appearing on purchase orders when calculating an item's quantity available.


Sales Invoice \ Receipt Out of Stock Warning Message

These options tell Peachtree whether or not to warn you, when entering invoices or receipts, that an item is out of stock. Select the appropriate option to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned, that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand, or that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


Sales Invoice \ Receipt Out of Stock Warning Message

These options tell Peachtree whether or not to warn you, when entering invoices or receipts, that an item is out of stock. Select the appropriate option to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned, that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand, or that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


Do not warn me

Select this to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned when an item is out of stock.


Warn if inventory item is out of stock based on quantity on hand

Select this to tell Peachtree that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand.


Warn if inventory item is out of stock based on quantity available

Select this to tell Peachtree that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


Sales Order Out of Stock Warning Message

These options tell Peachtree whether or not to warn you, when entering sales orders, that an item is out of stock. Select the appropriate option to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned, that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand, or that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


Sales Order Out of Stock Warning Message

These options tell Peachtree whether or not to warn you, when entering sales orders, that an item is out of stock. Select the appropriate option to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned, that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand, or that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


Do not warn me

Select this to tell Peachtree that you don't want to be warned when an item is out of stock.


Warn if inventory item is out of stock based on quantity on hand

Select this to tell Peachtree that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity on hand.


Warn if inventory item is out of stock based on quantity available

Select this to tell Peachtree that you want to be warned when an item is out of stock based on quantity available.


OK

For entry, select this button once you have entered your account password.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window without saving any changes you have made.


Password

Enter your account password here, and then select the OK button.


Close

Select this to close the window.


View Error Log

Select this to view the data verification error log.  The log lists all errors encountered during the tests, the start and finish times for the tests, and all changes made during verification, including any corrupt data records deleted.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Data Verification Complete

This dialog appears when the data verification tests have been successfully completed. The text at the top of the window will tell you how many errors Peachtree found and corrected during the tests. For detailed information about the tests, select View Error Log.


Data Verification Complete

This dialog appears when the data verification tests have been successfully completed. The text at the top of the window will tell you how many errors Peachtree found and corrected during the tests. For detailed information about the tests, select View Error Log.


OK

Select OK to search for the information entered.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without printing any receipts.


First Receipt Number

Enter the number of the first receipt you want to print.


Last Receipt Date

This displays the date of the last receipt that was printed by Peachtree Accounting. You cannot edit this field; it is only for display.


Welcome

This is the Peachtree Conversion wizard. It walks you through the process of converting a company that is not compatible with the version of Peachtree you're currently running. To continue converting the company to the new format, click Next.


Confirm Company to Convert

This window shows the name of the company you want to convert, as well as its datapath information and release number. If the listed company is not the one you want to convert, select Cancel, and then open the company you want to convert.


Company Name

This is the name of the company you want to convert. Confirm that it is the correct company.


Company Name

This is the name of the company you want to convert. Confirm that it is the correct company.


Location

This is the datapath of the company you want to convert.


Release

This is the release number of the company you want to convert.


Upgrading to

This is the version of Peachtree you want to convert the company to.


Release

This is the release number of Peachtree you want to convert the company to.


Include company name in file name.

Select the check box if you want to include your company's name in the name of the file generated during data backup.


Back Up

Select this button to start backing up company data.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


Data Conversion in Progress

The progress bar at the center of the window graphically represents how much of the conversion process is complete. Be sure not to interrupt the process.


If you have an authorization number...

The read-only text to the left of the text box indicates your company is not authorized for Peachtree direct deposit. If you have an authorization code, enter it and select OK. You will then be able to enter company information needed to set up direct deposit.


OK

Select this once you have entered your company direct deposit authorization code.


Learn

Select this to see more information on Peachtree direct deposit on the direct deposit authorization code.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Peachtree has detected...

The read-only text indicates that your company is not authorized for Peachtree direct deposit. If you have an authorization code, enter it and select OK to enter company information needed to set up direct deposit.


Peachtree has detected...

The read-only text indicates that your company is not authorized for Peachtree direct deposit. If you have an authorization code, enter it and select OK to enter company information needed to set up direct deposit.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Save

Select this button to record the information entered in the window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Company Name

This is the name of the company to which direct deposit information applies.


Active

This indicates whether or not the company currently uses Peachtree direct deposit.


Checking

Select this if you want to debit the company checking account for direct deposits.


Savings

Select this if you want to debit the company savings account for direct deposits.


Bank Account Number

Enter the account number of the company account you want to use for direct deposit. This number appears at the bottom of your company's bank checks.


Routing/Transit Number

Enter the routing/transit number of the company account you want to use for direct deposit. This number appears at the bottom of your company's bank checks.


Reset Account

Use this to reset company account information whenever your company's direct deposit pre-note status is either pending or approved. To reset, enter the new account information, and then click the button.


Cash Account

For each direct deposit transaction, Peachtree will create a journal entry crediting this cash account. Select the account you want to act as cash account.


Fee Expense Account

This is the account you want to debit for fees charged on direct deposit transactions. Peachtree will create a general journal entry based on the chosen account.


Pre-Note Status

This reflects whether or not you have successfully sent a pre-note to KeyBank, the third-party financial institution that transmits ACH data and direct deposit funds to an employee's bank. You can't edit this field.


Status Date

This displays the date of the latest pre-note that you have sent. If you have not sent a pre-note, the date that appears is the current system date. You can't edit this field.


Status Information

This read-only text tells you about your company's current pre-note status.


Cash Account Name

This is the name of the cash account that is credited in a Peachtree journal entry each time your company completes a direct deposit transaction.


Fee Expense Account

This is the name of the account debited for direct deposit fee expenses. Peachtree will create a general journal entry based on this account.


Important!

This read-only information tells you that when you enter a paycheck transaction, that transaction date is the date when the paycheck will be deposited in the employee's account. However, in order for the check to be deposited on that date, you must syncronize it three business days before the actual deposit date.


Important!

This read-only information tells you that when you enter a paycheck transaction, that transaction date is the date when the paycheck will be deposited in the employee's account. However, in order for the check to be deposited on that date, you must syncronize it three business days before the actual deposit date.


Reset Direct Deposit Account

If you want to reset direct deposit account information so that you can enter new information, type Yes in the text box. The Direct Deposit window will return with all fields cleared and ready to receive the new information.


OK

Select this button to save your changes and return to the previous window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


ID

This is the ID of the employee displayed in the Payroll Entry window. It is for display only; you cannot change the ID.


Employee

This is the name of the employee displayed in the Payroll Entry window. It is for display only; you cannot change the name.


Direct Deposit Allocations

Listed below are the allocations for the four direct deposit accounts set up for this employee on the Direct Deposit tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.


Direct Deposit Allocations

Account: These are the four direct deposit accounts set up for the employee on the Direct Deposit tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Distribution: This displays the percentage or fixed dollar amount to be distributed to each account. If the word Remainder appears for an account, it was set up as a Remainder account.

Amount: This is the total dollar amount of the distribution to each direct deposit account.


Direct Deposit Allocations

Account: These are the four direct deposit accounts set up for the employee on the Direct Deposit tab of the Maintain Employees/Sales Reps window.

Distribution: This displays the percentage or fixed dollar amount to be distributed to each account. If the word Remainder appears for an account, it was set up as a Remainder account.

Amount: This is the total dollar amount of the distribution to each direct deposit account.


Backup Automatically

Select this check box to have Peachtree start the online backup process automatically.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


Backup Day

Select the check box to indicate the day(s) an automatic backup will be performed.

Note: You can select more than one day.


From spin control

The From time indicates the earliest time an automatic backup can be started. Using the spin control, select or enter a time in the From field.


From

The From time indicates the earliest time an automatic backup can be started. Either select or enter a time in the From field, making sure that you include the AM and PM.


To spin control

The To time indicates the latest  time an automatic backup can be started. Using the control, select a time in the To field.


To

The To time indicates the latest  time an automatic backup can be started. Either select or enter a time in the To field, making sure that you include the AM and PM.


Backup Time

The backup time tells Peachtree to start a backup when you connect to the internet if a backup has not been made in a specific time period. The specific time period is called the backup time. Select the backup time from the list. Examples of backup times include the following: 12 hours, 24 hours, 2 days, 5 days, and 7 days.


Prompt Settings

Prompts allow you to better control when online backups are started. You can have Peachtree display the following prompts:

Prompt for backup each time Windows exits--select this check box if you want Peachtree to display an online backup prompt 	every time you exit Windows.

Ask before proceeding with any automatic backup, allowing it to be deffered.--select this check box if you want Peachtree to 	display an online backup prompt before starting an automatic backup. This option allows to you defer the backup for a specic time period. 	Specify how long to defer the backup, by selecting a time period from the list.


Prompt Settings

Prompts allow you to better control when online backups are started. You can have Peachtree display the following prompts:

Prompt for backup each time Windows exits--select this check box if you want Peachtree to display an online backup prompt 	every time you exit Windows.

Ask before proceeding with any automatic backup, allowing it to be deffered.--select this check box if you want Peachtree to 	display an online backup prompt before starting an automatic backup. This option allows to you defer the backup for a specic time period. 	Specify how long to defer the backup, by selecting a time period from the list.


Back up when I connect to the internet

Select the check box to start a backup when you connnect to the internet if a backup has not been made in a specific time period. You select the time period from the drop down list. Examples of time periods include the following: 12 hours, 24 hours, 2 days, 5 days, and 7 days.


Prompt Settings

Prompts allow you to better control when online backups are started. You can have Peachtree display the following prompts:

Prompt for backup each time Windows exits--select this check box if you want Peachtree to display an online backup prompt 	every time you exit Windows.

Ask before proceeding with any automatic backup, allowing it to be deffered.--select this check box if you want Peachtree to 	display an online backup prompt before starting an automatic backup. This option allows to you defer the backup for a specic time period. 	Specify how long to defer the backup, by selecting a time period from the list.


Company List

The company list shows the companies that you have selected for online backup. Included in the list is the company name and path. When you want to remove a company or start an immediate backup, select the company name from the Company List first; then select the appropriate button.


Backup All Now

Select Backup All Now to start an immediate backup all companies the list.

Note: You cannot make a backup of a single company. When you select Backup All Now, all companies in the list will be backed up. If you want to back up a single company, remove the companies that you don't want to back up from the list.


Add Company

Select Add Company to specify the Peachtree company you want to back up online. Once you select the Add Company button, Peachtree will display the Select Company to Add window, which allows you to pick the company name from a list of Peachtree companies.


Remove Company

Select Remove Company after you select a company from the list. Remove Company removes the company you selected from the list of files to be backed up.

Note: The Remove Company button will only be accessible after a company has been selected from the list.


Select the company you want to restore

Select the company that you want to restore from the list.


Peachtree Information to Restore

Peachtree allows you to choose which information to restore for your company. You can choose from or select all of the following:

Company information--Select this check box to restore all of the company information.

Unprocessed web transactions--Select this check box to restore any unprocessed web transactions.

Standard and custom form files--Select this check box to restore all standard or custom forms.


Peachtree Information to Restore

Peachtree allows you to choose which information to restore for your company. You can choose from or select all of the following:

Company information--Select this check box to restore all of the company information.

Unprocessed web transactions--Select this check box to restore any unprocessed web transactions.

Standard and custom form files--Select this check box to restore all standard or custom forms.


Select the restore date

Select the backup date that you want to restore from the list. Dates listed indicate when a complete backup (which may include multiple companies) was made.


Restore Now

Select the Restore Now button to start the restore process. The backup that will be restored corresponds with the date you selected in the Select the restore date field.


Peachtree Information to Restore

Peachtree allows you to choose which information to restore for your company. You can choose from or select all of the following:

Company information--Select this check box to restore all of the company information.

Unprocessed web transactions--Select this check box to restore any unprocessed web transactions.

Standard and custom form files--Select this check box to restore all standard or custom forms


OK

Select this button to save your changes and return to the previous window.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Fiscal Year

This is the fiscal year that has been chosen in Maintain Budgets. Select the Adjust Budget for the Year option to copy budget information for this year.


Adjust Budget for the Year

Select this option to copy a budget amount throughout the accounting periods of a chosen fiscal year. The text box next to the option shows which fiscal year has been chosen in Maintain Budgets.


Copy from Budget Year

Select this option to copy budget information for a chosen fiscal year to another fiscal year. The text box next to the option shows which fiscal year has been chosen in Maintain Budgets. To change the year, select a new one from the drop-down list.


Copy from Budget Year (list box)

The list box shows the fiscal year to which budget information will be copied. To change the year, select a new one from the drop-down list.


To Budget Year

Use the drop-down list to select the fiscal year to which you want to copy budget information.


Adjust Options/Copy Options

If you have chosen the Adjust Budget for the Year option, the group box will contain options for copying budget information throughout the chosen fiscal year. This includes distributing a total amount throughout the accounting periods of the fiscal year, if you have entered a total amount for the year in Maintain Budgets. To distribute the total amount, choose the Allocate option.

If you have chosen Copy from Budget Year, the group box will contain options for copying budget information from one fiscal year to another.


Period Ending

This displays the end date of the accounting period chosen in Maintain Budgets.


Amount

This displays the budget amount you are copying from the displayed accounting period to other periods in the fiscal year.


Period Ending

This displays the accounting period from which you are copying the budget amount to other periods in the fiscal year.


Amount

This displays the budget amount you are copying from the displayed accounting period to other periods in the fiscal year.


Copy

If you are copying a budget amount from one accounting period to others in single fiscal you, you can choose whether you want to copy that amount upward or downward through the periods of the year.


Down

Select this option if you want to copy the displayed budget amount downward through the periods in the fiscal year.


Up

Select this option if you want to copy the displayed budget amount upward through the periods in the fiscal year.


Allocate

If you have chosen the total budget amount for the selected fiscal year in Maintain Budgets, you can choose to allocate that total amount to all accounting periods throughout the year.


Copies the amount selected...

You will be copying the amount you entered in the selected accounting period in Maintain Budgets. Peachtree will copy the amount either upward or downward throughout the remaining periods of the year. If you choose a calculation method below, that calculation will be applied to the amount copied.


Allocate

If you have chosen the total budget amount for the selected fiscal year in Maintain Budgets, you can choose to allocate that total amount to all accounting periods throughout the year.


No Increase/Decrease to amount

If desired, you can apply a calculation method to the budget amount you are copying or allocating. This includes increasing or decreasing the entered budget amount either by a desired amount or percentage. You can also round the newly created value to the next thousandths of a dollar or to the next whole dollar amount. If do not you want to apply a calculation method, select No Increase/Decrease to amounts.


Calculation selected below

If desired, you can apply a calculation method to the budget amount you are copying or allocating. This includes increasing or decreasing the entered budget amount either by a desired amount or percentage. You can also round the newly created value to the next thousandths of a dollar or to the next whole dollar amount. If you want to apply a calculation method, choose the Calculation selected below option.


Calculation Method

From the drop-down list, choose a calculation method. For example, Increase by Amount or Increase by Percent.


Amount or Percent

Depending on your chosen calculation method enter either an amount or percent here.


Percent to decrease/increase budget amounts by

The percent sign indicates you have chosen to increase or decrease budget amounts by a certain percentage. Enter the desired percentage in the text box.


Round New Value to

Use the drop-down list to choose from three options: to apply no rounding to the calculation, to round the calculation to the nearest thousandth of a dollar, or to round the calculation to whole dollars.


Round New Value to

Use the drop-down list to choose from three options: to apply no rounding to the calculation, to round the calculation to the nearest thousandth of a dollar, or to round the calculation to whole dollars.


Copy Budget for

Use the drop-down list to select the account or accounts for which you want to copy budget information from one fiscal year to another.


Copy Budget for

Use the drop-down list to select the account or accounts for which you want to copy budget information from one fiscal year to another.


Select the account or accounts...

Use the Copy the Budget for drop-down list to select the account or accounts for which you want to copy budget information from one fiscal year to another.


Dollar amount to decrease/increase budget amounts by

The dollar sign indicates you have chosen to increase or decrease budget amounts by a certain dollar amount. Enter the desired amount in the text box.


Select Method of Adjustment

If desired, you can apply a calculation method to the budget amount you are copying or allocating. This includes increasing or decreasing the entered budget amount either by a desired amount or percentage. You can also round the newly created value to the next thousandths of a dollar or to the next whole dollar amount. If you want to apply a calculation method, choose the Calculation selected below option. Otherwise, select No Increase/Decrease to amounts.


Select Method of Adjustment

If desired, you can apply a calculation method to the budget amount you are copying or allocating. This includes increasing or decreasing the entered budget amount either by a desired amount or percentage. You can also round the newly created value to the next thousandths of a dollar or to the next whole dollar amount. If you want to apply a calculation method, choose the Calculation selected below option. Otherwise, select No Increase/Decrease to amounts.


OK

Select this button to close the window.


Help

Select the Help button to see online Help for this window.


Check your desired options.


Authorize Peachtree Payroll Service

The current company is not authorized for the Peachtree Payroll Service. In the text box at the middle of the window, enter your company's Peachtree Payroll Service authorization code.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Authorize Peachtree Payroll Service

The current company is not authorized for the Peachtree Payroll Service. In the text box at the middle of the window, enter your company's Peachtree Payroll Service authorization code.


Open Accounting Periods

This lists all open accounting periods in your open fiscal and payroll tax years. (Payroll tax years do not apply to First Accounting.) To change to one of the open periods, select it in the list, and then click the OK button at the top of the window.


Current Accounting Period

This window shows the currently active accounting period for your company.


First Open Fiscal Year

This window shows the first of your company's two open fiscal years.


Second Open Fiscal Year

This window shows the second of your company's two open fiscal years.


First Open Payroll Tax Year

This window shows the first of your company's two open payroll tax years.


Second Open Payroll Tax Year

This window shows the second of your company's two open payroll tax years.


Toolbar Buttons

These buttons have the following functions:

Cancel: Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.

OK: Select this button to save changes and close this window.

Help: Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


OK

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Open Payroll Tax Years

This group box lists your company's two open payroll tax years.


E-mail List

Select an item from this list to display previously-entered e-mail addresses below. You can display all e-mail addresses or only cusotmer, employee/sales rep, vendor, or company e-mail addresses.


Customer Rep (Automatic Address)

Select this check box to have Peachtree automatically insert the customer's e-mail address that is associated with the alert condition.


Vendor (Automatic Address)

Select this check box to have Peachtree automatically insert the vendor's e-mail address that is associated with the alert condition.


Employee/Sales Rep (Automatic Address)

Select this check box to have Peachtree automatically insert the employee/sales rep's e-mail address that is associated with the alert condition.


E-mail Address List

This list displays previously-entered e-mail addresses for customers, vendors, employees, sales reps, and/or companies. The e-mail addresses that display are based on the option you selected from the drop-down E-mail List field. Select the check box next to the name of the e-mail address you want this e-mail message sent to.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Add

Select this button to add the e-mail addresses you have selected from the address book to the recipient field of an alert e-mail message.


Help

Select the Help button to see online Help for this window.


Start

Select this to begin the data verification process.


Cancel

Select this to stop the verification process.


Data Reliability

Select this option to verify that all data files within your Peachtree company are set up correctly and use the proper, required format.


Data Access

Select this option to verify that your data path is valid and that Peachtree can access all your data files successfully. For example, you data may be stored on a network. This test searches for all linked Peachtree data files for the current open company.


Data Reliability

Select this option to verify that all data files within your Peachtree company are set up correctly and use the proper, required format. If any data errors are found during the test, in most cases Peachtree will try to correct them for you.


Data Access

Select this option to verify that your data path is valid and that Peachtree can access all your data files successfully. For example, you data may be stored on a network. This test searches for all linked Peachtree data files for the current open company.


Both Tests (recommended)

Select this option to run both the data reliability and data access test. Peachtree recommends that you select this option.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Cancel

Select this to stop the data verification process.


Total Progress

This progress meter graphically displays how much of the verification process has been completed. The text above the meter will show how many of the individual record sets (customer records, vendor records, accounts, items, and so forth) have been tested thus far.


Checking...

This progress meter shows how much of each individual part of the test has been completed. For example, when Peachtree is testing customer records, the static text above the meter will read "Checking Customers...."


Total Progress

This progress meter graphically displays how much of the verification process has been completed. The static text above the right side of the meter will show how many of the individual record sets (customer records, vendor records, accounts, items, and so forth) have been tested thus far.


Checking...

This progress meter shows how much of each individual part of the test has been completed. For example, when Peachtree is testing customer records, the static text above the meter will read "Checking Customers...."

The static text above the right side of the meter will show what percent of the current part of the test has been completed.


Total Progress

This progress meter graphically displays how much of the verification process has been completed. The static text above the right side of the meter will show how many of the individual record sets (customer records, vendor records, accounts, items, and so forth) have been tested thus far.


Checking...

This progress meter shows how much of each individual part of the test has been completed. For example, when Peachtree is testing customer records, the static text above the meter will read "Checking Customers...."

The static text above the right side of the meter will show what percent of the current part of the test has been completed.


Save

If you are using the Real-Time posting method, this button saves and posts the displayed transaction to your journals.

If you're using the Batch posting method, this button saves the transaction information without posting it.


Print

This button works like a drop-down list. In its drop-down state, the button reveals an additional three selections, Preview, Postage, and Report. To see the additional selection, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Print button.

Print: Click this button to print the appropriate disbursement check form.

Preview: Click this button to see onscreen how the chosen check form will look once printed.

Postage: Click this button to buy and print postage online through the Peachtree Internet Postage Service.


Recur

Select this button to set up repeating journal entries for the displayed transaction for future months or accounting periods. You can change or delete a recurring entry at any time.


New

Select the New button to clear the displayed transaction and enter a new one.


Journal (Accounting Behind the Screens)

Select this button to display the Accounting Behind the Screens window, which lists the transaction's corresponding journal entry.

Note: If the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option is activated, you must use Accounting Behind the Screens to change G/L accounts for an individual transaction.


Event

Select this button to display the Create Event window. It allows you to schedule an event for a customer/prospect, vendor, or employee/sales representative. You can also use it to see detail on system generated-events. You can use this to log notes about telephone calls, meetings, letters, or any other type of activity. You can use this to create a listing of future activity as well.


Write Checks

This allows you to write checks for payments that don't have a vendor invoice and where there is no need to track inventory. (Inventory tracking is not possible in First Accounting.) You can also write a check to a customer.


Write Checks

This allows you to write checks for payments that don't have a vendor invoice and where there is no need to track inventory. (Inventory tracking is not possible in First Accounting.) You can also write a check to a customer.


Company Name

This identifies the name of your company.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this check. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Vendor ID

Enter or select a vendor ID to associate with this check. To display a list of existing vendors, type ? in this field, or select the Lookup button. To add a new vendor, type + or double-click the field.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name of a vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, this field appears automatically. You can change it for this payment, if necessary.


Pay to the Order of

Use this to enter the name of a vendor you don't want to store in the vendor list. If the vendor is entered, this field appears automatically. You can change it for this payment, if necessary.


Check Number

Leave the check number blank if you want to print a check.

Enter a number only if the check has already been written. This will ensure that a second check is not written to the vendor because Peachtree will print the word "DUPLICATE" on the check. You can enter any number, using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Check Number

Leave the check number blank if you want to print a check.

Enter a number only if the check has already been written. This will ensure that a second check is not written to the vendor because Peachtree will print the word "DUPLICATE" on the check. You can enter any number, using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.


Date

Enter or select the date of the check, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Date

Enter or select the date of the check, if different from the current date. The first day of the accounting period appears if you are not in the current period. To choose a date, click the calendar button to the immediate right of the Date field.

Note: You can only enter dates for new transactions in the current or future accounting periods.


Check Amount

Enter the total amount of the check you are writing.


Check Amount

Enter the total amount of the check you are writing.


Address

This is the address of the vendor. If you entered an existing vendor ID, Peachtree will fill in the address for you. Otherwise, you can enter the address, if desired.


Address

This is the address of the vendor. If you entered an existing vendor ID, Peachtree will fill in the address for you. Otherwise, you can enter the address, if desired.


Address

This is the address of the vendor. If you entered an existing vendor ID, Peachtree will fill in the address for you. Otherwise, you can enter the address, if desired.


Address

This is the address of the vendor. If you entered an existing vendor ID, Peachtree will fill in the address for you. Otherwise, you can enter the address, if desired.


Address

This is the address of the vendor. If you entered an existing vendor ID, Peachtree will fill in the address for you. Otherwise, you can enter the address, if desired.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only, not on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can include it in the design of your check form.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account

Enter or select the General Ledger account ID to which you want to apply the payment. This would generally be a cash (checking) account.

If you have the Hide General Ledger Accounts global option activated, the Cash Account lookup list displays only names of cash accounts currently set up in the chart of accounts. Select the name of the cash account to apply to this payment. If you want to apply an alternate G/L account (an account that uses an account type other than Cash) for this transaction, you must select the Journal button.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Cash Account Balance

If you are using real-time posting, this displays the amount in the selected G/L account based on the transaction date.

If you are using batch posting, this displays the unposted transactions you entered for invoices, receipts, payments, or the general journal.

If the word "Uncalculated" appears in this field, select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed. This button is not available if you selected the Recalculate Cash Balance in Receipts and Payments global option.


Recalculate

Select the Recalculate button to update the cash balance displayed in the window. Each time you select this button, the cash balance is updated based on the date of the displayed transaction.

This button is not available if you have the Recalculate cash balance automatically in Receipts and Payments global option activated.


Expense Account

Enter or select the General Ledger expense account to use when recording this purchase. If you chose an existing vendor ID, the expense account you entered in Maintain Vendors window. If the vendor is a new one, the purchase account set up in Maintain/Default information/Vendors is used.


Expense Account

Enter or select the General Ledger expense account to use when recording this purchase. If you chose an existing vendor ID, the expense account you entered in Maintain Vendors window. If the vendor is a new one, the purchase account set up in Maintain/Default information/Vendors is used.


Split

This lets you make multiple line-item distributions if the check you are writing requires it.


Memo

You can enter anything you want here. The default is the contents of the Account # field from the Maintain Vendors window. Your entry in this Memo field appears on the window only, not on the check itself. If you want to have a memo print on the actual check, you can include it in the design of your check form.


Check Amount

The check amount that you have entered in the $ text box appears here.


Description

This identifies the purpose of the payment. It will appear on the check stub, if printed. Enter up to 30 characters for the description.


Description

This identifies the purpose of the payment. It will appear on the check stub, if printed. Enter up to 30 characters for the description.


Job

Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.


Job

Enter or select a customer job ID to associate with this transaction, if you are tracking job cost.


Write Checks

This window allows you to write checks for payments that don't have a vendor invoice and where there is no need to track inventory. Note: Inventory tracking is not possible in First Accounting.


Void

This will appear if the currently displayed check has been voided.


Open

Select this button to display a previously entered transaction.


Balance includes unposted transactions...

If your company uses the batch posting method, this tells you that the displayed Balance amount includes transactions not posted as of the displayed date.


Balance includes unposted transactions...

If your company uses the batch posting method, this tells you that the displayed Balance amount includes transactions not posted as of the displayed date.


Balance includes unposted transactions...

If your company uses the batch posting method, this tells you that the displayed Balance amount includes transactions not posted as of the displayed date.


Close

Select this button to exit the window without saving any work that has been entered since the last save.


Delete

This button drops down a menu of delete options. These include:

Delete: Click this button to delete the displayed disbursement check.

Void: Click this button to void the displayed check.


Help

This button drops down a menu of Help options. These include:

About this Window: The first option opens online Help for the current window.

How Do I…: The second option opens the appropriate How Do I? topic for the window, such as "How Do I: Customers, Sales and Receipts" or "How Do I: Vendors, Purchases and Payments."

What's This: The third option turns your cursor into an arrow with question mark. Place the cursor on any field and then left click to see context-sensitive Help for that field.


Back and Next buttons

Use these to navigate through the list of existing data records. The buttons are usually located to the right of the appropriate record field. Select Back (left arrow) to see the previous record in the list; select Next (right arrow) to see the next record.


Write Checks

This window allows you to write checks for payments that don't have a vendor invoice and where there is no need to track inventory. Note: Inventory tracking is not possible in First Accounting.


Check Amount

The check amount that you have entered in the $ text box appears here.


Address

If desired, you can enter the vendor's country in this box.


Unbalanced Split

This tells you that the check amount you have entered in Write Checks does not match the amount of the total distributions you made in the Split Transaction window. The window tells you the amount of the check you have written, the total amount of distributions you have made, and the amount that remains to be distributed.


Adjust the balance

Select this button if you want to return to the Split Transaction window and adjust the amount of the distributions you have made.


Adjust the check

Select this button if you want to return to the Write Checks window and adjust the amount of the check to match the amount of the distributions you have made.


OK

Select this button to close the window and return to either the Split Transaction or Write Checks window.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window and return to the Split Transaction window, where you can adjust distribution amounts if desired.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Credit Card Information

Your customers can use a credit card to pay for goods and services that your business provides. The Credit Card Information window is used to enter your customer's credit card payment information and authorize the credit card transaction.


Cardholder's Name

Enter the cardholder's name exactly as it appears on the credit card. Typically, this is an individual's name rather than a business name.

If you attempt to authorize a credit card payment using the SurePay gateway service, you must provide a first and last name in Peachtree's Cardholder Name field. SurePay requires that you enter the Cardholder Name as

<FirstName><Space><LastName>.

The Cardholder Name field must contain at least one space. That single space cannot be at the beginning or end of the cardholder's complete name. SurePay will accept only the first 32 characters of the cardholder's name. (Peachtree allows you to enter more than 32 characters.) The cardholder name entered in Peachtree will appear the same in SurePay's transaction report. For example, if you enter "Smith, John" (Last Name, First Name) in Peachtree, this is how it will display on your SurePay transaction reports.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card Service authorizes the credit card payment, the Cardholder Name and Billing Address fields are disabled (not available to edit).


Cardholder's Name

Enter the cardholder's name exactly as it appears on the credit card. Typically, this is an individual's name rather than a business name.

If you attempt to authorize a credit card payment using the SurePay gateway service, you must provide a first and last name in Peachtree's Cardholder's Name field. SurePay requires that you enter the Cardholder Name as

<FirstName><Space><LastName>.

The Cardholder Name field must contain at least one space. That single space cannot be at the beginning or end of the cardholder's complete name. SurePay will accept only the first 32 characters of the cardholder's name. (Peachtree allows you to enter more than 32 characters.) The cardholder name entered in Peachtree will appear the same in SurePay's transaction report. For example, if you enter "Smith, John" (Last Name, First Name) in Peachtree, this is how it will display on your SurePay transaction reports.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card Service authorizes the credit card payment, the Cardholder Name and Billing Address fields are disabled (not available to edit).


Cardholder's Billing Address

Enter the billing address associated with the cardholder's credit card account.


Cardholder's Billing Address

Enter the billing address associated with the cardholder's credit card account.


Cardholder's Billing Address

Enter the billing address associated with the cardholder's credit card account.


City, State, ZIP Code

City:  Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.

State: Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).

ZIP Code: Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


City

Enter the city in which your customer resides. You can enter up to 20 characters.


State

Enter a two-character state abbreviation for your customer's address. Use the standard U.S. state abbreviations, Military Americans (AA), Military Europe (AE), District of Columbia (DC), Puerto Rico (PR), and U.S. Virgin Islands (VI).


ZIP Code

Enter the five-digit or nine-digit U.S. ZIP Code for your customer's address. You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters, allowing Canadian and other formats, if needed.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Country

Enter the country where the customer is located. This field is optional. You only need to enter a country if you do business outside the United States.


Comment

This field is for information purposes only and is not used during the authorization process for credit cards. However, comment information is collected by the Peachtree credit card processing service and used in online transaction reports. To help manage your transactions online, you might want to enter the associated customer ID, invoice number, or other help reference number that will assist in reconciling receipts.


Comment

This field is for information purposes only and is not used during the authorization process for credit cards. However, comment information is collected by the Peachtree credit card processing service and used in online transaction reports. To help manage your transactions online, you might want to enter the associated customer ID, invoice number, or other help reference number that will assist in reconciling receipts.


Receipt Date

This represents the credit card transaction's authorization date. The date field is initially transposed from the original Peachtree receipt. To change these values, you must return to the Receipts or Sales/Invocing > Receipt Payment window.

Note: If you authorize credit card transactions using the Peachtree Credit Card Service, all authorized transaction amounts will be processed (settled) by the SurePay payment service at the daily Batch Settlement Time you have set up at the SurePay Manager Web site. The default Batch Settlement Time is approximately 6:00 P.M. (Pacific time) each the day that authorizations are requested, which can be changed to suit your business needs. Contact your merchant account provider to determine when funds are deposited into your business checking accounts.


Receipt Date

This represents the credit card transaction's authorization date. The date field is initially transposed from the original Peachtree receipt. To change these values, you must return to the Receipts or Sales/Invocing > Receipt Payment window.

Note: If you authorize credit card transactions using the Peachtree Credit Card Service, all authorized transaction amounts will be processed (settled) by the SurePay payment service at the daily Batch Settlement Time you have set up at the SurePay Manager Web site. The default Batch Settlement Time is approximately 6:00 P.M. (Pacific time) each the day that authorizations are requested, which can be changed to suit your business needs. Contact your merchant account provider to determine when funds are deposited into your business checking accounts


Receipt Amount

This represents the credit card transaction's authorization amount. The amount field is initially transposed from the original Peachtree receipt. To change this value, you must return to the Receipts or Sales/Invocing > Receipt Payment window.


Receipt Amount

This represents the credit card transaction's authorization amount. The amount field is initially transposed from the original Peachtree receipt. To change this value, you must return to the Receipts or Sales/Invocing > Receipt Payment window.


Credit Card Number

This identifies the credit card account number to authorize and charge for the amount of the Peachtree transaction. You can enter dashes (-), spaces, or slashes (/) as separators, if you would like. All non-numeric characters will be removed behind the scenes prior to requesting payment authorization (if you use Peachtree's processing service). To quickly remove an entered credit card number, click the Clear button.

After you select OK in the Credit Card Information window, this number will be encrypted with X's except for the last four digits (for example, XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-9876).

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card Service authorizes the credit card payment, the Credit Card Number field cannot be changed and the Clear button is disabled (not available).


Credit Card Number

This identifies the credit card account number to authorize and charge for the amount of the Peachtree transaction. You can enter dashes (-), spaces, or slashes (/) as separators, if you would like. All non-numeric characters will be removed behind the scenes prior to requesting payment authorization (if you use Peachtree's processing service). To quickly remove an entered credit card number, click the Clear button.

After you select OK in the Credit Card Information window, this number will be encrypted with X's except for the last four digits (for example, XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-9876).

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card Service authorizes the credit card payment, the Credit Card Number field cannot be changed and the Clear button is disabled (not available).


Clear

To quickly remove an entered credit card number, click the Clear button.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card Service authorizes the credit card payment, the Credit Card Number field cannot be changed and the Clear button is disabled (not available).


Expiration Date

This identifies when the cardholder's credit card will expire. Enter or select the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.

Important: The expiration date must be entered exactly as it appears on the credit card. The Peachtree Credit Card Service uses this information to authorize the transaction.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Expiration field is disabled (not available to edit).


Expiration Date

This identifies when the cardholder's credit card will expire. Enter or select the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.

Important: The expiration date must be entered exactly as it appears on the credit card. The Peachtree Credit Card Service uses this information to authorize the transaction.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Expiration field is disabled (not available to edit).


Expiration Date

This identifies when the cardholder's credit card will expire. Enter or select the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is5/31/03, enter 05/03.

Important: The expiration date must be entered exactly as it appears on the credit card. The Peachtree Credit Card Service uses this information to authorize the transaction.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Expiration field is disabled (not available to edit).


Expiration Date

This identifies when the cardholder's credit card will expire. Enter or select the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.

Important: The expiration date must be entered exactly as it appears on the credit card. The Peachtree Credit Card Service uses this information to authorize the transaction.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Expiration field is disabled (not available to edit).


Expiration Date

This identifies when the cardholder's credit card will expire. Enter or select the expiration date using the month/year (MM/YY) format. Expiration years (YY) appear as two digits (for example, 03 represents 2003). If a card expiration date is 5/31/03, enter 05/03.

Important: The expiration date must be entered exactly as it appears on the credit card. The Peachtree Credit Card Service uses this information to authorize the transaction.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Expiration field is disabled (not available to edit).


Authorization Code

Once a credit card transaction is authorized, enter the provided authorization code here for your records.

If you have signed up for the Peachtree Credit Card service, click the Authorize button. The authorization code will be supplied and inserted in this field for you.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Authorization Code field is disabled (not available to edit).


Authorization Code

Once a credit card transaction is authorized, enter the provided authorization code here for your records.

If you have signed up for the Peachtree Credit Card service, click the Authorize button. The authorization code will be supplied and inserted in this field for you.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Authorization Code field is disabled (not available to edit).


Authorization Code (Approved)

If you have signed up for the Peachtree Credit Card service, click the Authorize button. The authorization code will be supplied and inserted in this field for you. "Approved" will display below the Authorization Code field.

Note: Once the Peachtree Credit Card service authorizes the credit card payment, the Authorization Code field is disabled (not available to edit).


Authorize

If you have signed up for the Peachtree Credit Card Service, click the Authorize button. This service sends your customer's credit card information and payment data to your online merchant account provider using a secure Internet connection and the SurePay gateway service. The Peachtree Credit Card Service does not require the installation or use of a card swipe terminal. If your online merchant account provider accepts the transaction, the Peachtree Credit Card Service will enter the authorization code directly into Peachtree Accounting. Depending on your Internet connection, the authorization process could take up to 20 seconds.


OK

Select this button to save your changes and return to the previous window.


Cancel

Select this button to discard your changes and return to the previous window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Verification Number

The credit card verification number is located on the back of the card at the end of the sixteen-digit credit card number. This is a new protection feature included on most Visa cards produced after January of 1999 in order to help identify fraudulent cards or usage. Currently, Visa is the only card that requires this number, but MasterCard and American Express are beginning to implement their own version of this security feature. You can only enter up to four characters in the Verification Number field. The verification number is not stored in a database once the transaction is approved. It is transmitted with the approval request to the credit card company. The credit card company then returns the approval number for the credit card, along with a separate approval or decline code for the verification number.


Verification Number

The credit card verification number is located on the back of the card at the end of the sixteen-digit credit card number. This is a new protection feature included on most Visa cards produced after January of 1999 in order to help identify fraudulent cards or usage. Currently, Visa is the only card that requires this number, but MasterCard and American Express are beginning to implement their own version of this security feature. You can only enter up to four characters in the Verification Number field. The verification number is not stored in a database once the transaction is approved. It is transmitted with the approval request to the credit card company. The credit card company then returns the approval number for the credit card, along with a separate approval or decline code for the verification number.


Driver's License

Enter the state and license number from the customer's driver's license.


State

Enter the state issuing the customer's driver's license.


State

Enter the state issuing the customer's driver's license.


Number

Enter the state license number from the customer's driver's license.


Number

Enter the state license number from the customer's driver's license.


E-Commerce Sale

Check the E-Commerce Sale check box to indicate that this transaction involved selling goods or services through the use of the Internet. If the transaction did not involve e-commerce, leave the E-Commerce Sale check box unchecked.


Save this card as this customer's Payment Default

Select this checkbox if you want the number in the Credit Card Number field to be used as the default credit card for this customer. When you select this checkbox and click OK, this credit card number becomes the default credit card number listed on the Payment Defaults tab of the Maintain Customers/Prospects window.


Phone Number

Enter the customer's phone number.


Phone Number

Enter the customer's phone number.


E-Mail Address

Enter the customer's e-mail address.


E-Mail Address

Enter the customer's e-mail address.


Check Name

Enter the name that is printed on the customer's check. As the default, the name from the Receipts window will appear in this field. You can enter up to 39 characters in the Check Name field.


Backup Now

Select this to start the backup process immediately.


Cancel

Select this button to close the window without backing up.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Check your desired options.


Form Name

Enter the name for a customized form. You can enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters.

If you have edited (changed the design) of a form, saving it as the original name will overwrite the original version. Saving the form as a different name will rename the item, but the name of the original version is still present in the list. Then, remove the original version (if you will no longer be using it) by clicking the Delete button at the top of the Select a Report window.

Note: You cannot delete standard forms that came with your Peachtree Accounting package.


Form Name List

Displays the name of the available forms. Select the form name under which you want to save your newly designed form.


Form Description

Enter a brief statement that describes the form, or import/export template. This description will display in the Form Description field when the item is selected in the Select a Report or Select for Import Export window. You enter up to 160 alphanumeric characters.


Filename

This is the current filename of the selected form in the list. Form files are located in your Peachtree data folder (by default, \PEACHW). If you are renaming a form, Peachtree Accounting will create a new filename. To examine the new filename, you must return to this window after saving the form. Knowing the filenames of customized forms is helpful when backing up your data.


Save

Select this button to save changes and close this window.


Cancel

Select this button to close this window without saving any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Replace Standard Form

Check this box if you want the new custom form you are creating to replace the Peachtree standard form on which it is based.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Peachtree Purge wizard. It tells you that the job of the wizard is to remove old, unused transactions and inactives of all types. Once you have read the explanatory text and noted end dates for your company's last closed fiscal and payroll tax years, click the Next button to proceed. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.

Note: Before you can purge old transactions, you must first close the fiscal year containing those transactions.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Peachtree Purge wizard. It tells you that the job of the wizard is to remove old, unused transactions and inactives of all types. Once you have read the explanatory text and noted end dates for your company's last closed fiscal and payroll tax years, click the Next button to proceed. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.

Note: Before you can purge old transactions, you must first close the fiscal year containing those transactions.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Peachtree Purge wizard. It tells you that the job of the wizard is to remove old, unused transactions and inactives of all types. Once you have read the explanatory text and noted end dates for your company's last closed fiscal and payroll tax years, click the Next button to proceed. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.

Note: Before you can purge old transactions, you must first close the fiscal year containing those transactions.


Closed Years

This shows the end date of the last closed fiscal and payroll tax years for your company. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.


Closed Years

This shows the end date of the last closed fiscal and payroll tax years for your company. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.


Closed Years

This shows the end date of the last closed fiscal and payroll tax years for your company. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.


The last closed fiscal year

The last closed fiscal year for your company ends on the date displayed here.


The last closed payroll tax year

The last closed payroll tax year for your company ends on the date displayed here.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Peachtree Purge wizard. It tells you that the job of the wizard is to remove old, unused transactions and inactives of all types. Once you have read the explanatory text and noted end dates for your company's last closed fiscal and payroll tax years, click the Next button to proceed. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.

Note: Before you can purge old transactions, you must first close the fiscal year containing those transactions.


Closed Years

This shows the end date of the last closed fiscal and payroll tax years for your company. Note: First Accounting does not include payroll tax years.


The last closed payroll tax year

The last closed payroll tax year for your company ends on the date displayed here.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Include company name

Select the check box if you want Peachtree to incorporate your company name in the name of the backup file you are about to create.


Back Up

Click this button to make a backup of your company data and customized forms. The wizard will perform the backup and tell you when it is complete. Then click the Next button to continue.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. The note tells you to be sure to make two backup files before purging, one for reference and one to act as an emergency audit trail.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. The note tells you to be sure to make two backup files before purging, one for reference and one to act as an emergency audit trail.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. The note tells you to be sure to make two backup files before purging, one for reference and one to act as an emergency audit trail.


Override backup?

If you have sufficient backups of your company data, select this button to cancel the backup process and proceed to the next Purge wizard windowm (Old Transactions).


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with the purge process. When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Old Transactions

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard which old transactions--ones unimportant to your current accounting--can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Old Transactions

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard which old transactions--ones unimportant to your current accounting--can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Date

Select or enter a date on or before which old transactions can be purged.


Date

Select or enter a date on or before which old transactions can be purged.


Date

Select or enter a date on or before which old transactions can be purged.


Date

Select or enter a date on or before which old transactions can be purged.


Transactions

Select the appropriate check boxes to tell Peachtree which types of transactions you want to purge.


Transactions

Select the appropriate check boxes to tell Peachtree which types of transactions you want to purge.


Receivables

Select this check box to purge old receivables transactions such as invoices and receipts.


Payables

Select this check box to purge old payables transactions such as purchases and payments.


Payroll

Select this check box to purge old payroll transactions.


Used Tickets

Select this check box to purge used time and expense tickets from payroll and sales transactions.


General Journals

Select this check box to purge old general journals and their entries.


Audit Trails

Select this check box to purge old company audit trails.


Unused Tickets

Select this check box to purge unused time and expense tickets.


Date

Enter or select the date on or before which unused time and expense tickets can be purged.


Old Transactions

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard which old transactions--ones unimportant to your current accounting--can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Inactive Maintenance Records

This window lets you tell Peachtree which maintenance records you want to purge. These records, such as customer/prospect or vendor records, can be purged only if they are inactive, are not used by any existing transaction, and have a zero remaining balance.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Inactive Maintenance Records

This window lets you tell Peachtree which maintenance records you want to purge. These records, such as customer/prospect or vendor records, can be purged only if they are inactive, are not used by any existing transaction, and have a zero remaining balance.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Inactive Maintenance Records

This window lets you tell Peachtree which maintenance records you want to purge. These records, such as customer/prospect or vendor records, can be purged only if they are inactive, are not used by any existing transaction, and have a zero remaining balance.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Select

Select the appropriate check box for each type of inactive record you want to purge.


Customers/Prospects

Select this check box to purge inactive customer and prospect records.


Vendors

Select this check box to purge inactive vendor records.


Employees/Sales Reps

Select this check box to purge inactive employee and sales representative records.


GL Accounts

Select this check box to purge inactive general ledger account records.


Inventory Items/Attribute Sets

Select this check box to purge inactive inventory item or attribute set records. Note: In First Accounting, this check box will read simply "Items"; attribute sets are not available in First Accounting.


Jobs/Phases/Cost Codes

Select this check box to purge inactive job, job phase, and job cost code records.


Inactive Maintenance Records

This window lets you tell Peachtree which maintenance records you want to purge. These records, such as customer/prospect or vendor records, can be purged only if they are inactive, are not used by any existing transaction, and have a zero remaining balance.

When finished working in the window, select Next to continue.


Account Reconciliation

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard whether you need to have selected accounts reconciled before transactions associated with them can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Account Reconciliation

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard whether you need to have selected accounts reconciled before transactions associated with them can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Account Reconciliation

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard whether you need to have selected accounts reconciled before transactions associated with them can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Yes

Select this option if you use Account Reconciliation and need the chosen accounts to be reconciled before related transactions can be purged.


No

Select this option if you do not use Account Reconcilation.


Accounts

In the table below, select the accounts that you need to be reconciled.


Accounts

In the table below, select the accounts that you need to be reconciled.


Accounts

Use the triangles to expand the list of accounts within an account type.

Use: Select this check box for each account you need to be reconciled.

Account ID: This column lists the IDs of all accounts within a selected account type.

Description: This column lists a brief description for all accounts within a selected account type.


Account Reconciliation

This window lets you tell the Purge wizard whether you need to have selected accounts reconciled before transactions associated with them can be purged. When finished working in the window, select the Next button to proceed with the purge process.


Note

Notice the triangles in the list box above. Click a triangle to see the list of accounts within the account type marked by a triangle. Click again to hide the list of accounts. If you want to use the keyboard for the same function, press + to see the list of accounts; press - to hide the list.


Note

Notice the triangles in the list box above. Click a triangle to see the list of accounts within the account type marked by a triangle. Click again to hide the list of accounts. If you want to use the keyboard for the same function, press + to see the list of accounts; press - to hide the list.


Summary of Options

This window summarizes the purge options that you have selected in earlier windows of the Purge wizard. To change any options, select the Back button. If all options are as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Summary of Options

This window summarizes the purge options that you have selected in earlier windows of the Purge wizard. To change any options, select the Back button. If all options are as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Summary of Options

This window summarizes the purge options that you have selected in earlier windows of the Purge wizard. To change any options, select the Back button. If all options are as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Finish

If all options are set as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Finish

If all options are set as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Begin Purge

If all options are set as desired, select the Begin Purge button to complete the purge process.


Begin Purge

If all options are set as desired, select the Begin Purge button to complete the purge process.


Summary of Options

This window summarizes the purge options that you have selected in earlier windows of the Purge wizard. To change any options, select the Back button. If all options are as desired, select the Finish button to complete the purge process.


Begin Purge

If all options are set as desired, select the Begin Purge button to complete the purge process.


Purge Process in Progress

This window indicates that the Purge wizard is now purging selected old data. The progress gauges at the middle of the window display the percent of the purge process that is now complete.

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Purge Process in Progress

This window indicates that the Purge wizard is now purging selected old data. The progress gauges at the bottom of the window display the percent of the purge process that is now complete.

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Purge Process in Progress

This window indicates that the Purge wizard is now purging selected old data. The progress gauges at the bottom of the window display the percent of the purge process that is now complete.

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Purge Process in Progress

This window indicates that the Purge wizard is now purging selected old data. The progress gauges at the bottom of the window display the percent of the purge process that is now complete.

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Stopping Purge

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Stopping Purge

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Stopping Purge

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Stopping Purge

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Stopping Purge

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Purge Is Complete

When you see this message, Peachtree has completed the purge process.


Purge Process in Progress

This window indicates that the Purge wizard is now purging selected old data. The progress gauges at the middle of the window display the percent of the purge process that is now complete.

To cancel the process at any time, select the Cancel button. Note that when you stop the purge process, not all eligible transactions will have been purged.


Purge Is Complete

When you see this heading, Peachtree has completed the purge process.


Click the Log button

Select the Log button to view a log detailing what happened during the purge process.


Click the Close button

Select the Close button to exit the Purge wizard.


Purge Was Stopped

If you see this message, you have canceled the purge process before completion. This means that not all eligible transactions have been purged. You can purge any such remaining records by running the Purge wizard again and selecting the appropriate records to purge.


Purge Was Stopped

If you see this message, you have canceled the purge process before completion. This means that not all eligible transactions have been purged. You can purge any such remaining records by running the Purge wizard again and selecting the appropriate records to purge.


Purge Was Stopped

If you see this message, you have canceled the purge process before completion. This means that not all eligible transactions have been purged. You can purge any such remaining records by running the Purge wizard again and selecting the appropriate records to purge.


Purge Was Stopped

If you see this message, you have canceled the purge process before completion. This means that not all eligible transactions have been purged. You can purge any such remaining records by running the Purge wizard again and selecting the appropriate records to purge.


Purge Was Stopped

If you see this message, you have canceled the purge process before completion. This means that not all eligible transactions have been purged. You can purge any such remaining records by running the Purge wizard again and selecting the appropriate records to purge.


Click the Log button

Select the Log button to view a log detailing what happened during the purge process.


Click the Close button

Select the Close button to exit the Purge wizard.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Year-End Wizard. It shows your company's two open fiscal and payroll tax years and explains that the Wizard will help you close the first open fiscal or payroll tax year or both. Once you have read the explanatory text, click the Next button to continue the year-end close process. Note: First Accounting includes only fiscal years, not payroll tax years.


Important

This is just a reminder that the Peachtree Year-End Guide has useful information that you should consult before proceeding with year-end close.


Current Open Years

The windows below list your company's two currently open fiscal years and payroll tax years. Note: First Accounting includes only fiscal years, not payroll tax years.


Fiscal Years

This window lists the date ranges of your company's two currently open fiscal years.


Payroll Tax Years

This window lists the date ranges of your company's two currently open payroll tax years.


Years to Close

You can close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Close Options

This window lets you choose whether you want to close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Close Options

This window lets you choose whether you want to close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Fiscal and Payroll Tax Years

Select this option button to close both your company's first open payroll tax year and fiscal year.


Fiscal Year

Select this option button to close your company's first open fiscal year.


Payroll Tax Year

Select this option button to close your company's first open payroll tax year.


Dates

This shows the date range of your company's first open fiscal year.


Dates

This shows the date range of your company's first open payroll tax year.


Close Options

This window lets you choose whether you want to close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Close Options

This window lets you choose whether you want to close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Close Options

This window lets you choose whether you want to close your company's first open fiscal year, first open payroll tax year, or both. Since your first open payroll tax year is one or more years behind your open fiscal year, we recommend that at the least you close your first open payroll tax year.


Cannot Proceed

This window appears if your company has any purchases, dated within the fiscal year your are closing, that are waiting for vendor bills. Before you can close out the year, you will have to clear the Waiting on Bill check box on the Purchases/Receive Inventory window. (In First Accounting, this window is called "Purchases.") Click the Help button for instructions on how to do this.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Sales/Invoices

This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Payment Checks

This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Payroll Checks

This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


W-2 Forms

This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


1099 Forms

This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Unprinted Items

This window warns you that your company has unprinted items that should be printed before completing year-end close. We strongly recommend that you print all of the currently unprinted items listed below. Select Cancel, and then proceed to print the items. If you want to continue with the close despite the warning, select Next.

The warning messages you might see in this window include the following:

Sales/Invoices: This warning tells you there are unprinted invoices for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payment Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payables checks for the fiscal year you want to close.

Payroll Checks: This warning tells you there are unprinted payroll checks for the payroll tax year you want to close.

W-2 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted employee W-2s for the payroll tax year you want to close.

1099 Forms: This warning tells you there are unprinted contractor 1099 forms for the payroll tax year you want to close.


Print Fiscal Year-End Reports

This window lets you print all listed reports before you continue with year-end close. Printing the reports will provide an audit trail that won't be available once you close out the year.

To automatically print all listed reports, click the Next button. To exit the Wizard so you can print the reports one by one, click the Cancel button.


Print Fiscal Year-End Reports

This window lets you print all listed reports before you continue with year-end close. Printing the reports will provide an audit trail that won't be available once you close out the year.

To automatically print all listed reports, click the Next button. To exit the Wizard so you can print the reports one by one, click the Cancel button.


Back Up Company Data

This window lets you back up your company data and customized forms before proceeding with year-end close.


Back Up

Click this button to make a backup of your company data and customized forms. The wizard will perform the backup and tell you when it is complete. Then click the Next button to continue.


New Open Fiscal Years

This window lets you change the dates of your next fiscal year's accounting periods. Since Peachtree automatically adjusts accounting period dates for you, you don't generally need to adjust them yourself. But if for some reason you need to, click the Next Fiscal Year option button to display the accounting period dates for the next fiscal year, and then change the displayed dates in the table at the right side of the window.


New Open Fiscal Years

This window lets you change the dates of your next fiscal year's accounting periods. Since Peachtree automatically adjusts accounting period dates for you, you don't generally need to adjust them yourself. But if for some reason you need to, click the Next Fiscal Year option button to display the accounting period dates for the next fiscal year, and then change the displayed dates in the table at the right side of the window.


Display

Select the first option button to display the current fiscal year accounting period dates in the table at right. The dates will appear in read-only format; you won't be able to edit them.

Select the second option button to display accounting periods for the next fiscal year. You will be able to change the dates in the table at right.


Current Fiscal Year (read only)

Select this option button to display the current fiscal year accounting period dates in the table at right. The dates will appear in read-only format; you won't be able to edit them.


Next Fiscal Year

Select this option button to display accounting periods for the next fiscal year. You will be able to change the dates in the table at right.


Important - Confirm Year-End Close

This window shows you the fiscal year and the payroll tax year or years that will be closed if you proceed. Be sure before continuing that you have properly completed all transactions and printed final reports for these years because you won't be able to do this once the year is closed. Note: First Accounting includes only fiscal years, not payroll tax years.


Fiscal Years

This window shows what the date ranges of the two open fiscal years will be once you have completed the year-end close process.


Payroll Tax Years

This window shows what the date ranges of the two open payroll tax years will be once you have completed the year-end close process.


Fiscal Year Dates

This shows the dates of the fiscal year you will be closing.


Payroll Tax Year Dates

This shows the dates of the payroll tax year or years you will be closing.


After closing your open years will be

The two windows below show what the date ranges of the two open fiscal and payroll tax years will be once you have completed the year-end close process. Note: First Accounting includes only fiscal years, not payroll tax years.


Now Closing

This is a progress bar. As the year-end close proceeds, the bar will show you what percent of the process has been completed.


Begin Close-Year Process

This window lets you start the year-end close process. To begin, just click the the Begin Close button. Do not cancel the Year-End Wizard once you have clicked this button, and do not shut off your computer.


Begin Close-Year Process

This window lets you start the year-end close process. To begin, just click the the Begin Close button. Do not cancel the Year-End Wizard once you have clicked this button, and do not shut off your computer.


Begin Close-Year Process

This window lets you start the year-end close process. To begin, just click the the Begin Close button. Do not cancel the Year-End Wizard once you have clicked this button, and do not shut off your computer.


Begin Close-Year Process

This window lets you start the year-end close process. To begin, just click the the Begin Close button. Do not cancel the Year-End Wizard once you have clicked this button, and do not shut off your computer.


Begin Close-Year Process

This window lets you start the year-end close process. To begin, just click the the Begin Close button. Do not cancel the Year-End Wizard once you have clicked this button, and do not shut off your computer.


Now Closing

This is a progress bar. As the year-end close proceeds, the bar will show you what percent of the process has been completed.


Congratulations!

When you see this window, the Wizard has successfully closed the fiscal year and payroll tax year or years you have chosen to close. Note: First Accounting includes only fiscal years, not payroll tax years.


Fiscal Years

This window shows the date range of your company's two currently open fiscal years.


Payroll Tax Years

This window shows the date range of your company's two currently open payroll tax years.


Fiscal Year

This window shows the fiscal year that has been closed.


Payroll Tax Year

This window shows the payroll tax year or years that have been closed.


Your current accounting period is

This shows the date range of your company's current accounting period.


Welcome

This is the first window in the Year-End Wizard. It shows your company's two open fiscal years and explains that the Wizard will help you close the first open fiscal year. Once you have read the explanatory text, click the Next button to continue the year-end close process.


Important

This is just a reminder that the Peachtree Year-End Guide has useful information that you should consult before proceeding with year-end close.


Current Open Fiscal Years

This window below lists your company's two currently open fiscal years.


Fiscal Years

This window lists the date ranges of your company's two currently open fiscal years.


Important

This window indicates that the company whose first fiscal year you are trying to close is still operating in that year. Since you cannot close a fiscal year under these circumstances, Peachtree Software strongly advises that you wait until your company has started on its second fiscal year before you close the first of the two open years.


Important

This window indicates that the company whose first fiscal year you are trying to close is still operating in that year. Since you cannot close a fiscal year under these circumstances, Peachtree Software strongly advises that you wait until your company has started on its second fiscal year before you close the first of the two open years.


Important

This window indicates that the company whose first fiscal year you are trying to close is still operating in that year. Since you cannot close a fiscal year under these circumstances, Peachtree Software strongly advises that you wait until your company has started on its second fiscal year before you close the first of the two open years.


NOTE

This is just a reminder that the Peachtree Year-End Guide has useful information that you should consult before proceeding with year-end close.


Important - Confirm Year-End Close

This window shows you the fiscal year that will be closed if you proceed. Be sure before continuing that you have properly completed all transactions and printed final reports for this year because you won't be able to do this once the year is closed.


Fiscal Years

This window shows what the date ranges of the two open fiscal years will be once you have completed the year-end close process.


Fiscal Year Dates

This shows the dates of the fiscal year you will be closing.


After closing your open fiscal years will be

The window below show what the date ranges of the two open fiscal years will be once you have completed the year-end close process.


Congratulations!

When you see this window, the Wizard has successfully closed the fiscal year you have chosen to close.


Fiscal Years

This window shows the date range of your company's two currently open fiscal years.


Fiscal Year

This window shows the fiscal year that has been closed.


Your current accounting period is

This shows the date range of your company's current accounting period.


OK

When finished, select this button to close this window.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Copy to Clipboard

Select this to copy to your computer's Clipboard the special function that appears in the box at the middle of the window. Once copied, you can paste the function into the appropriate formula in your Crystal report. To paste the function, use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V.


The function...

This Crystal report contains a special function compatible with an older version of Crystal Reports. For the function to work in the report, you will have to update it. Select the Copy to Clipboard button, and then paste the contents of the Clipboard into the custom formula in your Crystal report.


The function...

This Crystal report contains a special function compatible with an older version of Crystal Reports. For the function to work in the report, you will have to update it. Select the Copy to Clipboard button, and then paste the contents of the Clipboard into the custom formula in your Crystal report.


Function

The text box displays the updated function that is compatible with your current version of Crystal Reports. Select the Copy to Clipboard button, and then paste the updated function into the custom formula in your Crystal report.


OK

Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Ignore: Causes this occurrence of a misspelled word to be skipped. If the same misspelled word appears later, it will be reported again. Note: If you edit the text in the Not in Dictionary box, the Ignore button changes to an Undo Edit button.

Undo Edit: Remove any changes made to the text in the Not in Dictionary box. This button appears only if the text in the Not in Dictionary box has been changed.


Ignore All

Causes this occurrence of a misspelled word to be skipped, and all further occurrences of the misspelled word within the section you're checking. You might use this button if the word reported as a misspelling is actually spelled correctly. If the word is one you use frequently, you may wish to ignore it permanently be selecting the Add button.


Add

Causes the reported word to be added to the dictionary selected in the Add Words To box. Use the Add button if a correctly spelled word you use often is reported as a misspelling (for example, your name). If the word is not used frequently, you may want to select the Ignore or Ignore All buttons instead. This button is only enabled if a user dictionary has been selected in the Add Words To list.


Change: Causes the reported word to be replaced. If the word in question was edited, the edited word is used as the replacement. Otherwise, the highlighted suggestion is used as the replacement. Only this occurrence of the reported word is replaced. If you want this and all following occurrences of the word replaced, select the Change All button. Note: The name of this button changes according to the word in question. The Change button becomes a Delete button if the word in question is a doubled word, rather than a misspelling.

Delete: Removes the word from the text. This button appears when a doubled word has been detected, or when the contents of the problem-word box are deleted.


Change All

Causes this and all following occurrences of the reported word within this section to be replaced. If the word in question was edited, the edited word is used as the replacement. Otherwise, the highlighted suggestion is used as the replacement.


Suggest

Search more thoroughly for suggested replacements for the current misspelled word. Each time you press the Suggest button, a more extensive search is made. The Suggest button is disabled once all possible suggestions have been located.


Undo

Removes the last change made. The Undo button can be pressed several times to remove the last several changes.


Dictionaries

Opens the Dictionaries window. You can use the Dictionaries window to open or close user dictionaries, and to edit the contents of user dictionaries.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for the Check Spelling window.


Cancel

Stops the current spelling check.


Check Spelling

From the Check Spelling window, you can specify whether the word in question should be ignored or replaced. You can also add the word to your dictionary so that the word will be ignored in the future. Note: The names of some buttons and text boxes in this window change, depending on the type of word in question.

Not in Dictionary: Indicates that a misspelled word was detected. You can edit the word in this box or select a suggestion from the list. Click the Change button to correct the word, or press the Ignore button to skip the word. Note: The title of this text box changes according to the word in question. Depending on the word, it may display as one of the following:

Captialization: Contains an uncapitalized word that exists in the dictionaries in capitalized form only. You can edit the word in this box or select a suggestion from the list, then click the Change button to correct the word, or press the Ignore button to skip the word.

Consider Changing: Contains a word that may be mispelled or otherwise incorrect, and is presented with a candidate replacement word. You can change the word by selecting the Change button, or skip it by selecting the Ignore button.


Not in Dictionary: Indicates that a misspelled word was detected. You can edit the word in this box or select a suggestion from the list. Click the Change button to correct the word, or press the Ignore button to skip the word. Note: The title of this text box changes according to the word in question. Depending on the word, it may display as one of the following:

Captialization: Contains an uncapitalized word that exists in the dictionaries in capitalized form only. You can edit the word in this box or select a suggestion from the list, then click the Change button to correct the word, or press the Ignore button to skip the word.

Consider Changing: Contains a word that may be mispelled or otherwise incorrect, and is presented with a candidate replacement word. You can change the word by selecting the Change button, or skip it by selecting the Ignore button.


Suggestions

Contains a list of suggested replacements for the word reported as misspelled.


Suggestions

Contains a list of suggested replacements for the word reported as misspelled.


Add words to

Indicates which user dictionary the words will be added to when you select the Add buton.


Add words to

Indicates which user dictionary the words will be added to when you select the Add buton.


Enter your input in this field.


Words

Conatins a list of wrods in the currently selected user dictionary.


Words

Conatins a list of wrods in the currently selected user dictionary.


Action

Used to select an action that is associated with words in the dictionary. The action tells Spell Check what to do when it finds a word in the dictionary. Select an action from the following list of choices:

Auto change (use case of other word): This action allows you to automatically replace one word with another, using the same case as the other word. For example, you could enter "AR" in the Words field and "acounts receivable in the Other word field, and then select Auto change (use in case of other word) as the action. Spell Check will automatically replace "AR" with "accounts receivable" wherever it appears. Note: The replacement is only automatically replaced if you selected the Auto correct misspelled words option on the Spelling tab of the Maintain Global Options window.

Auto change (use case of checked word): This action allows you to automatically replace one word with another. For example, if you often type "recieve" instead of "receive," you might enter the word "recieve" in the Words field, and "receive" in the Other word field. Select Auto change (use case of checked word) from the Action list. Spell Check will automatically correct "recieve" wherever it appears. If you enter "recieve" with a capital letter ("Recieve") in the Words list, Spell Check will automatically replace it with "Receive." Note: The replacement is only automatically replaced if you selected the Auto correct misspelled words option on the Spelling tab of the Maintain Global Options window.

Conditionally change (use case of other word): This action allows you to optionally replace one word with another, always with the same case pattern as the other word. This action is useful for expanding abbreviations. For example, you could enter "AR" in the Words field, and "accounts receivable" in the Other word field, and then select Conditionally change (use case of other word) from the Action list. Spell Check will ask if you want to replace "AR" with "accounts receivable."

Conditionally change (use case of checked word): This action allows you to optionally replace one word with another. For example, if you often type "recieve" instead of "receive," you might enter the word "recieve" in the Words field, and "receive" in the Other word field. Select Conditionally change (use case of checked word) from the Action list. Spell Check will ask if you want to replace "recieve" with "receive." If you enter "recieve" with a capital letter ("Recieve") in the Words list, Spell Check will automatically replace it with "Receive."

Ignore (skip): This action tells Spell Check that the word is spelled correctly, and can be skipped over. This is the most common action.

Exclude (treat as misspelled): This action tells Spell Check that the word is misspelled, even if it is listed in another dictionary. Words marked with this action will never be offered as suggestions for misspelled words, and tehy will be reported as misspellings when they are encountered by Spell Check. Note that Spell Check looks up words in user dictionaries in the order in which they appear in the Files list. If you want to exclude a word, make sure it doesn't appear in a previous user dictionary.


Other word

Contains an alternate word associated with the currently selected word. The other word is used in the "Auto change" and "Conditionally change" actions to supply a replacement word. You can enter more than one word in the Other word field, but the total length should be limited to 63 characters.


Add Word

Causes the word entered in the Words field to be added to the currently selected dictionary. The currently selected choices in the Other word field and the Action list are associated with the word. Note the Add Word button is only enabled when a new word is typed in the Words field. The words you add may contain virtually any character, but only words that contain embedded periods should have trailing periods. For example, "U.S.A." is acceptable, but "USA." is not.


Delete Word

Causes the word in the Words field to be removed from the currently selected dictionary. The associated choices in the Other word field and the Action list are also removed.


Import

Adds the words contained within a text file to the currently selected dictionary. When you select the Import button, the Import Dictionary window appears, where you can select the text file to be imported. Each word in the selected file is loaded into the dictionary. Keep in mind that importing a large list of words may take some time.


Export

Saves the contents of the currently selected dictionary to a text file. When you select the Export button, the Export Dictionary window appears, where you can select the text file to be imported. Each word in the selected file is loaded into the dictionary. Keep in mind that importing a large list of words may take some time.


Files

Contains the list of open dictionary files. When you select a file from the list, its contents are diplayed in the Words list.


Files

Contains the list of open dictionary files. When you select a file from the list, its contents are diplayed in the Words list.


Add File

Opens a user dictionary file. When you select the Add File button, the Add Dictionary window appears, where you can select the dictionary file to open. The set of open dictionary files is remember, so once you add a dictionary file you don't need to add it again. If you need to create a new user dictionary, use the New File button. You can open user dictionaries used in other applications.


New File

Creates a new user dictionary file. When you select the New File button, the New Dictionary window appears, where you can specify attributes of the new dictionary.


Remove File

Closes the currently selected dictionary file. Closed dictionaries are not checked during a spelling check. Although the file is closed, it is not deleted. Closed dictionary files can be reopened later using the Add File button.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for the Custom Dictionaries window.


Close

Closes the Custom Dictionaries window.


Language

Displays the language (American English, Spanish, and so forth) of the words in the currently selected dictionary.


Language

Displays the language (American English, Spanish, and so forth) of the words in the currently selected dictionary.


File Name

Enter a name for the file used to hold the contents of the new dictionary.


File Name

Enter a name for the file used to hold the contents of the new dictionary.


Language

Specifies the language (American English, Spanish, and so forth) of the words the new user dictionary will contain. If the language you want to use is not listed, select "Any."


Language

Specifies the language (American English, Spanish, and so forth) of the words the new user dictionary will contain. If the language you want to use is not listed, select "Any."


OK

Closes the New Dictionary window and creates the new dictionary.


Cancel

Closes the New Dictionary window without creating a new dictionary.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for the New Dictionary window.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Choose an item from the list.


OK

Select this to make your choices and close the window.


Toolbar Components

This text box displays all components available for use on the Main Application Toolbar. To add a component to the toolbar, select and drag it to the desired position on the bar.

To change the ToolTip associated with a component, select the component in the text box, and then enter new ToolTip text in the ToolTip box below.

To change the icon associated with a component, select the component in the text box, and then select the Change Icon button.


Cancel

Select this to close the window without making a choice.


Help

Select the Help button to display online Help for this window.


Reset Defaults

This lets you reset all elements for selected toolbar components to their original settings. This includes ToolTips and icons representing the selected components.

In the Toolbar Components text box at the center of the window, select all components you want to reset. Then select the Reset Defaults button.


ToolTip

This is the text of the ToolTip corresponding to the selected toolbar component. To change the ToolTip, type in new text and select OK.


Icon

This displays the icon currently associated with the selected toolbar component. If you want to change to a new icon, select the Change Icon button.


Change Icon

Select this to change the icon associated with the selected toolbar component. Peachtree will open the Change Icon window, where you can make a new selection.


Toolbar Components

Select a desired component from the box in the middle of the window. Then use the options in the Component Properties group box to change the icon or ToolTip associated with the component. To return the custom toolbar to its default status, select the Reset Default button.


Component Properties

Use these options to change the icon or ToolTip associated with the component.

ToolTip: This is the text of the ToolTip corresponding to the selected toolbar component. To change the ToolTip, type in new text and select OK.

Change Icon: Select this to change the icon associated with the selected toolbar component. Peachtree will open the Change Icon window, where you can make a new selection.


ToolTip

This is the text of the ToolTip corresponding to the selected toolbar component. To change the ToolTip, type in new text and select OK.


Toolbar Components

Select a desired component from the box in the middle of the window. Then use the options in the Component Properties group box to change the icon or ToolTip associated with the component. To return the custom toolbar to its default status, select the Reset Default button.


Change Icon

This window appears when you select the Change Icon button in the Toolbar Components window. The Change Icon window lets you choose a different icon to associate with the selected component on the Main Application Toolbar.

Select Icon: The text box contains images of all available icons for use on the toolbar. Select the desired one and then click OK. Peachtree will exchange the new icon for the old one used to represent the component you have highlighted in the Toolbar Components window.


OK

Select this to make your choice and close the window.


Cancel

Select this to close the window without making a choice.


Select Icon

The text box contains images of all available icons for use on the toolbar. Select the desired one and then click OK. Peachtree will exchange the new icon for the old one used to represent the component you have highlighted in the Toolbar Components window